mm 
 
 : 
 
 : 
 
 u 
 
 \}i 
 
 HI] 
 
 m
 
 "m

 
 HERMES 
 
 OR 
 
 A PHILOSOPHICAL INQVIRY 
 
 - CONCERNING 
 
 VNIVERSAL GRAMMAR 
 
 BY lAMES HARRIS ESQ^ 
 
 Ei:iENAI ©APP0YNTA2 EINAI TAP KAI ENTAT©A ©E0Y2. 
 
 THE FOURTH EDITION 
 REVISED AND CORRECTED 
 
 LONDON, 
 
 Printed for C. M O U R S E, in the Strand. 
 MDCCLXXXVI^
 
 ' tl 
 
 To the Right Honourable 
 
 Philip Lord Hardwicke, 
 
 Lord High Chancellor of Great- 
 Britain *. 
 My Lordj 
 
 AS no one has exercifed 
 the Powers of Speech 
 with jufter and more vmiverfal 
 applaufe, than yourfelf j I 
 have prefumed to infcribe the 
 following Treatife to your 
 Lordfhip, its End being to 
 inveftigate the Principles of 
 thole Powers. It has a far- 
 ther claim to your Lord- 
 fhip's Patronage, by being 
 connected in fome decree with 
 that politer Literature, which, 
 in the moil important fcenes 
 
 A 2, of 
 
 * The above Dedication is printed as it originally flood, 
 the Author being defirous that what he intended as real Re- 
 fpe£l. to the noble Lord, when living, fhould now be con- 
 sidered, as a Tcftimony of Gratitude to his Memoiy. 
 
 - .*-k r^. ar~\
 
 iv Dedication. 
 
 of Bufinefs, you have ftill 
 found time to cultivate. With 
 regard to myfelf, if what I have 
 v^ritten be the fruits of that 
 Security and Leifure, obtained 
 by living under a mild and free 
 Government 5 to whom for this 
 am I more indebted, than to 
 your Lordfhip, whether I con- 
 iider you as a Legidator, or 
 as a Magiilrate, the firft both 
 in dignity and reputation? 
 Permit me therefore thus pub- 
 licly to affure your Lordfhip, 
 that with thegreateft gratitude 
 and refpeft I am. My Lord^ 
 
 Tour Lord/hip's mojl obliged, 
 
 and mojl obedient bumble Servant^ 
 
 Cltfe af Salijburyy 
 
 Cci. 1, 175 1 • 
 
 James Harris, 
 
 I
 
 r 
 
 [ v] 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 ^ t HE chief E?id^ propofed by the 
 -^ Author of this Treatife in inak- 
 ing it public^ has bee^i to excite his 
 Readers to curiofity and inquiry ; 
 not to teach them himfelf by prolix 
 and formal LeBures^ (from the effi- 
 cacy ofmohich he has little expe&ation) 
 but to induce them^ if pojfble^ to be- 
 come 'Teachers to themfehes^ by an im- 
 partial ufe of their own tmderfland- 
 i?igs. He thinks nothing more abfurd 
 than the common notio7i ofh7flruBio7t^ 
 as if Scie?tce were to he poured into 
 the Mindy like water into a ciflern^ 
 that pajfwely waits to receive all that 
 comes. The growth of Knowledge he. 
 rather thinks to refemble the growth 
 of Fruit ; however external caufes 
 may i?i fome degree co-operate^ it is 
 the internal vigour^ and virtue of 
 
 A 3 the
 
 vi PREFACE. 
 
 tie treey that 7?iujl ripen the juices to 
 thei?^ juji maturity, 
 
 'This thenj namely^ the exciting^ 
 men to inquire for themfelves into 
 JubjeBs worthy of their contemplationy 
 this the Author declares to have been 
 his frfl and principal motive for 
 ifppearing in print. Next to thaty 
 €is he has always been a lover of 
 Letters^ he would willingly approve 
 his fludies to the liberal and inge- 
 nuous. He has particularly named 
 thefe^ in diJlinBion to others ; becaufcy 
 as his fludies were never profecuted 
 with the leaf regard to lucre ^ fo they 
 are no way calculated for any lucra- 
 tive E?td, The liberal therefore and 
 ingenuous (whom he has mentioned 
 already) are thofe^ to whofe perufal 
 he ofjers what he has written. Should 
 they judge favourably of his attempt y 
 he ?nay not perhaps heft ate to confefsy, 
 
 Hoc jiivat et melli eft. 
 
 For
 
 PREFACE. vli 
 
 For tho he hopes he cannot he chai^gecl 
 with the foolijlj love of vain Praifey 
 he has no defit^e to be thought indif-^ 
 ferent^ or infenfible to ho72eJi Fame. 
 
 From the injlue7tcc of thefe fentl- , 
 
 ments^ he has endeavoured to treat his 
 
 fubjeSi with as much order^ correSi- 
 
 nefsy and perfpicuity as in his power ; 
 
 and if he has failed^ he can Jafely 
 
 fay (according to the vulgar phrafe) 
 
 that the failure has been his misfor^ 
 
 tune J and 7iot his fault » He f corns 
 
 thofe trite and contemptible methods 
 
 of anticipating pardon for a bad per -^ 
 
 formance^ that '' it was the hafly 
 
 ^^ fruits of a few idle hours ; written 
 
 '' merely for private afnufemeJtt ; 
 
 ^' never revifed j publifjed agai7ifi 
 
 '^ confenty at the importunity of 
 
 ^^ friends J copies (God knows how) 
 
 " having by ftealth gotten abroad "^'^ 
 
 with other ft ale jargon of equal falf- / 
 
 hood and inaitity. May we not ajk 
 
 fuch Prefacersy If what they allege 
 
 A 4 be
 
 vlii PREFACE. 
 
 be true, what has the world to do 
 with them and their crudities ? 
 
 As to the Booh, itfelfj it ca?t fay 
 this in its behalf^ that it does not 
 merely confine it f elf to what its title 
 f?'omifeSy but expatiates f'eely i7ito 
 whatever is collateral ; aiming on 
 every occafion to rife i7t its inquiries^ 
 a7td to pafs^ as far as pojftble^ from 
 fnall matters to the greatefl. Nor 
 is it formed 7nerely zipon fentiments 
 that are now i7i fafjion, or fupported 
 C7ily by fuch authorities as are 7noder7j, 
 Ma7iy Authors are quoted ^ that now- . 
 a-days are but little ftudied \ a7id 
 fo77ie perhaps^ whofe ve?y 7iaf7ies are 
 hardly known, 
 
 TToe Fate indeed of antient Authors 
 (as we have happened to 7nentio7i the7n} 
 is 72ot U7iworthy of our notice* A 
 few of the77i furvive i7i the Libraries 
 of the lear7ied^ where fo7ne venerable 
 Folio^ that fill goes by their na7ney 
 
 jufi
 
 PREFACE. ix 
 
 juji fuffices to give them a kind of 
 nominal exijience. The refl have 
 long fallen iftto a deepe7^ ohfcurity^ 
 their very names^ when me?2tioned^ 
 affeSiing lis as little^ as the 7iames^ 
 when we read the7n^ of thofe fubordi- 
 nate Heroes^ 
 
 Alcandrumque, Haliumquej No-. 
 emonaque^ Prytanimqiie. 
 
 Now if a?i Author^ not content 
 with the 7ncre e7?iinent of antie?it 
 Writers^ fdould venture to bri?2g his 
 reader into fuch co?npany as thefe 
 lafty among people (in the fapnon- 
 ahle phrafe) that nobodj^ knows ; 
 what ufage^ what quarter can he 
 have reafon to expeSi f Should the 
 Author of theje fpeculations have 
 done this (and it is to be feared he 
 has) what 7Tiethod had he bejl take in 
 a circimiftance fo critical?— Let us 
 fuppofe him to apologize in the befv 
 mafiner he ca.71^ and in co7feque72ce 
 of this ^ to fuggefl as follows — - 
 
 He
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 He hopes there ijoill be foimd a 
 fleafure m the contemplation of an* 
 tient fe72time72ts^ as the view of an- 
 tient ArchiteFture^ tho in ruins^ has 
 fomething venerable. Add to thisy 
 what from its antiquity is but little 
 known^ has from that very circum-^ 
 fiance the recommendation of novelty \ 
 fo that here^ as i?i other inflancesy 
 Extremes may be fa id to meet. 
 Farther fill^ as the Author s^ whom 
 he has quoted^ lived in various ages^ 
 a7td in diflant cou?2tries ; fo77te in the 
 full maturity (^/^ Grecian and Roman 
 Literature ; fome in its declenfion ; 
 and others in periods flill more bar- 
 barousy a7id depraved \ it 77iay afford 
 perhaps 720 tmpleafmg fpeculation^ to 
 fee how the same Reason has at all 
 ti77tes prevailed \ how there is one 
 Truth, like one Sun^ that has en- 
 lio-htened hu7nan Intellig'snce through 
 every age^ a72d faved it fro7n the 
 dark72efs both of Sophifl7y and Er- 
 ror, 
 
 Nothing
 
 PREFACE. xi 
 
 Nothing call more tend to enlarge 
 the Mindy than thefe extenjive views 
 of Men ^ and human Kitowlege ', no- 
 thing can 7nore effeSiually take us off 
 from the foolijh admiration of what 
 is immediately before our eyes, and 
 help us to a jufier ejlimate both of 
 prefent Meny and prefeiit Litera- 
 ture* 
 
 It is perhaps too much the cafe with 
 the 7nultitude in every nation ^ that as 
 they know little beyond themfelves^ and 
 their own affairs^ fo out of this nar- 
 row fphere of knowlege^ they tlmtk no- ^ 
 thing worth knowing. As w^ Britons 
 by our fituation live divided fr 0771 the 
 whole worldy this perhaps will be 
 found to be 7nore reinarkably our cafe. 
 And hence the reafon^ that our fludies 
 are tfually fatisfied in the works of 
 our own Count ry7?ien ; that in Philo- 
 fophyy in Poetry^ in every kiiid of 
 fubje&y whether ferious or ludicrous y 
 whsth^r facr^d or profa7iey we think 
 
 per--
 
 xii PREFACE. 
 
 ferfeEiion with ourfelveSy and that it 
 is fuperfiiious to jearch farther. 
 
 The Author of this Treatife would 
 ly no means detraEi from the jujl 
 honours due to thofe of his Country^ 
 men^ who either in the prefefjty or 
 preceding age^ have fo illujlrioufy 
 adorned it. But tho he can with 
 fleafure and fatcerity join in celebra- 
 ting their deferts^ he would not have 
 the admiration of thefe^ or of any 
 other fewy to pafs thro' blind excefs 
 into a contempt of all others* Were 
 fuch Admiration to become uiiiverfal^ 
 an odd event would follow ; a few 
 learned Men^ without any fault of 
 their own^ would contribute in a man- 
 ner to the extinEiio7i of Letters. 
 
 A lilc evil to that of adrniri?!^ 
 only the authors of our own age-, is 
 that of admiring only the authors of . 
 one particular Scie?ice. There is in- 
 deed in this lafl prejudice fomething 
 
 pe'cu*
 
 PREFACE. ;cni 
 
 peculiarly unfortunate^ and that is^ 
 the more excellent the Sciejice^ the 
 more likely it will be found to produce 
 this effeB. 
 
 There are few Sciences more i?i- 
 trinfically -valuable^ tha?z Mathe- 
 matics. It is hard indeed to fay^ 
 to which they have more contributed^ 
 whether to the Utilities of Life^ or to 
 the fuhlimefl parts of Science. They 
 are the noble fl Praxis of 'Logiq^ or 
 UNIVERSAL Reasoning. It is thro 
 them we may perceive^ how the flat eel 
 Forms of Syllogifm are exe?nplified in 
 one Subje^^ namely the Predica7/ient 
 /^/^ Quantity. By 7narki?2g the force 
 of thefe Forms ^ as they are applied- 
 here, we may be enabled to apply 
 them of ourf elves el few here. iV^v 
 farther fill — by viewing the Mind, 
 during its procefs in thele lyilogiftic 
 employments, we may come to hiom 
 in party what kind of Being it is ; 
 fifice Mind, like other Powers^ can 
 
 12 be
 
 xW PREFACE. 
 
 Ifc only know7t from its Operations. 
 TVho&ver therefore will fludy Mathe- 
 matics in this vieWy will become not 
 only hy Mathematics a 7?iore expert 
 Logician, and by Logic a 7nore ra- 
 tional Mathematician, but a wifer 
 Philofopher^ and an acuter Reafoner^ 
 in all the pojftble fubjeBs either of 
 fcience or deliberation^ 
 
 But when Mathematics, inflead of 
 being applied to this excellent purpofe^ 
 are ufed not to exemplify Logic, but 
 to fupply its place ; no wonder if 
 Logic pafs into cont empty and if 
 Mathematics, ijiflead of furthering 
 fcience^ become in faEi an obflacle, 
 .For when men^ knowing nothing of 
 that Reafo7iing which is univerfal, 
 come to attach themfdves for years 
 to a fingle Species, a f pedes wholly 
 involved in Lines and Numbers 
 only ; they grow infenfbly to believe 
 thefe lajl as infeparable from all Rea- 
 fonifigy as the poor Indians thought 
 6 every
 
 PREFACE, XV 
 
 every horfei/ia?i to he infep arable from 
 his horfe. 
 
 A?id thus we fee the tfe^ 72ay the 
 necejftty of enlargi?7g our literacy 
 views ^ left even Knowlege itfclf 
 fDoidd ohflruB its own growth^ and 
 perform infofne meajure the fart of ^ 
 igfiorance and barbarity. 
 
 Such then is the Apology made by 
 the Author of this Treatife^ for the 
 multiplicity of antient quotations^ 
 with which he has filled his Booh If 
 he can excite in his readers a proper 
 fpirit of curiofty \ if he can help in 
 the leaf degree to enlarge the bounds 
 of Science ; to revive the decaying 
 tafe of a7itie?tt Literature ; to lejfen 
 the higotted contempt of every thing 
 not modern ; and to affert to Authors 
 of every age their juf portion of 
 efeem ; if he can in the leafl degree 
 contribute to thefe ends^ he hopes it 
 fnay be allowed^ that he has done a 
 
 fervicc
 
 XVI PREFACE. 
 
 fervice to mankind. Should th'isfer-^ 
 vice be a reafon for his Work to fur- 
 vive, he has confefl already,^ it would 
 he no unpleafing event. Should the 
 contrary happen^ he mufl acquiefce 
 in its fate^ and let it peaceably 
 pafs to thofe defined regions^ whither 
 the produBions of modern Wit are 
 every day paffmg^ 
 
 in vicum vendentem tus et 
 
 odores. 
 
 ADVERTISEMENT. 
 
 The Reader is defired to take notice, that 
 as often as the author quotes V. I. p. ^c, 
 he refers to 'Three Treatifes publified frfi in 
 one Volume, OBavo, in the year IJ^S* 
 
 THE
 
 f xvii 3 
 THE 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 B O O K I. 
 
 Chapter I. IntrodiiSfion, Dejign of the 
 whok» page i 
 
 Chap. II. Coyicerning the Aiialyzmg of 
 Speech into its fmalkfi Tarts. 
 
 p. 9 
 
 chap .III. Concerning the fever al Species of 
 
 thofe fmalkfl Farts, P* 2^ 
 
 Chap. IV. Co7iceming.Suhflantives f properly 
 
 fo called. p. 37 
 
 Chap. V. Concerning Suhfantives oftheSe- 
 
 condary Order. ^ P* ^^ 
 
 Chap. VI. Concerning Attributives , and frfi 
 
 concerning Verbs ^ P* ^7 
 
 Chap. VII. C oncer fling Time and Tcnfes, 
 
   p. 100 
 
 Chap. VIII. Concerning Modes, p. 140 
 
 Chap. IX. Concerning Verbs, as to their Spe- 
 cies and other remaining PrO" 
 perties,. p. 173 
 
 a Chap,
 
 xvili CONTENTS. 
 
 Chap. X. Concerning Participles and Ad^ 
 
 jeSfives. p. 184 
 
 Chap. XI. Concerning Attributives of the 
 
 Secondary Order » p. 192 
 
 BOOK II. 
 
 Chapter I. Concerning Definitives, page 213 
 Chap. II. Concerning ConneSfives, andfirfi 
 thofe called ConjunBions . ^. lyj 
 Chap. III. Co7icerning thofe other Connec- 
 tives , called Prepofitions.1^. 26 1 
 Chap. IV. Concerning Cafes, p. 275 
 
 Chap. V. Concerning InterjeBions — Recapi- 
 tulation'^ConcluJion^ p. 289 
 
 BOOK. III. 
 
 Chapter I. IntroduBion-^^^Divifon of the 
 SubjeB into its principal Parts, 
 
 page 305 
 
 Chap. II. Upon the Matter or common Sub- 
 
 je5i of Language, P- 316 
 
 Chap,
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 Chap. III. Upon the Form, or peculiar Cha* 
 raSier of Language, p* 327 
 
 Chap. IV. C oncer nifig general or univerfal 
 Ideas, p. 350 
 
 Chap. V, Subordination of IntelUgeiice •— 
 Difference of Ideas, both in 
 particular Men, and in whole 
 Nations — Different Genius of 
 different Languages "^CharaC" 
 ter of the Englifli, the Orien- 
 tal, the Latin, and the Greek 
 Languages •— Superlative Rx" 
 cellence of the LaJl-^Conclu-^ 
 fon. p. 403 
 
 XIX 
 
 ERRATA. 
 
 Page 83, line 17, /or t-TroTxIiHof, r^fli t;7roTax?»>;oy. 
 131, Note, 1. 1, /or Roman, r^arf'Romani. 
 252, 1. 2 from the bottom, for An, read And. 
 328, 1. 3 from the bottom, /cr ogyacav, read o^yxm, 
 332, 1. laft, for i, read it. 
 369, Note, 1. 15,/oruncleafing, r^Wunceafin?. 
 384, Note, I. 4, for iih TFn, readUiTTn,,
 
 Lately Publijhsd, 
 
 A NEW EDITION, IN FIVE VOLUMES OCTAVCj 
 
 PRICE ONE POUND TEN SHILLINGS BOUND, 
 
 WITH A HEAD OF THE AUTHOR BY BARTOLOZ:iI, 
 
 The WORKS of JAMES HARRIS, Efq. 
 
 CONTAINING, 
 
 VoL.I. qpHREE TREATISES: 77;^ Firfl, 
 
 X. concerning Art : The Second, concerning 
 Mufic^ Paintings and Poetry : The Third, con- 
 cerning Happincfst 
 
 Vol. II. HERiVLES; or, A Philofophical Inquiry 
 concerning Univerfal Grammar. 
 
 VoL.III. PHILOSOPHICAL ARRANGEMENTS, 
 containi?7g a variety of fpeculations, logical, 
 phyfualy ethical, and jnctaphyfical; derived 
 froTn the principles of the Greek Philofophers, 
 and iliufiratrd by examples from the greatejl 
 Writers both ancient and tnodern. 
 
 VoL.IV. IPHILOLOGICAL'INQUIRIES: hiThree 
 andV-. 3 Parts. Containing, 
 
 I. The Rife and different Species of Criticifn 
 and Critics. 
 
 II. An Ilhijlraiion of Critical DcBrines and 
 Principles, as they appear in dflinguijhed 
 Authors, as ivell ancient as modern. 
 
 III. An Effay en the Tajie and Literature of 
 the middle Ages. 
 
 To which are added, four Appendixes ^ — Firft^ 
 An Account of the Arabic Manifcripts be- 
 longing to the Efcurial Library in Spain. 
 Second, Concerning the Manufcripts of Livy, 
 in the fa?ne Library. Third, Concerning the 
 Manufcripts of Cebes, in the Library of the 
 King of France. Fourth, Some Account of 
 Literature in Rujfia^ and cf Us Progrefs to- 
 wards being civilized. 
 ♦^* Any of the above Volumes may be had feparate, to 
 
 complete SetSt
 
 HERMES 
 
 OR A PHILOSOPHICx\L INQUIRY 
 
 CONCERNING UNIVERSAL GRAMMAR, 
 
 BOOK L 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 JDeJign of the Whole >. 
 
 IF Men by nature had been framed Ch.I. 
 for Solitude, they had never felt an 
 Impulfe to converfe one with an- 
 other: And if, like lower Animals, they 
 had been by nature irrational, they could 
 not have recognised the proper Subjedts 
 of Difcourfe. Since Speech then is the 
 joint Energie of our bell and noblefl Fa- 
 culties [a), (that is to fay, of our Rea- 
 
 B fan 
 
 {a) See V. I. p. 147 to 169. See alfo Note xr, 
 p. 292, and Note xix. p. 2965 of th? f^pie Volume.
 
 2 ' HERMES. 
 
 Ch.I. /on and o\iv focial AffeSfionJ being withal 
 our peculiar Ornament and Diftind:ion, as 
 Me?2; thofe Inquiries may furely be deemed 
 interefting as well as liberal, which either 
 fearch how Speech may be naturally re- 
 fohed -J or how, when refolved, it may 
 be again combined. 
 
 Here a large field for fpeculating opens 
 before us. We may either behold Speech, 
 as divided into its confiituent Parts, as a 
 Statue may be divided into its feveral 
 Limbs; or elfe, as refolved into its Matter 
 and Form, as the f^me Statue may be re- 
 folved into its Marble and Figure, 
 
 These different Analyjings or Refolii- 
 tions conftitute what we call ijj) Philo- 
 sophical, or Universal Grammar. 
 
 When 
 
 (/;>) Grammaticam et'tarn bipart'itam ponemus^ ut alia 
 fit I'lteraria^ alia philofophica, IfSc. Bacon^ de Jupn, 
 Sciem. VI. I. And foon after he adds — Feru?ntamen 
 hiic ipp re mon'tti^ cogitatione cornplcxi fumzis Grammati- 
 ca?n quandaWf qua tion analcglam verbonan ad ini^iccmy 
 fed analogiam inUr verba at res ftvi ratlQUem fdid}! in- 
 qui'rat.
 
 Book the First. ^ 
 
 When we have viewed Speech thus Ch. I. 
 nnalyfedy we may then confider it, as 
 compounded. And here in the firil place 
 we may contemplate that {c) Synfhefis, 
 wPiich by combining Jimple Therms produces 
 a 'Truth ', then by combining two T'ruths 
 produces a third , and thus others, and 
 others, in continued Demon flration, till 
 we are led, as by a road, into the regions 
 of Science. 
 
 Now this is thditfuperior and moil ex* 
 ctlXtnt Synthejis y which alone applies itfelf 
 to our IntelleSi or Reafon, and which to 
 
 B 2 condu(5t 
 
 [c) Arijlotle fays — im ^\ xccja, fji.'/i^i{Jt.Kxv (Tu/*- 
 TrXcKvw Xcyof/.ivuv B^lu axf ojAjjOe? iirs T^£\i$i^ Ig-iU* 
 o»ov avO^coTr©^, A£uk@^, TPSvfi, viKoi — Of thcfe words 
 which are .jpokcn without Conne^ioi^ there is no one 
 €itl?er true or falfe ; as for injiance^ Man^ whiu, 
 runneth^ conqvxreth. Cat. C. 4, So again in the be- 
 ginning of his Treatife De Interpretatione^ wf^l yot^ 
 <ru^6£0•Jv pt, Sidi^itTiv £$-* to ^iXiSoq re ^ to.^AjiOe?. 
 True a}?d Falfe are fc'cn in ComHftion and Divifwn, 
 Compofition makes affirmative Truth, Divifion makes 
 negativ -, yet both alike bring Terms together, and fo 
 f*r therefore may be called fyntheticaU
 
 .4 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.I. conducfl according to Rule, conftitutes 
 the Art of Logic. 
 
 After this we may turn to thofe 
 (J) /;£/£'r/i'r Compofitions, which are pro^ 
 
 dudtive 
 
 '{d) Jirimomws in his Comment on the.Treatifc 
 tlf^j Ep^Tivsixgy p. 53, gives the following Extra6l 
 from TheophraJIits, which is here inferted at length, as 
 well for the Excellence, of the Matter, as becaufe it' is 
 not (I believe) elfewhere extant. 
 
 6 pKo.<To(p^ @io<p^a.f<^) rJfj ts HPOS TOYS 
 
 AKPOHMENOTS, olq xj irn^^aivH tj, xJ t?i? 
 
 IIPOS TA nPAFiMATA, uVg^ wi/ o Anywi/ -vjh' 
 
 ccci i!rporj6?iTa:t ra^ aK^owj«,£VH?, •srepi |U,£v ai/ rrjv 0"p^£- 
 
 tiv dvlz rnv HPOS TOTS AKPOATAS xa/^- 
 
 -yU'Ovlxi vroivJiKri -Kj p>)7<5p*>c7i, tTiOTt s^yoj/ dvlaTi; iyj^i- 
 
 'yz(^^xi ra trsiAvortpcx, twi/ ovo^mrmy akXa, (j.^ to, xoivx 
 
 3^ J'cJ'ilj!AfU/A£i/a, >t, raura iva^[J!.oi/i\^g tru//.7rA£)cfjv aA- 
 
 Ar'Aeif, wff J^jct tutuiv >t, Tui/ r^TOig iTrofAtvuv, olov 
 
 ccc^Tjvsia.?, yAuxuTJiT©^, >tj Tw^ uKkav ihuvj 'in ts fxx- 
 
 xhXoyiccg, jtj fipoc^vXoyicc;, y.Oila, y.xt^ov tuocvtuv zroi- 
 
 ^ot.Xcx.y.^a.\/oyi.ivuv^ olcroci rs tov ccKooxTriV} H; iHTrXri^xi. 
 
 3fj trpof rriv ■sTfiSw ^npu^iulx i^siv' t>5? c5*£ yf HPOS 
 
 Tx\ nPAFMATA t5 Aoya o-p^fViw? o (piXo(ro(p(^ 
 
 .VfonyH^ivug i7nu.tXr,(Tp,xij to, re ^tv^<^ ^leXiy^uv^ 
 'J. " 1.. ^
 
 Book the First. 5 
 
 du(flive of the Pathetic, and the Plea^ Ch.I, 
 fant in all their kinds. Thefe latter Com- 
 
 politions 
 
 1 11 - I   I ■' ' ' . ' ' — - 
 
 3^ TO dXvi^iq aTToJ'f jxi/u?. The Relation of Speech be- 
 ing twofold (as the Philofophcr Theophrajius hath 
 fettled it) one to the Hearers, to whom it explains 
 fomething^ and one to the THltiGS^ concerning which 
 the Speaker propofes to perfuade his Hearers : I'Flth 
 refpeSi to the frfi Relation^ that which regards the 
 Hearers, are employed Poetry and Rhetoric. Thus 
 it becomes the huftnefs of thefe two^ to feleSi the mo/i 
 refpeSlable Words^ and not thofe that are co7nmon and 
 of vulgar tfe^ and to connect fuch Words harmonioufly 
 one with another^ fo as thro' thefe things and their 
 confequences^ fuch as Perfpiciiity^ Delicacy, and the 
 other Forms of Eloquence^ together with Copioufnefs and 
 Brevity, all employed in their proper fafon, to lead 
 the Plearer, andflrike him, and hold^ him vanquijhed by 
 the power of Perfuafon, On the contrary, as ta the 
 Relation of Speech to Things, here the Philofophcr 
 will he found to have a principal employ, as ivell in 
 refuting the Fqlfe, as in demonjlrating the True. 
 
 SanSlius fpeaks elegantly on the fame Subjeil. 
 Creavit Deus homine?n rationis participem ; cui, quia 
 Sociabilem effe voluit, magno pro munere dedit Sei- 
 monem. Sermoni autem perficiendo tres opifices adhi- 
 buit. Prima efi Grammatica, qu(S ab oratione folce- 
 cifmos (ff harbarifmos expelUt ; fecunda Diale6lica, 
 quce in Sermonis veritate verfaiur ; tertia Rhetorica, 
 quce ornaium Sermonis tantum exquirit. Min. 1. i, 
 c. 2, 
 
 B 3
 
 6 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.I. portions afpire not to the Intellect, but 
 being addrefled to the Imaghiation, the 
 AffeBtons, and the ^enfe, become from 
 their different heightnings either Rhe- 
 toric or Poetry. 
 
 Nor need we neceifarily view thefe 
 Arts diftindly and app.rt ; we may ob- 
 ferve, if we pleafe, how perfedlly they 
 eo-incide. Grammar is equally requi- 
 fite to every one of the reft. And though 
 Logic may indeed fubfifl: without Rhe- 
 toric or Poetry, yet fo neceffary to 
 thefe lafl is a found and correcfl Logic, 
 that without it, they are no better than 
 warbling Trifles. 
 
 Now all thefe Inquiries (as we have 
 faid already) and fuch others arifing from 
 them as are of flill fublimer Contempla- 
 tion, (of which in the Sequel there may 
 be pofTibly not a few) may with juflice be 
 deemed Inquiries both interefling and 
 liberal. 
 
 At
 
 BooktheFirst. J 
 
 At prefent we fhall pofrpone the whole Ch. I. 
 fynthetical Part, (that is to fay. Logic and 
 RheioricJ and confine ourfelves to the 
 analytical, that is to fay. Universal 
 Grammar. Iq this we fliall follow 
 the Order, that we have above laid down, 
 firfl dividing Speech, as a Whole, in-to 
 its CONSTITUENT Parts; then rcfolving 
 it, as a Composite, into its Matter 
 and Form; two Methods of Analyfis 
 very different in their kind, and which 
 lead to a variety of very different Specu- 
 lations. 
 
 Should any one object, that in the 
 courfe of our Inquiry we fometimes de- 
 fcend to things, which appear trivial and 
 low j let him look upon the effed:s, to 
 which thofe things contribute, then from 
 the Dignity of the Confequences, let him 
 honour the Principles. 
 
 The following Story may not impro- 
 perly be here inferted. ** When the Fame 
 
 B 4 *' of
 
 HERMES. 
 
 " of Heraclitus was celebrated through-. 
 ** out Greece^ there were certain perfons, 
 ** that had a curiofity to fee fo great a 
 *' Man. They came, and, a$ it happen- 
 *' ed, found him warming himfelf in a 
 " Kitchen. The mean nefs of the place 
 *' occafioned them to ftop ; upon which 
 *' the Philofopher thus accofled them — • 
 M Enter (fays he) BOLDLY, for here 
 ** too there are Gods (^).'' 
 
 We fhall only add, that as there is no 
 part of Nature too mean for the Divine 
 Prefence ^ fo there is no kind of Subjeft, 
 having its foundation in Nature, that is 
 below the Dignity of a philofophical In- 
 quiry. 
 
 \i) See Ar'if.Qt. dc Part. Animal 1. I. c. 5. 
 
 CHAP,
 
 Book THE Fir sTj 5 
 
 CHAP. IL 
 
 Concerning the Analyjing of Speech info its 
 fmalleji Parts, 
 
 THOSE things, which are/^ to Nar Ch. 11; 
 ture, are notfrji to Man. Nature *'''°"^''^^- 
 begins from Caiifes, and thence defcends 
 to EffeBs. Human Perceptions firil: open 
 upon EffeBs, and thence by flow degrees 
 afcend to Caufes. Often had Mankind 
 feen the Sun in Eclipfe, before they knew 
 its Caufe to be the Moon's Interpofition ; 
 much oftner had they feen thofe unceafing 
 Revolutions of Summer and Winter, of 
 Day and Night, bofore they knew the 
 Caufe to be the Earth's double Motion [a) . 
 
 Evea 
 
 [a) This Diftinfiion o^ f.rj} to Man, and Jir/I to 
 Nature^ was greatly regarded in the Peripatetic Phi- 
 lofophy. See Jri/?. Phyf. )fufcult. 1. i.e. i. Themif- 
 this's Comment on the fame, Pojler. Analyt. 1. l. 
 c. 2. De Anima, 1. 2. c. 2. It leads us, when pro- 
 perly regarded, to a very important Diftin6tion be- 
 "• y^ tv/een
 
 ,,o H E R M E S. 
 
 Ch. II. Even in Matters of Art and human Crea- 
 tion, if we except a few Artifts and cri- 
 tical 
 
 tvizcn Intelligence Divine and Intelligence Human, 
 God may be faid to view the Firft, as firfl: ; and the 
 Laft, as laft ; that is, he views Effects thro' Causes in 
 their natural Order. Man views the Laft, as firft ; 
 and the Firft, as laft ; that is, he views Causes thro* 
 Effeds^ in an Inverfe Order. And hence the 
 Meaning of that PalTage in Arljlotk : u(nrtp yxp 
 ra tuiy vvKJBptSccv 'oiJi,[^3^a. Trpo? to (piyl'^ i^si to 
 f/.i^' Yt[j.ipxif^ arw >^ rvig ^fji.iT£pxg r^jv^rtg o N5? tt/jo? 
 Ta T^ (pu(rsi (pa,vip(j3Toc\a, tto-vJoov. As are the Eyes of 
 Bats to the Light of the Day^ fo is Man^s Intelligence 
 to thofe OhjeSis^ that are by Nature the brighte/i and 
 moji confpicuous of allTlnngs. Metaph. !. 2. c. I. See 
 alfo 1. 7. €.4. znd Ethic. Nlcom. 1. i. c. 4. AmmonhtSy 
 reafoning in the fame way, fays very pertinently to 
 the Subjedl: of this Treatife — 'AyaTrTiTov rt; dv^poo- 
 
 TTlVi} ^IKTfi, £X TCDV Ot,T£X£fipCCV Xy <nJ>0£TWV iTTt TCC CC' 
 
 TrXa^iocx, jt^ nXnonpa, 'n'poiivoti' rx yap <rvv7iT0i[ji.oiXAov 
 cuv'/iOx) vfjf'^Vy >ij yvwpi^'.unpoi.' ' Ovtu yav jc, 7ra7g 
 ilpai [xiv Xoyovy -x^UinTv^ XojKpXTr,^ Tripnro^sTy aie* 
 ruTOV SI cicvciXv<rcn eU ovo^j^a jcj pvyt-Xy Xj ravrx ng 
 ffuAAaSa?, xccy.s7va, iTg fOi^sTocj ayisrt' Human Na- 
 ture viay be well contented to advance from the more 
 imperfecl and complex to the more ftmple and perfeSi ; 
 for the complex Subjc^s are more fatniliar to us, and 
 better kno^vn. Thus therefore it is that even a Onld 
 knoivs hew to put a Sentence together^ and fay, Socrates 
 4 ' walkcth J
 
 Book the First. ii 
 
 tical Obfervers, the reft look no higher Ch.IL 
 than to the PraSiice and mere Work, 
 knowing nothing of thofe Principksy on 
 which the whole depends. 
 
 Thus in Speech for example — All 
 men, even the loweft, can fpeak their 
 Mother-Tongue. Yet how many of this 
 multitude can neither write, nor even 
 read ? How many of thofe, who are thus 
 far literate, know nothing of that Gram- 
 mar, which refpeds the Genius of their 
 own Language ? How few then muft be 
 thofe, who know Grammar univer- 
 sal; that Grammar y which without re- 
 garding the feveral Idioms of particular 
 Languages, only refpecis thofe Principles, 
 that are ejfential to them all ? 
 
 'Tis our prefent Defign to inquire 
 about this Grammar ; in doing which we 
 
 fhall 
 
 walketh ; but how to refolve this Setitence into a Noun 
 and Vcrby and thefe again into Syllables^ and Syllables 
 into Letters or Elements^ here he is at a kfs. Am. in 
 Com. de Praedic. p. 29,
 
 12 HERMES, 
 
 Ch, IL ihall follow the Order confonant to human, 
 perception, as being for that reafon thq 
 more eafy to be underflood. 
 
 We fhall begin therefore firfl: from ^ 
 Period or Sentence, that combination in 
 Speech, which is obvious to all, and 
 thence pafs, if poffible, to thofe its pri^ 
 mary Farts, which, however elTential, 
 ^re only obvious to a few, 
 
 With refped therefore to the dif-^ 
 ferent Species of Sentences, who is there 
 fo ignorant, as if we addrefs him in his 
 Mother-Tongue, not to know when 'tis 
 we ajfcrt, and when we qiiejlion; when 'tis 
 ^t command, and when ^cpray or wiJJo f 
 
 For example, when we read in Shake- 
 
 Jpeare *, 
 
 T^he Man, that hath 7io miific in hi?jifelf. 
 
 And ts not mov d ^with concord offweet 
 
 founds. 
 
 Is Jit for 'Treafons 
 
 Or 
 
 * Merchant of Fenicc,
 
 Book the First. ij 
 
 Ox'mMilto?2 *, Ch.IL 
 
 O Friends, I hear the tread of nimble 
 feet,, 
 '■ Hafiing this way-^— 
 
 "'tis obvious that thefe are affertive Sen- 
 tences, one founded upon Judgment, the 
 other upon Senfation. 
 
 When the Witch in Macbeth fays to 
 her Companions, 
 
 ■When jh all we three meet again 
 In thunder, lightning, and in rain ? 
 
 this 'tis evident is an interrogative SeU" 
 tence. 
 
 When Macbeth fays to the Ghoft of 
 Banqiio, 
 
 *- Hence, horrible Shadow, 
 
 Unreal Moclcry hence ! 
 
 he fpeaks an imperative Sentence, founded 
 upon the pafiion of hatred. 
 
 When 
 
 * P. L. IV. 866. 
 
 i
 
 ,4 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.II. When Milton fays in the charader of 
 his Allegro, 
 
 Hajie thee. Nymph, and bring with thee 
 yejl and youthful 'Jollity, 
 
 he too fpeaks an imperative Sentejice, tho' 
 founded on the paffion, not of hatred but 
 of love. 
 
 When in the beginning of the Para* 
 dife Loji we read tiie following addrefs. 
 
 And chief y than, O Spirit, that dof prefer 
 Before all temples tlf upright heart, and 
 
 pure, 
 Inflru5l ?ne, for thou knowf — 
 
 this is not to be called an imperative 
 Sentence, tho' perhaps it bear the fame 
 Form, but rather (if I may ufe the Word) 
 ,'ti5 a Sentence precative or optative » 
 
 What then fliall v/e fiv ? Are Sen ten- 
 ces to be quoted in this manner without 
 ceafing, all differing from each other in 
 
 their
 
 Bo©K-T^i-E First. i^ 
 
 their ilamp and charader ? Are they no Ch.II, 
 way reducible to certain definite CiaiTes ? 
 If not, they can be no objects of rational 
 comprehenfion. — Let us however try. 
 
 'Tis a phrafe often applied to a man, 
 when fpeaking, that he fpeaks /jis mind ^ 
 as much as to fay, that his Speech or Dif- 
 courfe is a publljhing of fome Energie or 
 Motion of his Soul. So it indeed is in every 
 one that fpeaks, excepting alone the Dif- 
 fembler or Hypocrite -, and he too, as far 
 as pofiible, affed:s the appearance. 
 
 Now the Pow£Rs of the soul (over 
 and above the meer-f nutritive) may be in- 
 cluded all of them in thofe of Percep^ 
 TioN, and thofe of Volition. By the 
 Powers of Perception, I mean the 
 Senfes and the IntelleSl -, by the Powers of 
 Volition, I mean, in an extended fenfe, 
 not only the Will, but the feveral Pafjions 
 and Appetites ; in fhort, all that moves to 
 ASfion, whether rational or irrational. 
 
 If 
 
 "y^m— WW— i^»— .-     I I I'll I I ■»<»<— .i»i II » 
 
 t V^d, ArU^Qt. de An. IL 4,
 
 j6 Hermes. 
 
 Ch.II. If then the leading Powers of the Soul 
 be thefe two, 'tis plain that every Speech 
 or Sentence, as far as it exhibits the Soul,- 
 muit of courfe refped one or other of 
 thefe. 
 
 If we a/fert, then is it a Sentence which 
 refpeds the Powers of Perception. For 
 what indeed is to ajfert, if we confider the 
 examples above alleged, but to publifi 
 fome Ferceptlon either of the Senfes or 
 the Intelle£l ? 
 
 Again, \{yR^ inter rogat^y i^ wq 'com- 
 mandy ifwe^nT/, or if we wi/Jj, (which 
 ill terms of Art is to fpeak Sentences in- 
 terrogative, imperative, precative, or op- 
 tative) what do we but publifh fo many- 
 different Vol it ions? — For who is it that 
 quejiions ? He that has a Dejire to be in- 
 formed.: — Who is it that commands f Pie 
 that has a Will, which he would have 
 obey'd. — What are thofe Beings, who 
 either wijlo or pray f Thofe, who feel 
 
 ' certain
 
 Book THE First. 17 
 
 tertain wants either for themfelves, or Ch.II, 
 others. 
 
 If then the Soid's leading Powers be the 
 two above mentioned, and it be true that 
 all Speech is a publication of thefe Powers, 
 it will follow that every Sentence 
 
 WILL BE EITHER A SENTENCE OF AS- 
 SERTION, OR A Sentence of Voli- 
 tion. And thus, by referring all of 
 them to one of thefe two clafTes, have 
 we found an expedient to reduce their 
 infinitude (^), 
 
 The 
 
 i)Qi(rng ^vvuij.sigy rag [j.iv yvuriKag, raj ^l ^wxixaf, 
 rdg Hy o^fiili-Aoiq ?^£'yojxiuui;' (^Kiyoo ^l yv'jjfi>t(xg y.iv, 
 xaO ag yivucxo^su ixccg-oi/ ruv ovruv, olov fsf, §ix-» 
 voia,v, So^,xVj (po.vro(,<noc,v Xp atcrGrKni/' oPiytjiKa,; Slj 
 xay ag op£yoiJ.£\)cc tcov ocyotgoovy n twv ovTUiVy v run/ 
 
 «0KHUTU)VyOlQV pHAJKTiV ?^iyU3, ZTPOXipS<nVy S'u^aov, J^ imrt' 
 dvyAxj/j rx A'lEN Tirjx^a, ilSri ts Xoys (t« vyxpoi rav 
 C(.Tro<pxvrn<.ov) cx/iro twu opixjiyccov ^vvcc[Ji.iii}U TSTpoipyov 
 rxt T'd? 4'^X'^''i ^^" civrr.g xaO' diit'iiv Ii/Bpy3(rrigj a.KXoi 
 tiT^og 'tTB^ov oiTroTBivoi^hrig (rev (rvy.^o(K?^s<r9xi §Qy.ivrx 
 ^^og T9 T'-j^uv rvg oci^iug) Xj >)to» }\oyo)/ zrxp aufs
 
 iS HERMES. 
 
 Ch.II. The Extenfions of Speech are quite 
 indefinite, as may be feen if we compare 
 
 the 
 
 ^Wo-r?, Kcc^oiTTtp Itt) tS nrSMATIKOT j^ 
 EPX2THMATIKOT xaAajUEva Ao-ys, ^ zr^oiy[J.oij 
 
 ov Ao-y©^, U(r7rsp Itti, t5 KAHTIKOT, ri tjvo? 
 •srap' aula zrpd^eui;' ^ TauTV)?, ii wj -uToc^oi x^sirloj/^, 
 ug iTTi Ttif ETXHL, "/I w? zyx^x "XJ^pov^, cog etti ra 
 avpiwg v.ocX'diAivr,g nPOSTAHEIli^' //.ovoi/ AE to 
 AHO^ANTIKON ostto twv yi'wrmwv, >^ Ift raro 
 l^a.yUKT iv-ov Tr]g yiuofxi^ng iv y^^'iv yyuijiug twi/ -ny^Ciy' 
 i/.UTUp dXn^ug, ri ^ati/ojUEi/w?, iio >t, f/.ovou thto ^syiji- 
 ■Kov IfiV aA>i9j»a? ?) 4^£y(?aj, t«v ^s aAAwv a^/i/. The 
 Meaning of the above pafTage being impUed in the 
 Text, we take its tranflation from the Latin Interpre- 
 ter. Dicendmn igitur eji^ cum anhna yiojlra duplicem 
 poteJIaUm haheat^ cogn'itmn;^ i^ 'vitcey qnes etiam appe- 
 th'ionh ac cupiditatis appellatur^ qme vera cognitionis ej}^ 
 •uh eji^ qua res fingulas cogmJdmuSy ut mens^ cogitatio, 
 epinjo, phantajia^ fenfus : abpetitus vera facultas eji^ qua 
 hona^ vel qua funt^ vel qua videntuTy concupifcimus, ut 
 funt voluntas^ confilium^ ira^ cupidkas : quatuor orationis 
 fpecieSf prater enunciantem^ a partihus animi proficifcun- 
 tur^ qua concupifcunt ; tion cum aumus ipfe per fe agity 
 fed cum ad alium fe convertit., qui ei ad confequendum idy 
 quod cupit, conducere pojfc videatur i atque etia?n vel ra- 
 tionem ab (o exquirit, ut in oratio'ie, quam Percundlan- 
 
 tem.
 
 Book the First* 19 
 
 the Eneid to an Epigram oi Martial, But Ch. II. 
 the longejl ExtenfioTty with which Gram- 
 mar has to do, is the Extenfion here 
 confidered, that is to fay, a Sentence. 
 The greater Extenfions (fuch as Syllo- 
 gifms. Paragraphs, Sedions, and complete 
 Works) belong not to Grammar, but to 
 Arts of higher order; not to mention that 
 all of them are but Sentences repeated. 
 
 Now a Sentence (c) may be fketch'd 
 in the following defcription- — a compound 
 
 C 2 ^antity 
 
 tern, aut Interrogantem vacant ; vel rem : fiqm renty 
 vel cum ipfum confequi cupit, quicum loquitur^ ut in op- 
 tante oratione, vel aliquam ejus aulionem : atque in hdcy 
 vel ut a prajlantiore, ut in Deprecatione ; vel ut ab in- 
 feriore^ ut in eo, qui proprie JufTus mminatiir. Sola 
 aut em Enunclans a cognofcendi facultate projicifcitur : 
 hacque nunciat rerum cognitionem^ qua in nobis eji, aut 
 veram^ aut fmulatatn. Itaque Hasc fola verum falfum- 
 que capit : prater ea vero nulla. Aramon. in Libr. de 
 Interpretatione. 
 
 (*i^y) KaO' aura o-n/Aa/j/fj tj, Arift. Po^. C 20. 
 See alfo de Interpret. C. 4.
 
 20 II E R M E S. 
 
 Ch. II. ^antity of Bound fignijic ant , of which cer^ 
 tain PaT'ts are themfches alfofgnificant. 
 
 Thus when I fay [^the Sun JJn7ieth'] not 
 only the whole quantity of found has a 
 meaning, but certain Parts alfo, fuch as 
 \_Sun'\ and [JJjineth.'] 
 
 But what {hall we fay ? Have thefe 
 Parts again other Parts, which are in like 
 manner fignificant, and fo may the pro- 
 grefs be purfued to infinite ? Can we fup- 
 pofe all Meaning, like Body, to be divi- 
 fible, and to include v/ithin itfelf other 
 Meanings without end? If this be abfurd, 
 then mufl we neceffarily admit, that there 
 is fuch a thing as a Sound fgnif cant , of 
 which no Part is of itfelf fignificant . And 
 this is what we call the proper character 
 of a [d) Word. For thus, though the 
 
 Words 
 
 cni^ocvn-Aoy. De Poetic, c. 20. De Interpret, c 2 
 & 3. Prifcian'i Definition of a Word (Lib. 2.) is as 
 
 follows
 
 Book the First. 2i 
 
 Words [Su/i] and [fiinet/j] have each a Ch.II. 
 Meaning, yet is there certainly no Mean- 
 ing in any of their Parts, neither in the 
 Syllables of the one, nor in the Letters of 
 the other. 
 
 If therefore all Speech, whether in 
 profe or verfe, every Whole, every Sec-* 
 tion, every Paragraph, every Sentence, 
 imply a certain Aleaning, dlvijible into 
 ether Meanings, but Words imply a 
 Meaning, which is not fa divijible : it fol- 
 lows that Words will be the fmalleji parts 
 offpeech, in as much as nothing lefs has 
 any Meaning at all. 
 
 ' c 3 ro 
 
 follows — D'lCiio ejl pars jyumma oratlonis coyijlruolts^ id 
 e/lj In ord'ine cotnpofita. Pars autem, quantum ad Mum 
 intelUgendiim^ id ejl^ ad totius fenfiis intelh-^im^ Hoc 
 autem idea di5lum eji, nequis conetur vir^s in ditas partes, 
 dividerc^ hoc ejl^ itt vi iff res ; non ejiim ad totum intelli^, 
 gendum bac fit div'fio. To Prijcian we may add Theo- 
 dore Gaza. — Ae^i? J's, }/.io(^ b.x^troy kcctx <T'jyrx.^iY 
 A&ya. Introd. Gram. 1. 4. Flat3 fhewed them this 
 
 charaderifticof a Word— See Cr^/y^/i, P- S^S- Edj.t. 
 Scir.
 
 22 HERMES. 
 
 Ch. II. ^0 know therefore the /pedes of Words, 
 muft needs contribute to the knowledge of 
 Speech, as it implies a knowledge of its 
 minuteft Parts. 
 
 This therefore mufl become ournext 
 Inquiry. 
 
 CHAP,
 
 Book THE First. 23 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 
 Concerning the /pedes of Words, thefmallefi 
 Tarts of Speech, 
 
 LE T us firft fearch for the Species Q\^Wl^ 
 of Words among thofe Parts of 
 Speech, commonly received by Gram- 
 marians. For example, in one of the 
 pafTages above cited.— 
 
 T!he MaUy that hath no mufic in hifnfelfy 
 And is not movd with concord of fweet 
 
 founds. 
 Is fit for treafons^^ 
 
 Here the Word \T!he'\ is an Article j— 
 \Man'\ \No\ [Mufic] [Concord] [Sweet] 
 [Sounds] [Fit] [Treafons] are all Nouns, 
 fome Subfianti've, and fome AdjeBive—^ 
 [That] and [Himfef] are Pronouns —   
 [Hath] and [is] are Verbs— -[?;?(3i'(?^] a 
 Participle — [iVb/] an Adverb — 
 [And] a Conjunction —' [/-^] [with] 
 
 C 4 and
 
 24 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.IIL and [For] are Prepositions. In one 
 fentence we have all thofe Parts of Speech, 
 which the Greek Grammarians are found 
 to acknowledge. The Latijis only dif- 
 fer in having qo Article, and in feparat- 
 ing the Interjection, as a Part of it- 
 felf, which the Greeks include among 
 the Species of Adverbs. 
 
 What then flriall we determine ? why 
 arc there not more Species of Words ? 
 ■why fo many ? or if neither more nor 
 fewer, why thcfe and not others ? 
 
 To refolve, if poffible, thefe feveral 
 Queries, let us examine any Sentence that 
 comes in our way, and fee what diffe- 
 rences we can difcover in its Parts. Fop 
 example, the fame Sentence above, 
 
 'The Man that hath no Mujic, &c. 
 
 One Difference foon occurs, that fome 
 Words are variable, and others invariable. 
 Thus the Word Man may be varied into 
 Mans and Men-, Hath, into Have, Hafi^ 
 
 Hadj
 
 Book THE First, 25 
 
 Mad, Sec. Sweet into Sweeter and Sweet- Ch.III. 
 eji-. Fit into Fitter and Fittejl. On the 
 contrary, the Words, ^he. In, And, and 
 fome others, remain as they are, and can^ 
 not be altered. 
 
 And yet it may be quejflioned, how far 
 this Difference iseflential. For in the iirft 
 place, there are Variations, which can be 
 hardly called neceflary, becaufeonly fome 
 Languages have them, and others have 
 them not. Thus the Greeks have the dual 
 Variation, which is unknown both to the 
 Moderns and to the ancient Latins . Thus 
 the Greeks and Latins vary their Adjec- 
 tives by the triple Variation of Gender, 
 Cafe, and Number 5 whereas xh^EngliJIj 
 never vary them in any of thofe ways, but 
 thro* all kinds of Concord preferve them 
 ilill the fame. Nay even thofe very Va- 
 iiations, which appear moil necelTary, 
 may have their places fupplied by other 
 methods 3 fome by Auxiliars, as when 
 for Brutii or BnitOy we hy, of Brutus, to 
 
 Erutus 5
 
 26 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.III. Brutus-, fome by meer Pofitloriy as when for 
 Brutiim amavit Cajjius, we fay, CaJJius 
 lovd Brutus. For here the Accufative^ 
 which in Latin is known any where from 
 its Variation, is in Englijh only known 
 from its Pojitio?i or place. 
 
 If then the Diftindlion of Variable and 
 Invariable will not anfwer our purpofe, 
 let us look farther for fome other more 
 effential. 
 
 Suppose then we iliould diflblve the 
 Sentence above cited, and view its feveral 
 Parts as they ftand feparate and detach- 
 ed. Some 'tis ^\2im Ji ill prefer ve a Mean- 
 ing (fuch as Man, Mujic, Sweet, &c.) 
 others on the contrary immediately lofe it 
 (fuch as. And, Tihe, With, &c.) Not 
 that thefe laft have no meaning at all, 
 but in fad: they never have it, but when 
 in company, or ajfociated. 
 
 Now it fliould feem that this Diftinc- 
 tzon, if any, was effential. For all 
 
 Words
 
 Book the First. 27 
 
 Words are fignificant, or elfe they would Ch.IIL 
 not be Words; and if every thing not ab- 
 folute, is of courfe relative, then will all 
 . Words be fignificant cither abfolutely or 
 relatively. 
 
 With refped therefore to this Dif- 
 tindion, the firfi: fort of Words may be 
 C2XV ^Jignijicant by them/elves -, the latter 
 may be C3lVdJignificant by relation ; or if 
 we like it better, the firfi: fort may be 
 call'd Principals, the latter Accejfories^ 
 The firfi: are like thofe ftones in the bafis 
 of an Arch, v/hich are able to fupport 
 themfelves, even when the Arch is de- 
 ftroyed -, the latter are like thofe ftones 
 in its Summit or Curve, which can no 
 longer fland, than while the whole fub- 
 fifls(^). 
 
 § This 
 
 (f) Apollonius oi Alexandria (one of the acuteft Au- 
 thors that ever wrote on the fubjed of Grammar) il- 
 luftrates the different power of Words, by the different 
 power of Letters. "Ert, ov rporrov ruv roi^uuv 
 
 4 JSd 
 
 \
 
 25 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.III. § This Diillndlon being admitted, we 
 thus purfue our Speculations. All things 
 
 what* 
 
 rw l>i<p(i3vyi<TiV' rov dvrov rpoirou it^v iTnvor,(ryA ace Tn 
 rui/ Xi^icou. di yXy yd,^ dviwvy r^oirov riva. rav <p'jovr\i.'j- 
 rccv, pnTOCi uct' y.oiMdiTc^ Itti twi/ prj^uaTwi/, c^<Jj(AaTCc'^, 
 oiVTOO)ivy.iuVy i7rippy)[jt,XT!i09'—cct Sly cc(y7rBpn <r\j{ji.(pw\>Xy 
 CiV(zy.iviicri roc (pavr\ivro(,y a $vvcicy,svx KOtT iS'iocv pr,T(x. 
 liven — xaGaTTfP I'm ruv zx^o^itrsuVy ruv dp^poovy ruv 
 cvv^i<Tfji.uv' rtx, yoiproioiVTa an ruiv iJ^q^tm q\)(T<T7\txxivn, 
 In the fame mannery as of the Elements or LetterSy fame 
 are Vowelsy which of the?} f Ave s cojnplete a Sound y others 
 ere ConfonantSy zvhlch without the help of Vowels have na 
 exprefs Vocality ; fo likewife may we conceive as to the na- 
 ture of Words, Someofthe?ny like VoivclSy areofthem- 
 felves exprejivey as is the cafe of Verhsy Nounsy Pro- 
 nqunSy and Adverbs ; other Sy like ConfonantSy wait for 
 their Vowelsy being unable to become cxpreffive by their 
 Divn proper Jirengthy as is the cafe of Prcpofiticm^y Arii- 
 CiCSy and Conjun£iions ; for thefe parts of Speech are al- 
 ways Config7iificanty that isy are only figni fie ant y when af- 
 fociated to fomething elfe. ApoUon. de Syntax!. L. i. 
 C. 3. Itaque quibufdam philofophis placuit NOMEN iff 
 VERBUM Solas esse partes Orationis j catera 
 veroy AoMi'SicxJLAvel JvtiCTVRAS earum : quomodo 
 navium partes funt tabula iS' trabesy catera autem (id- ejly 
 ceray Jluppay ^ clavi & fimilia) vincula ^ congluti7\a~ 
 2 tiones
 
 Book THE First. 29 
 
 whatever either exijl as the 'Energies^ or Ch.III. 
 AffeSiions, offonie other thing, or without 
 being the Energies or AffeSfions of fome 
 other thing. If they exill as the Energies 
 or Affections of fomething elfe, then are 
 they called Attributes. Thus to 
 think is the attribute of a Man 5 to be 
 white, of a Swan -, to fly, of an Eagle - 
 to be four footed, of a Horfe. If they 
 ex id not after this 7nanner, then are they 
 call'd Substances*. Thus Man, 
 Swan, Eagle, and Horfe, are none of 
 them Attributes, but all Subftances, 
 becaufe however they may exift in Time 
 and Place, yet neither of thefe, nor of 
 any thing elfe, do they exifl as Energies 
 or Affedions. 
 
 And 
 
 tiones partiu?n yiavis (hoc eji^ tahiiJarum bf trablum) non 
 partes navis dkuntur. Prifc. L. XI. 913, 
 
 * Substances.] Thus Arlftotle. Nuv ^tXv Zv tiTttm 
 itPriTCH, n 7Z0X eVu' >) aTj«, oTi to \n.y\ KaO' vVo>c£i- 
 jWEi/2, aAA* >ca9' k tv. «AA«, Met^ph. Z. y. 
 p. 106. Ed. Sylb,
 
 30 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.III. And thus all things whatfoever, being 
 either (/) Subjiances or Attributes, it fol- 
 lows of courfe that all Words, which are 
 Jtgnijicant as Principals, muft needs be 
 iignificant of either the one or the other. 
 If they are fignijicant of Subjiances, they 
 are call'd Subjiantives ; if ^ Attributes, 
 they are call'd Attributives. So that all 
 Words whatever, Jignijicant as Princi- 
 pals, are either Substantives or At- 
 
 TKIBUTIVES. 
 
 Again, as to Words, which are only 
 Iignificant as Accejfories, they acquire a 
 Signification either from being afibciated 
 to one Word, or elfe to many. If to o?ie 
 Word alone, then as they can do no more 
 than in fome manner define or determine, 
 they may juilly for that reafon be called 
 
 De- 
 
 (f) This divifion of things into Subjiance and Jtiri- 
 hiite feems to have been admitted by Philofophers of all 
 Seas and Ages. See Categor. c. 2. Metaphyf, L. 
 VII. c. I. De Qelo, L. lU. c. i.
 
 Book the First. 31 
 
 Definitives. If to many Words at Ch.III* 
 once, then as they ferve to no other pur- 
 pofe than to conneB, they are called for 
 that reafon hy the name of Connec- 
 tives. 
 
 And thus it is that all Words what- 
 ever are either Principals or Accejfories y 
 or under other Names, Qithtv Jignijicanf 
 from themfehesy or Jignijicant by relation, 
 — \i Jignijicant from themfelves, they are 
 either Subfiantives or Attributives \ if 
 fgnifcant by relation, they are either 
 Defniti'ves or ConneBives, So that un- 
 der one of thefe four Species, Sub- 
 stantives, Attributives, Defini- 
 tives, and Connectives, are all 
 Words, however different, in a manner 
 included. 
 
 If any of thefe Names feem new and 
 unufual, we may introduce others more 
 ufual, by calling the Subjiantives, Nouns; 
 the Attributives, Verbs 5 the Definitives, 
 
 Art I-
 
 32 HERMES. 
 
 Ch. III. Articles ; and the Connediives, Cok^ 
 
 JUNCTIONS. 
 
 Shou'd it be afk'd, what then becomes 
 of Pronouns y Adverbs^ Prepojiiionsy and 
 InterjeBions ; the anfwer is, either they 
 mufl; be found included within the Spe- 
 cies above-mentioned, or elfe mufl be 
 admitted for fo many Species by them- 
 felves. 
 
 § There were various opinions in an- 
 cient days, as to the number of thefe Parts, 
 or Elements of Speech. 
 
 Plato in his * Sophift mentions only- 
 two, the Noun and the Verb. Arijlotle 
 mentions no more, where he treats of 
 •f- Propofitions. Not that thofe acute Phi- 
 lofophers were ignorant of the other Parts, 
 but they fpoke with reference to Logic or 
 
 Did- 
 
 * Tom. I. p. 261. Edit. Ser. 
 t Delnterpr. c. 2 & 3.
 
 Book the First. ' 33 
 
 DtaleBk (^•), confidering the Eflence of Ch.III. 
 Speech as contained in thefe two, becaufe 
 thefe alone combined make a perfecSt afj^er^ 
 tive Sentence, which none of the reft 
 without them are able to efFed:. Hence 
 therefore Arijiotk in his * treatife of Poe^ 
 try (where he was to lay down the ele- 
 ments 
 
 (g) Partes igitur orationis fiint fccimdu?n Diale^kos 
 duay NoMEN y Verbum; quia hce Jolce etiarn per 
 fe conjunSics plenam fac'iunt orationem ; alias aiite7n partes 
 c\)Wi^Yiyoor\^XTOt.f hoc eji^ confignificantia appellabant. 
 Prifcian. 1. 2. p. 574. Edit. Putfchii. Exijiit hie qiice- 
 dam quajlio^ cur duo tantmn^ Nomen ^ Verbum, 
 fe (Arijioteles fc.) deter minare promittat^ cum plures par- 
 tes orationis ejj'e videantur. ^ibus hoc dicendum ejl^ tan- 
 turn Arijlotelem hoc libra dtffinijfe^ quantu7n Hit ad idy 
 quod injlitucrat tra^are^ fuffecit. TraSiat namque de 
 fimpUci enuntiativa oratione^ qua fcilicet hujufmodi eji^ ut 
 junSiis tantum Verbis et Nominibus componatur. — ^are 
 fupcrHuum ejl quarere, cur alias quoqucy qucs 'videntur 
 oratiofiis partes^ non propofuerit^ qui yion totius fimpliciter 
 orationisy fed tantum fimplicis orationis injiituit elemeyita 
 partiri. Boetius in Libr. de Interpretat. p. 295. 
 Jpollonius from the above principles elegantly calls the 
 Noun and Verb, ra l^^Myftrxroi, ^/.i^n tk A&ys, 
 the mojl animated parts of Speech. De Syntaxi, 1. i.e. 3, 
 p. 24. See alfo Plutarch, ^lafl. Platon. p. 1009. 
 
 * Poet. Cap. 20. 
 
 D
 
 34 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.III. ments of a more variegated fpeech) adds 
 the Article and ConjunBion to the Noun 
 and Verb, and fo adopts the fame Parts, 
 with thofe eftablillied in this Treatife. 
 To Arijlotles authority (if indeed better 
 can be required) may be added that alfo 
 of the elder Stoics {/j). 
 
 The latter Stoics inflead of four Parts 
 made iive, by dividing the Noun into the 
 Appellative and Proper. Others increafed 
 the number, by detaching the Pronoun 
 from the Noun ; the Participle and Ad- 
 ijerb from the Verb ; and the Prepofition 
 from the Conjun6tion. The Latin Gram^ 
 marians went farther, and detached the 
 InterjeBion from the Adverb, within 
 which by the Greeks it was always in- 
 cluded, as a Species. 
 
 We 
 
 [h) For this we have the authority of Diouyfius of 
 Halkarnqffiis, De Struil. Or at. Se^. 2. whom ^an- 
 tilian follows, Irji. I. i.e. 4. Diogenes Laerhus and 
 Prifcian make them always to have admitted five Parts. 
 See Prifcian^ as before, and Laeitius, Lib. Vlh 
 Segm. 57.
 
 Book the First. 
 
 35 
 
 We are told indeed by (/) Dionyfius of Ch.III. 
 Halicarnajfus and ^intilian, that Arijlo- 
 tie, with TheodeBes, and the more early 
 writers, held but thi^ee Parts of fpeech, 
 the Noun, the Verb, and the ConjiinBion^ 
 This, it muft be ov/ned, accords with 
 the oriental Tongues, whofe Grammars 
 (we are [k) told) admit no other. But 
 as to Arijiotlc^ we have his own authori- 
 ty to afiert the contrary, who not only 
 enumerates the four Species which we 
 have adopted, but afcertains them each 
 by a proper Definition *« 
 _^ D 2 To 
 
 (z) See the places quoted in the note immediately 
 preceding. 
 
 (Ji) Avtiqwjfifna eorum ejl opinio^ qui tres clajjh fa^^ 
 aunt. Ejlqne hcsc Arahum quoque Jentent'ia — Hebrcsi 
 qmque (qut^ cum Arabes Grammaticam fcr'ibere defmerent^ 
 art cm cam clemum fcribere coeperunt, quod ante annos conti- 
 git circiter quadringmtos) Hebrcei^ inquam^ hac in re fecuti 
 funt magi/iros fuos Arabes.- — Im?no vero trium clajjium nu-' 
 mcrum alia ettmn Orient is Ungues retine;?t. Dubium^ 
 titrum ea in re Orientales imitati funt antiqiios Gracorum^ 
 an hi potius fecuti funt Orientalium exempium. Utut eji^ 
 £tiam veteres Grtecos tres tantiim partes agmvijfe^ non 
 folum autor eji Dionyfius^ Sec. VoiT. de Analog. 1. i. 
 c. I. See alfo Sanciii Mir.erv. L i. c, 2, 
 
 * Sup. p. 34,
 
 36 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.III. To conclude — the Subjed of the fol- 
 lowing Chapters will be a diftindt and fe- 
 parate confideration of the Noun, the 
 Verb, the Article, and theCoNjUNC- 
 tionj which four, the better (as we 
 apprehend) to exprefs their refpe<5tive 
 natures, we chufe to call Substan- 
 tives, Attributives, Definitives, 
 and Connectives. 
 
 i 
 
 CHAP.
 
 Book the First* 37 
 
 CHAP. IV, 
 
 Concerning Subjiantives, properly fo called, 
 
 SUBSTANTIVES are all thofe principal QhAY , 
 Words, which are Jignijicant of Sub~ 
 fiances y conjidered as Subjiances, 
 
 The firft fort of Subjlances are the 
 NATURAL, fuch as Animal, Vegetable, 
 Man, Oak. 
 
 There are other Subflances of our own 
 making. Thus by giving a Figure not 
 natural to natural Materials, we create 
 fuch Subflances, as Houfe, Ship, Watch, 
 Telefcope, C^c. 
 
 Again, by a more refined operation of 
 our Mind alone , v\^e abfiraB any Attribute 
 from its necellary fubjed:, and confider it 
 apart, devoid of its dependence. For 
 example, from Body we abflradt to Fly, 
 
 D 3 from
 
 3$ HERMES. 
 
 Ch.IV. from Surface, the being White-, from Soul, 
 the being I'ernperate, 
 
 And thus it is we convert even Attr^ 
 biites into SubJianceSj denoting them on 
 this occafion by propej* Subjiantives, fuch 
 as Flighty Whitenefsy T'emperance -, or elfe 
 by others more general, fuch as Motion, 
 Colour, Virtue. Thefe we call ab^ 
 STRACT Substances ; the fecond fort 
 we call artificial. 
 
 Now all tliofe feveral Subflances have 
 their Genus, their Species, and their In- 
 dividuals. For example, in natural Sub- 
 ilances. Animal is a Genus; Man, a Spe-« 
 cies; Alexander, an Individual. In arti- 
 ji^c/^/Subftances, Edifice is a Genus j Pa- 
 lace, a Species; the Vatican, an Indivii- 
 dual. In abjlraol Subftances, Motion is a 
 Genus -, Flight, a Species ; this Flight 
 cr that Flight are Individuals, 
 
 A§
 
 Book the First, 39 
 
 As therefore every (^) Genus may be Ch.IV„ 
 
 found whole and intire in each one of its 
 
 Species ^ (for thus Man, Horfe, and Dog, 
 
 are each of them diitindly a complete and 
 
 intire Animal) and as every Species may 
 
 be found whole atid intire in each one of its 
 
 Individuals-^ (for thus Socrates , Plato, and 
 
 Xenophon, are each of them completely 
 
 and diflindly a Man) hence it is, that 
 
 every Genus, tho' One, is multiplied into 
 
 Many; and every Species, tho' One, is 
 
 alfo multiplied into Many, by reference 
 
 to thofe beings, which are their proper fub'-^ 
 
 ordinates. Since then no individual has 
 
 any fuch fuhordinates , it can never in ftridt- 
 
 nefs be conlidered as Many, and fo is 
 
 truly an Individual as well ia Nature 
 
 as in Name, 
 
 D 4 From 
 
 [a) This is what Plato feems to have exprefled in a 
 manner fomewhat myfterious, when he talks of /*»'«v 
 taiOiv oicc TiyoXXccvy hoq IxcKf^i jifijUEva VWfl)?, zyacvln 
 iiXTiraiMivrw — Xy -nroAAaf, £T«^af aAAiiAwv, uVo /aj*? 
 'i^u^iv ■UTi^u'xjoi/.ivocq. SophjJ}. p. 253. Edit. Serrani. 
 For the common definition of Genus and Species, fee tho 
 Ifagoge or Introdudion of Porphyry to JriJht!/'S Logic,
 
 40 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.IV. From thefe Principles it is, that Words 
 
 following the nature and genius oiT^hingSy 
 
 fuch Subjlantives admit of Number as 
 
 denote Genera or Species y while thofe, 
 
 which denote [b) Individuals, in ilrid- 
 
 nefs admit it not. 
 
 Besides 
 
 [b) Yet fometimes Individuals have plurality or Num- 
 ber^ from the caufes following. In the firft place the 
 Individuals of the human race are fo large a multitude, 
 even in the fmalleft nation, that it would be difficult to 
 invent a new Name for every new-born Individual. 
 Hence then inftead oione only being call'd Marcus, and 
 one only Antonius^ it happens that many are called Mar~ 
 ens and many called Antonius ; and thus 'tis the Romans 
 had their Plurals, Marci and Antonii^ as we in later days 
 have our Marks and our Anthonies. Now the Plurals 
 of this fort may be well called accidental^ becaufe it is 
 merely by chance that the Names coincide. 
 
 There feems more reafon for fuch Plurals, as the 
 TtolemieSy Scipiosy Catos, or (to inftance in modern 
 names) the Howards^ Pelhamsy and Montagues ; be- 
 caufe a Race or Family is like zfmallcrfort of Species; 
 fo that the family Name extends to the Kindred, as the 
 ipecific Name extends to the Individuals. 
 
 A third caufe which contributed to make proper 
 Names become Plural, was the high Cha7-a£ier or Emi- 
 nence of fome one Individual, whofe Na?ne became af- 
 terwards a kind of common Appcllativey to denote all 
 9 thofe.
 
 Book the First. 41 
 
 Besides Nwnber, another character- Ch.IV. 
 iftic, vifible in Subftances, is that of Sex. 
 Every Subftance is either Male or Female ; 
 or l>otl) Male and Female -, or neither one 
 nor the other. So that with refpeil to 
 Sexes and their Negation, all Subjiances 
 conceiveable are comprehended under this 
 fourfold confideration. 
 
 Now the exiftence of Hermaphrodites 
 being rare, if not doubtful ; hence Lan- 
 guage, only regarding thofe diftindtions 
 
 which 
 
 thofe, who had pretenfions to merit in the fame way. 
 Thus every great Critic was call'd an Ariflarchus -^ 
 every great Warrior^ an Alexander j every great Beauty^ 
 a Helen^ &c, 
 
 A Daniel come to 'Judgment ! yea a Daniel, 
 cries Shylock in the Play, when he would exprefs the 
 wifdom of the young Lawyer. 
 
 So Martial in that well known verfe, 
 
 Siiit MiECENATES, non deeruntj Flacce^MARO^ES^ 
 So LuciliuSy 
 AiriAinOI mantes, JEthuje omnes, afperi A- 
 
 THONES. 
 
 wcVoi ^AE0ONTE2, t AETKAAmNES. Lucian 
 in Timon. T. I. p. 108,
 
 42 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.IV. which are more obvious, confiders Words 
 denoting Suhfiances. to be either Mascu- 
 line, FemininEj or Neuter*. 
 
 As to our own Species, and all thofc 
 animal Species, which have reference to 
 common Life, or of which the Male and 
 the Female, by their Iize, form, colour, 
 t^c. are eminently dijlinguijloedi mofl Lan- 
 guages have different Subftantives, to de-. 
 note the Male and the Female. But as to 
 thofe animal Species, which either lefi 
 frequently occur, or of which one Sex i§ 
 lefs apparently diflinguijhed from the other, 
 in thefe a fingle Subflantive commonly 
 ferves for both Sexes, 
 
 In 
 
 * After this manner they are diftinguiftied hy Jrijfo-' 
 tk' Twi/ ovo^ajoov ra {jXv ocppevcc, ra §\ ^viXia, tcc SI 
 f^iTu^v. Poet. cap. 21. Protagoras before him had 
 eftablifiied the fame Diftindtion, calling them ocp^ivix, 
 S'JiAfaj jc, a-nivr. Ariftot. Rhet. L. III. c. 5. Where 
 mark what were afterwards called aV/rf^a, or Neuters, 
 were by thefe qallcd roc [a-btoc^v k) trxivnt
 
 Book THE First, 43 
 
 " *f In the Enghy/j Tongue it feems a ge- Ch. IV, 
 iieral rule (except only when infringed by 
 a figure of Speech) that no Subftantive is 
 Mq/culme, but what denotes a Male am- 
 mal Stibjlanc'e ; none Feminine, but what 
 denotes a Female animal Subjlance ; and 
 that where the Subftance l^as no Sex, the 
 Subftantive is always Neuter. 
 
 But 'tis not fo in Greek, Latin, and 
 many of the modern Tongues, Thefe all 
 of them have Words, fome mafculine, 
 fome feminine (and thofe too in great 
 multitudes) which have reference to Sub- 
 llances, where Sex never had exigence. 
 To give one infhance for many. Mind 
 is furely neither male, nor female -, yet 
 is NOTS, in Greek, mafculine, and mens, 
 in hatint feminine. 
 
 In 
 
 f Nam quicquid per Naturam Sexni no7i adfignatur, 
 neutrum haberi oporteret^ fed id Ars, &c. Confent. apucj 
 Putfch. p. 2023, 2024. 
 
 The whole PafTage from Genera Hommwn^ qua na* 
 turaliafunt^ 6fc. is worth perufing,
 
 44- 
 
 HERMES, 
 
 Ch.IV, In fome Words thefe diflincSbions feem 
 owing to nothing elfe, than to the mere 
 cafual ftrucfture of the Word itfelf : It is 
 of fuch a Gender, from having fuch a 
 Termination 5 or from belonging perhaps 
 to fuch a Declenfion. In others we may 
 imagine a more fubtle kind of reafoning, 
 a reafoning which difcerns, even in things 
 ivithout Sex, a diftant analogy to that great 
 NATURAL Distinction, which (ac- 
 cording to Milton j animates the World \^ 
 
 In this view we may conceive fuch 
 Substantives to have been confidered 
 as Masculine, which were '* confpicu- 
 *' ous for the Attributes of imparting or 
 communicating; or which were by na- 
 ture atSlive, ftrong, and efficacious, and 
 that indifcriminately whether to good 
 or to ill ', or which had claim to Emi- 
 ** nence, either laudable or otherwife." 
 
 The 
 
 X Mr. Linnaus^ the celebrated Botanift, has traced 
 the D'lJlinSlion of Sexes throughout the whole Vegetable 
 Worldy and niade it the Bafis of his Botanic Method, 
 
 €( 
 
 tt 
 tl
 
 <{ 
 
 6< 
 
 Book the First. 
 
 The Feminine on the contrary were Ch.IV, 
 ** fuch, as were confpicuous for the At- 
 ** tributes either of receiving, of con- 
 taining, or of producing and bringing 
 forth ; or which had more of the paf- 
 ** five in their nature, than of the ad:ive; 
 or which were peculiarly beautiful 
 and amiable ; or which had refped: to 
 ** fuch ExceiTes, as were rather Femi- 
 ** nine, than Mafculine." 
 
 Upon thefe Principles the two greater 
 Luminaries v^'^ere confidered, one as Maf- 
 culine, the other as Feminine ; the Sun 
 ("HA/©^, So/J as MafcuUne^ from com- 
 municating Light, which was native 
 and original, as well as from the vigorous 
 warmth and efficacy of his Rays ; the 
 Moon (SfAijv^j, Luna) as Feminine, from 
 being the Receptacle only of another's 
 Light, and from fliining with rays more 
 delicate and foft. 
 
 Thus
 
 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.lV. Thus Milt on ^ 
 
 Firjl in HIS Eajl the glorious Lamp was pen , 
 "Regent of Day, and all th* Horizon round 
 Invefied with bright rays ; jocund to run 
 His longitude thro' Heavn's high road: 
 
 the gray 
 Dawn, and the Pleiades before him dancd, 
 Sheddi?2gfiveet influence. Lefs bright the 
 
 Moon 
 'But oppofte, in levelled Wefi wasfef. 
 His mirrour, with full face borrowing her 
 
 Light 
 "From HIM ',for other light she needed none ^ 
 
 P. L. VII. 370. 
 
 By Virgil they were confidered as Bro^ 
 ther and Sifter, which ilill preferves the 
 fame diftindion. 
 
 Nee F R A T R I s radiis obnoxiafurgere Luna. 
 
 G. I. 396. 
 
 The Sky orETHERis in Gr^?^/^ and Z<3- 
 tin Mafculine, as being the fource of thofe 
 (howers, which impregnate the Earth. 
 
 The
 
 Book the First. 47 
 
 *The Earth on the contrary is univer- Ch.IV- 
 fally Feminine, from being the grand Re- 
 ceiver, the grand Container, but above all 
 from being the Mother, (either mediately 
 or immediately) of every fublunary Sub* 
 fiance, whether animal or vegetable. 
 
 Thus Virgil, 
 
 *Ttim Pater omnipoten s f^cundis im" 
 
 bribus tEther 
 Con JUG IS in gremium z^mtie. defcendif^ 
 
 & omnes 
 Magnus a lit magno comniixtus corpore foetus. 
 
 G. 11. 325. 
 .Thus Shake/pear, 
 
 r :{: Common Mother, 5"/6£?/^ 
 
 Whofe Womb unmeafurable, and infinite 
 
 Breaji 
 'Teems and feeds all — Tim. of Athens. 
 
 So Milton, 
 Whatever Earth, all-bearing Mo* 
 ther, yields. P. L. V. 
 
 So 
 
 * Senecae Nat. ^icsji. III. 14. 
 
 X U(x.i/.lJ.7iT0[i yn p^ccr^f— Grsec. Anth. p, 281,
 
 ^S HERMES. 
 
 Ch.IV. So Virgil y 
 
 Non jam mater alit Tellus, 'uirefqiie 
 mintjlrat (f). Mw, XI. 71. 
 
 Among artificial Subftances the Ship 
 (N(^i/f, Navis) is feminine, as being fo 
 eminently a Receiver and Container of va- 
 rious things, of Men, Arms, Provifions, 
 Goods, c?^. Hence Sailors, fpeaking of 
 their Veffel, fay always, "she rides at 
 *' anchor,'* *' she is under fail »* 
 
 A City (ITcA/?, CivitasJ and a Coun* 
 TRY {UdTpig, PatriaJ 2ive feminine alfo, 
 by being (like the Ship) Containers and 
 Receivers, and farther by being as it were 
 the Mothers and Nurfes of their refpedlive 
 Inhabitants. 
 
 Thus 
 
 {c)—Sio ^ Iv rZ oX^ T^\ THS <pv<Tiv, cJ? 0HAT 
 ^ MHTEPA vo/A.'^ao-iv- OTPANON ti h) HAION, 
 j^ £t n Tuv uXKuv rwv roiirtcv, w? FENfiNTAS x, 
 IIATEPAS -cr^oo-ayopEuao-*, Arift. de Gener. Anim. 
 
 I. c. 2.
 
 Book the First, 49 
 
 Thus Virgih Ch.IV, 
 
 ^alvcy MAGNA Parens FRUGUM,»S'(3/z/r- 
 
 nia Melius, 
 Magna Virum—   — Geor. II. 173* 
 
 So, in that Heroic Epigram on thofe 
 brave Greeks, who fell at Ch<^roncay 
 
 Their parent Country in her hfom 
 
 holds 
 Their wearied bodies.'^—'^ 
 
 So Milt on. 
 
 The City, which Thoitfeejl, no other deem 
 Than great and glorious Rome, Queen of 
 the Earth. Par. Reg. L. IV. 
 
 As to the Ocean, tho' from its being 
 the Receiver of all Rivers, as well as the 
 
 Container 
 
   Demoft. in Orat. de Corona. 
 
 E
 
 50 H E R M E S. 
 
 Ch.IV. Container and FroduBrefs of fo many Ve- 
 getables and Animals, it might juftly have 
 been made (like the Earth) Feminine-^ yet 
 its deep Voice and boijleroiis Nature have, in 
 fpight of thefe reafons, prevailed to make 
 it Male, Indeed the very found of Homer ^ 
 
 would fuggefl to a hearer, even Ignorant 
 of its meaning, that the Subjedt was in- 
 compatible with, female delicacy and foft- 
 ijefs. 
 
 Time {Xpcv(^) from his mighty EJfica^ 
 cy upon every thing around us, is by the 
 Greeks and EngliJJj juftly confidered as 
 Mafculine. Thus in that elegant diflich, 
 fpoken by a decrepit old Man, 
 * 'O yap Xpcv<^ jul' ev.aiL-XSi reiiTOdV « (Todpcc, 
 
 ''Attclvtoi ^' spyci^oixEv^ dffkvEgEpci -f*. 
 Me Time hath bent, that firry Artiji, he 
 ^hat furely main's ^ whatever he handles, 
 ivoifie. 
 
 So 
 
 Grxc. Anth. p. 290. 
 t Stob. Eel. p. 591,
 
 Book THE First. '51 
 
 So too Shake/pear, fpeaking likewife of Ch.IV. 
 Time, 
 
 Orl. Whom doth he gallop withal^ 
 Rof. With a thief to the gallows.'-^ 
 
 As you like it. 
 
 The Greek Soivart^ or A/'^vjc, and the 
 Englifi Death, feem from the fame ir- 
 reliftible Power to have been confidered 
 as Mafculine. Even the Vulgar with us 
 are fo accuftomed to this notion, that a 
 Female Death they would treat as 
 ridiculous (i/). 
 
 Take a few examples of the mafcu- 
 line Death. 
 
 E 2 Cain^ 
 
 [d) Well therefore -did Miltoji in his Paradife Loft 
 not only adopt Death as a Peijon^ but confider him 
 as Masculine. : in which he was fo far from introduciiig 
 a Phantom of his own, or from giving it a Gender not 
 fupportcd by Cit/Ioni^ that perhaps he had as much the 
 Sanilion of motional Opinion for his IllafcuUne Death^ as 
 the ancient Poets had for many of their Deities,
 
 52 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.IV. . CaUhnachus upon the Elegies of his 
 Friend Her adit us — 
 
 y et thy fweet warbling jlra'ms 
 Still live immortal, nor on themJJjall'D'E a t h 
 His band e'er lay, thd Ravager of all. 
 
 In the Alcejlis of 'Euripides, GiviXT(^ 
 or Death is one of the Perfons of the 
 drama -, the beginning of the play is made 
 up of dialogue between Him and Apollo-, 
 and towards its end, there is a jEght be- 
 tween Him and Hercules, in which Her^ 
 cules is conqueror, and refcues Alcejlis 
 from his hands. 
 
 It is well known too, that Sleep and 
 Death are made Brothers by Homer. 
 It was to this old Gorgias elegantly allud- 
 ed, when at the extremity of a long life 
 he lay numbering on his Death-bed. A 
 Friend alked him, '' How he didV — — 
 
 '' Sleep
 
 ( c 
 
 Book the First. 53 
 
 Sleep (replied the old Man) is jiiji C\i.\Y , 
 " upon delivering me over to the care oj 
 *' his Brother (^)." 
 
 Thus Shakefpear, fpeaking of Life, 
 
 merely Thou art Death's Fool -, 
 
 For H I M I'hotc labour Jl by thy fight to 
 
 Jhun, 
 And yet runjl towards myiJlilL 
 
 Meaf. for Meaf. 
 
 So Milton, 
 
 Dire was the tojjing, deep the groans ; 
 
 Defpair 
 "Tended thejick, biifiejifrom couch to couch: 
 And over them triianphant Death h^s 
 
 dart 
 
 Shook ; but delay d to Jlrike 
 
 P. L. XI. 489 (/). 
 
 The 
 
 eia-9«j T' AAEA^ni. Stob. Eel. p. 600. 
 
 (/) Suppofe in any one of thefe examples we intro- 
 duce a female Death 3 fuppofe we read, 
 
 E 3 Aid
 
 54 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.IV. The fupreine Being (God, Oso?, Deus, 
 DieUi &c.) is in all languages Mafculine, 
 in as much as the mafculine Sex is the 
 fuperior and more excellent; and as He 
 is the Creator of all, the Father of Gods 
 and Men. Sometimes indeed we meet 
 with fuch words as To IIpcoTov, To Qimv, 
 Numen, Deity (which laft we 'E7igUJI:> 
 join to a neuter, faying Deity itfelfj 
 fometimes I fay we meet with thefe 
 Neuters. The reafon in thefe inftances 
 feems to be, that as God is prior to all 
 things, both in dignity and in time, 
 this Priority is better characterized and 
 expreil: by a Negation, than by any of 
 thofe Diftindtions which are co-ordinate 
 ivith fome Oppojite, as Male for example 
 
 is 
 
 And over them triumphant Death her dart 
 Shook^ &c. 
 
 What a falling off ! How are the nerves and ftrength 
 of the whole Sentiment weakened !
 
 Book THE First. f5 
 
 is co-ordinate with Female, Right with Ch.IV. 
 
 Left, ^c. &c. (g). 
 
 Virtue ('ApfTvj, Virtus) as well as 
 mofl: of its Species, are all Feminine, per- 
 haps from their Beauty and amiable Ap- 
 pearance, which are not without effed: e- 
 ven upon the moll: reprobate and corrupt. 
 
 E 4 ' — ' — abajh'd 
 
 (^) Thus Anmionius^ fpeaking on the fame Subje6l 
 —TO nmTON Afyc^fi/, £<p' w 1^-/] Si t(joi/ Six 
 fAV^oXoyiong zyxpoc^oi^TUi/ 'A^Hv ra-g B'noXoyiocg sroXfj'.yiCS 
 T»? n dppEVUTTOVj 7) B'vXviirPSTrri (lege B^riAvTrpsTrvJ So.- 
 
 ^Op(pW(TiV (pi^iiV' Vij TSTO £J3-tOTWi* TW ^iV y%^ C/.^~ 
 
 pei/i TO ^7]Xv crvfoi^ou' to (lege tw) ^s ITANTHI 
 ATlAil'E AITim (rijroi)(^ov sSsu. aAAa y^ otxv 
 d^TSi/moog TON 0EON ovoi^^ci^o^iv. [-/jo?'] to 
 ci^von^cv twv yzvtj^v r^ vp£iiJ,ivs zr^oTiy-uvTsg^ arwj 
 avTon ■urpocra.yopivofjLev. Primum dicimuSj quod nc??io 
 etiam eorum^ qui theologiam nobis fahularum integiimentis 
 obvolutam tradiderunt^ vel marii vel foemimc jpecie jingere 
 aiifus eft : idque inerito : conjugatum enim x^-ux\ foe mini' 
 num eji. Causae autem omnino absolutje ac siivj- 
 PLlci nihil eji conjugatum. hnmo vero cum Deum 
 mafcuUyio genere appellamus^ ita ipfujn nominatnus^ genus 
 prisjlantius fuhmijfo atque humili pnsferentes. Ammon. 
 in Lib. de Interpr. p. 30. b. — a yoip luocvTiov tco 
 n^wTo) i^iy, iViftot. Metaph. A. p. 210. Sylb.
 
 5^ HERMES. 
 
 Ch . I V. ahajh'd the Beviljlood, 
 
 And felt how awful Goodnefs is, andfaw 
 Virtue in htv fiape how lovely ; faw, 
 
 and pin d 
 His lofs — — ~ 
 
 P. L. IV. 846. 
 
 This being allowed. Vice {^clvacl) be- 
 comes Feminine of courfe, as being, in 
 the GV:;oix'iCiy or Co-ordination of things. 
 Virtue's natural Oppofite (^h). 
 
 The Fancies, Caprices, and fickle 
 Changes of Fortune would appear but 
 awkwardly under a Charader that was 
 Male: but taken together they make a 
 
 very 
 
 {h) They are both reprefehted as Females by Xeno- 
 plmi^ in the celebrated Story of Hercules, taken from 
 Prodicus, See Memorab. L. II. c. i. As to the 
 
 cvToi-^io. here mentioned, thus Varro Pythagoras 
 
 Sa?nius ait omnium rerum initia ejja bina : ut finitum & 
 injinitum, honum & mahtm^ vlta/n i^ mortem j diern &" 
 noSfem. De Ling. Lat. L. IV. See alfo Ariji. Me^ 
 ia^h. \f. I, c. 5. and ^aV^^/Vw, Chap. Ixii. v^r. 24,
 
 BooktheFirst. 57 
 
 very natural Female, which has no fmali Ch.IV, 
 refemblance to the Coquette of a modern 
 Comedy, beftowing, withdrawing, and 
 fhifting her favours, as different Beaus 
 fucceed to her good graces. 
 
 ^ranfmutat incertos honoresy 
 
 Nunp mihiy nunc alii benigna, Hor. 
 
 Why the Furies were made Female.^ 
 is not fo eafy to explain, unlefs it be that 
 female Paflions of all kinds were conli- 
 dered as fufceptible of greater excefs, than 
 male Paffions -, and that the Furies were 
 to be reprefented, as Things fuperlatively 
 outrageous. 
 
 ^alibus AleSto diBis exarjit in iras. 
 
 At yuveni oranti fubttiis tremor occupat 
 
 artus ; 
 
 JDiriguere oculi : tot Frinnys fibilat Hy^ 
 
 dris, 
 ^antaque fe fades aperit : turn Jlammea 
 
 torquens 
 
 Lumitia
 
 58 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.IV. Liwiina ciin^aiiian^ queer ent em dicere 
 plura 
 Kepulity & geminos erexit crinibus an- 
 
 guesy 
 Verberaqiie infonnit, rahidoque hcec ad' 
 
 didit ore : 
 "EiTi ! Ego ijiBaJitu, &c. 
 
 Mn. VII. 455 (/). 
 
 He 
 
 (?) The Words above mentioned, Ti?ne^ Death, 
 Fortune, Virtue, Sec. in Greek, Latm, French, and moft 
 modern Languages, though they are diverfified w^ith 
 Genders in the manner defcribed, yet never vary the 
 Gender which they have once acquired, except in a few 
 inftances, where the Gender is doubtful. We cannot 
 fay n d^ilri or o cx.^ilr\, hac Virtus or hie Virtus, la Ver- 
 iu or le Vertu, and fo of the reft. But it is otherwife 
 in Englijh, We in our own language fay, Virtue is 
 its own Reward, or Virtue is hercmn Reward ; Time 
 maintains its wonted Pace, or Time maintains his 
 wonted Pace. 
 
 There is a fingular advantage in this liberty, as it 
 enables us to mark, with a peculiar force, the Diftinc- 
 tion between the fevere or Logical Stile, and the orna- 
 mental or Rhetorical. For thus when we fpcak of the 
 above Words, and of all others naturally devoid of Sex, 
 8 as
 
 Book the First. 59 
 
 He, that would fee more on this Sab- Ch.IV. 
 jed:, may confult Ammonius the Peripate- 
 tic, 
 
 as Ntuters^ we fpeak of them as they are^ and as be- 
 comes a logical Inquiry. When we give them Sex^ by 
 making them MafcuHne or Feminine, they are from 
 thenceforth perfonijied ; are a kind of Intelligent Beings, 
 and become, as fuch, the proper ornaments either of 
 Rhetoric or of Poetry. 
 
 Thus Milton, 
 
 — The Tlmnder, 
 Wiiig^d tvith red light' ning and impetuous rags. 
 Perhaps hath fpe)it HIS Jhafts P. Loft. I. 174. 
 
 The Poet, having juft before called the Hail^ and 
 Thunder, God's Minijiers of Vengeance^ and fo perfoni- 
 fied them, had he afterwards faid its Shafts for his 
 Shafts, would have deftroyed his own Image, and ap- 
 proached withal fo much nearer to Profe. 
 
 The following PafTage is from the fame Poem. 
 
 Should intermitted Vengeance arm again 
 
 His red right hand P. L. II. 174. 
 
 In this Place His Hand is clearly preferable either to 
 Her's or Its, by immediately referring us to God him- 
 felf, the Avenger, 
 
 I fliaU
 
 6o H E R M E S. 
 
 Ch.IV. tic, in his Commentary on the Treatife 
 de Inter pretatione, where the Subjedl is 
 treated at large with refped; to the Greek 
 Tongue. We fhall only obferve, that as 
 all fuch Speculations are at heft but Con- 
 jed:ures, they fliould therefore be receiv- 
 ed 
 
 I fhall only give one inflance more, and quit this 
 Subjeft. 
 
 At his command th'' up-rooted Hills retired 
 Each to HIS place: they heard his voice and went 
 Obfequious: Hcav'n HIS wonted face renew' d^ 
 And with frejl) fourets Hill and Valley fmiVd. 
 
 P. L. VI. 
 
 See alfo ver. 54, 55, of the fame Book. 
 
 Here all things are perfonified ; the Hills hear^ the 
 Valleys fmile^ and the Face of Heaven is renewed. 
 Suppofe then tlie Poet had been neceflltatcd by the Iav?s 
 of his Language to have faid — Each Hill retired to its 
 Place — Heaven reneived its wonted face — how profaic 
 and lifelefs would thefe Neuters have appeared ; how 
 detrimental to the Profopopeia^ which he was aiming to 
 cftablifh ! In this therefore he was happy, that the 
 Language, in which he wrote, impofed no fuch necef- 
 fity ; and he was too wife a Writer, to impofe it on 
 himfelf. It were to be wifhed, his Corredors had been 
 as wife on their parts.
 
 BooktheFirst. 6| 
 
 cd with candour, rather than fcrutinized Ch.IV. 
 with rigour. Farrow words on a Subject 
 near akin are for their aptnefs and elegance 
 well worth attending. Non mediocres 
 enim tenebrde in Jihd, iibi h^c captanda^ 
 neqiie eo, quo -pervenire 'uoluj?tuSy fetrnta 
 tritcs ; neque non in tramitibus qucedam oh^ 
 jeBa, quce euntem retinere pojfiint^ . 
 
 To conclude this Chapter. We may 
 colled: from what has been faid, that 
 both Number and Gender appertain to 
 Words, becaufe in the iirft place they 
 appertain to Things ; that is to fay, be- 
 caufe Subjiances are Many, and have either 
 Sex, or no Sex-, therefore Subfantives have 
 Number, and are Mafculine, Fe?ninine, or 
 Neuter. There is however this diffe- 
 rence between the two Attributes : Num- 
 ber in {lrid:nefs defcends no lower, than 
 
 to 
 
   De Ling. Lat, L. IV.
 
 62 . JI E R M E S. 
 
 Ch.IV. to the lafi Rank cf Spedcs (k) : Gender 
 on the contrary flops not here, but de- 
 fcends to every Individual ^ however di- 
 verfified. And fo much for Substan- 
 tives, PROPERLY so CALLED. 
 
 (/•) The leafon why Number goes no Jower, is 
 that it does not naturally appertain to Ind'ivlduoh \ the 
 caufc of which fee before, p. 39. 
 
 CHAP.
 
 Book the First. 6j 
 
 C H A P. V. 
 
 Concermng Subjiantives of the Secondary 
 
 Order. 
 
 WE are now to proceed to a Secon- Ch.V. 
 DARY Race of Substantives, 
 a Race quite different from any already- 
 mentioned, and whofe Nature may be ex- 
 plained in the following manner. 
 
 Every Objeft which prefents itfelf to 
 the Senfes or the Intelled:, is either then 
 perceived for \.\iQ.JirJi time, or elfe is re- 
 cognized as having been perceived be- 
 fore. In the former cafe it is called an 
 Objed: T^i: Trp^rvic 7vco<r5Wc, of the firjl 
 knowledge or acquaintance [a) -, in the lat- 
 ter 
 
 (<?) See Jpoll. de Syntaxi^ 1. i.e. i6. p. 49. 1. 2. 
 c. 3. p. 103. Thus Prifcian — Inter eji ant em inter de- 
 monjirat'ionem if)' relatiovem hoc ; quod demonjirat'io^ in^ 
 ierrogatiojii reddita^ Primam Cognitiojiem ojiendit', 
 
 Quis
 
 I 
 
 64 H E R M E S. 
 
 Ch. V. ter It is called an Obje(5l tvj? ^evTspa; yvou- ^ 
 (Tfocf , of the fecond knowledge or acquaint" 
 ance. 
 
 Now as all Converfation pafTes between 
 T articular s or Lidividuals , thefe will often 
 happen to be reciprocally Objeds tv^s Tpoo- 
 Tvjf yvwo-fWf, that is to fay, till that injlant 
 unacquainted with each other. What then 
 is to be done ? How fhall the Speaker ad- 
 drefs the other, when he knows not his 
 Name ? or how explain himfelf by his 
 own Name, of which the other is wholly 
 ignorant? Nouns, as they have been de- 
 fcribed, cannot anfwer the purpofe. The 
 firft expedient upoia this occafion feems 
 to have been Af/l^?, that is. Pointings or 
 Indication by the Finger or Hand, fome 
 traces of which are flill to be obferved, as 
 a part of that Adion, which naturally at- 
 tends our fpeaking. But the Authors of 
 
 Language 
 
 Quis fecit ? Ego : relatio vero Secundam Cognitio- 
 nem fignificat^ i/ty Is, de quo jam dixi. Lit, XIL 
 p. g^6. Edit. Putfchii,
 
 BobK THE First. 65 
 
 Language were not content with this. Ch. V. 
 They invented a race of Words to fupply 
 this Pointing ; which Words, as they al^ 
 ways Jlood for Subjiantives or Nouns, were 
 charad:erized by the Name of 'AvT(,)vv[XiCLij, 
 or Pronouns [b). Thefe alfo they dif- 
 tinguiihed into three feveral forts, calling 
 them Pronouns of the Firji, the Seco?id„ 
 and t\\Q 'Third Perfo?Zy with a view to cer- 
 tain diftiniftionSj which may be expkined 
 as follows. 
 
 Suppose the Parties converfing to be 
 wholly unacquainted, neither Name nor 
 Countenance on either fide known, and 
 
 the 
 
 (^) "E-AHVO iiV 'AvT&JVU/Xi'a, TO ]W£Ta AEIHEI22 
 
 Pi dvutpo^xq 'ANTONOMAZOMENON. Apoll. 
 de Synt. L. 11. c. 5. p. 106. Prifdan feems to con- 
 fidcr them fo peculiarly deflined to the expreffion of /«- 
 dividuals^ that he does not fay they fupply the place of 
 any Noun, but that of the proper Name only. And 
 this undoubtedly was their original, and ftill is their 
 true and natural ufe. Pronomen ejl pars orationis, 
 qua pro nomine proprio uniufcujufque accipitur. Prifc, 
 L. XII. See alfo JpolL L. II. c. 9. p. 117, 118, 
 
 F
 
 66 HERMES. 
 
 Ch. V. the Subjed of the Converfation to be the 
 Speaker himfelf. Here, to fupply the place 
 of Pointing by a Word of equal Power, 
 they furnifhed the Speaker with the Fro- 
 noun, I. I write, I fay, I dejire, &c. and 
 as the Speaker is always principal with 
 refped: to his own difcourfe, this they 
 called for that reafon the Pronoun of the 
 Ftrfl Perfon. 
 
 t 
 
 Again, fuppofe the Subjed of the 
 Converfation to be the Party addreft. 
 Here for limilar reafons they invented 
 the Pronotm, Thou. T^hou writefi. Thou 
 ivalkefi, &c. and as the Party addreft is 
 next in dignity to the Speaker, or at leaft 
 comes next with reference to the dif- 
 courfe; this Pronoun they therefore call- 
 ed the Pronoun of the Second Perfon. 
 
 Lastly, fuppofe the Subjedl of Con- 
 verfation neither the Speaker, nor the 
 Party addreft, hut fome Third ObjeSt, dif- 
 ferent from both. Here they provided an- 
 other Pronoun, He, She, or It, which 
 
 in
 
 Book THE First. (ij 
 
 in diftindiion to the two former was called Ch. V. 
 the Pronoun of the 'Third Perfon, 
 
 And thus It was x\\2XFro7iQiLns came to 
 be diilinguifhed by their refpedlive Per- 
 sons ((T). 
 
 As 
 
 (c) The Defcription of the different Persons here 
 given is taken from Prifcian^ who took it from Apollo-. 
 nius. Perfonce Pronomimim fimt ires j prhna^ fecunda^ 
 tertia. Prima ejl^ cum ipfa^ ques loquitur^ de fe pronun- 
 tiat ; Secunda, cum de ea pronunciat, ad quam direflo 
 fermone loquitur ; Tertia, cu?n de ca, quae nee loqui- 
 tur, nee ad fe direfturrv accipit Sermonem. L. XIL 
 p. 940. Theodore Gaza gives the fame Diftinclions. 
 
 oivUpoVy ui wipi T»j -woo? Of AoyiQr' rpiTOp, w •srfpt 
 fTi^n. Gaz. Gram. L. IV. p. 152. 
 
 This account -of Perfons is far preferable to the com- 
 mon one, which makes the Firft the Speaker ; the Se- 
 cond, the Party addrejl ; and the Third, the Suhjecf, 
 For tho' the Firft and Second be as commonly defcrib- 
 ed,. one the Speaker, the other the Party addreft ; yet 
 till they become fuhjei^s of the djfccurfe., they have no 
 exiftence. Again as to the Third Ferfon's being the 
 Juhjeil, this is a character, which it JJjares m common 
 
 F 2 with
 
 68 HERMES. 
 
 Ch. V. As to Number, the Pronoun of each 
 Perfon has it: (I) has the plural (we), 
 
 becaufe 
 
 with both the other Perfons, and which can never there- 
 fore be called a peculiarity of its own. To explain by 
 an inftance or two. When Eneas begins the narrative 
 of his adventures, the fccond Perfon immediately appears, 
 becaufe he makes Dich^ whom he addrejfes, the imme- 
 diate fubje<St of his Difcourfe. 
 
 Infandmn^ -^."rz/z^, jubes, renovare dolor em. 
 
 From hence forward for 1500 Verfes (tho' fhe be all 
 that time the party addreft) we hear nothing farther of 
 this Second Perfon, a variety of other Subjects filling up' 
 the Narrative. 
 
 In the mean time the Fi?^ Perfon may be feen every 
 where, becaufe the Speaker every where is himfelf the 
 Subjedl. They were indeed Events, as he fays him- 
 felf, 
 
 •—quaqiie Ipfe 7niferrhna vidi, 
 Et quorum pars magna fui 
 
 Not that the Second Perfon does not often occur in the 
 courfe of this Narrative ; but then it is always by a Fi- 
 gure of Speech, when thofe, who by their abfence are 
 in fadt fo many Third Peribns, are converted into Se- 
 cond
 
 Book the First, 69 
 
 becaufe there may be many Speakers at Ch. V". 
 once of the fame Sentiment ; as well as 
 one, who, including himfelf, fpeaks the 
 Sentiment of many. (Thou) has the 
 plural (you), becaufe a Speech may 
 be fpoken to many, as well as to one. 
 (He) has the plural (they), becaufe 
 the Subjed; of difcourfe is often many at 
 once. 
 
 But tho' all thefe Pronouns have Num- 
 ber, it does not appear either in Greek, or 
 Latin, or any modern Language, that 
 thofe of the firft and fecond^Perfon carry 
 the diflindtions of Sex, The reafon feems 
 
 F3 to 
 
 cond Perfons by being introduced as prefcut. The real 
 Second Perfon (Dido) is never once hinted. 
 
 Thus far as to Virgil. But when we read EucUdy 
 we find neither Fi^Jl Perfon, nor Second^ in any Part of 
 the whole Work. The reafon is, that neither Speaker 
 nor Party addreft (in which h"ght we may always view 
 the Writer and his Reader) can poflibly become the 
 Subjedt of pure Mathematics, nor indeed can any thing 
 elfe, except abftradl Quantity, which neither fpeaks 
 itfclfj nor is fpoken to by another.
 
 70 HERMES. 
 
 Ch. V. to be, that the Speaker and Hearer being 
 generally prefent to each other, it would 
 have been fuperfluous to have marked a 
 diftindion by Art, which from Nature 
 and even Drefs was commonly {d) appa- 
 rent on both fides. But this does not 
 hold with refped: to the third Perfon, 
 of whofe Charader and Diilin6tions, (in- 
 cluding Sex among the reft) we often 
 know no more, than what we learn from 
 the difcourfe. And hence it is that in 
 moft Languages the third Perfon has its 
 Genders, and that even EftgUJIj (which al- 
 lows its Adjedlives no Genders at all) 
 has in this Pronoun the triple (f ) diftinc- 
 tion of He, She, and It. 
 
 Hence 
 
 [d) Demonjlratio ipfa fecum goius ojicndit. Prifcian. 
 L. XII. p. 942. See ylpolL dc Syntax. L. II. c. 7. 
 p. 109. 
 
 {e) The Utility of this Diftinftion may be better 
 found in fuppofing it away. Suppofe for example wc 
 fhould read in hiftory thefe words— i/^ ca:ifed him 
 
 to
 
 Book the First. ' ji 
 
 Hence too we fee the reafon why a Ch. V, 
 Jingle Pronoun [f) to each Perfon, an / 
 
 F 4 to 
 
 t3 dejlroy him — and that we were to be informed the 
 [He], which is here thrice repeated, rtood each time 
 for fomething different, that is to fay, for a Man, for 
 a Woman, and for a City, whofe Names were Alex- 
 ander., Thais., and PerfepoHs. Taking the Pronoun in 
 this manner, diverted of its Genders, how would it ap- 
 pear, which was deftroyed ; which was the deftroyer ; 
 and which the caufe, that moved to the deftruftion ? 
 But there are not fuch doubts, when we hear the Gen- 
 ders diftingulfhed ; when inrtead of the ambiguous 
 Sentence, He caufed him to deftroy him^ we are told 
 with the proper diftinctions, that she cai^fed him to 
 dejlroy IT. Then we know with certainty, what 
 before we could not : that the Promoter was the 
 Woman ; that her Inftrument was the Hero ; and 
 that the Subjcdl of their Cruelty was the unfortunate 
 City. 
 
 (/) ^iisritiir tamen cur prima quidem Pe^Jona ^ 
 fecunda fingula Prcnonnna habewit^ tertiam vera fex di- 
 
 verfae indicent voces? Ad quod refpondendum ej}^ quod 
 prifna qpiidem dff fecunda Perjona ideo noh egent diver/is 
 
 vocibus, quod femper praefentes inter (e funt, & demin-' 
 Jlrativa ; tertia vera Perjona rnodo demonjirativa ejl, ut^ 
 
 Hie, Iftc ; modo relativa^ ut Is, Ipfe, &c. Prifcian. 
 
 L. XII. p. 933,
 
 72 PI E R M E S. 
 
 Ch. V. to the Firjl, and a ^hou to the Second, are 
 abundantly fufficient to all the purpofes of 
 Speech. But it is not fo with refpedt to 
 the T^hird Perfon. The various relations 
 of the various Objefts exhibited by this 
 (I mean relations of near and diftant, pre- 
 fent and abfent, fame and different, de- 
 finite and indefinite, ^c.) made it necef- 
 fary that here there fhould not be one, 
 but 7?iany Pronouns, fuch as He, 'This, 
 lihat. Other, Any, Some, 6cc. 
 
 It muft be confeiTed indeed, that all 
 thcfe Words do not always appear as 
 Pronouns, When they fland by them- 
 felves, and reprefent fome Noun, (as 
 when we fiy. This is Virtue, or ^5/h.t/kco;, 
 Give me That) then are they Pronouns. 
 But when they are alTociated to fome 
 Noun (as when we fay. This Habit is 
 Virtue; or ^f/iiTiKW, That Man de- 
 frauded me) then as they fupply not the 
 place of a Noun, but only ferve to afcer- 
 tain one, they fall rather into the Species 
 of Definitives or Articles, That there is 
 
 indeed
 
 Book the First. 73 
 
 indeed a near relation between Pronouns Ch.V. 
 and Articles, the old Grammarians have 
 all acknowledged, and fome words it has 
 been doubtful to which Clafs to refer. 
 The beft rule to diftinguifh them is this 
 —The genuine Pronoun always Jiands 
 by itjdf, affuming the Power of a Noun, 
 and fupplying its place— Th.Q genuine 
 Article never jlands by itfelf, but 
 appears at all times afibciated to fome* 
 thing elfe, requiring a Noun for its fup- 
 port, as much as Attributives or [g) Ad- 
 jedives. 
 
 As 
 
 (?■) To 'AoOpov jWrsja ovofiocll^, >Cy ■^ 'A^7wvUjM.^« 
 &\T ovo^ocl^. The Article Jlands with a 
 Noun-y but THE Pronoun _y?<7W^ for a Noun. 
 Apoll. L. I. c. 3. p. 22. Au7<» ai/ T« a^O^a, t^j 
 tji^l(; roc ovo[^oc}cc crvva,prY](rsu}g OiTrofOcvTocj ilg ry\v 
 VTroTETxy[/.ivnv olvruvvfxiccu {/.BTOcTrnrUi' Now Art'i- 
 tides themfelves^ zvhen they quit their Connexion ivith 
 NounSj pdfs into fuch Pronoun^ as is proper upon the occa- 
 fion. Ibid. Again — "Orav ro ' Ap^pov [/.r\ [Mt ovo-
 
 74 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.V. As to the Coakfcence of thefe Pro- 
 nouns, it is, as foliov/s. The Firft or 
 
 Second 
 
 vvy^ixv ^/JaA?5(p6>(cr£T(Zi, ilyi -Ik iylivoy-Bvou fji.iT ovo- 
 fAUT(^ ^vua,y,£i a^Tt &vo/AaT@p i^u^BXYicp^yi. TVhen 
 the Article is ajfmned without the Noun^ and has (as we 
 explained before) the fame Syntax.^ which the Noun has ; 
 it mujl ofahfolute neceffity he admitted for a Pronoun^ becaufe 
 it appears tmthout a Noun^ and yet is in poiuer affiimedfor 
 me. Ejufd. L. II. c. 8. p. 113. L. I. c. 45. p. g6. 
 Inter Pronomina ^ Articulos hoc interejl^ quod Pronomina 
 ea putantur^ qua^ cum fola fnt, vicem nominis complent^ 
 ut QUis, ILLE, iste: Articidi vcro cum Pronomhnbus.^ 
 cut Nomijiibus^ aut Participiis adjunguntur. Donat. 
 Gram. p. 1753. 
 
 Prifcian^ fpeaking of the Stoics, fays 9s follows: 
 Articulis autem Pronomina connumerantes, fi- 
 NiTos ea Articulos appellabant ; ipfos autem Ar- 
 iiculos, quihus nos caremus^ infixitos Articulos 
 dicebant. Vel^ ut alii dicunt, Articulos connumcrabant 
 Pronotninibus, & Articularia eos Pronomina 
 vocabant, kc. Prifc. L. I. p. 574. Varro, fpeaking 
 of ^ifquc and Hie, calls them both Articles, the 
 firft ind finite, the fecond definite. De Ling. Lat. 
 L, Vlh See alfo L. IX. p. 132. Vo(fius indeed in 
 his Analogia (L. J. c. \.) oppofes this Dodtrine, be- 
 caufe Hie has not the fame power with the Greek Ar- 
 ticle,
 
 Book the First. 75 
 
 Second will, either of them, by them- Ch. V. 
 felves coalefce with the Third, but not 
 with each other. For example, it is 
 good fenfe, as well as good Grammar, to 
 fay in any Language — I am He — Thou 
 ART He — but we cannot fay — I am 
 Thou — nor ThoU art I. The reafon 
 is, there is no abfurdity for the Speaker to 
 be the SubjeB alfo of the Difcourfe, as 
 when we fay, I a?n He -, or for the Ferfon 
 addreji ; as when we fay, 'T'hou art He, 
 But for the fame Perfon, in the fame cir- 
 cumftances, to be at once the Speaker, 
 and the Party addreft, this is impoffible ; 
 and fo therefore is the Coalefcence of the 
 Firft and Second Perfon. 
 
 And now perhaps we have feen enough 
 of Pronouns, to perceive how they differ 
 
 from 
 
 tide, 0. But he did not enough attend to the antient 
 Writers on this Subje6l, who conhdered all Words, as 
 Articles, which being ajfociaied to Nouns (and not 
 Jlanding in their place) ferved in any manner to afcertain^ 
 and determine their Signification,
 
 ^6 HERMES. 
 
 Ch. V. from other Subflantives. The others are 
 Primary y thefe are their Eubjittutes ; a 
 kind of fecondary Race, which were ta- 
 ken in aid, when for reafons already (-6) 
 mentioned the others could not be ufed. 
 It is moreover by means of thefe, and of 
 Articles, which are nearly allied to them, 
 
 that 
 
 (/;) See thefe reafons at the beginning of this chap- 
 ter, of which reafons the principal one is, that " no 
 " Noun, properly fo called, implies its own Prefencc. 
 *' It is therefore to afcertaln fuch Prejence^ that the Pro- 
 *' noun is taken in aid j and hence it is it becomes 
 " equivalent to (S'st'gKj that is, to Pointing or Indication 
 *' by the Finger." It is worth remarking in that Verf« 
 of Perfius^ 
 
 Sed pukhrum eji digito MONSTRARI, y dicier-^ 
 
 HiC EST. 
 
 how the ^iT^n;, and the Pronoun are introduced toge- 
 gether, and made to co-operate to the fame end. - 
 
 Sometimes by virtue of J'a^K the Pronoun of the 
 third Perfon ftands for the f>Ji. 
 
 ^todft militihus parceSy erit HiC quoque Miles. 
 That is, / alfo tuill be a Soldier. 
 
 Tibul. L. 11. El. 6. V. 7- See VuJpius. 
 
 It
 
 Book the First. 77 
 
 that '^^ Language, tho' in itfelf only Ch.V 
 ** iignificant oi general Ideas y is brought 
 * * dov/n to denote that infinitude of Par^ 
 '' ticidars, which are for ever ariling, and 
 ** ceafing to be.'' But more of this here- 
 after in a proper place. 
 
 As to the three orders of Pronouns al- 
 ready mentioned, they may be called Fre- 
 fojitive^ as may indeed all Subftantives, 
 . becaufe they are capable of introducing 
 or leading a Sentence, without having 
 reference to any thing previous. But be- 
 fides thofe there is another Pronoun 
 
 (in 
 
 It may be obferved too, that even In Epiflolary 
 Correfpondence, and indeed in all kinds of Writing., 
 where the Pronouns I and You make their appear- 
 ance, there is a fort of implied Prefenccj which they 
 are fuppofed to indicate, though the parties are In fa6t 
 at ever fo great a diftance. And hence the rife of 
 that diftiniSlion in Apollonius^ t«c fJ-^v rnv o^i^av sJvoci 
 ^''*^£*?> '''^f <J£ Ta y^y that fome Indications are ock- 
 lavy and fome are mental, De Svntaxi, L, 11. c. 3. 
 p. 104. 
 
 /
 
 78 HERMES. 
 
 Ch. V. (in Greeli «, oVc (0 ; in Latin, ^i -, In 
 EngUp, Who, Whichy That) a Pronoun 
 having a charader peculiar to itfelf, the 
 nature of which may be explained as fol- 
 lows. 
 
 Suppose I was to fay — Light is a 
 Body, Light moves with great celerity, — 
 
 Thefe 
 
 (/) The Greeks, it muft be confeft, call this Pro- 
 noun vTTorooiliy.ov a,^^^ov, the fubj unlive Article. Yet, 
 as it (hould feem, this is but an improper Appella- 
 tion. Apollon'ms, when he compares it to the t^do- 
 roocjiyiov or true prepofitive Article, not only confefles 
 it to differ, as being expreft by a different Word, 
 and having a different place in every Sentence; but 
 in Syntax he adds, it is zuholly different. De Syntax. 
 L. I. c. 43. p. 91. TJieodore Gaza acknowledges 
 
 the fame, and therefore adds oOsi/ ^-/j >t) % xvpico^ 
 
 etv 'an a^9poi/ Ta,v% -for thefe reajons this (meaning 
 
 the Suhjundiive) cannot properly be an Article. And 
 juft before he fays, nvpiug ys fj(.^u a^Of of ro zirpoTociiJi- 
 
 xov however properly /peaking it is the Prepofitive is 
 
 the Article. Gram. Introd. L. IV. The Latins there- 
 fore have undoubtedly done better in ranging it with 
 the Pronouns,
 
 Book the First. 7^ 
 
 Thefe would apparently be two diftind Ch. V. 
 Sentences. Suppofe, inftead of the Se- 
 cond, Light, I were to place the prcpo- 
 fitive Pronoun, it, and fay — Light is a 
 Body ', 1 T 7noves with great celerity — the 
 Sentences would flill be diilind; and two. 
 But if I add a ConneBi^oe (as for Example 
 an and) faying — Light is a Body, and 
 it moves with great celerity — I then by 
 Conned:ion make the two into one, as 
 by cementing many Stones I make one 
 Wall. 
 
 Now it is in the united Powers of a Con- 
 ricBive, and another Br onoiiny that we may 
 fee the force, and character of the Pro- 
 noun here treated. Thus therefore, if 
 in the place of and it, we fubilitute 
 that, or which, laying Light is a 
 Body, which moves with great celerity 
 — the Sentence flill retains its TJnity and 
 BerfeSiion, and becomes if pofiible more 
 compact than before. We may with jull 
 reafon therefore call this Pronoun the 
 Subjunctive, becaufe it cannot (like 
 
 the
 
 8o HERMES. 
 
 Ch. V. the Prepofitive) introduce an original 
 Sentence, but only ferves to fubjoin one to 
 fame other, which is previous (^). 
 
 The 
 
 {k) Hence we fee why the Pronoun here mentioned 
 is always necejfarlly the Part of fome complex Sentence, 
 which Sentence contains, either expreft or underftood, 
 two Verbs, and Hvo Nominatives. 
 
 Thus in that Verfe of Horace^ 
 
 Qui metucm vivity liber jnihi non erlt unquam. 
 
 Ille non erlt liher — is one Sentence ; qui metuens vlvit—' 
 is another. Ille and ^i are the two Nominatives ; 
 Erit and Fivity the two Verbs y and fo in all other 
 inftances. 
 
 The foUov/ing paflage from Apollonius (tliough 
 fomewhat corrupt in more places than one) will ferve 
 to fhew, whence the above Speculations are taken. 
 To UTTOTxliHov a-p^pov £771 p»i|M,a i^iov ^i^srociy cru^of- 
 Je|w.£i/ov Skx. tv<; oiva(po^oi(; xw ■zjpov.Hi/.iv^ ovc/x«Ti* X; 
 IvriZ^Ev a,7rXZv Xoyov a zrccpifocvsi y.oc\oi rnv twv o\j9 
 fny.xruv (rvvjcc'^iv (^Xiyu rriu Iv tu Ivo^arij >e> t»;i/ iv 
 
 eUvTO) TU ap^pui) OTTSp 'uT<K?^lV rB'tXpSlTTSTO TW KAI (^U^- 
 
 ^jVjtAw. Kotkev jotb (lege TO KAI ysip koi^^qv y.h) 
 
 ■5r«o£-
 
 BoOlC THE FlRST« 8l 
 
 The Application ofthis Subjunctive, Ch. V. 
 like the other Pronouns, is univerfal. It 
 
 may 
 
 «ra^£Aa^Cav£ to ovo[jt.x to TS-poycBifAcVOVy (rJjUTrAjxoy 
 «£ iT£^Qv X'oyoy -srai/Tw? Xj 'irspov pri[AOC TZ'a.pEXccfji.^a.vSf 
 ^ 8TW TO, nAPEFENETO O FPAMMATIKOS, 
 OS AIEAEHATO, §\jva,y.ti rov uvtov aironKii rs 
 (forf. Tw) O rPAMMATIKOS nAPEFENETO, 
 KAI AIEAEHATO. The fubjun^h^ Article^ (thai 
 w, the Pronoun here mentioned) is applied to a Verb or 
 its oivny and yet is connected zvithal to the antecedent 
 Noun. Hence it can never feYve to conjlitute a fimple 
 Se?iiencej hy reafon of the Syntax of the two Verbs^ I mean 
 that which rfpeSfs the Noun or Antecedent^ and that 
 which refpe£is the Article or Relative. The fame too fol- 
 lows *is to the ConjunS'iion^ and. This Coptdative af- 
 fumes the Antecedent Noun, which is capable of king ap- 
 plied to many Subje£is^ and by conne5iing to it a new Sen- 
 tence, of necejfity afjiimes a new Verb alfo. And hence it 
 is that the Words — the Grammarian came, who dif- 
 courfed— /Jr/« in power nearly the fame fentence, as if 
 we were to fay — the Grammarian came, and dif- 
 courfed. Apoll. de Syntaxi, L. I. c. 43. p, 92, See 
 alfo an ingenious French Treatife, called Granmiaire 
 generale iff raifonnce. Chap. IX. 
 
 The Latins, in their Stru^ure of this Subjunftive, 
 feem to have well reprefented its compound Nature of 
 ■part Pronoun^ and part Connective, in forming their 
 
 G QUI
 
 82 HERMES. 
 
 Ch. V. may be the Subflitute of all kinds of Sub- 
 ilantives, natural, artificial, or abftra(fl ; 
 as well as general, fpecial, or particular. 
 We may fay, the Animal, Which y &c. the 
 Man, Whom, &c. the Ship, Which, Sec, 
 Alexajtder, Who, &c. Bucephalus, I'hat, 
 5cc. Virtue, Which, &c. &c. 
 
 Nay, it may even be the Subftitute of 
 all the other Pronouns, and is of courfe 
 therefore expreflive of all three Perfons. 
 Thus we fay, I, who now read, have near 
 JiniJJded this Chapter ; Thou, who now 
 reade/l : He, who now readeth, 5cc. &c. 
 
 And thus is this Subjunctive truly 
 a Profioim from its Subjiitution, there be- 
 ing 
 
 qui and quis from que and is, or (if we go with Sca- 
 nner to the Greek) from KAI and '02, KAI and 
 O. ScaL de Cauf. Ling. Lat. c. 127. 
 
 Homer alfo exprefles the Force of this StihjuyiSJ'wc^ 
 Pronoun or Article, by help of the Prepcfitive and a 
 Conncclive, exadlly confonant to the Theory here efta- 
 bhfhed. See Iliad, A. ver. 27c, 553. N. 571. IT. 
 54> ^Sh 158.
 
 Book the First. S^ 
 
 ing no Subftantive exiiling, in whofe Ch.V. 
 place it may not ftand. At the fame 
 time, it is ejjentially diJiinguiJJjed from the 
 other Pronouns, by this peculiar, that it 
 is not only ^ Subfdtute, but v/ithal a Con-^ 
 neBivc (/). 
 
 And 
 
 (/) Before we quit this Subje6t, it may not be im- 
 proper to remark, that in the Greek and Latin Tongues 
 the two principal Pronouns, that is to fay, the Firfc 
 and Second Perfon, the Ego and the T//, are implied In 
 the very Form of the Verb itfelf (y^aipw, y^aipsig, 
 fcribo^ fcribis) and are for that reafon never expreji^ 
 unlefs it be to mark a Contradiftindlion j fuch as in 
 Virgil^ 
 
 Nos patriam fugimus ; Tu, Tityre^ lentus in umbra 
 
 Formofam refonare doces^ Sic. 
 
 This however is true vi^ith refpect only to the Cafus 
 retiusy or Nominative of thefe Pronouns, but not v/ith 
 refpe6l to their oblique Cafsj which muft always be 
 added, becaufe tho' we fee the Ego in Afno, and the 
 Tu in Jmasy we fee not the Te or Me in Jmat^ or 
 Amant, 
 
 Yet even thefe oblique Cafes appear in a different 
 Txianner, according as they mark Contradiilinftion, 
 or not. If they contradiftinguifli, then are they com- 
 monly placed at the beginning of the Sentence, or at 
 leaft before the Verb, or leading Subftantive. 
 
 G a Thus
 
 §4 HERMES. 
 
 C'n. V. And now to conclude what we have 
 faid concerning Subftantives. All Sub-* 
 
 STANTIVES 
 
 Thus Virgity 
 
 ^dd T'hefca^ magnum 
 ^lid memorcm Alciden ? Et Ml genus ab Jove fumtno-i 
 Thus Ho7nerf 
 
 IIa7^cc ^l MOI AuVoiTs (p/xrv — — lA. A. 
 
 where the *T[jav and the Mo) ftand, as contradiftin- 
 guifhed, and both have precedence of tiieir relpe(5live 
 Verbs, the 'T/xn/ even leading the whole Sentence. 
 In other inftances, thefe Pronouns commonly take their 
 place behind the Verb, as may be feen in examples 
 every where obvious. The Greek Language went far- 
 ther ftill. When the oblique Cafe of thefe Pronouns 
 happened to contradiftinguiih, they afTumed a peculiar 
 Accent of their own, which gave them the name of 
 e^OoToj/ajM-Evat, or Pronouns uprightly accented-. When 
 they marked no fuch oppofition, they not only took 
 their place behind the Verb, but even gave it their Ac- 
 cent^ and (as it were) inclined themselves upo?i it. And 
 hence they acquired the name of EyxXtTJX.ai, that is^ 
 Leaning or Inclining Pronouns. The Greeks too had in 
 the firft perfon 'EjaS, 'E^aoj', 'E^w,! for ContradiJiin^iveSf 
 and Ma, Mo», Ms for Enclitics. And hence it was that 
 ApoHmius contended, that in the paflage above quoted 
 from the firft Iliad, we fhould read -srmi^si S' 'EMOI, 
 
 for
 
 Book the First. 85 
 
 STANTIVES are either Pri?nary, or Se- Ch. V. 
 coJidary, that is to fay, according to a Lan- 
 guage more familiar and known, are ei- 
 ther Nouns or Pronouns. The Nouns 
 denote Subjiances, and thofe either Na~ 
 tural. Artificial, or AbJiraB *. They 
 moreover denote Things either General, 
 or Special, or Particular.. The Pro- 
 nouns, their Subilitutes, are either Fre- 
 pojitive, or SubjtinBive. The Preposi- 
 tive is diftinguifhed into three Orders 
 called the Firfi, the Second, and the Third 
 Perfon. The Subjunctive includes 
 
 G 3 the 
 
 hr zyxiSot. Si MOI, on account of the Contradiftinc- 
 tion, which there occurs between the Grecians and 
 Chryfes. See Jpoll. dc Syntax}.^ L. I. c. 3. p. 20, 
 L. II. c. 2. p. 102, 103. 
 
 This Dlverfity between the Contradiftinilive Pro- 
 nouns, and the Enchtic, is not unknown even to the 
 Engl/J}} Tongue. When we fay, Give ?ne' Content^ 
 the (Me) in this cafe is a perfe6l EncUtic. But when 
 we fay, Give Me Content^ Give Him his thoufands^ the 
 (Me) and (Him) are no Enclitics, but as they ftand ia 
 oppofition, aflume an Accent of their own, and fo be-» 
 come the true o'^9oTof«/A£v«(. 
 
 * See before, p. 37,, 38.
 
 86 ' HERMES. 
 
 Ch. V. the powers of all thofe three, having 
 fuperadded, as of its own, the peculiar 
 force of a Connedihe, 
 
 Having done with Substantives, 
 we now proceed to Attributives. 
 
 I 
 
 CHAP,
 
 B O K T H E F I R S T . ^7 
 
 CHAP. VL 
 
 Concerning Attributives, 
 
 ATTRIBUTIVES are all thofe princi- Ch.VL 
 pal Words, that denote Attributes, 
 conjidered as Attributes. Such for exam- 
 ple are the Words, Black, White, Great, 
 Little, Wife, Eloquent, Writeth, Wrote, 
 Writing, &c. {a), 
 
 How- 
 
 [a) In the above lift of Words are included what 
 Grammarians called Adjectives^ Verbs, and Participles, 
 in as much as all of them equally denote the Attributes 
 of Subjiance. Hence it is, that as they are all from 
 their very nature the Predicates in a Propofition (being 
 all predicated of feme Subject or Subftance, Snozu is 
 zvhite, Cicero writeth, he.) hence I fay the Appella- 
 tion PHMA or Verb is employed by Logicians in an , 
 extended Senfe to denote them all. Thus Atnmonius ex- 
 plaining the reafon, v/hy Ari/lotlc in his Tra6l de In- 
 terpretatiane calls Aeujccj a Verb, tells us -zs^acrav (puvrii/, 
 KXTTiyopaiAEi/ov opou iv vrpoTolirii uTOiatrav, 'PHMA 
 iiccXiTo-^cHy thai every Somid articulate^ that forms the 
 
 G 4 Prc^
 
 85 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.VI. However, previoufly to thefe, and to 
 every other poflible Attribute, whatever a 
 thing may be, whether black or white, 
 fquare or round, wife or eloquent, writ- 
 ing or thinking, it vnuikjirft of neccffity 
 EXIST, before it can pofiibly beany thing 
 clfe. For Existence maybe confidered 
 as an tiniverfal Genus y to which all things 
 of all kinds are at all times to be referred. 
 The Verbs therefore, which denote it, 
 claim precedence of all others, as being 
 efiential to the very being of every Pro- 
 pofition,in which they may ftill be found, 
 either expreji, or by implication -, expreft, 
 as when we fay, I'he Sun i s bright 5 by 
 
 im- 
 
 Predicate hi a Propofttion, is called a Verb, p. 24. 
 Edit. Ven. Prifcian's obfervation, though made on 
 another occafion, is very pertinent to the prefent. Non 
 Decli?iatio^ fed proprictas excutiejida ejl fignificationis, 
 
 L. II. p. 576. And in another place he fays non 
 
 Jimilitiido declinationis omnimodo conjimgit vel difcernit partes 
 trationls inter fe^ fed vis ipfiiis fgnificationis. L, XIII* 
 p. 970,
 
 Book THE First, 89 
 
 implication, as when we fay, T^he Sun Ch.VI. 
 rifesy which means, when relblved, The 
 Sufi IS rijing {b). 
 
 The Verbs, /x, Growethy Bccometh, 
 miy Fit, virij^xsi igi, Trelei, y/yvfra/, are 
 all of them ufed to exprefs this general 
 Genus, The Latins have called them 
 Verba Subjlantiva, Verbs Subjiantive, but 
 the Greeks 'VviikCLTciL 'YTrcipnTinUy Verbs of 
 Exijiencey a Name more apt, as being 
 of greater latitude, and comprehending 
 equally as well Attribute, as Subftance, 
 The principal of thofe Verbs, and which 
 we fhall particularly here confider, is the 
 Verb, '£^/, £/, Is. 
 
 Now all Existence is either abfo- 
 lute or qualified — abfolutey as when we 
 fay, B I s ; qualified y as when we fay, B 
 IS AN Animal; B is black, is round, 
 
 Wl T H 
 
 {h) Sec Metaphyf. Ar'ijlot. L. V. C 7. Edit. Du-Valh
 
 90 
 
 H E R M E S< 
 
 Ch.VI. With refped to this difference, the 
 Verb (is) can by itfelf exprefs abfolute 
 "Exijlence, but never the qualified , with- 
 out fubjoining the particular Form, be- 
 caufe the Forms of Exiftence beine in 
 number infinite, if the particular Form 
 be not expreft, we cannot know which is 
 intended. And hence it follows, that 
 when (is) only ferves to fubjoin fome 
 fuch Form, it has little more force, than 
 that of a mere Ajfertion. It is under the 
 fame charadier, that it becomes a latent 
 part in every other Verb, by expreffing 
 that Affertion, which is one of their Ef- 
 fentials. Thus, as was obferved jufl be- 
 fore, Rifeth means, is rifing ; JVnteth, 
 
 IS writing. 
 
 Again — As to Existence in gene- 
 ral, it is either mutable, or immutable', mu~ 
 table, as in the ObjeBs of Senfation -, . im~ 
 ?}iutable, as in the ObjeBs of IntelleBioji 
 and Science. Now mutable Objed:s exift 
 all in T^imc, and admit the feveral Di- 
 
 flindions
 
 Book the First. 91 
 
 flindiions of prefent, paft, and future. Ch.VI. 
 
 But immutable OhjeSis k?iow no fuch Di~ 
 fiinBionsy but rather iland oppofed to all 
 things temporary. 
 
 And hence two different -S,ignifications 
 of the fubftantive Verb (is) according 
 as it denotes mutable, or i?nmutable Be- 
 ing. 
 
 For example, if we fay, .T'M Orange 
 is ripey (is) meaneth, that it exijieth fo 
 no%v at this prefenty in oppofition to paji 
 time, when it was green, and to future 
 time, when it will be rotten. 
 
 But if we fay, T^hc Diameter of the 
 Square is incomfiienfurable with its fde, 
 we do not intend by (is) that it is incom- 
 nienfurable nowy having been formerly 
 commenfurable, or beine to become fo 
 hereafter j on the contrary w^e intend that 
 FerfeBio7i of Exifencey to which l^imc 
 and its DiflinBions are utterly unknown. 
 It is under the fame meaning we employ 
 
 this
 
 92 HERMES, 
 
 Ch.VI. this Verb, when we fay. Truth is, 
 or, God is. The oppofition is not of 
 ^ime prejhit to other I'imes, but of necef- 
 fary Exifte?ice to all temporary ExiJleJice 
 whatever {c). And fo much for Ferh 
 ofExiJlence, Commonly called Verbs Sub- 
 Jtantive. 
 
 We are now to defcend to the com- 
 mon Herd of Attributives, fuch as black 
 and white, to write, to fpeak, to walk, 
 &c. among which, when compared and 
 oppofed to each other, one of the moft 
 eminent diftindions appears to be this. 
 Some, by being joined to a proper Sub- 
 
 flantive 
 
 (c) Cum enim dichnm^ Deus est, non eiim\dkmus 
 
 NUNC ESSE, (ed tantum in Substantia f sse, ut 
 
 hoc ad imrnutabilitate?)} potius fuhjiantia^ quam ad iempm 
 
 aliquod refer atur. Si autem dicwms^ dies est, adnid^ 
 
 lam dkijidjlantiam pertinet^ n'lfi tatitum ad te7?iporis con- 
 
 fitutionem ; hoc enim, quod fignificat^ tale eji^ tanquam. 
 
 ft dicamm^ NUNC EST. ^are cum diclmus esse, ut 
 
 Julfiant'iam defignemusy fimpliciter E^r add'mius ; cu7n 
 
 vera ita ut aliquid prafens Jignificetur, fecimdum Tenipus, 
 
 Boeth. in Lib. de Intcrpr. p. 307. See alfo Plat. Thru 
 
 p. 37, 38. Edit. Serrani,
 
 Book the First. 93 
 
 ftantive make without farther help a per- Ch.VI, 
 feB ajfertive Sentence j while the reft, 
 tho* otherwife perfect, are in this refpeB 
 deficient. 
 
 To explain by an example. When 
 we fay, Cicero eloquent, Cicero wife, thefe 
 are imperfedl Sentences, though they de- 
 note a Subftance and an Attribute. The 
 reafon is, that they want an AjjWtioUy 
 to fhew that fuch Attribute appertains to 
 fuch Subftance. We muft therefore call 
 in the help of an Aflertion elfewhere, an 
 (is) or a (was) to complete the Sentence, 
 faying Cicero is wife, Cicero was elo'^ 
 quent. On the contrary, when we fay, 
 Cicero writeth, Cicero walketh, in inftan- 
 ces like thefe there is no fuch occafion, 
 becaufe the Words (writeth) and (walk- 
 eth) imply in their own Form not an At- 
 ' tribute only, but an Aftertion likewife. 
 Hence it is they may be refolved, the one 
 into Is and Writing, the other into Is 
 and Walkings 
 
 Now
 
 94 HERMES. 
 
 Ch. VI. Now all thofe Attributives, which have 
 ^ ' "' this complex Power of denoting both an 
 Attribute and an Aflertion, make that 
 Species of Words, which Grammarians 
 call Verbs. If we refolve this complex 
 Power into its diftind Parts, and take t^e 
 Attribute alone without the AfTertion, 
 then have we Participles. All other 
 Attributives, befides the two Species be- 
 fore, are included together in the general 
 Name of Adjectives. 
 
 And thus it is, that all Attribu- 
 tives are either Verbs, Participles, 
 or Adjectives. 
 
 Besides the Diilindtions abovemen- 
 tioned, there are others, which deferve 
 notice. Some Attributes have their Ef- 
 fence in Motion ; fuch are to walk, to fly, 
 to flrike, to live. Others have it in the 
 privation of Motion ', fuch are to flop, to 
 refl, to ceafe, to die. And laflly, others 
 have it in fubjeds, which have nothing to 
 5 do
 
 Book THE First. 95- 
 
 do with either Motion or its Privatiou -, Ch.VF. 
 fuch are the Attributes of. Great and Lit^ 
 tie. White and Black, Wife and FooliJJj, 
 and in a word the feveral ^antities and 
 ^alities of all Things. Now thefe laft 
 are Adjectives ; thofe which denote 
 Motions, or their Privation, are either 
 Verbs or Participles. 
 
 And this Circumftance leads to a 
 farther Diilindion, which may be ex- 
 plained as follows. That all Motion is in 
 T^ime, and therefore, wherever it exifls, 
 implies T^ijne as its concomitant, is evi- 
 dent to to all, and requires no proving. 
 But befides this, all Rejl or Privation of 
 Motion implies T'ime likewife. For how can 
 a thing be faid to refi: or flop, by being 
 in one Place for one Inftant only? — fo too 
 is that thing, which moves with the 
 greateft velocity, -f- To flop therefore or 
 reft, is to be in one Place for more than one 
 
 Inftant, 
 
 t Thus Proclus in the Beginning of his Treatife 
 concerning Motion. HpiiJ.Hv tfi to Tr^orspov >t, ufipov
 
 96 " HERMES. 
 
 Ch.Vl. Inflant, that is to fay, during an Exfe?2/ion 
 between two Injlants, and this of courfe 
 gives us the Idea of Time. As therefore 
 Motions and their Privation imply Time as 
 their concomitant, fo Verbs, which de- 
 note them, come to denote Time alfo [d). 
 And hence the origin and ufe of Tenses, 
 *' which are fo many different forms, af- 
 ** figned to each Verb, to fliew, without 
 *' altering its principal meaning, the va- 
 ** rious Times in which fuch meaning 
 '* may exift." Thus Scribit, Scripjit, 
 Scripferat, and Scrihet, denote all equally 
 the Attribute, To Write, while the dif- 
 ference between them, is, that they de- 
 note Writing in different Times. 
 
 Should 
 
 {d) The antient Authors of Dialedlic or Logic have 
 well defcribed this Property. The following is part 
 of their Definition of a Verb — — f^/A« ^i sr* to zrpocr- 
 CYi^ouyov p^pcvoi', a Verb is fomething^ which JJgniJies 
 Time OVER and above (for fuch is the force of the 
 Prepofition, Tlpog.) If it fhould be afked, over mid 
 above what P It may be anfwered, over and above its 
 principal Signification, which is to denote fome moving 
 and energizing Attribute. See Jriji. de Interpret, c. 3. 
 together with his Commentators Ammoniiu and jB<?f- 
 thius.
 
 Book the First. 
 
 97 
 
 Should it be afked, whether T^hne it- Ch.VI. 
 felf may not become upon occafion the 
 Verb's principal Signification; it is an- 
 fwered, No. And this appears, becaufe 
 the fame 'Time may be denoted by diffe- 
 rent verbs (as in the words, writeth and 
 fpeaketh) and different T^imes by the fame 
 Verb (as in the words, ^writeth and wrote) 
 neither of which could happen, w^ere 
 lUme any thing more, than a mere Conco- 
 mitant.- Add to this, that when words 
 denote Time, not collaterally, but prin- 
 cipally, they ccafe to be verbs, and be- 
 come either adjedlives, or fubflantives. 
 Of the adjective kind are ''Timely^ Yearly, 
 Dayly, Hourly, &c. of the fubilantive kind 
 are TimCy Tear, Day, Houry &c. 
 
 The moft obvious divifion of Time is 
 into Prefent, Paft, and Future, nor is any 
 language complete, wliofe verbs have 
 not Tenses, to mark thefe difi:ind:ions. 
 But we may go ftill farther. Time pall 
 and future arc both infinitely extended. 
 
 H Hence
 
 98^ HER M E S. 
 
 Ch.VI. Hence It is that in unherfal I'm? paji Wff 
 may alTume 7nany particular Times pajl, 
 and in unive7'fal 'Ti?jie future,, many, parti- 
 cular Times future, fome more^ fome lefs 
 remote, and correfponding td each other 
 under different relations. Even prefent 
 Time itfelf\% not exempt from thefe dif- 
 ferences, and as necelfarily implies fome- 
 degree of 'Extenfion, as does every given 
 line, however minute^ 
 
 Here then wc are to feek for the 
 reafon, which firft introduced into lan- 
 guage that variety of Tenfes. It was not 
 it feems enough to denote indefnitely (or 
 by Aorifls) mere Prefent, Paft, or Fu- 
 ture, but it was necelfary on many occa- 
 iaons to define with more precilion, ivhai 
 kind of Paft,, Prefent, or Future. And 
 hence the multiplicity of Futures, Prs-r 
 terits, and even Prefent Tenfes, with 
 which all languages are found to abound, 
 and without which it would be difficult 
 to afcertain our Ideas, 
 
 How-
 
 Book the First. 
 
 99 
 
 However as the knowledge of Ten- Ch.VL 
 SEs depends on the Theory of Time, 
 and this is a fubjed: of no mean fpecula- 
 tion, we fhall referve it by itfelf for the 
 following chapter. 
 
 II 2 C 11 A P,
 
 loo HER iM E S. 
 
 I 
 
 CHAP. vn. 
 
 Concerning I'ime, and I'enfes, | 
 
 C.VIL y I liME and Space have this in com- j 
 JL mon, that they are both of them by 
 nature things continuous, and as fuch they 
 both of them imply Rxtenfion, Thus be- 
 tween London and Salijhury there is the ^ 
 Extenfion o^ Space, and between Tefierday 
 and To-morroiv, the Extenlion of 'Time. 
 But in this they differ, that all the parts of 
 Space exifl at once and together, '^\\At thofe I 
 
 i 
 
 of Time only exift in 'Tranjition or Sue- 
 cejjion [a). Hence then we may gain fome 
 Idea of Time, by confidering it under the 
 
 notion 
 
 J 
 
 {a) See Vol. I. p. 275. Note XIII. To which we , 
 may add, what is faid by Amrnoynus — om^X yap XP^^^ m 
 oA©^ u,[J.Oi vfifctrai., aAA* v y.ocTx fj.oyov to NTN' • 
 Iv yxp Tu yivic^xi x^ <p0£»^£(rG«i to ilvai sp^f*. Time 
 „doth not fuhfij} the tvhole at once^ hut only in a fingle Now 
 or Instant j for it hath its Exi/Iencein becoming and in 
 ceafing to he. Amm. hi Predicam. p. 82. b.
 
 Book THE FiR'ST. loi 
 
 notion of a tranjlent Continuity. Hence C.VII. 
 alio, as far as the afte^lions and proper- 
 ties of T^ranfition go. Time is different 
 from Space 5 but as to thofe o^ Exten- 
 Jion and Continuity^ they perfed:ly CQ^ 
 incide. 
 
 Let us take, for example, fuch a part 
 of Space, as a Line. In every given Line 
 we may affume any where a Point, and 
 therefore in every given Line there may be 
 ailumed infinite Points. So in every giv- 
 en Time we may affume any where a 
 Now or Injiant, and therefore in every 
 given Time there may be aifumed infinite 
 Nows or Injlants. 
 
 Farther flill— A Point is th€ Bound 
 of every finite Line -^ and a Now or In- 
 stant, of every finite T^iyne. But aitho' 
 they are Bounds, they are neither of them 
 Parts, neither the Point of any Li?2e, nor 
 the Now or Injiant of any 'Time. If this 
 appear flrange, we may remem.ber, that 
 the farts of any thing extended are necef- 
 
 H 3 Jdrily
 
 103 HERMES, 
 
 C.VII. farily extended alfo, it being eflential to 
 their charader, that they jhould meafure 
 their Whole. But if a Foint or Now were 
 cxtendedy each of them would contain 
 within itfelf infinite other Points y and in- 
 finite other Nows (for thefe may be affum- 
 ed infinitely within the minuteft Exten- 
 fion) and this, it is evident, would he ab- 
 furd and impoffible. 
 
 These afTerticns therefore being ad- 
 mitted, and both Points and Nows being 
 taken d.sBounds,hvit. notsis Parts [b), it will 
 
 follow. 
 
 (3) — (pocvipov 0T» ^.Si [jiopiov TO NTN Ta p^^oi/a, 
 ua-TTip aiJ' di fiyiAa) rri<; ypa^[ji.ni' ca SI ypcx.(j.y.a,i Svo 
 triq [A.ixg [xopicc. It is evident that A Now or Injlant 
 is no more a part ofTime^ than Points are of a Line. 
 The parts indeed of one Line are two other Lines. Natur. 
 Aufc. L. IV. c. 17. And not long before — To <?s 
 NTN a jW£^(^' /LifT^E?, T£ yap to /A£f^, >C; (Tuy- 
 xftcOaJ <?£? TO oAoi; Iv. tuv [Xipw)/' J'e XPONOS a 
 $o^u o-u'yjcncrfiiXi iy. tZv NTN. y/Now is no Part of 
 Tiine ; for a Part is able to meafure its TFhole^ and the 
 Whole is neceffarily triade up of its Parts ; but TlME doth 
 mt appear to be made up ofi^QW'S. Ibid. c. 14.
 
 Book the First. 103 
 
 follow, that in the fame manner as the fame C. VII. 
 Point may be the Ejiidoi one Line, and the 
 Beginning of another, fo the fafne Now or 
 Injlant may be the EW of one Time, 
 and the Beginning of another. Let us 
 fuppofe for example, the Lines, A B, B C. 
 
 B 
 
 A ' C 
 
 I fay that the Point B is the End of the 
 Line A B, and the Beginning of the Line, 
 B C. In the fame manner let us fuppofe 
 AB, BC to reprefent certain Times, and 
 let B be a Now or Injlant. In fuch cafe 
 I fay that the Jpjtant B is the End of the 
 Time A B, and the Beginning of the 
 Time B C. I fay likewife of thefe two 
 Times, that with refpe^ft to the Now or 
 Injiant, which they include, the firfi: of 
 them is neceifarily Past Time, as being 
 previous to it; the other is neceflarily Fu- 
 ture, as hcm^fuli/eqitent , As therefore 
 
 H 4 every
 
 I04 H E R M E S. 
 
 C.VII. every Now or Instant always exills in 
 Time, and without being Time, is Tmes 
 BouJid ; the Bound of Completion to the 
 P^/, and the Bound of Commencement to 
 the Future: from hence v/e may conceive 
 its nature or end, which is to be the Me-- 
 dium of Continuity between the Pafi and the 
 Future yfo as to render Time, thro" all its 
 Parts J one Fat ire and PerfeB Whole (r) . 
 
 From the above fpeculations, there 
 follow fome conclufions, which may be 
 perhaps called paradoxes, till they h^ve 
 been attentively confidered. In the firft 
 place there cannot {^x'lGXy i^tdking) be any 
 
 fuch 
 
 {^C^ To h\ NTN fV* <ruv£p^£ia '/^(iy^^ u<nri^ '^^'-X" 
 
 T« o\ TfAfurn. A Nov/ or Injlant is (as was /aid bc~ 
 fire) the Chntinu'tty ' or holding together of Thne ; fir it 
 makes Time continuous^ the paji and the future^ and is in 
 general its Boundary^ as being the beginning of OJie Time 
 and the ending of another. Natur. Aufcult. L. I\'^. 
 c. 19. Y.Mytiyjiam this place means not Continuity^ as 
 ftanding for Extetfwn^ but rather that "Jimclion or Hold- 
 ing together^ by which Extenfion is imparted to other 
 
 thin-jr-:.
 
 Book the First. 105 
 
 Juch thing as T^ime prefent. For if all Time C.VII. 
 be tranjicnt as well as continuous, it cannot 
 like a Line be prefent all together, but 
 part will necelTarily be gone, and part be 
 coming. If therefore any portion of its 
 continuity were to be prefent at o?ice, it 
 would fo far quit its tranfient nature, and 
 be ^ime no longer. But if no portion of 
 its continuity can be thus prefent, how 
 can T^ime poflibly be prefent, to which 
 fuch Continuity is effential ? 
 
 Farther than this — -If there be no 
 fuch thing as T^ime Prefent, there can be fio 
 Sejifation of Time by any one of the fenfes. 
 For A L L S E N s A T I o N /j- ofthe '\ Prefent on - 
 ly, thePaft being preferved not by Senfe but 
 by Memory, and the Future being antici- 
 pated by Prudence only and W\{^Forefight. 
 
 But if no Portion of Time be the ob- 
 jed: of any S>enfation ; farther, if the Pre- 
 fent 
 
 "f TauTV) yccp (aj(70y/(rfj ic.) ovn to y.iXKov, ovrt 
 ft) yiyyofxevov yvw^i^oiAZV, dXKol to zj-xpov [/.ovov* 
 A^K. TTfPi Mi/^i/x. A. a. - I
 
 io6 HERMES. 
 
 C.VII. fent Tiever exiil j if the Paft be ?io more i 
 if the Future be not as yet ; and if thefe 
 are all the parts, out of which Time is 
 compounded : how ftrange and fliadowy 
 a Being do we find it? How nearly ap- 
 proaching to a perfect Non-entity [d) ? 
 Let us try however, fince the fenfes fail 
 us, if we have not faculties of higher 
 power, to feize this fleeting Being, 
 
 The World has been likened to a va- 
 riety of Things, but it appears to refem- 
 ble no one more, than fome moving fpec^ 
 
 tacle 
 
 £x Tuv (?£ T<? oiv xj7ro7r]iv<riii' to (aIv yccp aula ytyops, 
 X, ax if^ TO ai /w.£AA£i, Xj uttu ifiy ix oi raruv -Kf 
 o ccTTSi^i^ Xy oici Aa/;xS:zK>|U,£i/©J XP^^^ (Tufxinxi" 
 ro d ix fj.ri ovTioy o-ufxiijUfvov, dSuvarov M $o^iii Kocri- 
 ^iiv vTorl ^a-iag. That thertfare TiME ex'ifi% not at all^ 
 or>at leaji has but a faint and obfcitre exijience^ one may 
 Jujpeci from hence. A part of it has been., and is no 7nore j 
 a fart of it is coming., and is not as yet ; and out of thefe 
 is mjde that infinite Tiine^ zuhich is ever to be a[jicmed Jiill 
 farther and farther. Now that which is made tip of nor 
 thing but Non-entitieSy it Jhould feem luas impojfblc ever to 
 participate of Entity. Natural. Aufc. L. IV. c. J4, 
 See alfoFhilop. M. S, Com. in Nicorruch. p. 10.
 
 Book THE First. 107 
 
 tacle (fuch as a proceflion or a triurpph) C.VII. 
 that abounds in every part with fplendid 
 objeas, fome of which are ftill departing, 
 as fail as others make their appearance. 
 The Senfes look on, while the fight paffes, 
 perceiving as much as is immediately prefenf, 
 which they report with tolerable accuracy to 
 the Soul's fuperior powers. Having done 
 this, they have done their duty, being con- 
 cerned with nothing, fave what is prefent 
 andinflantaneous. But to \\\^Memo7'y^ to 
 the Imagination^ and above all to the InteU 
 leB, the feveral Nowsox lnjiants2st net lofl, 
 as to the Senfes y but are preferved and made 
 obj efts of/?t'^j^comprehenfion, however in 
 their own nature they may be tranfitory and 
 ■pajjing. *' Now it is from contemplating 
 ** two or more of thefe Inllants under one 
 **view, together with that Interval of 
 ** Continuity, which fubfifts between 
 ** them, that we acquire infenfibly the 
 ** Idea of Time (6')." Forexample: T^he 
 
 Sun 
 
 ^(?) ToT£ (pu^Xv yiyovivoci ;)^Poi'Oi/, orocv ra zirpoTEpH 
 7^ ufEPa iv TV Kivria-ci c«.j<r0i<icni/ XxQwy,!v. 'Opi^oy-iv
 
 io8 HER M E S. 
 
 C.VII. Stmrifes', this I remember: it rife s again -, 
 this too I remember. Thefe Events are 
 not together j there is an Extenjion be- 
 tween 
 
 Si T'f «AAo jc, aAAo uVoAa^iM/ aura, Xy jUfxa^-j Tt 
 ccvTU]/ iTBoo]/ oTCcv yx,p rex, wapoc iripoc, m ^ica vor^oru}- 
 
 f^iV, Xy aVC ilTTH 71 ^^X^V T*i NTN, TO f/.iV T^^OTiDOVy 
 
 TO §\ v^Boov, TCT£ >^ TUTO (pa[Av elvui XPONON. 
 It is then we fay there has been Time, when we can ac^ 
 quire a Senfation of prior and fuhfequent in Motion. But 
 we dijVi7iguifh ayid fettle -thefe tzvo^ by confidering one firjl^ 
 then the other^ together with an interval between them dif- 
 ferent from both. For as often as we conceive the Extre?nes 
 to be differerit from the Mean^ and the Soul talks of two 
 Now 5, one prior and the other fuhfequent^ then it is luefay 
 there is Time, and this it is lue call Time. Natural. 
 ^ufcult. L. IV. c. 1 6. Themijitus's Comment upon 
 this paflage is to the fame purpofe. 'Otxv yap o vaf 
 ecva^vnc^iig ts NTN, o ^^U i^mv, irspov uraAn/ uiryi 
 ■ro rrtxspov) tots Xj ^^ovov Eufiu? hsvovirsv, vtto twk ^So 
 
 NTN O^l^OfXiVOVy o7oV VTTO TS-SpCCTUV ^VoTv' >t) iiTU) Xiynv 
 
 piov s^ d-n-iipii ypa[j!.y.rii; -^rnyyuiav ivo <rriy'SiOig cctto- 
 TJ^vJ^sv^. For xvhen the Mind^ remembering tha 
 Now, which it talked of yejlerday^ talks again of another 
 Now to-day^ then it is it immediately has an idea of Time, 
 terminated by thefe two Notvs, as by two Boundaries ; and 
 thus is it enabled to fay, that the ^atitity is of fifteen, or 
 efftxteen hours, as if it were to fever a Cubit's length 
 from an infinite Line by two Points, Themift. Op. edi;. 
 Alfli- p- 45^b•
 
 ' Book the First. 109 
 
 tween them — not however of Space ^ for C.VII. 
 W€ may fuppofe the place of rifmg the 
 fame, or at leaft to exhibit no fenfible dif- 
 ference. Yet flill we xQcogmzQfofm Ex- 
 tenfion between them. Now what is this 
 Extenlion, but a natural Day F And what 
 is that, but pure Ti??ieF It is after the fame 
 manner, by recognizing two new Moons, 
 and the Extenfion between thefe : two 
 vernal Equinoxes, and the Extenfion be- 
 tween thefe ; that we gain Ideas of other 
 Times, fuch as Months and Tears, which 
 are all fo many Intervals, defcribed as a- 
 bove; that is to i\iy ,pajjmg Intervals of Con- 
 tinuity between two Injlants viewed together. 
 
 And thus it is the Mind acquires the 
 Idea of Time. But this Time it mufl be 
 remembered is Past Time only, which 
 is always the firfi Species, that occurs to 
 the human intelle6t. How then do we 
 acquire the Idea of Time Future? The 
 anfwer is, we acquire it by Anticipation. 
 Should it be demanded flill farther. And 
 what is Anticipation ? We anfwer, that in 
 
 this
 
 no HERMES. 
 
 C.VII. this cafe it is aklndof reafoningbyanalogy 
 from fimilar to fimilar; from fucceflions 
 of events, that are paft already, to fimilar 
 fucceflions, that are prefumed hereafter. 
 For example : I obferve as far back as my 
 memory can carry me, how every day has 
 been fucceeded by a night; that night, by 
 another day; that day, by another night; 
 and fo downwards in order to the Day that 
 is now. Hence then I anticipate ajimilar 
 fuccejjion from the prefent Day, and thus 
 gain the Idea of days and nights in fiituri-* 
 ty. After the fame manner, by attending 
 to the periodical returns of New and Full 
 Moons ; of Springs, Summers, Autumns 
 and Winters, all of which in Time pafl I 
 find never to have failed, I anticipate a 
 like orderly and diverjijied fuccejjion ^ which 
 makes Months, and SeafonS, and Years, 
 in 'Time future. 
 
 We go farther than this, and not only 
 
 thus anticipate in thefe naturalVtx'vo^^y but 
 
 even in matters of human and civil concern. 
 
 For example ; Having obferved in m*any 
 
 10 pafl:
 
 Book the First. hi 
 
 paft inftances how health had fucceeded C.VII. 
 to exercife, and iicknefs to (loth ; we an- 
 ticipsitej'ufure health to thofe, who, being 
 now iickly, ufe exercife; znd Jufure fick- 
 nefs to thofe, who, being tjow healthy, are 
 llothful. It is a variety of fuch obfervati- 
 ons, all refpediing onefubje(fl, which when 
 fyftematized by jufl reafoning, and made 
 habitual by due practice, form the charac- 
 ter of a Mailer- Artift, or Man olpraBical 
 Wifdom. If they refpect the human body 
 (as above) they form the Phyfician ; if mat- 
 ters military, the General; if matters na- 
 tional, the Statefman; if matters of private 
 life, the Moralift ; and the fame in other 
 fubjedts. All thefe feveral charadlers in 
 their refpedive ways may be faid to poflefs 
 a kind ofpropheticdifcernment, which not 
 only prefents them the barren profpeB of 
 futurity (aprofpedt not hid from the mean- 
 eft of men) but fhews withal thofe events, 
 which are likely to attend it, and thus en- 
 ables them to ad: with fuperior certainty 
 and re(5titude. And hence it is, that (if we 
 except thofe^ v/ho have had diviner affift- 
 
 ances)
 
 112 HERMES, 
 
 C. VII. ances) we mayjuftly fay, as was faid of old. 
 
 He's the befi Prophet, ivho coiijeSiwes 
 
 ivcll{f). 
 
 From 
 
 So Milton. 
 
 Till old Experience do attain 
 To fomething like Prophetic Strain. 
 Et facile exijVimari potejl^ Prudentiam ejfe quodani^ 
 modo Divitiatione7n. 
 
 Corn. Nep. in Vit. Attici. 
 There is nothing appears fo clearly an objecl of the 
 Mind or Intellect only, as the Future does, fmcc 
 we can find no place for its exiftence any where elfe. 
 Not but the fame, if we confider, is equally true of the 
 Pajl. For tho' it may have once had another kind of 
 being, when (according to common Phrafe) it aSIually 
 tvasy yet was it then fomething Prejcnt^ and not fome- 
 thing Pajl. Ai Paji^ it has no exiftence but in the 
 MiKD or Memory, fince had it in fa6l any other, it 
 could not properly be called Paft. It was this intimate 
 connedlion between Time, and the Soul, that made 
 fome Philofophers doubt, ivhethcr if there was no Souly 
 there could hi any Time^ fince lime appears to have its 
 Being in no other region. W-'o-n^oy ^\ jxr, aa-r;? ^v^rg 
 'im av p^P&t'Ofj ocTTop'/iarsmi av rig^ x. r. A. Natur. 
 Aufcult. L. IV. c. 20. The?ni/lius, who comments 
 the above pafTage, exprefles himfelf more pofitively. 
 Ei roivvv J'j^w? XiysTOH tJte ocPivurirov Xj to asi^fxa- 
 usvovy TO [MV TO ajOiO/jcnTof $Y\Xa.Sri §Mva,^n, to §i iv" 
 toyiioi,^ rauTPi $1 HK »v v-rrof xiVij jw,-/] ovTog ra «pj0/Ari- 
 
 (TOVTOJ
 
 Book the FirsI'. 113 
 
 From what has been reafoned it ap- C.VII. 
 pears, that knowledge of the Future 
 comes from knowledge of the Paji ; as 
 does knowledge of the Pafi from know- 
 ledge of the Prefent, fo that their Order 
 to us is that of Present, Past, and 
 Future. 
 
 Of thefe Species of knowledge, that of 
 the Prefent is the loweft, not only '^^Jirfi 
 in perception^ but as far the more exten- 
 live, being necelTarily common to all ani^ 
 ?nal Beings, and reaching even to Zoo- 
 phytes, as far as they pofTefs Senfation. 
 Knowledge of the PaJi comes next, 
 which is fuperior to the former, as being 
 confined to thofe animals, that have Me- 
 7nory as well as Senfes. Knowledge of the 
 
 Future 
 
 ;i^povo? £j5i, [J.n aa-»]? ■^xi'/riq. Them. p. 48. Edit. 
 Aldi. Vid, etiamejufd. Comm. in Lib. de A«. p. 94. 
 
 I
 
 114 HERMES. 
 
 C.VII. Future comes laft, as being derived from 
 \~)r Y the other two, and which is for that rea- 
 
 Ariir. de ' 
 
 An. II. 3. fon t/je tnojl excellent as well as the mofi 
 
 *'* ' rare, fince Nature in her fuperadditions 
 
 rifes from worfe always to better, and is 
 
 never found to fink from better down to 
 
 worfe *. 
 
 And now having feen, how we acquire 
 the knowledge of 'Time pajl, and Time fu- 
 ture 'j which is firfl in perception, which 
 firft in dignity ; which more common, 
 which more rare 5 let us compare them 
 both to the prefent Now or Injiant, and 
 examine what relations they maintain to- 
 wards it. I 
 
 In the firfl: place there may be Times 
 hothpaji 2ind future, in which th^ prefeni 
 Now has no exigence, as for example in 
 Tejierday, and To-morrow: 
 
 Again, 
 
 See below, Note (r) of thb Chapter. 
 
 J
 
 Book the First, 115 
 
 Again, thtprefent Now may fo far be- C.VII. 
 long to 7'ime of either fort, as to be the 
 End of the paft, and the Beginning of the 
 future 'y but it cannot be included within 
 the limits of either. For if itwerepoffible, 
 let us, fuppofe C th.Qprefe?it Now included 
 
 A B C D E 
 
 within the limits of the paji Time AD. 
 In fuch cafe C D, part of the pall Time 
 AD, will be fubfequent to C the prefent 
 NoWy and fo of courfe h^ future. But 
 by the Hypothefis it i^paji, and fo will be 
 both Pafl and Future at once, which is 
 abfurd. In the fame manner we prove 
 that C cannot be included v/ithin the li* 
 mits oi 2^ future Time, fuch as BE. 
 
 What then fliall we fay of fuch Times, 
 as this Day, this Month, this Year, this 
 
 I 2 Cen-
 
 ii6 HERMES. 
 
 C.VII. Century, all which include within them 
 the prefcnt Now ? They cannot be paji 
 T'imes or future, from -what has been 
 proved ; 2iV\dpfefent I'ime has no exijiejice, 
 as has been proved likewife *. Or fhall 
 we allow them to be prefent, from the 
 frefent Now, which exijis within them ; 
 {o that from the prefence of that we call 
 thefe alfo prefent, tho' the fhortefl among 
 them has infinite parts always abfent ? If 
 fo, and in conformity to cuilom we allow 
 {uchTirnesprefentj^s^i'e^cvxtDs.ySfMonihs, 
 Years, and Centuries, each muflof necef- 
 fity be a compound of the Pajiand the Future, 
 divided from each other by fome prefent 
 NoworInftant,andy(?/;7//KcalledPRESENT, 
 while that Now remains within them. Let us 
 fuppofe for example the Time XY, which 
 
 r XABCDEY „ 
 
 y . . . .   • ' 'S 
 
 let 
 
 * s 
 
 Sup. p. i04»
 
 Book the First. 117 
 
 let us call a Day, or a Century ; and let C.VII. 
 
 the prefent Now or Injlant exift at A. 
 I fay, in as much as A exifts within 
 XY, that therefore XA is Time paft, 
 and A Y Time future, and the whole 
 XA, AY, T!ime prefent. The fame 
 holds, if we fuppole the prefent Now ta 
 exift at B, or C, or D, or E, or any 
 where before Y. When the prefent Now 
 exifts at Y, then is the whole XY '^tme 
 faji, and ftill more fo, when the Now 
 gets to g, or onwards. In like manner 
 before the Prefent Now entered X, as 
 for example when it was aty^ then was 
 the whole X Y 'T^i7ne future ; it was the 
 fame, when the prefent Now was at 
 X. When it had paft that, then XY 
 became T^hne prefmt. And thus it is that 
 Time is present, while paffing, in its 
 PRESENT Now or Instant. It is the 
 fame indeed here, as it is in Space, A 
 Sphere pafTmg over a Plane, and being 
 for that reafon prefent to it, is only pre- 
 fent to that Plane i?t afingle Foint at once, 
 
 I 3 while
 
 ii8 HERMES. 
 
 C.VII. while during the whole progreffion its 
 parts abfent are infinite [g]. 
 
 From what has been faid, we may 
 perceive that all Time, of every, deno^ 
 
 mination^ 
 
 {g) Place, according to the antients, was either 
 mediate, or immediate. I am (for example in Europe^ 
 becaufe I am in England ; in England^ becaufe in IVilt- 
 Jhire; in Wiltjhire^ becaufe in Salljbury; in Salijhury^ 
 becaufe in tny own houfe ; in my own houfe^ becaufe in 
 myjludy. Thus far Mediate Place. Andwhatis 
 my IMMEDIATE Place ? // is the internal Bound of 
 that containing Body (whatever it he) which co-incides 
 "With the external Bound of my own Body. Ta zrsciiyov- 
 rog zTi^ccq^ xaQ' o arf^jsp^si to zrs^is^oy.£i/ov. Now as 
 this i?nmediate Place is included within the limits of all 
 the former Places, it is from this relation that thofe ?ne- 
 diate Places alfo are called each of them ?ny Place^ the* 
 the leaft among them fo far exceed my magnitude. To 
 apply this to Time. The Prefcnt Century is prefent in 
 the prfent Tear ; that, in the prefent Month ; that, in 
 the pr font Day ; that, in the prefent Hour; that, in the 
 prefent Minute. It is thus by circumfcription within 
 circumfcription that we arrive at that real and 
 indivisible Instant, which by being itfelf the very 
 Effcnce of the Prefent diffufes Press NC£ throughout 
 2 aU
 
 Book the First. 119 
 
 mtnation, is divifihle and extended. Butif C.VII. 
 {Oy then whenever we fuppofe a definite 
 ^ime, even though it be a 'Time prefent, it 
 muft needs have a Beginning, a Middle, 
 and an End, And fo much for Time. 
 
 Now from the above dodrine of Time, 
 we propofe by way of Hypothecs the fol- 
 lowing Theorie of Tenses. 
 
 The Tenses are ufed to mark Prefent, 
 Pail, and Future Time, either indefinitely 
 
 I 4 with- 
 
 all even the largeft of Times, which are found io in- 
 clude it within their refpeSiive limits. Nicephonis Ble7n- 
 mides fpeaks much to the fame purpofe. 'Evffwj iv 
 
 NTN* ^povog jtAfptJto?, £>t TsrccpiXriXv^oTog Xy (jAXKovroq 
 rvvEfug^ Xj $ioi rv\v •sr^o? to kupjw? NTN yiilvtixcriv, 
 NTN XiyoiA-ivoq ^ d\j\v(;. Present Time there^ 
 fore is that which adjoins to the real Now cr Instant 
 on either Jidey being a limited Time rnade up of Pafl and 
 Future^ and from its vicinity to that REAL Now [aid ta 
 he Now alfo itfelf. 'EttiI. (pu<riK>ij Kfip. G', See alfo 
 Ariji. Fhyfti, L. VI. c. 2, 3, ^f.
 
 I20 HERMES. 
 
 C.VII. without reference to any Beginning, 
 Middle, or End -, or e]fe definitely ^ in 
 reference to fuch diftin(ftions. 
 
 If indejinttelyy then have we three 
 Tenses, an Aorift of the Prefent, an 
 Aorifl of the Paft, and an Aorift of the 
 Future. If definitely , then have we three 
 Tenfes to mark the Beginnings of thefe 
 three Times ; three, to denote their Mid- 
 dles ; and three to denote their Ends 3 in 
 
 all Nine, 
 
 » 
 
 The three firil of thefe Tenfes we 
 call the Inceptive Prefent, the Inceptive 
 Pafl, and the Inceptive Future. The 
 three next, the Middle Prefent, the Mid- 
 dle Paft, and the Middle Future. And 
 the three laft, the Completive Prefent, 
 the Completive Paft, and the Completive 
 Future. 
 
 And thus it is, that the Tenses in their 
 natural number appear to be twelve; 
 
 tl^ree
 
 Book the First. i2i 
 
 three to denote TUme abfolute, and iiine to CVIL 
 denote it under its refpeSlhe diJiinBions, 
 
 Aorifi: of the Prefent. 
 rp^(pw. Scribo. I write. 
 Aorifi of the Pafi:. 
 ''Eyp^^flt. Scrlpfi. I wrote, 
 
 Aorifi of the Future. 
 Fp^'^w- Scribam. I fhall write. 
 
 Inceptive Prefent. 
 
 Mf AAw ypa(pf/v. Scriptiirusfum. I am 
 going to write. 
 
 Middle or extended Prefent. 
 
 T'jy%ecv6o ypa$wv. Scribo or Scribens 
 fum. I am writing. 
 
 Completive Prefent. 
 rfyp<;c$5C. Scr-ipji. I have written. 
 
 Inceptive Pafl. 
 
 ''E[ks'KKov ypa$f/v. Bcripturiis eram, I 
 was beginning to write. 
 
 Middle
 
 122 H E R M E S. 
 
 C.VII. Middle or extended Paid. 
 
 ''EypccCPov or huy^ccvov ypx^(^v, Scribebam, 
 I was writing. 
 
 Completive Pail. 
 
 'Eyfypicfe/v. Scripferam. I had done 
 writing. 
 
 Inceptive Future. 
 
 y[s'K'hv[(r(j!^ ypoL^siv, Scripturus ero, I 
 fhall be beginning to write. 
 
 Middle or extended Future. 
 
 "Effo^di ypoL^Poiv, S crib ens ero, I ihall 
 be writing. 
 
 Completive Future. 
 
 ''EtsoiiGLi ysypot(P(^i, Scrip/ero. I fliall 
 have done writing. 
 
 It is not to be expected that the above 
 Hypothecs fhould be juftified through all 
 inllances in every language. It fares with 
 
 Tenfe'^-^
 
 Book the First. 123 
 
 Tenfes, as with other afFedions of fpeech; C.VII. 
 be the Language upon the whole ever fo 
 perfed, much mufl be left, in defiance of 
 all analogy, to the harfh laws of mere 
 authority and chance. 
 
 It may not however be improper to 
 inquire, what traces may be difcovered in 
 favour of this fyftem, either in languages 
 themfelves, or in thofe authors who have 
 written upon this part of Grammar, or 
 laftly in the nature and reafon of things. 
 
 In the firfl place, as to Aorists. 
 Aorijis are ufually by Grammarians re- 
 ferred to the Paft ; fuch are viK^ov, I went -y 
 £7re<rov, I fell, &c. We feldom hear of 
 them in the Future, and more rarely flill 
 in the Frefent, Yet it feems agreeable to 
 reafon, that wherever Time is Jignijied 
 without any farther circumfcription, than 
 that of Simple prefent, paji, or future , the 
 1'enfe /> an AoR i s t , 
 
 Thus
 
 124 H E R M E S. 
 
 C.VII. ThusM//c;/, 
 
 Millions of fpiritiial creatures walk the 
 
 earth 
 TJnfeeriy both when we wake, and when 
 
 wejleep, P. L. IV. 277. 
 
 Here the verb (walk) means not that 
 they were walking at that injiant only, 
 when Adam /poke, but oLo^^l^t^Q indefinitely , 
 take any inftant whatever. So when the 
 fame author calls Hypocrijy, 
 
 the only Evil, that walks 
 Invijible, except to God alone, 
 
 the Verb (walks) hath the like aorijiical 
 or indefizite application. The fame may be 
 faid in general of all Sentences of the Gno- 
 mologic kind, fuch as 
 
 Ad pcenitendwn properat, cito qui 
 
 judicat, 
 Avarus, niji cum moritur, nil reSle 
 
 FACIT, ^c. 
 
   All
 
 Book the First. 125 
 
 All thefeTenfes are fo many AoRisTS C.VII. 
 
 OF THE PRESENT. ' 
 
 Gnomologic Sentences after the fame 
 manner make likewife Aorists of the 
 Future. 
 
 'Tu nihil admittes in te, formidine 
 pcence, Hor. 
 
 So too Legijlative Sentences, Thou 
 SHALT not kill, Tihou shalt not ft eat y 
 &c. for this means no one particular fu- 
 ture Time, but is a prohibition extend- 
 ed indefinitely to every part of Time fu- 
 ture [h). 
 
 We 
 
 iji) The Latin Tongue appears to be more than or- 
 dinarily deficient, as to the article of Jori/is. It has no 
 peculiar Form even for an Aor'tjl of the Pqfl^ and there- 
 fore (as Prifcian tells us) the Preeteritum is forced to do 
 the double duty both of that Aor'ijl^ and of the perfeSi 
 Prefcnt.^ its application in particular inllances being to 
 
 be
 
 X26 HERMES. 
 
 C.VII. We pafs from Aortfis, to the incep- 
 tive TENSES. 
 
 These may be found in part fupplied 
 (like many other Tenfes) by verbs au- 
 xiliar. MEAAH 7/)it$6/v. Scn'pfurus sum. 
 I AM GOING to write. But the Latins go 
 farther, and have a fpecies of Verbs, de- 
 rived from others, w^hich do the duty of 
 thefe Tenfes, and are themfelves for that 
 reafbn called Inchoatives or Incentives, 
 Thus from CaleOy I am warm, comes Ca^ 
 kfco, I begin to grow warm ; from 7'umeo, 
 I [well, comes Tiimefco, I begin to fwelL 
 Thefe Inchoative Verbs are fo peculiarly 
 appropriated to the Beginnings of Time, 
 that they are defedive as to all Tenfes, 
 which denote it in its Completion, and 
 
 there- 
 
 be gathered from the Context. Thus it is that feci 
 means (as the fame author informs us) both TSiTrainv.ix, 
 and liToniircc, I have done it, and / did it ; vidi both 
 iupacax and slSov, I have ]ujl jeen it, and Ifaw it once. 
 Frifc. Gram. L. VIII. p. 814, 838. Edit. Pidjch.
 
 Book the First. 127 
 
 therefore have neither PerfeBwn, Plus C.VII. 
 quam-pej-feBum, or PerfeB Future. There 
 is likewife a fpecies of Verbs called in 
 Greek 'E(p£TM, in Latin Dejiderativat the 
 Dejideratives or Meditativesy which if they 
 are not ilridly Inceptives, yet both in 
 Greek and Latin have a near affinity with 
 them. Such are 7roAf|UL»j(Tf/w, Bellaturio, I 
 have a dejire to make war ; Pp(:icTsi(,is Efurio^ 
 I long to eat. (/). And fo much for the 
 Inceptive Tenses. 
 
 The two lafl orders of Tenfes which re- 
 main, are thofe we called (y^) THE Middle 
 Tenses (which exprefs Time as extended 
 
 , and 
 
 (i) As all Beglnnmgs have reference to what is fu^ 
 ture^ hence we fee how properly thefe Verbs are formed, 
 the Greek ones from a future Verb, the Lathi from a 
 future Participle. From z:oXsy.ricru and |3^ico-w come 
 ■ErokiiJ.r,criico and (^^uarstu ; from Bellaturus and Efuna 
 come Bellaturio and Efurio. See Macrohim^ p. 691. 
 Ed. Var. H -srai/u ys /;*£ vUi/ ^-^' TEAAZEIONTA 
 i-nroinc-xg yB?.aaix,i. Plato in Phaedone. 
 
 (/^} Care muft be taken not to confound thefe middk 
 Tenfes, with the Tenfes of thofe Verbs, which bear 
 the n^me name among Grammarians.
 
 128 H E R M E S. 
 
 C.VII. aiid/»^7^/z^)andthePERFECT orCoMPLE- 
 TiVE, which exprefs its Completion or Eiid. 
 
 Now for thefe the authorities are 
 many. They have been acknowledged 
 already in the ingenious Accidence of 
 Mr. Hoadly, and explained and confirmed 
 by Dr. Samuel Clarke, in his rational edition 
 o^ Hofners Iliad. Nay, long before either 
 of thefe, we find the fame fcheme in Sca^ 
 liger, and by him (/) afcribed to -f- Gro-- 
 cinusy as its author. The learned Gaza 
 
 (who 
 
 (/) Ex his percipimus Grocinum acute adymdum Tem- 
 
 pora diviJlffe^ fed 7nlnus commod}. Tria e7iim conjlituit, 
 
 ut nos^fed qua: hifariajn fecat^ PerfeSiiim & hnperfeSlum. : 
 
 fic^ Freeteritum imperfeclufn^ Amabam : Prateriturn per- 
 
 fciium^ Amaveram. ReSie jane. Et Prafens wiperfeC" 
 
 tunij Amo. ReSie haBeniis ; cont'inuat enim amorem^ ne- 
 
 que abfolvlt. At Prafeiis perfc£liim^ Amavi : quh hoc 
 
 dicat ? — De Futuro autern ut non tnale fentit^ ita controver- 
 
 fum eji. Futurum^ inquit^ tmperfeolu7n^ Amabo : Perfec- 
 
 imn, Amavero. Non malcj inquam : ftgnificat entm Ama- 
 
 vero, amorem futurmn & ahfolutum iri : Amabo perfec- 
 
 -honem nullajn indkat. De Cauf. Ling. Lat. c. 113. 
 
 t His Name was WiU'iam Grochi^ an EngUJhman^ con- 
 temporary with Erafmus^ and celebrated for his learn- 
 ing. He went to Florence to ftudy under Land'm^ and 
 was Profeflbr at Oa/S;?-*'/. Spec. Lit. Flsr.p, 205.
 
 Book, the First. 129 
 
 (who was himfelf a Greek, and one of the C. VII. 
 ableft reflorers of that language in the 
 weftern world) charad;erizes the Tenfes 
 in nearly the fame manner (;«), What 
 Apollonius hints, is exactly confonant (ii),, 
 
 Prifcian 
 
 (m) The Present Tf nse (as this Author informs 
 us in his excellent Grammar) denotes to heg-duBvo]/ xj 
 arsXigf that which is noiu Injlant and incomplete; the 
 Perfectum, to -nrapfAnAuOo? a^ri, y^ l^iXl; rz 
 Ivfrwro?, that which is now immediately pafl^ and is the 
 Completion of the P'refent ; THE Imperfectum, to 
 'jxoipotlUcc^ivcv Jty C4TfA£j tS uTOi^o3^ny.£VBj the extended 
 arid iticomplete part of the Paji ; and the Plusquam- 
 PERFECTUM, to ■sra^EA'/iXudof zroiXaij r^ tvnT^iq ra 
 ■ZB-apxyieiixiviij that which is pajl long ago^ and is the com- 
 pletion of the prcEteritum. Gram. L. IV. 
 
 \n) EvTfuOfi/ ^\ uTSiOo/AfSaj OTJ a •zs"a^wp^>l^EV8 <ru^- 
 TiA£»av (rriiAOciv£i o urccftoiv.ny.tvo';^ rnv yt ixr,v luBfcctray 
 — Hence we are perfuaded that the Perfedum doth notfig^ 
 nify the completion of the Paji^ but present Comple- 
 tion. Apollon. L. III. c. 6. The Reafon, which per- 
 fuaded him to this opinion, was the application and ufe 
 ©f the Particle otv, of which he was then treating, and 
 which, as it denoted Potetitiality or Contingence^ would 
 afTort (he iays) with any of the palling, extended, and 
 incomplete Tenfes, but never with this Perfectum, 
 becaufe this implied fuch a complete and ind^fcafihle ex~ 
 ijhnce^ as never to be qualified into the nature of a CoU'- 
 tingeni, 
 
 K
 
 1^0 HERMES. 
 
 C.VII. Prifcian too advances the fame dodrinei' 
 from the Stoics ^ whofe authority we efteem 
 greater than all the reft, not only from the 
 more early -cge when they lived, but from 
 their fuperior fkill in Philofophy, and 
 their peculiar attachment to DialeBiCf 
 which naturally led them to great accura- 
 cy in thefe Grammatical Speculations {o) . 
 
 Before 
 
 {o) By thefe Philofophers the vulgar prefent Tenfe was 
 called THE Imperfect Present, and the vulgar 
 Prateritum^ the Perfect Present, than which 
 nothing can be more confonant to the fyftem that we 
 favour. But let us hear Prijcian^ from whom we learn 
 thefe fads. Prji;sens tempus preprie dickur, cujus 
 pars jam pratcrut^ pars futura eji. Cum enim Tempus, 
 fiuvi'i more^ injlahili volvatur curfu, vix punSlum habere 
 potcjl in pnefent'i^ hoc ejl^ hi in/ianti. Maxima igitur pars 
 ejus (fuut di£ium ejl) vel prateriit vel futura eji. — Unde 
 Stoici jure hoc tempus presens etia/ji Imper- 
 fect um vocabant (ut diJium eJi) eo quod prior ejus par s^ 
 qua: pr^teriit, tranfacia ejl^ deeji auUm fequens^ id ej}j 
 fiiUira, Utfi in medio verfu dicam^ fcribo verfum, pri- 
 ore ejus parte fcriptd ; cui adhuc deejl extreme pafs, pra- 
 fenti utcr verbo^ dicendo^ fcribo verfum : y^ilMPERFEC- 
 
 TUM ^, quod deeJi adhuc veyfui^ quod fcribatur' Ex 
 
 eodcm igitur Prafenti nafcitur etiam Perfeclum. Si enim 
 adpiemperveniat inceptwji^ Jlatiyn utimur PR^TERITO 
 PERFECTo; continuo enim^ fcripto ad finem verjii^ dicOy 
 fcripfi verfum. — And foon after fpeaking of the Lati?i 
 
 Per-
 
 Book the First. 1 31 
 
 Before we conclude^ we fhall add a C.VII. 
 few mifcellaneous obfervations, which 
 will be more eafily intelligible from the 
 hypothecs here advanced, and fervc with- 
 al to confirm its truth. 
 
 And firfl, the Lathis ufed their Trcsfe-- 
 ritujti PerfeBum in fome inftances after a 
 very peculiar manner, fo a^ to imply the 
 very reverfe of the verb in its natural fig- 
 fiification. Thus, Vixit, fignified, is 
 
 DEAD ; FuiT, fignified, NOW IS NOT, IS 
 
 NO MORE. It was in this fenfethat Cicero 
 addrefTed the People of Rome, when he 
 had put to death the leaders in the Cata-- 
 linarian Confpiracy. He appeared in the 
 
 K 2 Forum, 
 
 Perfect um^ he fays -fciendum tamen^ quod Roijim 
 
 Pr-/t:terito Perfecto non folum in re modo complda 
 utuntur^ (in quo vim habet ejus^ qui cpud Gr^cos tnzpx- 
 xe/,u£vo? vacatur, quern Stoici TEAEION ENES- 
 TflTA nominaverunt) fed etiam pro 'Ao^ifs accipitur, 
 &c. Lib. VIII. p. 812,813,814.
 
 132 HE R M E S. 
 
 C.VIL Forum, and cried out with a loud voice, 
 *VixERUNT. So Virgil, 
 
 — — II F u I M u s Throes, f u i T Ilium G? 
 
 ingens 
 Gloria Dardanidiim — — Mn. II. 
 
 And 
 
 * So among the Ro?jians^ when in a Caufe all the 
 Pleaders had fpoken, the Cryer ufed to proclaim Dix- 
 ERUNT, i. e. they have done f peaking. Afcon. Paed. in 
 Verr. II. 
 
 il So Tribullus fpeaking of certain Prodigies and evil 
 Omens. 
 
 Hac fuerint oUm. Sed fu, jam mit'is^ Apollo^ 
 Prodigia hidomith merge fub csquor'tbiis. 
 
 Eleg. II. 5. ver. 19. 
 Let thefe Events HAVEBEENzw days of old -^ — by Im- 
 plication therefore — But henceforth let them be no 
 ?nore. 
 
 So Eneas in Virgil prays to Pha-bus. 
 
 Hac Trojana teniis iwtx\t fortuna Jecuta. 
 
 Let Trojan Fortune (that is, adverfe, like that oiTroy, 
 and its inhabitants,) HAVE /^j^r FOLLOWED us. By 
 implication therefore, but let it follow us no farther. 
 Here let it end^ Hie fit Finis, as Servius well obferves 
 in the place. 
 
 In which inftances, by the way, mark not only the 
 force of the T'tv//^, but of the Mood^ the Precative 
 or Imperative, not in the Future but in the Past. 
 Seep. I54)i55>i56»
 
 Book the First, 1^3 
 
 And again, C.VII. 
 
 -——Locus Ardea quondam ^— -r— ^ 
 
 Didius avisf & nunc magnum manef 
 
 Ardea nomen, 
 * Sedfortuna fuit-— lEn. VII. 
 
 The reafon of thefe lignifications is de- 
 rived from THE COMPLETIVE PoWER of 
 
 the Tenfe here mentioned. We fee that 
 the periods of Nature, and of human af- 
 fairs, are maintained by the reciprocal fuc- 
 ceffion of Contraries. It is thus v\^ith 
 Calm and Tempeil ; with Day and 
 Night ; with Profperity and Adverlity ; 
 with Glory and Ignominy^ with Life 
 and Death. Hence then, in the in- 
 ftances above, the completion of one con- 
 trary is put for the commencement of the 
 other, and to fay, hath lived, or, 
 HATH BEEN, has the fame meaning with, 
 IS Dead, or, is no more, 
 
 K 3 It 
 
 * Cerius hi hofpitibiis non ejl amor j errat^ ut ipjt : 
 Ctmique nihil fperes firmhts ejfe^ fuit. 
 
 Epift. Ovid. Helen. Paridi. vcr. 190. 
 ^ive er'imus^ feu nos Fata fuisse voknt. 
 
 Tibull. ill. 5, 32.
 
 134 
 
 HERMES. 
 
 C.VII. It is remarkable in * Firgll, that he 
 frequently joins in the fame fentence this 
 complete and perfect Prefent with the ex- 
 tended and pajjing Prefent ; which proves 
 that he confidered the two, as belonging 
 to the fame fpecies of 'Tme, and there- 
 fore naturally formed to co-incide with 
 each other. 
 
 — — ^ibijam brachia contrahit ardens 
 Scorplosj ^ cceli jiifid plus partt reliquit. 
 
 G. I. 
 
 'Terra tremit 'y fugevefef-a — G. I. 
 
 Prafrtimf ternpefas a vert ice fylvis. 
 Incubuit, glomeratque y^r^/2j" incendia 
 'Dentils, G. II, 
 
 " 'ilia noto citius, vohicrique fagittd. 
 
 Ad terram fugit, & portu fe condidit 
 alto, ^n. V. 
 
 In 
 
 * See 2!i{o Spencer's Fairy ^een, B. I. C. 3. St. 19. 
 C. 3. St. 39. C. 8. St. 9. 
 
 Ms hath his Shisld redeem'd, and forth his Szvord hg 
 draws.
 
 Book the First, 13J 
 
 In thjs fame manner he joins the fame C. VII. 
 two modifications of ^ime in the Pa/ij that 
 is to fay, the complete ^.nA perfeSi Pafi: with 
 the extended 2."^^ pajjing, 
 
 — -^ — Inruerant Danai^ & teBum omne 
 tenebant. ^n. II. 
 
 'Jris imbris torti radios ^ tris nubis aquofce 
 Addiderant, riitidi tris ignis, ^ alitis 
 
 aujiri, 
 Ful gores nunc terrijicos, foni turn que me^ 
 
 tumque 
 Mifcebant operi, jiammifque feqiiacibus 
 
 iras{p). iEn. VIII. 
 
 As 
 
 -— . ' .1 .   . I — ti 
 
 (/)) The Intention of Virgil may be better {^z\\ in 
 rendering one or two of tl^e above palTages into Eng~ 
 lijh. 
 
 Tibi jam hrachia contrahifi ardem 
 Scorpiosy y caeli jujid plus paTte reliquit. 
 
 For thee the fcorpion is now contracting his claws, 
 (ind HAT n ALREADY LEFT thee more than a jujl por- 
 tion of Heaven. The Poet, from a high ftrain of poetic 
 adulation, fuppofes the fcorpion fodefnous of admitting 
 Augujlus among the heavenly figns, that though he has 
 iikeady made him more than room enough, yet hey?/"// 
 
 K 4. CQti^
 
 136 H E R M E S. 
 
 C.VII. As to the Imperfectum, it is fome- 
 times employed to denote what is iifual 
 and ciijiomary. ThvLsfurgebat zvL^-fcribe^ 
 bat fignify not only, he was rijing, he 
 WAS writing, but upon occafionthey fig- 
 nify, he USED to rife, he used to write. 
 The reafon of this is, that whatever is 
 cufiomary, mufl be fomething which has 
 h^QX\ frequently repeated. But what has been 
 frequently repeated, muft needs require a'd 
 Extenfon ofl^i'mepaf, and thus we fall in- 
 fenfibly into the Tense here mentioned. 
 
 Again, 
 
 cont'mues to be making him more. Here then we have 
 two a6ls, one perfeci^ the other pending^ and hence the 
 life of the two different Tenfes. Some editions read 
 relinquit j but reliqu'it has the authority of the celebrated 
 Medicean manufcript. 
 
 Ilia noto citius, votucrtque faglttd, 
 
 Adterram f\.igitj&' port ufe condidit alto. 
 
 TheJInpj quicker than the ivind^ or afwift arrow^ con- 
 tinues FLYING to land^ and is hid within the lofty 
 harbour. We may fuppofe this Harbour, (like many 
 ethers) to have been furrounded with high Land. 
 Hence the Vefiel, immediately on entering it, was com- 
 j^ktely kid from thofe fpedlatorSj who had gone out to
 
 Book the First. i.37 
 
 Again, we are told by Fliny (whofe C.VII. 
 authority likewife is confirmed by many 
 gems and marbles flill extant) that the 
 ancient painters and fculptors, when they 
 fixed their names to their works, did it 
 fendenti titulo, in a fiifpenjive kind of In- 
 fcription, and employed for that purpofe 
 the Tenfe here mentioned. It was 'Atte'K' 
 ?viii.' iTToIsi, Apelles faciehat, XloV^v.'hzii^ 
 STTclsi, Folydetus faciebat ^ and never eTroivicTe 
 ox fecit. By this they imagined that they 
 avoided the fliew of arrogance, and had in 
 cafe of cenfure an apology (as it were) pre- 
 pared, fmce it appeared from the work it- 
 felf, that it was once indeed in hanJ, but no 
 pretenfion that it was everfnijhed (^). 
 
 It 
 
 fee the Ship-race, but yet mighty?/// continue Jailing to- 
 wards the fhore within. 
 
 .— — Inrucrant Danai, l^ teSlum omne tencbant. 
 The Greeks had entered ^7«^ were then posses- 
 sing the ivhcle Houfe ; as much as to fay, they had enter - 
 edj and that was over^ but their PofTeffion continuedjiill, 
 
 (q) Plin. Nat. Hif. L. I. The firft Printers (who 
 wercmoft of them Scholars and Critics) in imitation of 
 
 the
 
 1^8 . HERMES. 
 
 C.VII. Iris remarkable that the very manner^^ 
 in which the Latins derive thefe tenfes 
 from one another, fhevi^s a plain reference 
 to the fyilem here advanced. From the 
 faffing Prefent come the paffing Pafl, and 
 Future. Scribo,Scribcl)am,Sc?-ibam. From 
 the ferfeB Prefent come the perfect Paft, 
 and P\iturc. Scripjiy Scripferam^ Scrip- 
 Jero. And fo in all inflances, even where 
 the verbs are irregular, as from Fero come 
 Fereba?ji and Per am s from 'Ptili come 
 ^likram and 'Tulcro^ 
 
 We fhall conclude by obferving, that 
 the Order of the Tenfes, as they ftand 
 ranged by the old Grammarians, is not a 
 fortuitous Order, but is confonant to our 
 perceptions, in the recognitiorb.of Time, 
 according to what we have explained al- 
 ready 
 
 the antient Artifts ufed the fame Tenfc. Excudchat H. 
 Stephanits. Exmddat Gull. Morelius. Jbfolvebat Joan. 
 Benenatus, which has been followed by Dr. Taylor in his 
 late valuable edition of Demojlhenf^.,
 
 Book the First. 139 
 
 ready (r). Hence it is, that the Prefefit C.VII. 
 "Tenfe Hands firfl ; then the Paji Tenfes j 
 and laftly the Future, 
 
 And now, having feen what authorities 
 there are for Aoriils, or thofe Tenfes^ 
 which denote Time indefinitely ; and what 
 forthofeTenfeSjOppofed to Aorifts, which 
 mark it definitely^ (fuch as the Inceptive, 
 the Middle, and the Completive) we here 
 finiili the fubjedl of Time and Tenses, 
 and proceed to confider the Verb in 
 OTHER Attributes, which it will be 
 neceffary to deduce from other princi- 
 ples. 
 
 (r) See before p. 109, no, iii, 112, 113. Scall- 
 
 ger's obfervation upon this occafion is elegant. — Ordo 
 
 autem (Temporiim fell.) aliter eji^ quam naiura eorum, 
 
 J^iod emm fnEteriit.^ prlus eji, quam quod ejl.^ itaque pri~ 
 
 mo loco debere poni videhatur. Verum^ quodprhno quoque 
 
 tempore offertur 7iobis^ id creat primas fpec'ies in anima: 
 
 qiiamobrem Pnrfens Tempus pri?mmi locum occupavit ; e/i 
 
 enim commune omnibus a?iimalibus. Pmteritum autem iis 
 
 tanium^ qu(£ memoria pradita funt. Futurum vera etiam 
 
 paucloribus^ quippe qui bus datum eji prudentia offjcium, 
 
 De Cauf. Ling. Lat, c. 113. See alfo Seneca Epiji. 
 
 .124. Mutum animal fenfu comprehcndit prafejitia ; pnc- 
 
 jferitorwr,) &:c. 
 
 CHAP.
 
 H^ HERMES, 
 
 CHAP. VIII. 
 
 Concerning Modes, 
 
 ii 
 
 C.VIII. TTTE have obferved already (tf) that 
 V V the Soul's leading powers are thofe 
 oi Perception and thofe oi Volition , which 
 words we have taken in their moft com- 
 prehenfive acceptation. We have obferved 
 alfo, that all Speech or Difcourfe is a pub- 
 lifhing or exhibiting fome part of our foul, 
 either a certain Perception, or a certain 
 Volition. Hence then, according as we 
 exhibit it either in a differ ejit part, or af- 
 ter a differefzt manner^ hence I fay the va- 
 riety of Modes or Moods (^). 
 
 If 
 
 [a) See Chapter II. 
 
 (/>) G<7Z(2 -defines a Mode exactly confonant to this 
 doctrine. He fays it is — |3HA»jtAa, uT «i« •ar«9>}/ut^ 
 v"/0'''''> ^'"^ (pwm? G-rii/.ccn/o[ji.ivov — a Volition or Affeciion 
 cf the Sou/y figmfied through Joyne Voice^ or Sound articu- 
 late. Gram. L. IV. As therefore this is the nature of 
 Modes, and Modes belong to Verbs, hence it is Apolh- 
 
 nifii
 
 Book the First. 141 
 
 If we iimply declare, or indicate feme- C.VIIL 
 thing to be, or not to be^ (whether a Per- 
 ception or Volition, it is equally the fame) 
 this conftitutes that Mode called the De- 
 clarative or Indicative. 
 
 A Perception. 
 •—No SCO crhiisy incanaqiie men fa 
 Regis Romani — — Vi rg . iE n . V I „ 
 
 A Volition. 
 
 In nova fert animus mutatas dicer t 
 
 Jormas 
 Corpora Ovid, Metam. I. 
 
 If we do not ftridly aflert, as of fome- 
 tiling abfolute and certain, but as of foine- 
 thing poj/ibk only, and in the number of 
 
 nius obferves — roiq pr\iJ!.x(riv i'^ocipirtix; ■ufK^a.v.nrvA n 
 ^v^iK7) ^ix^cG-iq — the Soul's dijpofulon is in an eminent 
 degree attached to Verbs. De Synt. L. III. c. 13. Thus 
 too Prifcian: Modi funt diver j'es inclinationes 
 Animi, qiias varia corifequitur DECLINATIO VerBI. 
 
 L/VIILp. 821.
 
 142 H E R M E S. 
 
 C.VIII. ContingejitSy this makes that Mode, which 
 Grammarians call the Potential ; and 
 which becomes on fuch occafions the 
 leading Mode of the fentence. 
 
 , Eed tacitiis pafci Ji pojfet Corvus, ha- 
 
 BERET 
 
 Plus dapis, &c. Hor* 
 
 Yet fometimes it is not the leading 
 Alode, but only fubjoined to the Indica- 
 tive. In fuch cafe, it is moftly ufed to 
 denote the End, or final Caufe -, which 
 End, as in human Life it is always a Con- 
 tingent, and may never perhaps happen 
 in defpite of all our forefight, is there- 
 fore exprefl moil naturally by the Mode 
 here mentioned. For example, 
 
 U/jugulent homines, fur gunt dc noBe 
 lat rones, Hor. 
 
 Hhicvts rife by night, that they may cut 
 mens throats. 
 
 Here-
 
 Book the First. 143 
 
   Here that they r'lfe^ is pojilheiy ajjerted C.VIII. 
 in xXiQ Declarative or Indicative Mode-, but *" 
 as to their cutting mens throat s^ this is only 
 dtliyQVQd potentially t becaufe how truly fo~ 
 ever it may be the E/i^ of their rifing, it is 
 ilill but a Contingent, that may never per- 
 haps happen. This Mode, as often as it is 
 in this manner fubjoined, is called by 
 Grammarians not the Potential, but thk 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 But it fo happens, in theconftitution of 
 human affairs, that it is not always fuftl- 
 cient merely to declare ouv(q\vq^s to others* 
 We find it often expedient, from a con- 
 fcioufnefs of our inability, to addrefs them 
 after a manner more intereftine to our- 
 felves, whether to hiy^fmie Perception i?i- 
 formed, or fome Volition gratified. Hence 
 then new Modes of fpeaking; if we inter - 
 rogatCy it is the Interrogative Mode; 
 if wer^^z//;-!?, itis theREQ^isiTivE. Even 
 the Requifitive itfelf hath its Jul? or din ate 
 Species: With refped; to inferiors, it is 
 an Imperative Mode ; with refpect to 
 J 2 equals
 
 144 HERMES. 
 
 C.VIII. equals and fuperiors, it is a Precative 
 or Optative *. 
 
 And thus have we eflablifhed a variety 
 of Modes; the Indicative or Decla- 
 rative, /o ajjert what we think certain ; 
 the Potential, for the Piirpofes of 
 whatever ive think Contingent I the In- 
 terrogative, when we are doubtful y to 
 'procure us Liformation ; andTHEREQUi- 
 sitive, to aj^/i us in the gratification of 
 our Volitions. The Requifitive too appears 
 under two diftindt Species, either as it is 
 Imperative to inferiors, or Preca- 
 tive to fuperiors (r). 
 
 As 
 
 * It was the confounding of this Diflindlion, that 
 gave rife to a Sophifm ox Protagoras. Homer (fays he) 
 in beginning his Iliad with — Sing^ Mitfe^ the Wrath^— 
 when he thinks to pray^ in reality coinmmids. iv^^' 
 , fl-9ai o.'o|M,£j/ofj iTTiTxrlsi. Ariftot. Poet. c. 19. The 
 S(;lution is evident from the Divifion here eftabliflied, 
 the Grammatical Form being in both cafes the fame. 
 
 (c) The Species of Alocles in great meafure depend 
 on the Species of Sentences. The Stcics increafed the 
 number of Sentences far beyond thq Peripatetics. Be- 
 iides thofe mentioned in Chapter II. Note (h) they had 
 
 many
 
 Book the First. 
 
 145 
 
 As therefore all thefe feveral Modes C.VIII. 
 have their foundation in nature, fo have 
 
 certain 
 
 many more, as may be feen in Afnmonius de Interpret. 
 p. 4. and Diogenes Laertim^ L. VII. 66. The Peri- 
 patetics (and it feems too with reafon) confidered all 
 thefe additional Sentences as included within thofe, 
 which they themfelves acknowledged, and which they 
 made to be five in number, the Vocative, the Impera- 
 tive, the Interrogative, the Precative, and the Affertive. 
 There is no mention of a P<?/^k/7^/ Sentence, which may 
 be fuppofed to co-incide with the Affertive, or Indica- 
 tive. The Vocative (which the Peripatetics called the 
 i\^o% >cA»Ti)toi/, but the Stoics more properly Tz-potrayo- 
 ^£UTiKoi/) was nothing more than the P^orm of addrefs 
 in point of names, titles, and epithets, with which we 
 apply ourfelves one to another. As therefore it feldom 
 included any Verb within it, it could hardly contribute 
 to form a verbal Mode. Ammon'nis and Boetbius^ the 
 one a Greek Peripatetic, the other a Latin^ have illu- 
 ftratedthe Species of Sentences from Homer and Virgil^ 
 after the following manner. 
 
 'AAAa T8 Aoy« vrivli EiJ^wf, ts t£ K AHTIKOYj wj 
 
 TO, Q, [AKKxp Ar^it^n 
 
 ^ tS nPOSTAKTIKOY, w? to,
 
 146 HERMES. 
 
 C.VIII. certain marks or figns of them been intro- 
 duced into languages, that we may be 
 
 enabled 
 
 p^ T« 'EPXITHMATIKOT, cJj to, 
 
 TjV, TiToOfi/ elg ccv^^uv ; — — 
 5^ tS 'ETKTIKOT, w? to, 
 
 *At yap Zeu t£ zrarep — — 
 ^ Itt) T2T0K, tS 'AnO^ANTIKOY, ;taG' 2v diro- 
 qionvoy.i^Of, zfspi oTovHV ruv zr^ocyixcuTUVf olov 
 
 — — 0fej ^i T£ zravrcx, i<roc<Tiv 
 
 a -zs-f^i TO-avTo?, &c. E»? to Tjrf^t E^^, p. 4. 
 
 Boethms's Account is as follows. Perfeclarum vera 
 Or a tio7i7im partes quinqtie funt : Deprecativa, zcf, 
 Jupiter omnipGtcns, precibus JifeSler'is ullis. 
 Da diende auxiUum^ Pater, atque hac om'inafirma. 
 
 Imperativa, Ut, 
 
 Fade age, Nate, voca Zephyros^y bf lahere penms. 
 
 Interrogativa, ut. 
 
 Die mih'i, Damata, cujum peciis ?— — 
 
 Vocativa, wf, 
 
 O ! Pater, O ! hominum rerwnque aierna potejlas, 
 
 Enuntiativa, in qua Veritas vel Falfttas invenitur, uty 
 Principio arboribus varia cji natura creandis. 
 
 Bceth. in Lib. de Interp. p. 291. 
 
 In
 
 Book the First* 147 
 
 enabled by our difcourfe to fignify them, C.VIII. 
 one to another. And hence thofe various 
 Modes or Moods, of which we find in 
 common Grammars fo prolix a detail, and 
 which are in fadt no more than ** fo many 
 *' fer^/ Forms, intended to exprefs thefc 
 *' ;z^//^r^/ Diftindions " {d). 
 
 All 
 
 In Milton the fame Sentences may be found, as fol- 
 lows. The Precative, 
 
 -—Univerfal Lord ! be bounteous JIUl 
 To give us only Good — — -• 
 
 The Imperative, 
 
 Go then^ Thou might'iej}^ In thy Father* s mights 
 
 The Interrogative, 
 
 Whence^ and what art thou^ execrable Shape ? 
 
 The Vocative, 
 
 Adam, earth'^s hallow' d Alold^ 
 
 OfGodinfpir'd 
 
 The Assertive or Enunciative, 
 
 The conquered alfo and enjiav'd by war 
 Shally with their freedo?n lojl^ all virtue lofe. 
 
 (d) The Greek Language, which is of all the moft 
 elegant and complete, expreffes thefe fcveral Modes, 
 
 L z and
 
 14^ HERMES. 
 
 C.VIII. All thefe Modes have this in com- 
 mon, that they exhibit fome way or other 
 
 the 
 
 and all diftinftions of Time likewife, by an adequate 
 number of Variations in each particular Verb. The{e 
 Variations may be found, fome at the beginning of the 
 Verb, others at its ending, and confift for the moft part 
 either in multiplying or diminijhing the number of Sylla- 
 bles, or elfe in lengthening or JJwrtening their refpedive 
 Quantities, which two methods are called by Gram- 
 marians the Syllabic and the TejuporaL The Latin<f 
 which is but a Species of Greek fomewhat debafed, ad- 
 mits in like manner a large portion of thofe Variations, 
 which are chiefly to be found at the Ending of its Verbs, 
 and but rarely at their Beginning. Yet in its Depo- 
 nents and Paffives it is fo far defedlive, as to be forced to 
 have recourfe to the Auxilim^ fum. The modern Lan- 
 guages, which have ftill fewer of thofe Variations, have 
 been neceffitated all of them to aflume two Auxiliars 
 at leail, that is to fay, thofe which exprefs in each Lan- 
 guage the Verbs, Have^ and Am. As to the Englijh 
 Tongue, it is fo poor in this refpedl, as to admit no 
 Variation for Modes, and only one for Time, which 
 we apply to exprefs an Aorift of the Paft. Thus from 
 IP'rite Cometh J-Vrote ; from Give^ Gave ; from Speak, 
 Spakt\ &c. Hence to exprefs Time, and Modes, we 
 are compelled to employ no lefs than feven Auxiliars, 
 viz, Dc, Jm, HaiJi-j Shall, TViU, May^ and Can ; which 
 v^e ufe fomctimcs fuigly, as when we ^^y-i I am writ- 
 ing*
 
 Book the First. j49 
 
 the Soul and its Affections. Their CVIII, 
 Peculiarities and Diftindions are in part, 
 as follows. 
 
 The Requisitive and Interroga- 
 tive Modes are diftinguifhed from the 
 Indicative and Potential, that whereas 
 thefe laji feldoni call for a Return, to the 
 X^o former it is always necejfary, 
 t- 
 
 If we compare the Requisitive 
 Mode with the Interrogative, we 
 fhall find thefe alfo diftinguiflied, and 
 that not only in the Returns but in other 
 Peculiarities. 
 
 L 1 "The 
 
 ing, I haije written ; fometimes two together, as, I 
 have been writing, I Jhould have written ; fometimes no 
 lefs than three, as I ynlght have been loft, he could have 
 been preferved. But for thefe, and all other fpecula- 
 tions, relative to the Genim of the Englijh Language, 
 we refer the reader, who wifhes for the moft authen- 
 tic information, to that excellent Treatife of the learned 
 Dr. Loivtl?^ ijititled, A Jhort Jntroduclicn to E-n^lij'h 
 Grammar.
 
 15C> H E R M E S. 
 
 C.VIII. T^he 'Return to the Reqiiijttive is fome^ 
 times made in Words, Jomethnes in Deeds, 
 To the requeft of Dido to Eneas — 
 
 — — a prima die, hofpesy origine nobis 
 
 Infidias Dandum- 
 
 the proper Return was in Words, that is, 
 in an hiilorical Narrative. To the Requeft 
 of the unfortunate Chief-rr — date obolutn 
 Belifario' — the proper Return was in a 
 Deed, that is, in a charitable Relief. But 
 with refpedt to the Interrogative, the Re- 
 turn is necejjdrily made in Words alone, in 
 Words, which are called a Refponfe ov An- 
 fwer, and which are always adlually or 
 hy implication fome defaiitive ajfcrtive 
 Sentence. Take Examples. Whofe Verjes 
 are thefe ? — the Return is a Sentence — 
 T^hefe are Verfes of Horner. Was Brutus 
 a worthy Man f — the Return is a Sen- 
 tence — Brutus was a worthy Man, 
 
 A N D hence (if we may be per- 
 mitted to digrefs) we may perceive 
 
 the
 
 Book the First. 151 
 
 the near affinity of this Interrogative Mode C.VIII. 
 with the Lidicativey in which lad its Re- 
 fponfe ox Return is moHly made. So near 
 indeed is this Affinity, that in thefe two 
 Modes alone the Verb retains the fame 
 Form (d'), nor are they other wife diftin- 
 guiffied, than either by the Addition or 
 Abfence of fome fmall particle, or by fome 
 minute change in the collocation of the 
 words, or fometimes only by a change in 
 the Tone, or Accent {f). 
 
 But 
 
 fAivriv yiccTO(,(pa.(nu aTro^ocXXiia'a,, ^.tvifocroii ts xccKeV- 
 c"0oji opifiKn—'a.vtXTrXTi^oo^BTcrcx, ^l tyi? zuracponTEugf 
 CnofPiipsi £»j TO slvoii o^ifjjtii. The Indicative Mode^ 
 ofivhich we fpeak^ by laying afide that Ajfertion^ which by 
 its nature it implies., quits the name of Indicative — when it 
 reajjiimes the AJJertion^ it returns again to its proper Cha- 
 ra£ier. Apoll. dc Synt. L. III. c. 2I. Theodore Gaza 
 fays the fame, Introd. Gram. L. IV. 
 
 (y) It may be obferved of the Interrogative, 
 that as often as the Interrogation Is f.mple and definite^ 
 the Refponfe may be made in almoft the j'ame Words, 
 
 L 4 by
 
 1-2 HERMES. 
 
 C.VIIT. But to return to our comparifon be- 
 tween the Interrogative Mode and the Re^ 
 
 qutftive. 
 
 The 
 
 by converting them into a fentence affirmative or nega- 
 tive, according as the Truth is either one or the other. 
 For example — Arethefe Verfes ^Horner ? — Refponfe— 
 Thefe Verfes are o/" Homer. Jre thofe Verfes of Virgil ? 
 — Refponfe — Thofe are not Verfes of V\rg\\. And here 
 the Artifts of Language, for the fake of brevity and 
 difpatch, have provided two Particles, to reprefent all 
 fuch Refponfesj Yes, for all the affirmative j No, for 
 all the negative. 
 
 But when the Interrogation is complex^ as when we 
 fay — Jre thefe Verfes o/" Homer, or of Virgil? — much 
 more, when it is indefinite^ as when we fay in general 
 — Whofe are thefe Verfes ? — we cannot then refpond 
 after the manner above mentioned. The Reafon is, 
 that no Interrogation can be anfwered by a fimple Tes^ 
 or a fimple As, except only thofe, which are themfelves 
 {o fimple, as of two poffible anfwers to admit only one. 
 T^ow the leaft complex Interrogation will admit of four 
 Anfwers, two affirmative, two negative, if not perhaps 
 of more. The reafon is, a complex Interrogation can- 
 not confift of lefs than two fimple ones ; each of which 
 irwybe feparately affirmed and feparately denied. For 
 
 inftance
 
 Book the First. 153 
 
 The Interrogative (in the Ian- C.VIIL 
 guage of Grammarians) has all Perfons 
 
 of 
 
 inftance — Ar£ thefe Verfes Homer's, or Virgil's ? (i.) 
 They are Homer* s — (2.) They are not Homer* s — (3.) 
 They are Virgil's — (4.) They are not Virgil's — we may 
 add, (5.) They are of neither. The indefinite Interro- 
 gations go ftill farther ; for thefe may be anfwered by 
 infinite affirmatives, and infinite negatives. For in- 
 ftance — TVhofe are thefe Verfes ? We may anfwer affir- 
 matively — They are Virgil's, They are Horace's, They 
 are Ovid's, ^c. — or negatively — They are not Virgil's, 
 They are tiot Horace's, They are tiot Ovid's, and fo on, 
 either way, to infinity. How then fhould we learn froni 
 a fingle Tes^ or a fingle A^, which particular is meant 
 among infinite Poffibles? Thefe therefore are Inter- 
 rogations which muft be always anfwered by a SenteJice. 
 Yet even here Cuftom has confulted for Brevity, by 
 returning for Anfwer only the fingle effential chaj-aSier- 
 yiic Word^ and retrenching by an Ellipfis all the reft, 
 which reft the Interrogator is left to fupply from himfelf. 
 Thus when we are afked — How many j-ight angles equal 
 the angles of a triangle ? — we anfwer in the ftiort mo- 
 nofyllable. Two j whereas, Vithout the Ellipfis, the 
 anfwer would have been — Two right angles equal the an' 
 gles of a triangle. 
 
 The
 
 154 H E R M E S. 
 
 C.VIII. of both Numbers. The Requisitive 
 or Imperative has no jirjl Perfon of 
 the fmgular, and that from this plain 
 reafon, that it is equally abfurd in Modes 
 for a perfon to reqiiejl or give commands 
 to himfelf, as it is in Projzouns, for the 
 fpeaker to become the fubjedl of his own 
 
 addrefs 
 
 * 
 
 Again, we may interrogate as to all 
 ^imesy both Prcfent, Paft, and Future. 
 Who WAS Founder ^ Rome ? Who is 
 King o/' China? Who will discover 
 the Longitude ? — But Intr eating and Com- 
 manding (which are the effence of the 
 
 Re- 
 
 The Antients diftinguifhed thefe two Species of In- 
 terrogation by different names. The fimple they called 
 '£f coT?),aa, Interrogatio ; the complex, uruV/Aa, Percon- 
 iatio. Jm7nonius calls the firft of thefe 'E^coT^iTij Six- 
 A«xl*5()i ; tlie other, 'E^cotho-j? 73-u(r/AaT»x>i. See j^jh. 
 in Lib. de Interpr. p. i6o. Dhg. Laert. VII. 66. 
 ^httil. Inji. IX. 2. 
 
 * Sup. p. 74, 75.
 
 Book the First. 155 
 
 Requifitive Mode) have a necelTary re- C.VIII. 
 fped to the Future [g) only. For indeed 
 
 what 
 
 (^) Jpolloniush Account of the Future, Implied in 
 all Imperatives, is worth obferving. 'Ettj yap y.Yi yi- 
 vofAivoig ri [AYj yiyovocriv r\ nP02TAHI2*T«J'£ fji.-n 
 yivoy-suoi ri ^-ri yiyovorccj iTriTri^eioTriTcn S'l s^ovrtx, slg 
 TO icrstr^cci, MEAA0NT02 sV*. A Command 
 has refpcSl to thofe things which either are not doings or 
 have not yet been done. But thofe things^ which being not 
 now doings or having not yet been done^ have a natural 
 aptitude to exiji hereafter^ may he properly faid to apper- 
 tain to THE Future. De Syntax!, L.I. c. 36. Soon 
 before this he fays — ' ATruvroi, roc Ts-pofaxlixa, ifycsiyAunv 
 s^ei rnv rs ^sAAofTo? dicx,^£<nv—~^riaou ya.p iv ktu Ef' 
 TO, 'O TTPANNOKTONH2A2 TIMA20X2, 
 Tw, TIMH0H2ETAI, xura t7\v ^povii 'ivvoixv' tt^ 
 iymXKTSi ^iTiXXoc^ogj >ta9o to [mIv zroos-ociilixovj to ^l 
 o^ifiKov. Jll Imperatives have a difpofition within 
 thern^ which rejpe£is the Future— tczV/^ regard there- 
 fore to Time, // is the fame thing to fay^ Let him, 
 
 THAT KILLS A TyRANT, BE HONOURED, ^r, HE, 
 THAT KILLS ONE, SHALL BE HONOURED ; the dif- 
 ference being only in the Mode^ in as much as one is Im- 
 PERATirE, the ether Indicative or Declarative, 
 Apoll. de Syntax!, L. I. c. 35. Prifcian feems to al- 
 low Imperatives a fhare of Prefent Time, as well as 
 jF^t^ire. But if we attend, we fhall find his Prefent to 
 
 be
 
 156 H E R M E S. 
 
 C.VIII. what have they to do with the prefent ar 
 the pafi:, the natures of which are immu- 
 table and neceflary ? 
 
 It 
 
 be nothing elfe than an Immediate Future, as oppofed to 
 a more diftant one. Imperativus vera Prafens is" Futu^ 
 rum [Tempus] natwali quadam necejjitate videtur pqffe 
 acdpere. Ea etenim imperamus, qua vel in prafenti Jia~ 
 iim volumus fieri fme aliqud dilatione^ vel infuturo. Lib. 
 VIII. p. 806. 
 
 It Is true the Greeks in their Imperatives admit cer- 
 tain Tenfes of the Paft, fuch as thofe of the Perfe£ium^ 
 and of the two Aorijls. But then thefe Tenfes, when 
 fo appUed, either totally lofe their te?nporary Character, 
 or elfe are ufed to infmuate fuch a Speed of execution, 
 that the deed ftiould be (as it were) done, in the very 
 inftant when commanded. The fame difference feems 
 to fubfift between our EngU/lo Imperative, Be gone, 
 and thofe others of, Go, or Be going. The firft (if 
 we pleafe) maybe ftiled the Imperative of the PerfeSlumy 
 as calling in the very inftant for the completion of our 
 Commands : the others maybe ftiled Imperatives of the 
 Future, as allowing a rcafonable time to begin firft, and 
 fmifli afterward. 
 
 It is thus Jpollonius, in the Chapter firft cited, diftin- 
 guifties between (rx«7rl£Tw ra? ajtATrsAaf, Go to digging 
 the Fines, and (rx«\|>oiTw raf djAiriXg^, Get the Fines 
 
 dug.
 
 Book the First. 157 
 
 It is from this connexion oi Futurity C.VIII, 
 with Commands, that the Future Indica- 
 tive is fometimes ufed for the Imperative, 
 and that to fay to any one. You shall 
 DO THIS, has often the fame force with 
 the Imperative, Do this. So in the 
 'Decalogue — Thou shalt not kill 
 —Thou shalt not bear false 
 
 WITNESS 
 
 dug. The firft is fpoken (as he calls it) £»? zs-apaxiZG-i!/, 
 by way of Extenfion^ or allowance of Time for the work ; 
 the fecondj lU (ruvTsXnua-iVy with a view to irmnediate 
 Completion. And in aiiother place, explaining the dif- 
 ference between the fame Tenfes, l,K0i7rj£ and Xxot^'ov, 
 he fays of the laft, a i^ovon to {At] y£]>6[ji.ii/ov Tsrpo^oicrtrn, 
 ceAAa >^ to yivofj.tvov iv TS-cipaTcca-ii dTrxyoPsvtiy that 
 it not only commands fo?nething^ ivhich has not been yet done^ 
 but forbids alfo that^ which is now doing in an Extenfton^ 
 that is to fay ^ in a flovj and lengthened progrefs. Hence, 
 if a man has been a long while writing, and we are wil- 
 ling to haften him, it would be wrong to fay in Greek^ 
 rPA$E, Write (for that he is kozc;, and has been 
 long doing) but TPA'FON, Get your writing 
 
 DONE ; MAKE NO DELAYS. ^QQ Apoll. L. III. C. 24. 
 
 See alfo Macrobius dcDIf. Verb. Gra:c.&Lat, p. 680. 
 Edit. Farior, Latini non fpjiimai'erunt^ &c.
 
 158 HERMES. 
 
 C.VIII. WITNESS— -which denote (we know) 
 the ftrideft and moft authoritative Com- 
 mands. 
 
 As to the Potential Mode, it is 
 diflingnifhed from all the reft, by its fub' 
 ordinate ov fubjimBive Nature. It is alfo 
 fl^rther diftinguifhed from the Requijitive 
 and Interrogative, by implying a kind of 
 feeble and weak Ajfertion, and fo becom- 
 ing in fome degree fufceptible of Truth 
 and Falihood. Thus, if it be faid po- 
 tentially, T^his may be, or, TZ^/j- might 
 have been, we may remark without ab- 
 furdity. It is true, or It isfalfe. But if it 
 be faid. Do this, meaning. Fly to Hea^ 
 ven, or. Can this be done ? meaning, to 
 fquare the Circle, we cannot fay in either 
 cafe, it is true or it is falfe, though the 
 Command and the Queftion are about 
 things impoffible. Yet ftill the Potential 
 does not afpire to the Indicative, becaufe 
 it implies but a dubious and conjeBural 
 9 Afiertion,
 
 Book the First. i^r^ 
 
 AfTertlon, whereas that of the Indicative C.VIII. 
 is abfolute, and without referve. 
 
 This therefore (the Indicative I 
 mean) is the Mode, which, as in all Gram- 
 mars it is the firft in order, fo is truly 
 firft both in dignity and ufe. It is this, 
 which publiihes our fublimeft percep- 
 tions ; which exhibits the Soul in her 
 pureft Energies, fuperior to the Imper- 
 fedion of defires and wants ; which in- 
 cludes the whole of Time, and its mi- 
 nuteft diftindiions -, which, in its various 
 Pajl Tenfes, is employed by Hiftory, to 
 preferve to, us the Remembrance of for- 
 mer Events j in its Futures is ufed by 
 Prophecy, or (in default of this) by wife 
 Forefight, to inftrud: and forewarn us, as 
 to that which is coming ; but above all 
 in its Prefent Tenfe ferves Philofophy 
 and the Sciences, by juft Demonftra- 
 tions to ellablifli necejfary Truth ; that 
 Truth, which from its nature only ex- 
 ids
 
 i6o HERMES. 
 
 C.VIII. ijh in the Prefenf -, which knows no di» 
 
 ' V ' flindtions either of Pafl or of Future, 
 
 but is every where and always invariably 
 
 one (/6). 
 
 Through 
 
 {h) See the quotation, Note {c) Chapter the Sixth. 
 Cum enim dicimus, Deus est, mn eu7n dicimus nunc 
 ejje^fedy &C. 
 
 Boeihius^ author of the fentiment there quoted, was 
 by birth a Roman of the firft quality ; by religion, a 
 Chriftian ; and by philofophy, a Platonic and Peripate- 
 tic ; which two Sedls, as they fprang from the fame 
 Source, were in the latter ages of antiquity commonly 
 adopted by the fame Perfons, fuch as Themi/iius^ Por- 
 phyry^ lamblkhus^ Ammonius^ and others. There were 
 no Se£ts of Philofophy, that lay greater Strefs on the 
 diftindtion between things exifting in Time and not in 
 Timt\ than the two above-mentioned. The Doftrine 
 of the Peripatetics on this Subjedl (fmce it is thefe that 
 Boethius here follows) may be partly underftood from 
 the following Sketch. 
 
 " The things, that exist in Time, are 
 " thofe whofe Exijhnce Time can measure. But if their 
 *' Exiftence may be meafured by Time, then there 
 *' may be afllimed a Time greater than the Exiftence 
 *' of any one of them, ^as there may be aiTumed a 
 *' number greater than the greateft multitude, that is 
 
 *' capable
 
 Book the First. lii 
 
 Through all the above Modes, with CVIII. 
 their refpedive Tenfes, the Verb being 
 
 con«. 
 
 "capable of being numbered. And hence it is . that 
 *' things temperary have their Exiftence, as it were If- 
 " mited by Time ; that they are confined within it, as 
 " within fome bound ; and that in fome degree or other 
 ** they allfubmit to its power., according to thofe com- 
 " mon Phrafes, that Time is a dejiroyer ; that things 
 *' decay through Time ; that men forget in Tiine^ and lofe 
 ** their abilities^ and feldom that they improve, or grow 
 " young, or beautiful. The truth indeed is. Time al~ 
 " ways attends ?Aotion. Now the natural efFed of Mo- 
 *' tion is to put fomething, which now is, out of that Jlatey 
 *' in which it now is, and fo far therefore to deftroy that 
 « ftate. 
 
 " The reverfe of all this holds with tHincJs that 
 " EXIST ETERNALLY. Thefe exift not in Time, be- 
 " caufe Time is fo far from being able to meafure their 
 " Exiftence, that no Time can be ajfumed, ivhicb their 
 " Exijience doth not furpafs. To which we may add, 
 *' that they_/tW none of its effe^s, being no way obnoxious 
 " either to damage or diiTolution. " 
 
 " To inftance in examples of either kind of Being. 
 " There are fuch things at this inftant, as Stortehengi 
 " and the Pyramids. It is likewife true at this inftant, 
 *' that the Diameter of the Jqiiare is commenfurabk 
 " xvith its fide. What then fhall we fay ? Was there 
 
 M " ever
 
 ,62 H E R M E i 
 
 C.VIII. confidered as denoting an Attribute^ 
 has always reference to fome Perfon, or 
 Substance. Thus if we fay, Went, or. 
 Go, or Whither goethy or. Might have gone, 
 we muft add a Perfon or Subftance, to 
 make the Sentence complete. Cicero 
 went ; Ccefar might have gone -, whither 
 rroeth the Wind? Go I I'hou I'raitor ! But 
 there is a Mode or Form, under which 
 Verbs fometimes appear, where they have 
 no reference at all to Perfons or Sub- 
 Itances. For example — I'd eat is pleafant ; 
 
 but 
 
 " ever a Time, when it was not incommenj'urahle^ as 
 " it is certain there was a Time, when there was no 
 " Stonehenge, or Pyramids ? or is it daily growing kfs 
 *' incojnnienfurahle^ as we are affured of Decays in both- 
 " thofe maily Structures ?" From thefe unc|iangeable 
 Truths, we may pafs to their Place, or Region ; to the 
 unceafmg Intelle6lion of the univerfal Mind, ever per- 
 fect, ever full, knowing no remiflions, languors, ds'r. 
 '^ttNat. Aujc. L. IV. c. 19. Metaph. L.XIV. c. 6, 7, 
 8, C), 10. Edit. Du Val. and Vol. I. p. 262. Note VII. 
 The following Paflage may deferve Attention. 
 
 Tav ya{ Noy o fxiv vceTv <Bri<^VKBV, i^ fxh voii'v o Jl j^ mi'^M, r^ 
 
 We". aXXa x^ 0UT05 i'litia rkwi;, aM fjih •nrfos-flSj ivrS to i^ vosTh 
 
 aei, »i OTavra vesiV, x, /uij aXXors aXXa. iS^-s i"n civ evTtXrj-aTci? i 
 
 vo^v at) »^ -nrivra, >^ a/*a. MaX. Tyr. DifT. XVH. p. iOl. 
 
 Ed. Lond.
 
 Book the First. 163 
 
 hut to f aft is whokfome. Here the Verbs, l^o C.VIII, 
 eat, and, T'o faft, ftand alone by them- 
 felves, nor is it requifite or even pradiica«. 
 ble to prefix a Perfon or Subftance. Hence 
 the Latin and modern Grammarians have 
 called Verbs under this Mode, from this 
 their indefinite nature. Infinitives. 
 SanBius has given them the name of Im- 
 perfonals ; and the Greeks that of 'ATdpe'fJi- 
 (pXToij from the fame reafon of their not 
 Jifcovering either Perfon or Number. 
 
 These Infinitives go farther. They 
 not only lay afide the character oi Attribu^ 
 ■tives, but they alfo alTume that oi Subjian- 
 tiveSi and as fuch themfelves become di- 
 ftinguifhed with their feveral Attributes, 
 Thus in the inilance above, Pleafant is the 
 Attribute, attending the Infinitive, To 
 Kat'y Wholefome the attribute attending the 
 Infinitive, T!o Fajl. Examples in Greek 
 and hatin of like kind are innumerable. 
 
 Duke & decorum eji pro patria mori. 
 Scire tuum nihil eft — 
 
 M 2 'O'J
 
 i64 HERMES. 
 
 C.VIII. 'O'J Kxr^civslv yap ^sivov, a.KK* a,i(TXP^i 
 
 The Stoics in their grammatical inqui- 
 ries had this Infinitive in fuch efleem, that 
 
 they 
 
 (i) It is from the Infinitive thus participating the 
 natrire of a Noun or Subftantive, that the beft Gram- 
 marians have called it fometimes 'Ovoy.x fn[/.oi,rniov, 
 A VERBAL Noun ; fometimes Oi/o/xa pVijaaro?, the 
 Verb's Noun. The Reafon of this Appellation is in 
 Grcc/c more evident, from its taking the prepofitive Ar- 
 ticle before it in all cafes; to y^oi(pnvy tx y^oi<l>nv, 
 Tw y^dfiiv. The fame conftrudion is not unknown 
 in Engl'tJJj. 
 
 Thus Spencer, 
 
 For not to have been dipt hi Lethe laksy 
 
 Could fave the Son o/" Thetis FROM TO die— 
 
 aTTo tS ^ocviiv. In like manner we fay, He did it, to 
 be rich, where we mull fupply by an EUipfis the Prepo- 
 fition, For. He did it, for to be rich, the fame as if 
 
 vi^eliad faid, He did it for gain '/i/fx« ts ■srXnTtTv, 
 
 iVfxa T8 v.i(>S-^t; in French^ pour s'enricher. Even 
 
 wlien we fpeak fuch Sentences, as the following, / 
 choofe TO PHILOSOPHIZE, rather than to be rich, 
 TO (piKo(7-o<p£iv (i^hou.cci, TiTTsp TO zjXnTiTvj thc lufini- 
 tivcs are in nature as much Accufatives, as if we were 
 to fay, I choofe philosophy rathir than Riches, rriv 
 
 I 
 
 i
 
 Book the First. 165 
 
 they held this alone to be the genuine C.VIII. 
 PHMA or Verb, a name, which they 
 denied to all the other Modes. Their rea- 
 foning was, they confidered the true ver- 
 bal charad:er to be contained fimpk and 
 tinmixed in the Infinitive ojily. Thus the 
 Infinitives, UsfiTrxre'iv, Ambulare, ^owaJk, 
 vn.t2,nfimply that energy, and nothing more. 
 The other Modes, befides exprefling this 
 tn^v^y,fuperadd certain AffeBions, which 
 refped: perfons and circumflances. Thus 
 Ambulo and Ambiila mean not fimply To 
 walk, but mean, I walk, and. Walk Thou, 
 
 M3 And 
 
 (p^Xoa-oipiav j3a?.o//.ai5 rtTnp tov ttAstov. Thus too 
 Prifcia?!, fpeaking of Infinitives — CuRRERE enijn eji 
 
 CURSUS J ^ SCRIBERE, ScRIPTURA; ^ LeGERE, 
 
 Lectio. Itaque frequenter &' Norninihus a^unguntur, 
 i^ aliis eafualibus^ more NQminwn \ id Perjius, 
 
 Sedpulcrmn eJi digito monjirari^ ^ dicier, hie eJi, 
 
 And foon after — Curn enim dice, Bonum est le- 
 GERE, nihil (dind fignifieo^ nifi, BoNA EST LECTIO. 
 L. XVIII. p. 1 1 30. See alfo Jpoll. L. I. c. 8. Gaza 
 Gram. L. IV. To ti XTrx^ii-A^xroVi i»tpy.a, If* ^n'^X'^^ 
 '5? y., T. A, 12
 
 i66 HERMES. 
 
 C.VIII. And hence they are all of them refolvable 
 into the hififiitive, as their Prototype, toge- 
 ther with fo?ne fentence or word, exprejjive 
 of their proper CharaBer. Ambulo, I walk ; 
 this IS, In die me ambulare, I declare my f elf 
 to walk . Arnkula, Walk T'hou -, that is, Impero 
 te ambulare, I ccinmand thee to walk ; and 
 fo With the Modes of every other fpecies. 
 Take away therefore the Ajfertion, the 
 Command, or whatever elfe gives a Cha- 
 raBer to any one of thefe Modes, and 
 there remains nothing more than the 
 MERE Infinitive, which (as Prifcian 
 fays) fignijicat ipfam rem, quam continet 
 Verhum (^). 
 
 The 
 
 {k) See JpoUon. L. III. 13. Ka6oAs zyciv zraprty- 
 fj.ivov ccTTo rivog x. r. A. See alfo Gaza, in the note 
 before. Igitw: a ConJlru6lione quoque Vim rei Verborum 
 (id ejl, Nomhns, quod fignijicat ipfam rem) habere Infi- 
 N I T I V u M pojjumtts digmfcere 5 res autem in Perfonas di- 
 {Iributay^f/V alios verbi motus. — Jtaque omnes modi in 
 ^i.'w, /(^ </?, Infinitivum, trarfumimtitr five refolvuntur. 
 Prifc. L. XVIII. p. 1 131. From thefe Principles 
 JpoUonius calls the Infinitive 'p-/)//,a ytuxwrarov, and 
 Prifcian, Vfrbum generate.
 
 Book the First. 
 
 The application of this Infinitive is 
 iomewhat iingular. It naturally coalefces 
 with all thofe Verbs, that denote any T^en- 
 dence, Dejirey or Volition of the Soul, but 
 not readily with others. Thus it is fenfe 
 as well as fyntax, to fay (Shxoixoli ?v]v, Cu- 
 pio vivere, I dejire to live ; but not to fay 
 'EffO/w ^vjy, Edo vivere, or even in Eng- 
 lijb, I eat to live, unlefs by an Eliiplis, 
 inftead of I eat for to live -, as we fay 
 hsY-CL Td ^vjv, or four vivre. The rea- 
 fon is, that though different ASl ions may 
 unite in xht fame SubjeB, and therefore 
 be coupled together (as v/hen we fay. He 
 walked and difcourfed) yet the Actions 
 notwithftanding remain feparate and di- 
 ftindl. But it is not fo with refpc<fl to 
 Volitionsy and ABions. Here the coalef- 
 cence is often fo intimate, that the Voli- 
 tion is unintelligible, till the ABion be 
 expreft. Cupioy Volo, Defidero — I dejire, 
 J am willing, J wafit — What ? — The fen- 
 tences, we fee, are defedlive and imperfedl. 
 
 M 4 We
 
 i68 HERMES. 
 
 C.VIIL We muft help them then by Infinitives ^ 
 which exprefsthe proper A(ftions to which 
 they tend. Cupio legere, Volo difcere, De- 
 fidero videre, I de/ire to read, I am willing 
 to live, I want to fee. Thus is the whole 
 rendered complete, as well in fentiment, 
 as in fyntax (/), 
 
 And fo much for Modes, and their fe- 
 veral Species. We are to attempt to 
 denominate them according to their moft 
 eminent characters, it may be done in the 
 following manner. As every neceffary 
 truth, and every demon ft rati ve fyllogifm 
 (which lafl is no more than a combina- 
 tion of fuch truths) mufl always be ex- 
 prefb under pofitive aiTertions, and as po- 
 
 litive 
 
 %M^I       ■'■' " '   I ■»■■■■■ I 1^.1   ^M— ^M I I i Ml 1 ^ 
 
 (/) Prifc'ian calls thefe Verbs, which naturally pre- 
 cede Infinitives, Verba Voluntativa ; they are called in 
 Greek Ylpoon^c-n-ad. See L. XVIII. 1129. but more 
 particularly fee yipollomus^ L. III. c, 13. where this 
 whole doftrine is explained with great Accuracy. See 
 slfo Macrohius de Dif. Verb. Gr. Iff Lat. p. 685. Ed. 
 Far. 
 
 6j— iVtt- omne d7roi^iy-<p»rov cii'ictivqiie Ver'bo^ &c.
 
 'Book THE First. 169 
 
 fitive alTertions only belong to the hidi- C.VIII. 
 cative, we may denominate it for that rea- 
 fon the Mode of Science (/;;). Again, 
 as the Potential is only converfant about 
 Contingents, of which we cannot fay v/ith 
 certainty that they will happen or not, we 
 may call this Mode, the Mode of Con- 
 jecture. Again, as thofe that are ig- 
 norant and would be informed, mufl alk 
 of thofe that already know, this being the 
 natural way of becoming 'Proficients -y 
 hence we may call th^ Inter rogati've, the 
 Mode of Proficiency. 
 
 Jnter ciinSfa leges, & per.contabere 
 
 do&os, 
 ^a ratione queas traducere leniter aimmy 
 ^id pure tranquillet, &c. Hor. 
 
 Farther ftill, as the higheft and moft ex- 
 cellent ufe of the Requijitive Mode is le- 
 
 giflative 
 
 (m) Oh mbilitatem pntivit IndicatIvus, folus Ado- 
 dus aptus Scientiis^ folus Pater Vaitatis. Seal, de Cauf. 
 L. Lat. c. 116.
 
 173 HERMES. 
 
 C.VIII. giilative command, we may ftile it for this 
 reafon THE Mode ofLegislature.^^^ 
 Dhos adeunto cajUy fays Cicero in the cha- 
 racter of a Roman law-giver -, Be it there^ 
 fore enadiedy fay the laws of England', and 
 in the fame Mode fpeak the laws of every 
 other nation. It is alfo in this Mode 
 that the geometrician, with the authority 
 of a legiflator, orders lines to be bifecft- 
 ed, and circles defcribed, as preparatives 
 to that fcience, which he is about to efla-» 
 ^lilh. 
 
 There are other yi//'/>^^aire6lions of 
 Verbs, fuch as 'Number and Ferfon, But 
 thefe furely cannot be called a part of 
 their elTence, nor indeed are they the 
 effence of any other Attribute, being in 
 fadt the properties, not of Attributes, but 
 of Subftances. The moil that can be 
 faid, is, that Verbs in the more elegant 
 languages are provided with certain ter- 
 minations, which refpedl the Number and 
 Ferfon of every SubfantivCy that we may 
 
 know
 
 Book THE First* i^l 
 
 know with more precifion, in a complex C.VIII. 
 fentence, each particular fubftance, with 
 its attendant verbal Attributes. The fame 
 may be faid of Sex^ with refpedl to Ad- 
 je<5tives. They have terminations which 
 vary, as they refpedt Beings male or fe- 
 male, tho' Subjla'nces pafl difpute are alone 
 fufceptible of fex [n). We therefore pafs 
 over thefe matters, and all of like kind, 
 
 as 
 
 {n) It is fomewhat extraordinary, that fo acute and 
 rational a Grammarian as Sar.Siiu;^ fliould juftly deny 
 Genders, or the diftindtion of Sex to Ad}e5lrjes^ and yet 
 make Perfons appertain, not to Su}>/iantives^h\xt to Verbs. 
 His commentator Perizonius is much more confiftent, 
 who fays — At veroji rem re6fe confideres^ ipjis Nominibus 
 i^ Pronomlnihus vel inaxirrie^ imb unice inejl ipfa Perjona ; 
 i^ Verba fe habent in Perfonarum rat'ione ad Nomina plane 
 ficidi Adjeiiiua in ratione Gcnerum ad Suhjiantiva^ qiiibus 
 Jolis alitor (Sandlius fcil. L. I. c. 7.) ^ re£ie Genus ad- 
 Jcribit^ exdufn Aije£2ivis. Sandt. Minerv. L. I. c. 12. 
 There is indeed an exadl Analogy between the Acci- 
 dents of Sex and Per/on. There are but two Sexes^ that 
 is to fay, the Male and the Female ; and but two Per- 
 fons (or Characters efiential to difcourfe) that is to fay, 
 the Speaker, and the Party addreffed. The third Sex 
 and third Perfon are improperly fo called, being in fail 
 ^ut Negations of the other twc^,
 
 172 HERMES, 
 
 C. Vni. as being rather among the elegancies, thao 
 the clTentials {g) of language, which ef- 
 fentials are the fubjed; of ourprefent in- 
 quiry. The principal of thefe now re- 
 maining is THE Difference of Verbs, 
 
 AS TO THEIR SEVERAL SpECIES> which 
 
 we endeavour to explain in the following 
 manner. 
 
 (<j) Whoever would fee more upon a fubjedl of im- 
 portance, referred to in many parts of this treatife, axxd 
 particularly in note (/;) of this chapter, may confult 
 Letters concernhig Mind, an Octavo Volume published 
 1750, the Author Mr. 'JohnPetvin^ Vicar of Ilfmgton 
 in Devon^ a perfon vv^ho, though from his retired fitua- 
 tion little known, was deeply (killed in the Philofophy 
 l)oth of the Antients and Moderns, and, more than 
 this, was valued by all that knew him for his virtue zpA 
 worth. 
 
 CHAP.
 
 00 K THE First. tyj 
 
 CHAP. IX. 
 
 Concerning the Species of Verbs , and their 
 , other refaaining Properties. 
 
 ALL Verbs, that are ilridly (o called, Ch.IX. 
 denote [a) Energies. Now as all 
 Energies zx^ Attributes, they have reference 
 of courfe to certain energizing Subjiances. 
 Thus it is impoffible there Ihould be fuch 
 Energies, as T^o love, tojiy, to 'wound, &c* 
 if there were not fuch beings as Men^ 
 Birds, Swords, &c. Farther, every Ener- 
 gy doth not only require an Energizer, 
 but is necefTarily converfant about fome 
 SubjeB, For example, if we fay, Brutus 
 loves'-^WQ. mufl needs fupply — leves Cato^ 
 
 CaJJiuSf 
 
 ^a) We ufe this word Energy, rather than Motim, 
 from its more comprchcnfive meaning ; it being a fort 
 pi Genus, which includes within it both ATnJon and j^> 
 
 PrhatisHt See before, p. 94^ 95,
 
 t74 HER M E S. 
 
 Ch.IX. Cajius, Portia, or fome one. The Sword 
 wounds — i, e. wounds HeSlor, Sarpedon, 
 Priam, or fome one. And thus is it, that 
 every Energy is necefTarilylituate between 
 two Subftantives, an Energizer which is 
 aEiive, and a Subjedl which is pajive. 
 Hence then, if the Energizer lead the 
 fentence, the Energy follows its charac- 
 ter, and becomes what we call a Verb 
 ACTIVE. — Thus we fay Brutus amaf, 
 Brutus loves. On the contrary, if the paf- 
 live Subjed: be principal, it follows the 
 charad:er of this too, and then becomes 
 what we call a Verb passive. — Thus 
 we fay, Portia amatur, Portia is loved. 
 It is in like manner that ihe^fame Road be- 
 tween the fummit and foot of the fame 
 mountain, with refped: to the fummit is 
 jifcent, with refpe(5t to the foot is T)efcent, 
 Since then every Energy refpeds an Ener- 
 gizer or a paiiive Subjed: ; hence the Rea- 
 fon why every Verb, whether adive or 
 paflive, has in language a neceifary re- 
 7 ference
 
 Book the First. iy^ 
 
 ference to fome Noim for its Nomtjtative Ch.IX. 
 
 But to proceed flill farther from what 
 has been already obferved. Brutus loved 
 Portia, — Here Brutus is the Energizer ; 
 loved, the Energy -, and Portia, the Sub^ 
 je5l. But it might have been, Brutm 
 loved Cato, or CaJJius, or the Roman Re- 
 public-, for the Energy is referable to 
 Subjeds infinite. Now among thefe infi- 
 nite Subjed:s, when that happens to occur, 
 which is the Energizer alfo, as when we 
 fay Brutus loved himfslf, flew himfelf, &c. 
 in fuch Cafe the Energy hath to th^fame 
 being a double Relation, both ad:ive and 
 pafiive. And this it is which gave rife 
 
 among 
 
 (^b) The do6lrine of Imperfonal Verbs has been juflly 
 rejected by the beft Grammarians, both antient and mo- 
 dern. See Sanif. Mm. L. I. c. 12. L. III. c. i. L. IV. 
 c. 3. Pri/cian, L. XVIII. p. 1 134. JpoIL L. III. fub fin. 
 In which places the reader will fee a proper Nominative 
 fupplied to all Verbs of this ilippofed Ch^radler.
 
 176 H E R M E S. 
 
 Ch.IX. among the Greeks to that fpecies of Verbs, 
 called Verbs middle (^), and fuch was 
 their true and original ufe, however in 
 many inftances they may have iince hap- 
 pened to deviate. In other languages 
 the Verb ftill retains its adive Form, and 
 the paffive Subjecft ffe or himfelfj is ex-^ 
 prelied like other acculatives. 
 
 Again, in fome Verbs it happens that 
 the Energy always keeps within the Ener- 
 gizer, and never pajfes out to any foreign 
 extraneous Subje(5t. Thus when we fay, 
 Ccefar walketh, Ccefarfitteth, it is impoffi- 
 
 ble 
 
 (^) Ta yap xxXii[xivx fxte-oTrtrcq y^'/i^a,Ta. o-jve^*- 
 
 T/je Vtrbs^ called Verbs middle^ admit a Coincidence of the 
 a£iive ayul pajjlve CfiaraSler. ApoUon. L. III. c. 7. He. 
 that would fee this whole Do6lrine concerning the pow- 
 er of THE MIDDLE VERB explained and confirmed 
 with great Ingenuity and Learning, may confult a fmall 
 Treatlfe of that able Critic Kujier^ entitled, De vera 
 XJfu Verbonan Mcdiorim. A neat edition of this fcarce 
 piece has been lately publifhed.
 
 BobK tut FiHsT. iyy 
 
 ble f&e Rnergy Piould pafs out (as in the Ch.IX. 
 cafe of thofe Verbs called by the Gram- 
 marians Verbs transitive) becaufe 
 both the Energizer and the FaJJive Sub- 
 jeEi are united in the fame Per/on, For 
 what is the caufe of this walking or fit- 
 ting ? — It is the Will and Vital Powers 
 belonging to Ccefar. And what is the 
 Subject, made fo to move or to fit ? 
 it is the Body and Limbs belonging alfo to 
 the fame Cafar. It is this then forms that 
 fpecies of Verbs, which grammarians have 
 thought fit to call Verbs neuter, as if 
 indeed they were void both of A5iio7i and 
 PaJJion, when perhaps (like Verbs middle) 
 they may be rather faid to imply both. Not 
 however to difpute about names, as thefe 
 Neuters in their Energizer always difcover 
 their paj/ive SubjeSl (c), which other 
 
 Verbs 
 
 (c) This Chara6ter of Neuters the Grcchs very hap- 
 pily exprefs by the Terms, 'AuT07ra9na and ^l^iOTrocQsicc^ 
 which Prifcian renders, qua ex fe in fcipfd fit intrivfecus 
 ■Pajjw, L. VIII. 790, Conjentn An G^udPutfch. p. 205 1. 
 
 N It
 
 178 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.IX. Verbs cannot, their paffive Subjects being 
 infinite; hence the reafon why it is as fu- 
 perfluous in thefe Neuters to have the 
 Subjed: expreffed, as in otherVerbs it is ne- 
 ceflary, and cannot be omitted. And thus 
 it is that we are taught in common gram- 
 mars 
 
 It may be here obferved, that even thofe Verbs, called 
 Aiytives^ can upon occafion lay afide their tranfitive che- 
 raiieri that is to fay, can drop their fubfequent Accu- 
 iative, and ajfunie the Form of Neuters, fo as to ftand by 
 themfelves. This happens, when the Difcourfe refpedls 
 the mere Energy or Affeol'ion only, and has no regard to 
 the Subject, be it this thing or that. Thus we fay, ax 
 il^iv dvayivucTJCin/ ^To^, This Mtm hioivs not hew to read, 
 fpeaking only of the Energy, m which we fuppofe him 
 deficient. Had the Difcourfe been upon the Subjedls of 
 reading, wc muft have added them, hk oi^sv avocyt- 
 v'^a-y.siv 7X '0/^tip«, He knoivs not haiv to read lionicry 
 or Virgil, or Cicero, &:c. 
 
 Thus Horace, 
 
 ^n cupiT aut METUIT, juvat ilium fic domus 
 
 aut res, 
 Ut Uppion piP.a: tabula • v 
 
 He that DESIRES or fears (not this thing In parti- 
 cular HOJF that, but in general he within wiioie breaft 
 
 thefc
 
 5ooK THE First, ij<^ 
 
 kiars that Verbs ABive require an Accu- Ch.lX. 
 faHve, while Neuters require none. 
 
 Of the above fpecies of Verbs, the 
 Middle cannot be called necejlTary, becaufe 
 mofl languages have done without it. 
 The Species of Verbs therefore re-* 
 maining are the Active, the Passive 
 and the Neuter^s and thofe feem eJifen- 
 tial to all languages whatever {d). 
 
 N 2 There 
 
 thefe affeilions prevail) ha$ the fame joy in a Hoiife or 
 Ejiate^ as the Man with had Eyes has in fine Picinres. So 
 C(efar in his celebrated Laconic EpilYle of, Veni, Vi- 
 Di, Vicij where two Adives we iee follow one Neu- 
 ter in the fame detached Form, as that Neuter itfelf. 
 The Glory itfeems was in the rapid Sequel of the Event', . 
 Conqiieft came as quick, as he could come himfelf, and 
 look. about him, JVhornht faw, and ivho^n he conquer- 
 ed, was not the thing, of which he boafted. See Jp^it, 
 L. III. c. 31. J). 279. 
 
 {d) The Stoics, in their logical view of Verbs, as 
 making part in Propofitions, coHlidcrcd them under the 
 four following Sorts,
 
 i8o HERMES- 
 
 Ch.IX. There remains a remark or two far- 
 ther, and then we quit the Subjedt of 
 Verbs. It is true in general that the 
 greater part of them denote Attributes of 
 
 Energy 
 
 When a Verh^ co-inciding with the Nominative of 
 feme Noun^ made zvithout farther help a perfedl aflertive 
 Sentence, as Zw^^am? •zcj^ tTraTf?, Socrates walketh j 
 then as the Verb in fuch cafe implied the Power of a 
 perfedt Predicate, they called it for that reafon Karn- 
 ycp7\i^cc, a Predicable j or elfe, from its readinefs o-u/a- 
 Ca^vitVf to co-incide with its Noun in completing the Sen- 
 tence^ they called it Zu^Ca^a, a Co-incider. 
 
 When a Verh was able with a Noun to form a per- 
 fect aflertive Sentence, yet could not aflbciate with fuch 
 Noun, but under fome oblique Caff-) as IIux^octh [mto»- 
 p.£A£t, Socratem pa^nitet : Such a Verb, from its near 
 approach to jujl Co-incidence^ and Predication^ they called 
 n«^«(rujtA^«jw,« or Tlac^oiyioiTnyo^ri[xoc.> 
 
 When a Verb, though regularly co-inciding with a 
 Noun in its Nominative,^?;// required^ to complete the 
 Sentiment, fo7}ie other Noun under an oblique Cafe, as 
 IlKoiru]) (piXBT Aioovocj Plato loveth Dio, (where without 
 Di<i or fome other, the Verb loveth would reft indefi- 
 nite:)
 
 Book the First. iS{ 
 
 Energy and Motion. But there are feme Ch.IX, 
 which appear to denote nothing more, 
 than a mere Jimple AdjeSfive, joined to an 
 AfTertion. Thus hcL^ei in Greek, and 
 Bqualleth in Englifi, mean nothing more 
 
 N 3 than 
 
 nite : ) Such Verb, from this Defeat, they called nr\o\> 
 n (rv[A^x[ji.oc,j or n axTnyo^yif^ccy fomething lep than a Co- 
 incid(T.^ or lefs than a Predkahle, 
 
 Laftly, when a Verb required two Nouns in oblique 
 Cafes, to render the Sentiment complete j as when we 
 fay 2wxp«T£t 'AAxj^jaVs? ^iKHy Tcsdet me Vita, or the 
 like : Such Verb they called tjtIoi^, or gAarlov ^ ra-a/ja- 
 cvj^^oiy-Xy or h zyapccuxTriycpniJ-cc, fomething lefs than 
 an imperfeSl Co^incider, or an imperfe^ Predicable. 
 
 Thefe were the Appellatiayis which they gave to 
 Verbs, when employed along with Nouns to the form- 
 ing of Propofitions. As to the Name of THMA, or 
 Verb, they denied it to them all, giving it only to the 
 Infinitive^ as we have (hewn already. See page 164. 
 See alfo Ammon. in Lib. de Interpret, p. 37. ApoUon, 
 de Syntaxi, L. I. c. 8. L. III. c. 31. p. 279. c. 32, 
 p. 295. Thcod. Gaz. Gram. L. IV. 
 
 From the above Doflrine it appears, that all Ferbs 
 Neuter are 1v{a^^[a<x}<k i V^rhi Adive, ^t7«v5c r^ g-u^w.-
 
 t^Z H E R M E S. 
 
 Ch.IX. than :acQ eqh ^^ e.jual. So Albeo in Latin 
 no more than aibus fum. 
 
 f—Campique ingentes qffikis albenf, Virg. 
 
 The fame may be faid of Tumeo, Mons 
 tiimety i, e. tiimidmefly is f timid. To ex- 
 prefs the Energy in thefe inflances, v/c 
 muft have recourfe to the Inceptives. 
 
 Flucfus uti pri?no ccefit cum albescere 
 Vento, Virg, 
 
 ~r- — — Freta pontl 
 
 Incipimit agitata tumescere. Virg. 
 
 There are Verbs alfo to be found, 
 which are formed out of Nouns. So that 
 as in Ahjlra^ Nouns (fuch as Whitenefi 
 from Whitey Goodnefs from Good) as alfo 
 in the Infinitive Modes of Verbs, the Attri- 
 butive /; coijverfed into a Subjiantive ; here 
 the Subfiantive on the contrary is converted 
 into an Attributive. Such are Y^m^wj from 
 Ht/'^v, to a£i the part of a Dog, or be a Cy- 
 nic ;
 
 Book the First. .183 
 
 nic; ^I'^iTTTrl^siV from ^ihiTrT©^, to Philip- Ch.IX. 
 pizCf or favour Philip ; Syllaturire from 
 Sylla, to meditate aSlijig the fame part as 
 Sylla did. Thus too the wife and virtuous 
 Emperour, by way of counfel to himfelf 
 — opflc jULV) f^To^JCiO'fit/JwOjJf, beware thou beef 
 not bec^sar'd I as though he fiid, Be^ 
 ware, that by being Emperor, thou doft not 
 dwindle into a mere C.^sar (^). la 
 like manner one of our own witty Poets, 
 
 Sternhole himfelf he Out-SterNt 
 
 HOLDED. 
 
 And long before him the facetious F idler, 
 fpeaking of one Morgan, a fanguLnary Bi- 
 ihop in the Reign of Queen Mary, lays 
 of him, that he out-bqnner'd even 
 Bonner himfelf^. 
 
 And fo much for that Species of 
 Attributes, called Verbs in the 
 strictest Sense. 
 
 (£■) Alarc. Antonin. L. VI. § 30. 
 * Church Hift. B,Vip. p.21. 
 
 N 4 CHAP.
 
 i84 HERMES. 
 
 CHAP. X. 
 
 Concerning thofe other Attributives^ 
 Participles and AdjeSiives, 
 
 Ch. X. ^TpHE nature of Verbs being under- 
 •*- flood, that of Participles is no 
 way difficult. Every complete Verb is 
 expreffive of an Attribute -, of Time -, and 
 of an AJ/ertion, Now if we take away 
 the AJ/ertion, and thus deftroy the Ferb, 
 there will remain the Attribute and the 
 Time^ which make the eilence of a Par- 
 ticiple. Thus take away the AfTer- 
 tion from the Verb, T^k(^si, Writeth, and 
 there remains the Participle, r/);c$cov,^r/>- 
 2«^, which (without \\iQ Affertion ) denotes 
 the fame Attribute y and the fame Time. 
 After the fame manner, by withdrawing 
 the Afertion, we difcover Y^k-\cL(; in ''Ey/3(5t- 
 4f> Fpctlwv in Tpk-^ei, for we chufe to re- 
 fer to the Greeky as being of all languages 
 2 the
 
 Book the First. 185 
 
 the moft complete, as well in this refpedt, Ch. X. 
 as in others. 
 
 And fo much for Participles («). 
 
 The 
 
 (a) The Latins are defeilive in this Article of Par- 
 ticiples, Their Active Verbs, ending in or, (com- 
 monly called Deponents) have Aftive Participles of all 
 Times (fuch as Loquens, Locutus, Locuturus) but none 
 of the Paffiye. Their Aftives ending in O, have Parti- 
 ciples of the Prefent and Future (fuch as Scriberis, and 
 Scripturus) but none of the Paft. On the contrary, 
 their Paffives have Participles of the Paft (fuch as Scrlp- 
 tus) but none of the Prefent or Future, unlefs we ad- 
 mit fuch as Scribendus and Docendiis for Futures, vi^hich 
 Grammarians controvert. The vi^ant of thefe Partici- 
 ples they fupply by a Periphrafis — for T'pavpaf they fay, 
 cum fcripfijfet — for y^a^o/Ajvo?, dum fcribitur, &c. In 
 EngliJJj v/e have fometimes recourfe to the fame Peri- 
 phrafis ; and fometimes v/e avail ourfelves of the fame 
 Auxiliars, vi^hich form our Modes and Tenfes. 
 
 The Englijh Grammar lays dow^n a good rule with 
 refpedt to its Participles of the Paft, that they all ter- 
 minate in D, T, or N. This Analogy is perhaps lia- 
 ble to as few Exceptions, as any. Confidering there- 
 ipit ho>v Uttle Analogy of any kind we have in our 
 
 Lan-
 
 i86 HER M E S. 
 
 Cli.X. The nature of Ferh and Parficipks 
 being underftood, that of Adjectives 
 becomes eafy. A Verb implies (as we 
 have faid) both an Attribute, and I'ime, 
 and an Ajfcrtion ; a Participle only implies 
 2Xi Attribute, and T/>;;^; and an Adjec- 
 tive only implies an Attribute, that is to 
 fay, in other Words','^*!!*' Adjective /6^j 
 no Ajfertion, and only denotes fuch an At^ 
 tribute, as has not its effmce either in 
 Motion or its Privation, Thus in genera! 
 the Attributes of quantity, quality, and 
 relation (fuch as jnany znd few, ^reaf and 
 
 little. 
 
 Language, it feems wrong to annihilate the few Traces, 
 that may be found. It would be well therefore, if zjX 
 writers, who endeavour to be accurate, would be care- 
 ful to avoid a corruption, at prefent fo prevalent, of fay- 
 ing, // ivas wrote^ for, it luas ivritten ; he was drove^ for, 
 he was driven ; / have tvenf^ for, / have gone. Sec. in all 
 which inftances a Verb is abfurdly ufed to fupply the 
 proper Participle, without any neceflity from the want- 
 of fuch Word.
 
 Book the First. i^y 
 
 little y Mack and white, good?.nA bed, double, Ch. X. 
 treble, quadruple, &c.) are all denoted by 
 Adjectives. 
 
 It muft indeed be confefTed, that feme-' 
 times even thole Attributes, which are 
 wholly foreign to the idea of Motion, af- 
 fiime an affertion, and appear as Verbs, 
 Of fuch v^^e gave inftances before, in 
 alheo, tumeo, hd^o:, and others. Thefe 
 however, compared to the reft of Verbs, 
 are but few in number, and may be call- 
 ed, if thought proper, Verbal AdjeBives. 
 It is in like manner, that Participles in- 
 fenfibly pafs too into Adjedives. Thus 
 docius in Latin, and learned in Englijl:, 
 lofe their power, as Participles, and mean 
 a Perfon pofTefled of an habitual Quality, 
 Thus Vir ehqiiens means not a man noiv 
 f peaking, but a man, who pqffej/es the ha-' 
 bit of fpeaking, whether he fpeak or no. 
 So v/hen we lay in Englijl:, he is a think-- 
 ???^-Man, an underjlanding Man, we mean 
 pot a perfon, whofe mind is /// aBnal 
 
 Energy,
 
 i88 HERMES. 
 
 Ch. X. Energy i but whofe J7iind is enriched with a 
 larger portioji of thofe powers. It is Indeed 
 no wonder, as all Attributives are homo- 
 geneous, that at times the feveral fpecies 
 fhould appear to interfere, and the dif- 
 ference between them be fcarcely percep- 
 tible. Even in iiatural fpecies, which 
 are congenial and of kin, the fpecific 
 difference is not always to be difcerned, 
 and in appearance at leaft they feem to 
 run into each other. 
 
 We have fhewn already (^) in the In- 
 ilances of ^{KiTTn'^nv, Syllafurire, 'Ato- 
 «^/fl-apw0;iva/, and others, how Subjian" 
 tives may be transformed into Verbal At- 
 tributives, We fliall now fliew, how 
 they may be converted into AdjeBives, 
 When we fay the party of Pompey, the 
 ftile of Cicero, the philofophy of Socrates, 
 
 in 
 
 {b) Sup. p. 182, 183.
 
 Book the First. iS^ 
 
 in thefe cafes the party, the ftile, and the Ch. X. 
 philofophy fpoken of, receive a ftamp 
 and chara<5ler from the perfons, whom 
 they refpe(ft. Thofe perfons therefore 
 perform the part of Attributes, that is, 
 flamp and characterize their refped:ive 
 Subjed:s. Hence then they a6iually pafs 
 into Attributes, and affume, as fuch, the 
 form of AdjeSiives. And thus it is we 
 fay, the Fompeian party, the Ciceronian 
 'flile, and the Socratic philofophy. It is 
 in like manner for a trumpet cf Brafs, 
 we fay, a brazen Trumpet ; for a Crown 
 of Gold, 2. golden Crown, &c. Even Prono- 
 minal Subftantives admit the like muta- 
 tion. Thus inftead of faying, the Book 
 of Me, of T'hee, and of Him, we fay. My 
 Book, Thy Book, and His Book ; inflead 
 of faying the Country o/" Uj-, of Ton, and 
 of Them, we fay. Our Country, Tour 
 Country, and Their Country, which 
 Words may be called fo many Fronom^ 
 nal AdjeBivcs. 
 
 It
 
 tg^ HER M £ ^, 
 
 Ch. X. It has been obfervcd already, and mufi 
 needs be obvious to all, that Adjedives^ 
 as marking Attributes, can have no 
 fex (c). And yet their having termina- 
 tions conformable to the fex, number^ 
 and cafe of their Subftantive, feems to 
 have led grar:marians into that flrange 
 abfurdity of ranging them with Nouns^ 
 and feparating them from Verbs, tho' 
 with refped: to thefe they are perfediy* 
 homogeneous; with refped to the others, 
 quite contrary. They are homogeneous 
 with refped to Verbs, as both forts de- 
 note Attributes ', they are heterogeneous 
 with refped: to Nouns, as ?iever properly 
 denoting Siih fiances. But of this we have 
 fpoken before (^/), 
 
 tn; 
 
 &c. 
 
 [c] Sup. p. 171. 
 {d) Sup. C. VI. Note (^). See alfo C. III. p. 28,
 
 Book the First, 191 
 
 The Attributives hitherto treated, Ch.X« 
 that is to %, Verbs, Participles, 
 and Adjectives, may be called Attri- 
 butives OF the first Order. The 
 reafon of this name will be better under- 
 flood, when we have more fully difcufled 
 Attributives of the second Or- 
 PER, to which we now proceed in the; 
 following chapter. 
 
 <;• H A p.
 
 192 HERMES. 
 
 CHAP. XI. 
 
 Concerning Attributives of the fecojid 
 
 Order, 
 
 Ch.XI. A S the Attributives hitherto men- 
 Jr\. tioned denote the Attributes of 
 Subjiances, fo there is an inferior clafs of 
 them, which denote the Attributes only of 
 Attributes. 
 
 To explain by examples in either kind 
 —when we fay, Cicero and Pliny were both 
 ofthe?n eloquent; Statius and Virgil both of 
 them wrote-, in thefe inflances the Attribu- 
 tives, eloquent, and wrote, are immediately 
 referable to the fubftantives, Cicero, Virgil, 
 &c. As therefore demoting the Attri- 
 BUTESopSuESTANCESjWe call them At- 
 tributives OF THE FIRST OrDER. But 
 when we (^.y, Pliny was moderately eloquent, 
 but Cicero exceedingly eloquent-, Statius wrote 
 indifferently, but Virgil^ wrote admirably -, 
 
 in.
 
 Book the First. 193 
 
 in thefe inftances, the Attributives, Mo~ Ch.XI. 
 derately, Exceedingly, Indifferently , Ad- 
 fnirably, are not referable to Subjiantivesy 
 but to other Attributives, that is, to the 
 words, 'Eloquent, and Wrote. As there- 
 fore denoting Attributes of Attributes, we 
 call them Attributives of the se- 
 cond ORDER. 
 
 Grammarians have given them the 
 Name of 'EyrippviiioCTOi, Adverbia, Ad- 
 verbs. And indeed if we take the word 
 'Pyjfia, or, Ferb, in its mofl comprehenfive 
 Signification, as including not only Verbs 
 -properly fo called, but alfo Participles and 
 Adjectives [an ufage, which may be jufli- 
 iied by the bell authorities [a)'] we fhall 
 
 find 
 
 [a) Thus Arijiotle in his Treatife de Interpretatlone, 
 inftances ''A^G^wttoj as a Noun, and Aeujco? as a Verb. 
 So Ammonius — Y.a.Toi t5to to <ry)fji.onv6f/.£vov, to [Av 
 KAA02 >i AIKAIOS >^ 'Uoc TOi«uT«— -'PHMATA 
 A£y£(r9«t x) aV 'ONOMATA. A cording to this Signi- 
 fication (that is of denoting th? Attributes of Subftance 
 
 O and
 
 194 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.XI. find the name, ETr/pl^Viixciy or Adverb, to 
 be a very juft appellation, as denoting a 
 Part of Speech, the natural Ap- 
 pendage OF Verbs. So great is this 
 dependence in Grammatical Syntax, that 
 an Adverb can no more fubfift without its 
 Verb, than a Verb can fubiifl without its 
 Subjiantive. It is the fame here, as in 
 certain natural Subjedis. Every Colour 
 for its exiftence as much requires a Su- 
 perficies, as the Superficies for its ex- 
 iftence requires a folid Body [b). 
 
 Among 
 
 and the Predicate in Propofitions) the words^ Fair, 
 Just, and the like^ are called Verbs, and not Nouns. 
 Am. in lihr. de Interp. p. 37. b. Ariji. de Jnterp. L. I. 
 c. I. See alfo of this Treatife, c. 6. Note (^) p. 87. 
 
 In the fame manner the Stoics talked of the Parti- 
 ciple. Nam Participium connumerantes Verbis^ 
 Participiale Verbum vocabant vel Qasuale. 
 Prifcia7i^ L. I. p. 574. 
 
 [b) This notion of ranging the Adverb under the fame 
 Genus zuith the Verb (by calling them both Attributives) 
 and of explaining it to be the Verb's Epithet or Adjedlive 
 
 (by
 
 Book the First. 195 
 
 Among the Attributes of Subflance are Ch.XT. 
 reckoned Quantities, and Qualities. Thus 
 we fay, a white Garment, a high Mountain, 
 Now fome of thefe Quantities and Qu^ali- 
 ties are capable of Intenlion, and Remif- 
 fion. Thus we fay, a Garment exceed- 
 ingly white-, a Mountain tolerably 
 
 O 2 highy 
 
 (by calling It the Attributive of an Attributive) is con- 
 formable to the beft authorities. Thecdore Gaza defines 
 an Adverb, as follows — jm.£^o? A&ya a7r7wToi/, ytxrd 
 priy.XTOi; XsyofxEVov, n i7nXiyofj.svov ^t^axiy >^ oiov 
 iTrl^srou prij^aTog. A Part of Speech devoid of Cafes^ 
 predicated of a Verh^ or fubjoined to it^ and being as it were 
 the VerFs AfjeSiive. L. IV. (where by the Avay we 
 may obferve, how properly the Adverb is made an Jp- 
 tote^ fmce its principal fometimes has cafes, as in Valde 
 Sapiens \ fometimes has none, as in Falde amat.) Prif 
 dan's definition of an Adverb is as follows — Adver- 
 BIUM eft pars orationis indeclinabilisy cujm ftgnificatio Ver- 
 bis adficitur. Hoc enim perfcit Adverbium Verbis additum, 
 quod adjcdliva nomina appellativis nominibus adjunSla j nt 
 prudens homo ; prudenter egit ; fellx Vir ; feliciter vi- 
 vit. L. XV. p. 1003. And before, fpeaking of the 
 Stoics, he fays — Etiam Adverbi a Nominibus vel Ver- 
 bis CONNUMERABANT, & quajl ADJECT IV A VeRBO- 
 
 RUM nominabant. L. I. p. 574. See aifo y^j//. de Synt, 
 L. I. c. '^.fiibfin.
 
 196 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.XI. high, or moderately high. It is plain 
 therefore that Intenfion and Remiilion are 
 among the Attributes of fuch Attributes. 
 Hence then one copious Source of fecon- 
 dary Attributives, or Adverbs, to denote 
 thefe two, that is, Intenjion, and Remiffion, 
 The Greeks have their ^avikCiqiZc, (j^clKigoL, 
 'md.v'o, vivLfgci ; the Latins their valde, vebe» 
 menter^ maxime, fatisy mediocriter ; the 
 "Bnglijly their greatly y vajllyy extremely, 
 fufficientlyy moderately y tolerably y indiffer-* 
 ently, 6cc. 
 
 Farther than this, where there are 
 different Intenfions of the fame Attribute, 
 they may be co??ipared together. Thus if 
 the Garment A be exceedingly WhitCy 
 and the Garment B be moderately 
 White y we may fay, the Gar?77e?it A is 
 more lohite than the Garment B. 
 
 In thefe inftances the Adverb More 
 not only denotes Intenfion, but relative 
 Intenfion, Nay we flop not here. Wc 
 
 not
 
 Book the First. 197 
 
 nx)t only denote Intenfion ?jierely relative Ch.XI, 
 hut relative IntenfioUy than ivhich there is 
 none greater. Thus we not only fay the 
 Mountain A is more high than the Moim'- 
 tain B, but that it is the most high of all 
 Mountains, Even Verbs y properly fo called, 
 as they admit Jimple Intenfions, fo they 
 admit alfo thefe comparative ones. Thus 
 
 in the following Example Fame he 
 
 LOVETH MORE than Riches, but Virtue of 
 all thinq-s he loveth most — the Words 
 
 o 
 
 MORE and most denote the different 
 comparative Intenfions of the Verbal At- 
 tributive, Loveth, 
 
 And hence the rife of Comparison, 
 and of its different Degrees ; which can- 
 not well be more, than the two Species 
 above mentioned, one to denote Simple 
 Excefs, and one to denote Superlative, 
 Were we indeed to introduce more degrees 
 than thefe, we ought perhaps to introduce 
 jnfnite, which is abfurd. For why ftop 
 at a limited Number, when in all fubjedls, 
 
 O 3 iuf-
 
 198 H E R M E S. 
 
 Ch.XI. fufceptlble of Intenlion, the Intermediate 
 Exceffes are in a manner infinite ? There 
 are infinite Degrees of 7nore White, be- 
 tween thtjirji Simple White, and the aS^^- 
 ferlative, Whitefi ; the fame may be faid 
 of more Great, more Strong, more Minute, 
 &c. The Docftrine of Grammarians about 
 three fuch Degrees, which they call the 
 Poiitive, the Comparative, and the Su- 
 perlative, muft needs be abfurd ; both be- 
 caufe in their Pofitive there is -f- no Com- 
 parifon at all, and becaufe their Superla- 
 tive is a Comparative, as much as their 
 Comparative itfelf. Examples to evince 
 this may be found every where. Socrates 
 was the most wise of all the Athenians — 
 Homer was the most sublime of all 
 Poets,—' 
 
 — Cadit etRipheus, justissimus unus 
 ^lifuit in T'eucris^ Virg. 
 
 It 
 
 t <^^ (fii^' Gradus Pofitivls) quoniam perfe5iui ejiy 
 a quibuftlam in numero Graduum nan compiitatur. Coii- 
 fentii Ars apud Putfch. p. 2022,
 
 Book the First. 199 
 
 It muft be confefTed thefe Compara- Ch.XI. 
 tives, as well xhtjimple, as the, J up er lathe, 
 feem. fometimes to part with their re- 
 lative Nature, and only retain their in^ 
 tenjive. Thus in the Degree, denoting 
 Jimple Excefs, 
 
 Triftior, et lacrymis oculos fuffufa ni" 
 te?2tes. Virg* 
 
 Rufticior paulo eji — Hor. 
 
 In the Superlative this is more ufual. 
 Vir doStiJjimus, Vir fortijfmius , a ?noJl learn- 
 ed Man, a moji brave Man, — that is to fay, 
 not the bravejl and mojl learned Man, that 
 ever exifled, but a Man pofTeffing thofe 
 Qualities in an e77iinent Degree, 
 
 The Authors of Language have con- 
 trived a method to retrench thefe Compa- 
 rative Adverbs, by expreffing their force 
 in the Primary Attributive. Thus in- 
 ftead of More fair, they fay Fairer ; in- 
 ilead oi Mojlfair, Fairest, and the fame 
 
 O 4 holds
 
 200 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.XI. holds true both in the Greek and Latin, 
 This Pradice however has reached no 
 farther than to AdjeSfiveSy or at leaft to 
 Participles, fiaring the nature of Adjec- 
 fives. Verbs p,erhaps were thought too 
 much diverfified already, to admit more 
 Variations without perplexity. 
 
 As there are fome Attributives, which 
 admit of Comparifon, fo there are others, 
 which admit of none. Such for example 
 are thofe, which denote that ^ality of 
 Bodies arifng from their Figure ; as when 
 we fay, a Circular Table, a ^adrangular 
 Court, a Conical Piece of Metal, ^c. The 
 reafon is, that a million of things, partici- 
 pating the fame Figure, participate it equals 
 ly, if they participate it at all . To fay there- 
 fore that while A and B are both quadran- 
 gular), A is more or lefs quadrangular than 
 E, is abfurd. The fame holds true in all 
 Attributives, denoting definite ^antitieSy 
 whether contiyiuous or difcrete, whether ab^ 
 folute or relative. Thus the two foot Rule 
 
 A
 
 Book the First. 2or 
 
 A cannot be more a two-foot Rule, than any Ch.XI. 
 other of the fame length. JWf/z/j/ Lions 
 cannot be more twenty than twenty Flies, 
 If A and B be both triple, or quadruple to 
 C, they cannot be more triple , or more qua^ 
 drufle, one than the other. The reafon 
 of all this is, there can be no Comparifon 
 without Intenjion mid RemiJ/ion ; there 
 can be no Intenfion and Remiffion in 
 things always definite-, and fuch are the 
 Attributives, which we have laft men- 
 tioned. 
 
 In the fame reafoning we fee the caufe, 
 why no Suhfiantive is fufceptible of thefe 
 Comparative Degrees. A Mountain can- 
 not be faid more to Be, or to Exist,, 
 than a Mole-hill, but the More and Lefs 
 mull be fought for in their Quantities. 
 In like manner v/hen we refer many In- 
 dividuals to one Species, the Lion A can- 
 not be called 7nore a Lion, than the Lion 
 B, but if more any thing, he is more fierce, 
 more fpeedy, or exceeding in fome fuch 
 Attribute. So again, in referring many 
 
 Species
 
 202 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.XI. Species to one Genus, a Crocodile is not 
 more an Animal, than a Lizard 3 nor a 
 Tiger, more than a Cat, but if any thing, 
 they are more bulky, more firongy &c. the 
 Excefs, as before, being derived from 
 their Attributes. So true is that faying 
 of the acute Stagirite — that Substance 
 is not fiifcef title ^^More and Less [c). 
 But this by way of digreffion ; to return 
 to the fubjedl of Adverbs. 
 
 Of the Adverbs, or fecondary x'^ttribu- 
 tives already mentioned, thefe denoting 
 Intenfion or Remiffion may be called K^- 
 \txhsoi ^antity continuous; Once, T'wice, 
 'Thrice, are Adverbs of ^antity difcrete ; 
 More and Mofi, Lefs and Leaji, to w^hich 
 may be added Equally, Proportionally, &c, 
 
 are 
 
 {^Cj S>t OCV ITTlde^ClTO V iS(TlX TCI fXa-AAOV Hy TO VTIOV, 
 
 Categor. c. 5. See alfo San£?iuSj L. I. c. 11. L. II. 
 c. 10, II. where the fubjeft of Comparatives is treated 
 in a very mafterly and philofophical manner. See alfo 
 Pr';fcian^ p. 598, Derivantur igitur Co?nparatha a No- 
 minibus Aijeilivisj Sec. 5
 
 Book the First. 203 
 
 are Adverbs of Relation, There are Ch.XI. 
 others of §luality, as when we fay. Ho- 
 nestly indtijirious , Prudently brave ^ 
 they fought bravely, -6^ painted finely, 
 a Portico formed Circularly, a Plain 
 cut Triangularly, <S?^. 
 
 And here it is worth while to obferve, 
 how the fame thing, participating the 
 fame EfTence, afTumes different gramma- 
 tical Forms from its different relations. 
 For example, fuppofe it fhould be afked, 
 how differ Honejiy Honeftly, and Honejiy, 
 The Anfwer is, they are in Ejfence the 
 fame, but they differ, in as much as Ho^ 
 nefi is the Attributive of a Subfa?2tive ; 
 Honejily, of a Verb ; and Honefy, being 
 divefted of thefe its attributive Relations, 
 affumes the Power of a Subjiantive, fo as 
 to ftand by itfelf. 
 
 The Adverbs, hitherto mentioned, are 
 common to Verbs of every Species ; but 
 
 there
 
 204 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.XI. there are fome which are peculiar to Verh 
 properly fo called, that is to fay, to fuch as 
 denote Motion or Energy, with their Pr/*- 
 vtitions. All Motion and Rest imply 
 Time and Place, as a kind of neceflary 
 Coincidents, Hence then, if we would 
 exprefs the Place or ^i7ne of either, we 
 muft needs have recourfe to the proper 
 Adverhs ; of Place, as when we fay, he 
 flood there ; he went hence 3 he travel- 
 led FAR, &c, : of TCime, as when we fay, he 
 Jiood then ', he went afterward -, he 
 travelled FORWLERLY, &c. Should it be 
 
 aiked -why Adverbs of T^ime, when 
 
 Verbs have T^enfes f The Anfwer is, tho' 
 Tenfes may be fufficient to denote the 
 greater Diflindlions of Time, yet to de- 
 note them all by Tenfes would be a per- 
 plexity without end. What a variety of 
 Forms, to denote Tejlerday, To-day, I'o- 
 tnorrow. Formerly, Lately, fuji now, 
 Isow, Immediately, Prcfently, Soon, Here- 
 after, &c. ? It was this then that made 
 
 the
 
 Book the First. 205 
 
 the Temporal Adverbs neceiTary, over and Ch.XI. 
 above the 'Tenfes. 
 
 To the Adverbs jufl mentioned may be 
 added thofe, v^^hich denote the Intenfions 
 and RemiJJions peculiar to Motion^ fuch as 
 fpeedily, hajlily y fwiftly ^ Jlowly t &c. as alfo 
 Adverbs of Place, made out of Prepoji-' 
 t'tonsy fuch as ctvw and ziiw from km and 
 v-OLiOL, in 'Englijh upward and downward^ 
 from up and down. In fome inflances the 
 Prepolition fuffers no change, but be- 
 comes an Adverb by nothing more than 
 its Application, as when we fay, circa 
 e quit at, he rides about; prope cecidity 
 he was ii^A,R falling -, Veriim ne post 
 confer as ciilpam in me. But do not after 
 lay the blame on me {d)» 
 
 There 
 
 (d) Sofip. Charlfn Inji* Gram. p. 170. Terent. Earn 
 Aa. II. Sc. 3.
 
 2o6 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.XI. There are VikcwiCc ^^veri>s of Liter- 
 rogation^ fuch as Where, Whence, Whi~ 
 ther. How ; of which there is this re- 
 markable, that when they lofe their //?- 
 terrogative power, they aflume that of a 
 Relative, fo as even to reprefent the 
 Relative or Subjun&ive Pronoun, Thus 
 Ovid, 
 
 Et Seges ejl, vbi T^roja fuit^^ 
 
 tranllated in our old Englifi Ballad, 
 
 And Corn doth grow, where I'roy town 
 Jlood, 
 
 That is to fay, Seges efi in eo loco, in quo, 
 ^c, Corngroweth in that place, I'H which, 
 &c. the power of the Relative, being im- 
 plied in the Adverb. Thus 1'erence, 
 
 Htijufmodi raihi res femper comminifcere, 
 \Jbi me excarnujices-^ Heaut. IV. 6. 
 
 where ubi relates to res, and flands for 
 
 qitibus rebus^ 
 
 It
 
 Book the First. ^07 
 
 It is in like manner that the Relative Ch.XI. 
 Pronoun upon occafion becomes an hi- 
 terrogative, at leaft in Latin and 'Englijld, 
 Thus Horace, 
 
 QuEM Virum aut Hero a lyrd, vel acrl 
 Tibia fmnes celebrare, Clio .^ 
 
 So Milton, 
 
   W HO ^rjlfeducd them to that foul re- 
 volt ? 
 
 The reafon of all this is as follows. 
 
 The Pronoun and Adverbs here mentioned 
 
 are all alike, in their original charafter. 
 
 Relatives. Even when they become 
 
 Interrogatives, they lofe not this charac- 
 
 ter, but are fbill Relatives, as much as 
 
 ever. The difference is, that without an. 
 
 Interrogation, they have reference to a 
 
 Subjed:, which is antecedent, definite, and 
 
 known ', with an Interrogation, to a Sub- 
 
 je(5l which isfubfequent, ifidefi?iite, 2^x16. im- 
 
 known.
 
 2o8 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.XI. blown, and which it is expeded that the 
 Anfwer fliould exprefs and afcertain, 
 
 Who Jirjl feduc'd them ?— — 
 
 The very Queflion itfelf fuppofes a Sedu- 
 cer, to which, tho' unknown, the Pro- 
 noun, Who, has a I'eference, 
 
 jT/^' infernal Serpent   
 
 Here in the Anfwer we have the SubjeSf, 
 which was indefinite, afcertained -, fo that 
 the Who in the Interrogation is (w^ fee) 
 as much a Relative, as if it had been faid 
 originally, without any Interrogation at 
 all. It was the Infernal Serpent, who 
 firft feduced them. 
 
 And thus is it that Inferrogatives and 
 Relatives mutually pafs into each other. 
 
 And fo much for Ad verbs, peculiar to 
 Verbs properly fo called. We have al- 
 ready fpoken of thofe, which are common 
 to all Attributives. We have likewife at- 
 4 tempted
 
 Book the Fjrst. 209 
 
 tempted to explain their general Nature^ Ch.XI. 
 which we have found to confift in being 
 the Attributes of Attributes, There re- 
 mains only to add, that Adverbs may be 
 derived from almoft every Fart of Speech ; 
 from Prepositions, as when from After 
 we derive Afterwards— -^vom Partici- 
 ples, and through thefe from Verbsy as 
 when from Know we derive Knowing, and 
 thence Knowingly ; from Sclo, Helens, and 
 thence Scienter — from Adjectives, as 
 when from Virtuous and Vicious, we de- 
 rive Vlrttwiify and Vlcloujly — from Sub- 
 stantives, as when from n/6>^^t©^, a7i 
 Ape, we derive Hi^y^-aeio'j (^'ksireiv, to look 
 Apishly ; from Ahv, a Lion, Afcvrco- 
 ^ooc, Leonlnely — nay even from Proper 
 Names, as when from Socrates and De- 
 mojlhenes, we derive Socratlcally and De-^ 
 piojlhenlcally . It was Socratlcally reafoned, 
 we fay J It was De?nofhenlcally fpoken^, 
 . P Of 
 
 * J'pjloile has KujcAcTrixwj QdopkalI)\ from Ku>iAwi|/ 
 a Cydops. Eth. Nic. X. 9.
 
 213 HER M E S. 
 
 Ch.Xr. Of the fame fort are many others, cited by 
 the old Grammarians, fuch as Catiliniter 
 from Cdtitna, Sijenniter from Sifenna, 
 T^uUidiie from Tullius, &c. [e). 
 
 Nor are they thus extenfiveonly inZ)^- 
 rivation, but in Signification alfo. T^beodor^ 
 Gaza in his Grammar inform.s us (y), 
 that Adverbs may be found in every 
 one of the Predicaments, and that the 
 readieil v^ay to reduce their Infinitude, 
 was to refer them by claffes to thofe ten 
 univerfal Genera. The Stoics too called 
 the Adverb by the name of YLcL'^livuvfi, 
 and that from a viev^ to the fame multi- 
 fovjn Nature. Omnia in fe capit quafi col- 
 lata per fatiram, concejfd fibi rerum varid. 
 pQtefiate. It is thus that Sofipater explains 
 
 the 
 
 (£-) See Pr-jc. L. XV. p. i022. SoJ. Charif. i6i, 
 I^dit. Ptitfchii. 
 
 rtiv yivvi Oic^ai £>t£;wa, na-iau, isodv, •nroffevj Tsrcgi x^y 
 X. T. A. Gram. Introd. L. II,
 
 Book the First. 211 
 
 the Word {g)j from whofe authority Ch.XI. 
 we know it to be Stoical, But of this 
 enough. 
 
 And now having nnifhed thefe prin- 
 cipal Parts of Speech, the Substan- 
 tive and the Attributive, which are 
 significant when alone, we pro- 
 ceed to thofe auxiliary Parts, which 
 are only significant, when asso- 
 ciated. But as thefe make the Subjedl 
 of a Book by themfelves, we here con- 
 clude the iirft Book of this Treatife. 
 
 is) ^°fiP' Char-.'ip, 175. Edit. Putfchiu 
 
 P 2 HER-
 
 [ 213 ] 
 
 HERMES 
 
 OR A PHILOSOPHICAL INQLJIRY 
 
 CONCERNING UNIVERSAL GRAMMAR. 
 
 B O O K IL 
 
 \ 
 
 C H A P L 
 
 Concernmg Definitives. 
 
 WHAT remains of our Work, Ch.L 
 is a' matter of lefs difficulty, 
 it being the fame here, as in 
 fome Hiftorical Pid:ure ; when the prin- 
 cipal Figures are once formed, it is an 
 eafy labour to defign the reil. 
 
 P 3 De.
 
 214 H E R M E S. 
 
 Ch. I. Definitives, the Subjedt of the pre- 
 fent Chapter, are commonly called hy 
 Grammarians, Articles, Articuli, 
 ''Ap^pci. They are of two kinds, either 
 thofe properly and JlriSily fo called, or elfe 
 the FronomiJial Articles, fuch as This, 
 That, Atiy, &c. , 
 
 We fhall firfl treat of thofe Articles 
 more Jlri5ily fo denominated, the reafon and 
 ufe of which may be explained, as fol- 
 lows. 
 
 The Tifible and individual Subflances 
 of Nature are' infinitely more numerous, 
 than for each to admit of a particular 
 Name. Tofupply this d'efed, when any 
 Individual occurs, which either wants a 
 proper Name, or whofe proper Name is 
 not known, we afcertain it, as well as 
 we can, by referring it to itb Specieji; 
 or, if the .'Species be unknown, then at 
 
 leaA
 
 Book the Second. 215 
 
 leafb to fome Genus. For example — a Ch.I. 
 certain Objed: occurs, with a head and 
 limbs, and appearing to pofTefs the pow- 
 ers of Self-motion and Senfation. If we 
 know it not as an Individual, we refer 
 it to its proper Species, and call it Do<r, 
 or Horje, or Lion, or the like. If none 
 of thefe Names lit, we go to the Genus, 
 and call it, AnimaL 
 
 But this is not enough. The Thing, 
 at which we are looking, is neither a Spe- 
 cies, nor a Genus. What is it then ? An 
 Individual . — Of what kind ? Kno^^on, or 
 unknown ? Seen nov/ for the jirjl time, 
 or feen before , and now remembered?— 
 It is here we iliall difcover the ufe of the 
 two Articles (A) and (The). (A) re- 
 fpedts our primary Perception, and de- 
 notes Individuals as unknown -, (The) 
 refpe(5ts our fecondary Perception, and 
 denotes Individuals as known. To ex- 
 plain by an example — I fee an objedt pafs 
 
 P 4 ' bv.
 
 ii6 M E R M E S. 
 
 Ch.I. by, which I never faw till now. Wha€ 
 do I fay ? — ^bere goes a Beggar with a 
 long Beard. The Man departs, and re- 
 turns a Week after. What do I fay then ? 
 ——T'here goes the Beggar with the long 
 Beard. The Article only is changed, the 
 reft remains unaltered. 
 
 Yet mark the force of this apparently 
 minute Change. The Individual, once 
 vague, is now recognized as fomething 
 known, and that merely by the efficacy of 
 this latter Article, v/hich tacitly inlinu- 
 ates a kind of previous acquaintance, by 
 referring the prefent Perception to a like 
 Perception already pad (^). 
 
 The Truth is, the Articles (A) and 
 (The) cire both of them definitives, as 
 they circumfcribe the latitude of -Genera 
 and Species, by reducing them for the 
 
 mofl 
 
 {a) See B. I, c. 5, p. 63, 64,
 
 Book the Second. 217 
 
 moft part to denote Individuals. The Ch.I. 
 difference however betv^^een them is this ; 
 the Article (A) leaves the Individual itfelf 
 nnafcertained, whereas the Article (The) 
 efcertains the Individual alfo, and is for 
 that reafon the more accurate Definitive 
 of the two. 
 
 It is perhaps owing to the imperfed: 
 manner, in which the Article (A) de- 
 fines, that the Greeks have no Article 
 correfpondent to it, but fupply its place, 
 by a negation of their Article, 'O. 'O 
 avOpcoTT©^ fWfo-fv, The man fell — av- 
 ^p:o7r^ tTCScsv, A Man fell, without any 
 thing prefixed, but only the Article with- 
 drawn {b). Even in Englijlj, where the 
 
 Article 
 
 (^) Ta yap dopifu^cog zjots voH^ivecy ri ra as^px 
 ZTOcp<x.^s(Tii; VTr& o^kt^aov th ZT^ocooini ccyu, Thofe things, 
 ivhkh are at times underjiood indefinitely, the addition of 
 the Article makes to be definite as to their Perfon. Apoll, 
 L.IV. c, I. See of the fame author, L. I. c. 6, 36. 
 
 lira***"
 
 2i8 HERMES. 
 
 Ch. I. Article (A) cannot be uTed, as in pliU 
 rals, its force is expreft by the fame Ne- 
 gation. T'/jofe are the Me-n^ means thofe 
 are Individuals, of which we pofTefs fome 
 frevious Knowledge. I'hoje are Men, the 
 Article apart, means no more than that 
 they are fo many 'vague and uncertain In- 
 dividuals, juft as the Phrafe, A Man, in 
 the fingular, implies one of the fame 
 number. 
 
 But 
 
 Ta lu Tw <ru»T«^Jt* oTov h [mv Xiyoi rif, AN0PX2IIO2^ 
 HKE, a,S-/\Xov rivx ecv^^uiirov Xiysi. U ^l O AN- 
 0PI2IIO2, ^>iAov, -uT^aiyvxc-iJLivov yocp rivoc auv^ccTrov 
 ^iyu, Taro S\ auro jSaAovrat Kj oi <px(rn<ivrig r u^- 
 Bpov a-n(jt,ciVT iKov zc^oitti? yvu}riwi; k^ SiVTs^ctg. The Arti^ 
 cle caufes a Revieiu ivithin the Mind offomething known 
 lefore the texture of the Difcourfe. Thus if any one 
 fays ''A^0^W7r(^ viy.h Man came (luhich is the fame, 
 as when we fay in Englifh A 7nan came) it is not evident^ 
 of whom he fpeaks. But if he fays o ocv^wtt^ vixe. 
 The man came, then it is evident ^ for he fpeaks of 
 fome Perfon known before. And this is what thofe mean^ 
 who fay that the Article is cxprejfwe of the Firfl and Si- 
 cond Knowledge together. Thcod. Gazae, L. IV.
 
 Book the Second, 21^ 
 
 But tho' the Greeks have no Article Ch.L 
 correfpondent to the Article (A,) yet 
 nothing can be more nearly related, than 
 their 'O, to the Article, The. *0 PccdiKsiJi, 
 The King; TO Mpov, The Gift, &c. 
 Nor is this only to be proved by parallel 
 examples, but by the Attributes of the 
 Greek Article, as they are defcribed by 
 Apollonhis, one of the earliell and mod 
 acute of the old Grammarians, now re- 
 maining. 
 
 t^iov oip^p'j^v y} dvccCpopoi, vi igi '^poy.ciTSihey^ 
 {iiv8'^po<7(^7ni 'zccipagciTiK'/i.'^Now t/je pecu- 
 liar Attribute of the Article, as we have 
 Jhewn elfcwhere, is that Reference, which 
 i?nplies fome certain Perfon already men^ 
 tioned. Again — -'Oy yap ^^iye id ovQixtf^ioi 
 
 €^ ci'JTi^V oiviX.(pOpOiV '^CipiqV]GlVy d fJLVJ (S'J{X7rCi^ 
 
 pci}^ci^oisv TO oipQpov, s i^ca'peToc ec;iv vi (ivci(pQ' 
 fd. For Nouns of themf elves imply not 
 
 Re- 
 
 7
 
 220 HERMES. 
 
 Ch. I. "Reference, unlefs they take to them the Ar^ 
 tick, whofe peculiar Character is Reference. 
 Again — To ff.p^^ov '^poiJ(p£g(2(TOLV yvuaiv ^v[ldt 
 — The Article indicates a pre-ejtablijhed 
 acfiuaintance {f). 
 
 His reafoning upon Proper Names is 
 worth remarking. Proper Names (he 
 tells us) often fall into Homonymie, that 
 is, different Perfons often go by the fame 
 Name. To folve this ambiguity, we have 
 recourfe to Adje5iives or Epithets, For 
 example — there were two Grecian chiefs, 
 who bore the name oi Ajax. It was not 
 therefore without reafon, th.?i\. Menejiheus 
 ufes Epithets, when this intent was to 
 diftinguifli the one of them from the 
 other. , 
 
 'A A Ace 
 
 (f) j^poll. de Synt. L. I. c. 6, 7. His account of 
 Reference is as follows — ^l^iufAO. dvcc<po^ug -zirpoKx- 
 TnAf y^t'i/a -nrpofrwTra Sivripot. yvuariq. The peculiar chn- 
 rocier of Reference is the fecond or repeated Knowledge of 
 fomc Perfon already inentioncd, L. II. c. 3.
 
 Book the Second. 22j 
 
 A/'ccc. Horn. 
 
 Jf both Ajaxes (fays he) cannot be fpared, 
 
 at leqji alone 
 Let mighty Telajnonian Ajax come, 
 
 Apollonhis proceeds Even Epithets 
 
 themfelves are difFufed thro' various Sub- 
 jedls, in as much as the fame Adje(5tive 
 may be referred to many Subllantives. 
 
 In order therefore to render both Parts 
 of Speech equally definite, that is to fay 
 the Adjedlive as well as the Subflantive, 
 the Adje6tive itfelf affumes an Article be- 
 fore it, that it may indicate a Reference to 
 fome Jingle Per/on only, \kQVc^ivy[ oivoi(pcpx, 
 according to the Author's own Phrafe. 
 And thus it is we fay, T/s-j^wv b TpdiifxciT)- 
 Jtof, Trypho the Grammarian -, AtcoI^Kq- 
 ^wp(SP 6 Ki'p^jvar©^, Apollodorus the Cyre- 
 nean^ &c. The Author's Conclufion of 
 
 this
 
 f^n/y 
 
 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.I. this Sedion is worth remarking. Afcv- 
 
 TS CtpOpa, ffVVihd^iKTX to l7n^STlv2v TO) Kup/w 
 
 cvcfxoLTi' — /^ /j' w//>6, reafon therefore that 
 the Article is here alfo added, as it brings 
 the AdjeBive to an Individuality , as precife, 
 as the f roper Name (^), 
 
 We may carry this reafoning farther, 
 and fhew, how by help of the Article 
 even common Appellatives come to have 
 the force of proper Names, and that un- 
 affifled by epithets of any kinds. Among 
 the Athenians Tlkmov meant ^hip 3 "Ev^fjtiZ, 
 Eleven -, and ''AvOpwri^, Man. Yet add 
 but the Article, and To U'koTov, the Ship, 
 meant that particular Ship, which theyfent 
 annually to Delos ; 'O; "Ev Jg^t^c, theeleven, 
 meant certain Officers of fujiice -, and 'Q 
 ''AvfipccT^, THE MAN, meant their public 
 'Executioner . So in 'Engliflo, City, is a 
 
 Name 
 
 [d) See Apoll. L. I. c. 12. where by miftake Mem-i 
 Jaus is put for Menejikeus.
 
 BooktheSeconp, 
 
 Name common to many places; and Ch.I^ 
 Speaker, a Name common to many Men, 
 Yet if we prefix the Article, the City 
 means our Metropolis; and the Speak- 
 er, ^ high OJicer in the Briiijh Parlia- 
 ment. 
 
 And thus it is by an eafy tranfitlon, 
 that the Article, from denoting Reference, 
 comes to denote Eminence 2\ioi that is to 
 fay, from implying an ordinary pre-ac^ 
 quaintance, to prefume a kind of general 
 and univerfal Notoriety, Thus among 
 the Greeks 'O ITo^^itvj?, the poet, meant 
 Homer {e) ; and 'O XraysipiTvi^, the sta- 
 GiRiTE, meant Arijiotle -, not that there 
 
 were 
 
 {e) There are fo few exceptions to this Obfervation, 
 that we may fairly admit it to be generally true. Yet 
 4r'iftotle twice denotes Ermpide^ by the Phrafe o -JCotJilii?', 
 once at the end of the feventh Book of his Nicomach'ian 
 Ethics^ and again in his Phyfics^ L. II. 2. Plato alfa 
 in his tenth Book of Laws (p. 901. Edit. Serr.Jdmiot'^y 
 Hefiod after the feme manner.
 
 224 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.I. were not many Poets, belide Homer; and 
 many Stagirites, htddtAriJiotk; but none 
 equally illuftrious for their Poetry ^nd 
 Philofophy, 
 
 It is on a like principle that Ariftotk 
 tells us, it is by no means the fame thing 
 to all'ert — ehai tvjv vi^ovviv oLya^^lv, or, TO 
 GiyMj — that, Pleafure is a Good, or. 
 The Good, The firfl; only makes it a 
 common ObjeB of Dejire, upon a level 
 with many others, which daily raife 
 our wifhes ; the laft fuppofes it that fu- 
 freme and fovereign Goody the ultimate 
 Scope of all our A(5tions and Epdea^ 
 TOurs (/). 
 
 But to purfue our Subjed, It has beem 
 faid already that the Article has no mean^ 
 ing, but when affociated to fome other 
 word. — To what words then may it be 
 aiTociated ? — To fuch as require definingy 
 
 for 
 
 (/) Analyt. Prior. L. I. c. 40.
 
 Book the Second. 225 
 
 for it is by nature a Defotitive.' — And Ch.I. 
 *what Words are thefe ? — Not thofe which 
 already are as definite, as may be. Nor 
 yet thofe, which, being indefinite , cannot 
 -properly be made other wife. It remains 
 then they muft be thofe, which though in^ 
 definite, are yet capable, through the Arti- 
 cle, of becoming definite. 
 
 Upon thefe Principles we fee the reafon, 
 why it is abfurd to fay, O Em, The I, or 
 O ^T, The Thou, becaufe nothing can 
 make thofe Pronouns more definite, than 
 they are (^). The fame may be alTerted 
 
 of 
 
 (^) Apollonhis makes it part of the Pronoun's Defi- 
 nition, to refufe co-alelcence with the Article, '''^■a.zivq 
 
 ^ou.ivov, w 24 (Tui/ffi TO aoO^ov. That therefore is a Pro- 
 noun^ which with Indication or Reference is put for a 
 Noun^ and WITH which the Article doth 
 KOT ASSOCIATE. L. II. c. 5. So Gaza, fpeaking of 
 Pronouns — Ucciflr, SI — aV. iTriSi^ovjcci oi^^^ov. L. IV. 
 Prifcian fays the fame. Jure igitiir apud Gnscos prima 
 
 Q. et
 
 2z6 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.I. of Proper Names, and though the Greeks 
 fay 6 Sicxpi^iT'^f, v\ Zd'^^iTTTr^j and the like, 
 yet the Article is a mere Pleonafm, unlef$ 
 perhaps it ferve to diflinguifli Sexes. By 
 the fame rule we cannot fay in Greek 
 oi AM^OTEPOI, or in Er.g/i/h., The 
 BOTH, becaufe thefe Words m their own 
 nature are each of them perfedlly dejined\ 
 fo that to define them farther would be 
 quite fuperfluous. Thus, if it be faid, / 
 ^^'u^r^^/^BOTHPof/j, this plainly indicates 
 a dejinite pair, of whom fome mention 
 has been made already > Aua; fyvwo'/J.fV;^, a 
 known Diiady as Apollo?iius expreifes him- 
 feif, [h) when he fpeaks of this Subjed:, 
 On the contrary, if it be faid, I have read 
 Two Poets, this may mean any Fair out 
 
 of 
 
 et fecunda perfona pronominwn^ qace fine duhio demonjlra- 
 tlva fiint^ articuUs adjungi non poffunt ; nee tertia^ quanda 
 dcmonp-ativa ejl. L. XII. p. 938. — In the beginning of 
 the fame Book, he gives the true reafon of this. Supra 
 omnes alias partes orationis finit per son as PronO* 
 W£N. 
 
 {h) Jpolhu L,L c; 16.
 
 Book, the SeconDo 227 
 
 of all that ever exifted. And hence this Ch.I. 
 Numeral, being in this Senfe indefiiite (as 
 indeed are all others, as well as itfelf) is 
 forced to ajfume the Article, whenever it 
 would become definite *. And thus it is. 
 The Two in EngliJJj, and 01 A to in 
 Greek, mean nearly the fame thing, as 
 Both or am^otepoi. Hence alfo it 
 is, that as Two, when taken alone, has 
 reference to fome pri?nary and indefi?iite 
 Perception, while the Article, The, has 
 reference to {ovnQfeco?2dary and definite -^ ; 
 hence I fay the Reafon, why it is bad 
 Greek to fay ATO OI ANGPnnoi, and 
 bad E?iglijhy to fay Two the Men* 
 Such Syntax is in fa6t a Blending ofilncom^ 
 
 Qjt patibles. 
 
 * This explains Servius on the XIP'^ iEneid. v. 511, 
 where he tells us that Duorum is put for Anbonim. In 
 Englijh or Greek the Article would have done the bufi- 
 nefs, for the Tivo^ or toXv SvoTv are equivalent to Both 
 or dy.(po1i^uvj but not fo Duorum^ becaufe the Latins 
 have no Articles to prefix. 
 
 t Sup, p. 215, 216,
 
 228 HERMES. 
 
 Ch. I. patthles, that is to fay of a defined SubfiaH' 
 five with an undefined Attributive. On 
 the contrary to fay in Greek AM^OTEPOI 
 oi AN0Pnnoi, or in Englifo, Both 
 THE Men, is good and allowable, becaufe 
 the Subflantive cannot poflibly be lefs 
 apt, by being defined, to coalefce with an 
 Attributive, which is defined as well as 
 itfelf. So likewife, it is corred: to fay, 
 OI ATO ANOPXinoi, The two Men, 
 becaufe here the Article, being placed 
 in the beginning, extends its Power as 
 well through Subilantive as Attributive, 
 and equally contributes to define them 
 both. 
 
 As fome of the words above admit of 
 no Article, becaufe they are by Nature as 
 defijiite as ??iay be, fo there are others, 
 which admit it not, becaufe they are not 
 to be defined at all. Of this fort are all 
 InterRogatives. If wequeftion about 
 Subfianccs, we cannot fay o TIS OT- 
 Tor, The who is this; but tis 
 
 OTTOS,
 
 Book the Second. 
 
 OTTOS, Who IS THIS ? (/). The fame 
 as to ^a/ities and both kinds o^ ^antity. 
 We fay without an Article noios, no- 
 ZOI, nUAIKOS, in E?2gliJJ?, WHAT 
 SORT OF, HOW MANY, HOW GREAT. 
 
 The Reafon is, that the Articles 'o, and 
 THE, refpe(ft Beings, already known ;. In- 
 terrogatives refped: Beings, about which' 
 we are ignorant ; for as to what we know. 
 Interrogation is fuperfluous. 
 
 In a word the natural Ajfociators with 
 Articles are all thofe co?nmon Appellatives, 
 which denote the feveral Genera and Spe- 
 cies of Beings. It is thefe, which, by af- 
 fuminga different /fr//r/(?,ferveeither to ex- 
 plain an Individual upon its firil being per^- 
 ceived, or elfe to indicate, upon its return, 
 aRecognition, or repeated Knowledge {k), 
 
 0^3 We 
 
 (?) j^pollonius calls TI2, IvocvliuiTOirov ruv ol^^puvj 
 a Part ot Speech, mo/I contrary^ moft averfe to Articles^ 
 jL. IV. c. I. 
 
 (/(') What is here faid refpciSls the /wi? Articles which 
 we have in Englijh. In Greck^ the Article does no more, 
 than imply a Recogniiioji. See before p. 216, 217, 218,
 
 )t 
 
 230 ]fl E R M E S. 
 
 Ch.I. We fhall here fubjoin a few Inftances 
 of the Peculiar Power of Articles. 
 
 Every Propofition confifts of a Su^- 
 jeBy and a Predicate. In Englijh thefe 
 are diftinguifhed by their Pofition, the 
 Subjed: ftanding ^/^z?, the Predicate loft, 
 Jlappinejs is Pleafure-^Yitxt, Happinefs is 
 the SubjeB ; Pleajure, the Predicate. If 
 we change their order, and fay, Pleafure 
 is Happinefs ; then Pleafure becomes the 
 SubjeSl, and Happinefs the Predicate. In 
 Greek thefe are diftinguifhed not by any 
 Order or Pofition, but by help of the 
 Article, which the Subje6l always af~ 
 fumes, and the Predicate in moft inftan- 
 ces (fome few excepted) rejedts, Hap^ 
 finefs is Pleafure — vj^ovv; vi iv^aiiiovix^^ 
 Pleafure is Happinefs — >j v)Jovv) iu^xiixovtci — » 
 J^i?2e things are difficult — ^xay^iT^k lu. viCL'hk 
 ^ — Dijicult things are fine — ri ^^Keyri 
 
 u
 
 Book the Second. ^231 
 
 In Greek it is worth attending, how in Ch. I. 
 the fame Sentence, the fame Article , by 
 being prefixed to a different Word, quite 
 changes the whole meaning. For exam- 
 ple — 'O lijo'hqxh'^ yvfxvdifixpx'^dci^ ETifxviQvi 
 -^Pto/erdy, hailing pref.ded over the Games y 
 was fublickly honoured. The Participle 
 •yufjivcCd^cippf^jJifT^? has here no other force, 
 than to denote to us the 'Time, when Ptole- 
 my was honoured, vlz» after having pre- 
 lided over the Games. But if, inflead of 
 the Subflantive, we join the Participle to 
 
 the Article, and fay, 'O yv\kvci(sicipx'^<^^'i 
 IlTQ'kE^dLi^ tTiiJ.Vi^vi, our meaning is then — f 
 The Ptolemy, who prejlded over the Games, 
 was honoured. The Participle in this cafe, 
 being joined to the Article, tends tacitly to 
 indicate not one Ptolemy but many, of 
 which number a particular one partici- 
 pated of honour (/). 
 
 0^4 I« 
 
 ^«ipi«*<*«9«l 
 
 (/) A^ollon„ L, I. c. 33, 24.
 
 232 HERMES.- 
 
 Ch. I. In 'Englijh likewife it deferves remark- 
 ing, how the Senfe is changed by chang- 
 ing of the Artidesy tho' we leave every 
 other Word of the Sentence untouched. — 
 And Nathan /aid tinto Davidf Thou art 
 THE Man *. In that fingle the, that 
 diminutive Particle, all the force and effi- 
 cacy of the Reafon is contained. By that 
 alone are the Premifes applied, and fo 
 firmly fixed, as never to be fhaken. It is 
 poffible this Affertion may appear at firfl 
 fomewhat ftrange^ but let him, who 
 doubts it, only change the Article, and 
 then fee what will become of the Pro- 
 phet and his reafoning. — And Nathan faid 
 tinto David, Thou art a Man. 
 I Might not the King well have demanded 
 upon fo impertinent a pofition, 
 
 Non dices hodie, quorjum hcec tamputida 
 tendant f 
 
 But 
 
 * 2;T EI 'O ANHP. Bcv.<riA. B'. me?-, »€', 
 
 3
 
 Book the Seconi^. 233 
 
 But enough of fiich Speculations. The Ch. I. 
 only remark, which we fhall make on 
 them, is this ; that '* minute Change in 
 <* Principles leads to mighty Change in 
 *' Effects; fo that well arePRiNciPLES 
 ** intitled to our regard, however in af-^ 
 ** pearance they maybe trivial and low." 
 
 The Articles already mentioned are 
 thok JiriSily fo called ; but befides thefe 
 there are the Pronominal Articles, 
 fuch as, This, That, Any, Other, Some, Ally 
 No, or None, &c. Of thefe we have fpoken 
 already in our Chapter of Pronouns {m), 
 
 where 
 
 [m] SeeB. I. c. 5. p. 72, 73. It feems to have been 
 fome view of words, like that here given, which in- 
 duced ^{intilian to fay of the Latin Tongue — Nojfer 
 fermo Articulos non defiderai ; ideoque in alias partes ora- 
 tionis Jparguntur. Inft. Orat. L. I. c. 4. So Scaliger, 
 His dedaratis, fatis conjiat Gracorum Articulos non neg- 
 hcios a nobis^Jed eorum ufum fuperjiuum. Nam ubi ali- 
 quid prafcribendum eji^ quod Graci per artiadum efficiunt 
 (ifAj^fv e ^»Ao?) expUtiira Latlnis per Is aut Ille -, Is, 
 
 auty
 
 234 HERMES. 
 
 Ch. I. where we have fhewn, when they may be 
 taken as Pronouns, and when as Articles. 
 Yet in truth it mufl be confelTed, if the 
 EfTence of an Article be to define and afcer- 
 tain, they are much more properly Arti- 
 cles, than any thing elfe,andas fuchfhould 
 be confidered in Univerfal Grammar; 
 Thus when we fay, this FiBure I ap^ 
 p'ove, but THAT Idiflikey what do we per- 
 form by the help of thefe Definitives, but 
 bring down the common Appellative to 
 denote two Individuals, the one as the more 
 near, the other as the more diflant? So when 
 we fay. Some men are virtuous , but All 
 men are mortal, what is the natural EfFedt 
 of this All and Some, but to define 
 that JJniverfality , and Particularity, which 
 would remain ii^lefinite, were we to take 
 
 them 
 
 cut^ Hie fervus dixit, de quo feruo antea faSta mentiofit, 
 cut qui alio quo fa£io not us fit. Additicr enim Articului 
 ad rei memoriam renovandam^ cujus antea non nefcii fumus, 
 fiut ad prafcribendam intelleclionem^ qua latius patere 
 queat ; veluti cum dicimus, C. Caefar, Is qui poftea dic- 
 tator fuit. Nam alii fuere C. Cafares. Sic Grac} 
 li^aXtroif djrcHfccTUf. De Cauf. Ling. Lat. c. 131*
 
 BooK„THE Second. 235 
 
 them away? The fame is evident in fuch 'Ch.I. 
 Sentences, as - — Some fubjiances have 
 fenfation-, others want it — Cbufe any 
 *way ofaBing, andsoM'E men will find faulty 
 6cc. For here some, other, and any, 
 ferve all of them to define different Parts of 
 a given Whole; Some, to denote a ^^- 
 nite Part ; Any, to denote an indefinite i 
 and Other, to denote the remaining 
 Part, when a Part has been affumed al- 
 ready. Sometimes this laft Word de- 
 notes a large indefinite Portion, fet in op- 
 pofition to iomt fingkj definite, and re^ 
 maining Part, which receives from fach 
 Oppofition no fmall degree of heighten- 
 ing. Thus Virgil, 
 
 pjxcudent a l i \fpirantia molUiis csra ; 
 f Credo equidemj vivos ducent demarmon 
 
 vultus -y , 
 
 Orabunt caufas meVms, oblique meatus 
 Defcribent radio, et furgentia fiidera 
 
 dicent : 
 Tfu regere imperio populos, Rom an 5s 
 
 ^etmnto, ficc, Mn, VI, 
 
 Nothing
 
 236 H E R M E S. 
 
 Ch.I. Nothing can be flrongerormore fub- 
 lime, than this Antithefis ; one A5i fet as 
 equal to many other ABs taken together , 
 and the ^ox^zxi fmgly (for it is T« Roma?ie, 
 not Vos RomaniJ to all other Men ; and 
 yet this performed by fo trivial a caufe, as 
 the juft oppofition of Alii to Tu. 
 
 But here we conclude, and proceed to 
 treat of Con N e c t i v e s . 
 
 C H A P.
 
 Book the Second. 237 
 
 C H A P. II. 
 
 Concerning ConneBives, and Jirji thofi 
 called ConjunSlions, 
 
 CONNECTIVES are the fubje(5t of what Ch. IL 
 follows ; which, according as they 
 conned: either Sentences ov Words, are call- 
 ed by the different Names of Conjunc- 
 tion s, or Pr EPOS I T ION s . Of thefeNames, 
 that of the Prepofition is taken from a mere 
 accident, as it commonly ilands in connec- 
 tion before the Part, which it conne(5ts. 
 The name of the ConjujiBion, as is evident, 
 has reference to its ejjential charadler. 
 
 Of thefe two we fliall confider the Con- 
 junction firft, becaufe it conned:s, not 
 Words, but Sentences. This is conform- 
 able to the Analyfis, with which we be- 
 gan this inquiry *, and which led us, by 
 
 parity 
 
 * Sup. p. II, 12.
 
 238 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.II. parity of reafon, to confider Sentences 
 themfelves before Words, Now the De- 
 finition of a Conjunction is as follows 
 — -^ Fart of Speech, 'void of Signification 
 itjefy hut fo formed as to help Signification^ 
 hy making two or more fignific ant Sent en-- 
 ces to be o^y. fignificant Sentence (^). 
 
 This 
 
 {a) Grammarians have ufually confidered the Con- 
 jun£lion as conne6ling xzA\tx fingle Parts of Speech^ than 
 zvhole Smtences, and that too with the addition of like 
 with hke, Tenfe with Tenfe, Number with Number, 
 Cafe witli Cafe, ^c. This SanSitm juftly explodes. 
 ConjunSiio neque cafus^ neque alias paries oratlonis (ut irn* 
 periti docent) conjungit^ ipfts en'im partes inter fe conjtin- 
 gtmtiir — -fed conjunSlio Oration es inter fe conjimgit. Miner. 
 L. III. c. 14. He then eftabliflies his do6lrine by a. 
 variety of examples. He had already faid as miich, 
 L. I. c. 18. and in this he appears to have followed 
 Scaliger^ who had afferted the fame before him. Con- 
 junSiionis autevi notionem vcteres pauUo incofifultiiis prodi" 
 dere ; neque enim, quod aiunt, partes alias conjungit (ipfce 
 enim partes per fe inter fe conjunguntur) — fed Conjun^ia 
 ef^ qua: conjungit Orationes phrss* De Cauf, Ling. Lat» 
 C. 165. 
 
 This
 
 Book the Second. 239 
 
 This therefore being the general Idea of Ch. II. 
 Conjunctions, we deduce their Sjpecies 
 
 This Do6lrine of theirs is confirmed by JpoHonius, 
 who in the feveral places, where he mentions the Con- 
 junction, always confiders it in Syntax as conne£ling 
 Sentences, and not Words, though in his works now ex- 
 tant he has not given us its Definition. See L. I. c. 2. 
 p. 14. L, II. c. 12. p. 124. L. III. c. 15. p. 234. 
 
 But we have ftronger authority than this to fupport 
 Scaliger and SanSiizis, and that is Arijiotle'z Definition, 
 as the Paflage has been correfted by the beft Critics 
 and Manufcripts. A Conjunction, according to him, is 
 
 ^i, TironTv zTi(pv^v7x ^iay ipuvviv cjifta^ltw^ii/. An arti- 
 culate Sound, devoid of Signification, which is fi) formed 
 as to make q^y. fignificant articulate Sound out of feveral 
 articulate Sounds, which are each of thernfignificant. Poet, 
 e. 20. In this view of things, the one fignificant arti- 
 culate Sound, formed by the Conjun6lion, is not the Union 
 of two or more Syllables in one fimple Word, nor even 
 of two or more Words in one fimple Sentence, but of 
 two or more fimplc Sentences in one complex Sentence^ 
 which is confidered as one, from that Concatenation 
 of Meaning effedled by the GonjwiSlions. For exam- 
 ple, let us take the Sentence, which follows. If Men 
 are by nature focial, it is their Intere/i to be j if I, though it 
 
 I were
 
 3J40 HERMES. 
 
 Ch. II. in thefollowingmanner. Conjunctions, 
 while they conneB fentencest either conneSi 
 
 alfi 
 
 %uere not [o ordained by the Laivs of their Country. Here 
 kre three Sentences, (i.) Men are by nature foclal. 
 (2. ) It is Mans Intereji to bejuji. (3. ) It is not ordain- 
 ed bv the Laws of every Country that Man Jl.ouid be juji„ 
 The firft two of thcle Sentences are made One by the 
 Conjun6tion, If ; thefe, Qne with the third Sentence, 
 by the Conjunction, Tho' ; and the three, thus united, 
 make that (^m'n \J^ic/. a-Yi^uvlix-Vi that one fignif cant arti- 
 culate Sounds of which Ari/fotle fpeaks, and which is the 
 refult of the conjun6live Power. 
 
 This explains a pafTage in his Rhetoric, where he 
 mentions the fame Subje6l. 'O yap o-JKJ'io-^oj Vi/ zrom 
 TO zjoXXcl' wfj Iccv E^ajpsOn, dY,?^ov on TUt/ociiTiov tfoct 
 TO £1/ TsroXKcc. The Conjuncfion makes many^ one ; fo 
 that if it he taken away, it is then evident on the contrary 
 that one will be MKt^iY. Rhet. III. c. 12. His inftance 
 .of a Sentence, diverted of its Conjun6lions, and thus 
 made many out of one^ is, jiaOoi/, aVyii/l^iTa, ISio^y^j 
 veni, occurri, rogavi, where by the way the three Sen- 
 tences, refulting from this Diflblution, (for ^aOoi/, 
 aTryji/liKra, and lSio[j.nvj are each of them, when un- 
 connected, fo many perfect Sentences) prove that thefe 
 are the proper Subjects of the Conjun^ion's connective, 
 faculty. 
 
 jffnmo?jius's
 
 Book the Second. 24.1 
 
 iilfo their meanings, or not. For exam- Ch.II. 
 pie : let us take thefe two Sentences — • 
 Koine ivas enjlaved — Cafar was afnbitious 
 — and conned: them together by the Con- 
 j u n(5tion , Because. Rome was enfiaved, 
 BECAUSE C(2far was ambitious. Here the 
 Meanings, as well as the Sentences, appear 
 to be connedied. But if I (^ij ,-— Manners 
 muji be reformed, or Liberty will be lojl — 
 here the Conjundtion, or, though it join 
 
 the 
 
 Ammonius''% account of the ufe of this Part of Speech 
 is elegant. Ato >tj twi" Xoyuv e ^\v Inra^^iv [xtav (tyi- 
 y-OiiUUV, jcuffiwj fl?, octaAcy^r' av iiri tw fji.7iSi7rco rsT- 
 fj.r)[j.iv(ii ^uAw, ity Sioc TJSTO hi Kiyo^ivtji' o ^l •urAfiova? 
 VTroip^eig inXosi/, ivoc (lege ^la) riua $1 cvi/^s<r[j.oi/ y]V(xi(X' 
 6«j ■srcog ^oKccVy dyxXoysT rn v/ii rn hi -sroXXuv (TvyKei- 
 
 tvucriVt Of Sentences that^ ^vhich denotes one Extjlence 
 Jimply.^ and which isJhiSily one, may be confidered as ana-* 
 logons to apiece of Timber not yet fevered-, and called on this 
 account One. That., which denotes feveral Exijiences, and 
 which appears to be rnack one by fome Conyun5live P arti- 
 cle .^ is analogous to a Ship made up of many pieces of Timber <^ 
 and which by means of the nails has an apparent Unity % 
 Am. in Lib. dc Interpret, p. 54, 6,
 
 242 HER M E S. 
 
 Ch.II. the Sentences^ yet as to their rcfpecli\^6 
 Mean'mgs^ is a pcrfed: DisjimBive. And 
 thus it appears, that though all Conjunc- 
 tions conjoin Sentences, yet with refped: to 
 the Senfe, fome are Conjunctive, and 
 fome Disjunctive; and hence {b) it is 
 that w^e derive their different Species. 
 
 The ConjimBions, which conjoin both 
 Sentences and their Meanings, are either 
 Copulatives, or Continuatives. 
 The principal Copulative in EngliJJj is. 
 And. The Continuatives are. If, Be- 
 cause, Therefore, That, ^c. The 
 Difference between thefe is this — ^he 
 Copulative does no more than barely coupk 
 Sentences, and is therefore applicable to 
 all Subjed:s, whofe Natures are not incom- 
 patible. Continuatives y on the contrary, by 
 a more intimate connection, confolidate 
 
 Sen- 
 
 (/>) Thus Scaliger. Ant ergo Senjum conjungunt^ ac 
 Verba ; aut Verba tantum conjuugunt^ Senfion vero d'lf- 
 jufigunt. De C. L. Latj^. 167,
 
 Book the Second. 243 
 
 Sentences into one cofitinuous Whole, and Ch-II. 
 are therefore applicable only to Subje<5ts, 
 which have an ejfential Co-incidence, 
 
 To explain by examples- — It is no way 
 improper to fay, Lyjippus was a Statuafy, 
 AND Prifcian was a Graimnarian — %bc 
 Sunjhineth, and the Sky is clear — because 
 thefe are things that may co-exiftj and yet 
 imply no abfurdity. But it would be ab- 
 furd to fay, Lyjippiis was a Statuary ^ be- 
 cause Prifcian was a Grammarian ; tho* 
 not to fay, the Sun Jhineth, because the 
 Sky is clears The Reafon is, with refpe^t 
 to the firft, the Co-incidence is merely aC' 
 cidental'y with refpecft to the lafl, it is ef- 
 fential, and founded in nature. And fo 
 much for the Diflindion between Copu^ 
 Jatives and Continuatives (r) . 
 
 As 
 
 (f ) Copidativa ejl^ qmx copulat tarn Verha.^ qiuim Sen- 
 fim. Thus Prifcian^ p. 1026. But Scaliger is more 
 explicit— y? Senfum conjungunt (cotijunclmjei fc.) aut ne- 
 
 R 2 ceJJariQ^
 
 244 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.IL As to Coftt'muatives, they are either 
 SupposiTivE, fuch as, If; or Positive, 
 fuch as. Because, Therefore, As, Qjc. 
 Take Examples of each — you will live 
 happily ) if you live honejUy"—yoii live hap- 
 pily, '&EC Aijs,'^, you live honejily. The Dif- 
 ference between thefe Continuatives is 
 this — The Suppojitives denote Connexion, 
 but affert not actual Eixijlence -, the Foft- 
 lives imply l^otb the one and the other {d) . 
 
 Farther 
 
 ceJpir'iOy aut mn necejfar'io : ^ ft non neceffario^ tumfiunt 
 Copdairo^^ he. De C. Ling. Lat. c. 167. Prifcian's 
 own account of Continuatives is as follows. Continua- 
 tivccfunt^ qua; continnat'ionein ^ confequentlam rerujnjigni- 
 ficant — ibid. Scaliger's account is — caujfam aut prcejli- 
 Unrnty autfuhdunt. Ibid. c. 168. The Greek name for 
 the Copulative was Ivv^Bcry.!^ (rviA.TrXiytliv.oq -, for the 
 Continuative, c\^y(x,7i]ix.o<; ; the Etymologies of which 
 words juftly diftinguifii their refpeftive characters. 
 
 {d) The old Greek Grammarians confined the name 
 
 HvvctTrVyyOiy and the Latins that oWorJuiiiat'ivtey tothofe 
 
 , < Con- 
 
 {
 
 Book the Second. 245 
 
 Farther than this, the Pofitives above Ch.II. 
 mentioned are either Causal, fuch as. 
 Because, Since, As, &c. or Collec- 
 tive, fuch as, Therefore, Where- 
 fore, Then, &c. The Difference be- 
 tvi^een thefe is this — the Caufals fubjoin 
 Qaufes to EffeBs--T^he Sun is in Eclipfe, 
 
 be- 
 
 Conjunftions, which we have called Suppofitive or Coji- 
 ditionaly while the Pofitive they called ■sra^ao-uvaTrJjjcot, 
 or Subcontinuativis. They agree however in defcribing 
 their proper Charafters. The firft according to Gaza 
 are, o» VTracp^iv y-lv b, axoXis^iav ^e rivx, h, tcc^iv ^n- 
 A8VT£f — L. IV. Prifcian fays, they flgnify to us, qua- 
 ils eji ordmatlo y natura rcrum^ cwn duh'itatione aliqtui 
 effentia reriim — p. 1027. And Scaliger fays, they con- 
 join y/?z<?yMZy^^t'«^2V< ncceffarid j poteji cnim jubfiflere <S nsn 
 fubfi/iere ; utrumque enim adniktunt. .Ibid. c. 168. On 
 the contrary of the Pofitive, or i^a^a.a-mix.Trlix.o'i (to ufe 
 his own name) Gaza tells us, on h^ xnrciP^n^ [ji.iTx 
 T«^£wj CYiy.oiiVdcnv kroiys — And Prifcian fays, caufain 
 continuationis ojiendunt conjeqimitem cum ejfentia rsrum — • 
 And Scaliger^ non ex hypothef.j fed ex eo-^ quod fubfi/iitj 
 conjungunt. Ibid. 
 
 R3 "u
 
 246 H E R M E S. 
 
 Ch.II. BECAUSE t/je Moon intervenes — I'^e Collect 
 tives fubjoin EffcBs to Caufes — T^he Moon 
 intervenes, therefore the Sun is in 
 Eclipfe. Now we ufe Caufals in thofe 
 inftances, where, the EfFed: being con- 
 fpicuous, we feek its Caufe ; and Collec- 
 tives, in Demonjirations, and Science pro- 
 perly fo called, where the Caufe being 
 
 knowf> 
 
 It may feem at firft fomewhat ftrange, why the Pofi- 
 itve Conjunflions fliould have been confidered as Sub- 
 ordinate to the Suppofitive^ which by their antient Names 
 appears to have been the fa£l. Is it, that the Pofifive 
 are confined to what aSlually is ; the Suppofitive extend 
 to PoJfihUs^ nay even as far as to ImpoJJihles ? Thus it is 
 falfe to affirm. As it is Day^ it is Light^ unlefs it adually 
 be Day. But we may at midnight affirm, If it be Day^ 
 it is Lights becaufe the, If, extends to Poffibles alfo. 
 Nay vv^e may affirm, by its help (if we pleafe) evenlm- 
 poffibles. We may fay, If the Sun he cubical^ then is the 
 Sua angular ; If the Sky fall^ then Jhall %ve catch Larks. 
 Thus top Scaliger upon the fame occz^ion—amplitudi- 
 nem Continuativa percipi ex eo^ quod etiam impojfihile ali'. 
 quando prajupponit. De C. L. Lat. C. 1 68. In this 
 lenfe then the Continuativc, Suppofitive or Condition?] 
 Ci)njun6tion is (as it were) fuperior to the Pofitive, a,s 
 bc"'**; of greater latitude in its appUcation,
 
 Book the Second. 247 
 
 known firfl:, by its help we difcern confe- Ch.II. 
 quences {e). 
 
 All thefe Continuatlves are refolvable 
 into Copulatives. Inllead of. Because // 
 is Day, it is light, we may fay, // is Day, 
 AND it is Light. Inftead of. If it be Day, 
 it is Light, we may fay. It is at the fame, 
 time necejfary to be Day, and to be Light -, 
 and fo in other Inlliances. The Reafon is, 
 that the Power of the Copulative extends 
 to all Connexions, as well to the ejfential, 
 as to the cafual ox fortuitous. Hence there- 
 fore the Continuative may be refolved into 
 a Copulative and fomething mo?^e, that is to 
 fay, into a Copulative implying an eJJ'ential 
 Coj|incidence^^intheSubjed:s conjoined. 
 
 R4 AmS 
 
 (e) Thp Latins called the Caufais, Caujales or Cau- 
 Jativez \ the CoUeftives, CoUetlhcs or Illatlvcs : The 
 
 Greeks called the former 'AjTioAo-yixoI, and the latter 
 
 XuAAoyifiHoi, 
 
 (f) Rcjohimtur antem in Copulativas omnes ha^ prop- 
 terea quod Caufa cum EffeSlu Suapte vatura conjtinna ejl. 
 Seal, de C. L. Lat. c. i6g.
 
 248 H E R M E S. 
 
 Cli.II. As to Caufal Conjunftions (of which 
 we have fpoken already) there is no one 
 of the four Species of Caufes, which they 
 are not capable of denoting : for example, 
 THE Material Cause — The I'rumpet 
 founds, B E c a u s E /V /j- ??2ade of Metal — T h e 
 FORMAL — I'he Trumpet founds, because 
 it is long and hollow — The efficient — • 
 The Trumpet founds, because an Artift 
 blows it — The final — The Trumpet 
 founds, that it may raife our courage. 
 Where it is worth obferving, that the three 
 firft Caufes are exprefl by the itrong affir- 
 mation of the Indicative Mode, becaufe if 
 the Effect actually be, thefe muil of ne- 
 eefiitv be alfo. But the laft Caufe his a 
 different Mode, namely, the Contiup-ent 
 or Potential. The Reafon is, that the 
 Final Caufe, tho' it may h&frjl in Specu- 
 lation, is always laf in Event, That is to 
 fay, however it mav be the End, which 
 fet the Artift iirft to work, it may ftill be 
 ^n End beyond his Power to obtain, and 
 
 which J
 
 Book the Second, 249 
 
 which, like other Contingents, may either Ch. II. 
 happen, or not {g). Hence alfo it is 
 conneded by Conjundions of a peculiar 
 kind, fuch as. That, /W, Ut, &c. 
 
 The Sum is, that all Conjunc- 
 tions, iiohich conneB both Sentences and 
 their Meanings, are either Copulative, or 
 Continuative 5 the Continuatives are 
 either Conditional, or Tofuive -, and the 
 Pofitives are either Caufal or ColleSlive, 
 
 And now we come to the Disjunc- 
 tive Conjunctions, a Species of 
 Words which bear this contradid:ory 
 Name, becaufe, while they disjoin the 
 Sejtfe, they conjoin the Sentences {h). 
 
 With 
 
 (g) See B. I. c. 8. p. 142. See alfo Vol. I. Note 
 VIII. p. 271. For the four Caufes, fee Vol I. Note 
 XVII. p. 280. 
 
 s'il'TTii iix-^vjyyvvrs^j 77\v <ppoi(riv iTna-vv^as'iv. Ga-2us 
 
 Gi'am,
 
 250 II E R M E S. 
 
 Ch. II. With refped: to thefe we may obferve, 
 that as there is a Principle of Union dif- 
 fufed throughout all things, by which 
 THIS Whole is kept together, and pre- 
 ferved from Diffipation ; fo there is a 
 Principle of Diversity diftufed in like 
 manner, the Source of Diftindtion, of 
 Kumber, and of Order (z). 
 
 Now 
 
 Grain. L. IV. DisjunSiiva fimt^ qucs^ quamvis dldil- 
 ones ccnjungant^ fcnfurn ta?ne7i disjunSlum hahent. Prifc. 
 Iv. XVI. p. 1029. And hence it is, that a Sentence, 
 connecSted by Disjunclives, has a near refemblance to a 
 Jtmple negative Truth. For though this as to its Intel- 
 letflion be dlsjuntlive (its end being to disjoin the Sub- 
 je6l from the Predicate) yet as it combines Terms to- 
 gether into one Proportion, it is as truly fynthetical^ as 
 any Truth, that is affirmative. See Chap. I. Note [b), 
 
 (?) The Diversity, which adorns Nature, maybe 
 faid to heighten by degrees, and as it pafTes to different: 
 Subjefts, to become more and more intenfe. Some 
 things only differ, when confidered as Individuals^ but if 
 we recur to their Species^ immediately lofe all Diftinc- 
 tion : fuch for inftance are Socrates and Plato. Others 
 differ as to Species^ but as to Genus are the fame : luch 
 8 are
 
 Book THE Second. ^51 
 
 Now it is to exprefs in fome degree the Ch.IL 
 Modifications of this Diver/ity,.th-2Lt Dis- 
 junctive Conjunctions feeni iirfl to 
 have been invented. 
 
 • 
 
 Of thefe Disjunctives, fomc arc 
 Simple, fome AdversA'Tive— «S/;;;//f, 
 as when we fay, either it is Day, or it 
 
 is 
 
 are Man and Lion. There are others again, which dif- 
 fer as to Genus^ and co-incide only in-thofe iranfcendeyi- 
 tal Comprehen/ions of .Ens^ Being, EKiftence, and the 
 like: fuch are ^z,;<wWrVj and ^W/V/i-i, as' -for. example 
 an Ounce., and the Colour, iPlnU. Laftly a.Ll Being 
 whatever differs, as Being., from Non-being. 
 
 Farther, in all things different, however moderate? 
 their Diverfity, there is an appearance of Opposition 
 with refpecl to each other, in as much as each thing is 
 itfclf and not any of the refl. But yet in all Subjedi. 
 this Oppofition is not the fame. In Relatives, fuch 
 as Greater and Lefs, Double and Half, Father and Son, 
 Caufe and P^ffecf, in thefe it is more fhiking., than in or- 
 dinary Subjefts, becaufc thrfe always fhew it, by necef- 
 Jarily inferring each other. In Contraries, fuch as 
 Black and White, Eveii and Odd, Good and Bad, 
 
 Virtuous
 
 252 HERMES. 
 
 Ch. II. is Night — Adverfati've, as when we fay, It 
 is not Day, but it is Nigbt. The Differ- 
 ence between thefe is, that the iimple do 
 no more, than merely disjoin -, the Adver- 
 fative disjoin, with an Oppojition concomi-^ 
 tant. Add to this, that the Adverfative 
 are definite -, the Simple, indefinite. Thus 
 when we fay^ T^he Number oj^ T'hree is not 
 
 an 
 
 Virtuous and Vitious, in thefe the Oppofition goes ftill 
 farther, becaufe thefe not only differ^ but are even de- 
 jlruiiwe of each other. But the moji potent Oppofition is 
 .that of \Av}i(poctTigj or Contradiction, when we 
 oppofe Propoftion to Prof ofition^ .Truth to Faljhood, af- 
 ferting of any Subject, either it is^ or it is not. This in- 
 deed is an Oppofition., which extends itfelf to all things, 
 for every thing conceiveable muft needs have its Nega^ 
 //V^, though multitudes by nature have neither Relu', 
 iives^ nor Contraries. 
 
 Befides thefe Modes of Diversity, there are others 
 that deferve notice : fuch for inftance, as the Diverfity 
 between the Nanie of a thing, and its Definition ; be- 
 tween the various Names^ which belong to thefame things 
 and the various things^ which are denoted by the fame 
 Najne ; ail which Diverfitie upon occafion become a 
 Part of our Difcourfe. An. fomuch, in Ihoit, for th? 
   Subjed of Diversity,
 
 Book the Second. 25^ 
 
 ^n even Number, bvt a?2 odd, we not only Ch. II. 
 disjoin two oppoiite Attributes, but we 
 definitely a6irm one, and deny the other. 
 But when we fay. The Number of the Stars 
 2V EITHER even or odd, though we affert 
 one Attribute to be, and the other not to 
 be, yet the Alternative notwithftanding is 
 left indefinite. And fo much for Jimp k 
 Disjunctives (k). 
 
 'As 
 
 (/J) The fimple Disjunftive %, or Vel^ is moftly ufed 
 hidefinitely^ fo as to leave an Alternative. But w^hen it 
 is ufed definitely^ fo as to leave no Alternative, it is then 
 a perfeft Disjunftive of the Siibfequent from the Pre- 
 vious, and has the fame force with >ij a, or, £t nonj, 
 It is thus Gaza explains that Verfe of Homer. 
 
 IX. A. 
 
 That is to fay, / defire the people JJjotdd be faved^ ANl) Koi' 
 be dejlroyed^ the Conjunction -^ being avonoinv-lz^ or 
 fublat'we. It muft how^ever be confeft, that this Ver(e is 
 otherwife explained by an Eliipfis, either of {j.S,KKov, oi 
 (njuTK, concerning which fee the Commentators.
 
 ^54 
 
 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.II. A^ 'to Adverfat he DisjtaiBheSy it has 
 been faid already that they imply Oppo- 
 sition. Now there can be no Oppofition 
 of ih^fame Attribute , in the fame SuhjeB^ 
 as when we fay, Nireus was beautiful -y 
 but the Oppofition mufh be either of the 
 fame Attribute in different Subje5ls, as when 
 we fay, Brutus was a Patriot, but Cafar 
 was not — or of different Attributes in the 
 .fame SubjeB, as when we fay, Gorgias was 
 a Sophiji, but not a Philofopher — or of 
 different Att?-ibutes in different SubjeSfs^ 
 as when we fay, Plato was a Philofopher, 
 BUT Hippias was a Sophifi. 
 
 The Cofijunoiions ufed for all thefe pur- 
 pofes may be called Absolute Advek- 
 
 SATIVES. 
 
 But there are other AdverfativeSy be- 
 Udes thefe ; as when we fay, Nireus was 
 more beautiful, than Achilles'-^Virgil was 
 
 AS.
 
 Book the Second. 255; 
 
 A5 great a Poet, as Cicero was an Orator. Ch. II. 
 The Charader of thefe latter is, that they 
 go farther than the former, by marking 
 not only Oppofition, but that Equality or 
 Rxcefs, which arifes among Subjedis from 
 their being compared. And hence it is 
 they may be called Adversatives of 
 Comparison. 
 
 Besides the Adverfatives here men- 
 tioned, there are two other Species, of 
 which the mofl eminent are unless and 
 ALT ho'. For example' — Troy will be taken ^ 
 unless the Palladium be prefer'ved — Troy 
 will be taken ^ ai.t iiol HeBor defend it. The 
 Nature of thefe Adverfatives may be tlius 
 explained. As every Event is naturally 
 allied to its Caife, fo by parity of roafon it 
 is oppofed to its Preveiitive. And as every 
 Caufe is either adequate (/) or in-adequate 
 
 (in- 
 
 (/) This Diftin(3:ion has reference to common Opinlcn, 
 afid the form of Languagey cojfonant thereto. In ftridl 
 metaphyfical truth, A^ Cauf^ that is not adequate, it 
 any Caufe at all. ^
 
 256 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.II. (in-adequate, when it endeavours, with« 
 out being effedlual) fo in like manner is- 
 every Preventive. Now adequate Prevent 
 tives are expreft by fuch Adverfatives, as 
 UNLESS — T^roy will be taken, unless the 
 Palladium be preferved -, that is, I' his alone 
 isfujicient to prevent it. The In-adequate 
 are expreft by fuch Adverfatives, as al- 
 THo' — T^roy will be taken, alt ho' lieStor 
 defend it -, that is, Heciors Defence will 
 prove in-effeSiual. 
 
 The Names given by the old Gram-^ 
 marians to denote thefe laft Adverfatives, 
 appear not fufficiently to exprefs their 
 Natures (;«). They may be better per^ 
 haps called Adversatives Adequate, 
 and In-adequate. 
 
 And thus it is that all Disjunctives, 
 that is Conjunctions, which conjoin Sen- 
 
 teticeSf 
 
 (m) They called them for the moft part, witliout 
 fufficient Diftinftion of their Species, Adverfativa^ or
 
 Book tIie Sscond. 257 
 
 fences i hut not their Meanings ^ are either Ch.II. 
 Simple or Adversative ; and that all 
 ADVERSATivEsareeither^^/j^/^orCoA7- 
 farative 3 or elfe Adequate or In-adequate, 
 
 We fhall finifli this Chapter with a few 
 mifcellany Obfervations. 
 
 In the firft place it may be obferved, 
 through all the Species of Disjunctives, 
 that t\iQ fame Disjundive appears to have 
 greater or ^/} force, according as the Sub- 
 jed:s, which it disjoins, are more or lefs 
 disjoined by Nature. For example, if 
 we fay, Every Nutnber is even, or odd-^ 
 Every Propqfition is true, o^falfe — nothing 
 feems to disjoin more Jirongly than the 
 DisjunBive, becaufe no things are in Na- 
 ture more incompatible than the Subjefts. 
 But if we fay, 'That Objedi is a Triangle, 
 OR Figure contained mider three right lines 
 — the (or) in this cafe hardly feems to 
 disjoin, or indeed to do more, than di- 
 Jiin5ily to exprefs the Thing, firil by its 
 
 S • Name,
 
 258 HERMES. 
 
 Ch. II. Name, and then by its Definition. So if we 
 fay, T^hat Figure is a Sphere, or a Globe, 
 OR a Ball — the Disjundive in this cafe, 
 tends no farther to disjoin, than as it di- 
 flinguifhes th^feveral Names, which be- 
 long to th^ fame Thing («). 
 
 Again — the Words, JVhen2indi Where, 
 and all others of the fame nature, fuch as. 
 Whence, Whither, Whenever, Wherever, ^c . 
 may be properly called Adverbial Con- 
 junctions, becaufe they participate the 
 nature both of Adverbs and Conjun(5tions 
 — of ConjunBions, as they conjoin Senten- 
 ces ; 
 
 («) The Latins had a peculiar Particle for this occa- 
 fion, which they called Subdisjun^iiva^ a SubdisjunSiive ; 
 and that was Sive. Alexander five Paris ; Mars five 
 Mavors. The Greek "En sv Teems to anfwer the fame 
 end. Of thefe Particles, Scaliger thus (peaks-— Et fane 
 no?nen Subdisjunilivarum reote acccptum £/?, ncque enim 
 tarn plarie dlsjungit^ quaf/i Dhjundivts. Najti DisjunC" 
 tivce funt in Contrariis — SubdisjunSiivce autem etiam in 
 non Contrariis^ fed Divcrfis tantum ; ut, Alexander five 
 Paris. Dc C. L. Lat. c. 170.
 
 Book the Second. 259 
 
 ces ; of Adverbs y as they denote the At- Ch. 11. 
 tributes either of ^ime, or of Place* 
 
 Ag AiN-^thefe Adverbial Coii'jiinBions^ 
 and perhaps mojl tf the Frepofitions (con- 
 trary to the Charafter of accejjory Words, 
 which have ftridly no Signification, but 
 when aflbciated with other words) have a 
 kind oi objcure Signification, when taken 
 alone, by denoting thofe Attributes of 
 Time and Place. And hence it is, that 
 they appear in Grammar, like Zoophytes 
 in Nature ; a kind of (0) middle Beings, 
 of amphibious character, which, by (bar- 
 ing the Attributes of the higher and the 
 lower, conduce to link the Whole toge- 
 ther (/>) . 
 
 And 
 
 T£^ov i^icou ri (pvTov. Themifi. p. 74. Ed. Aid. See 
 alfo AriJiAc Animal. Part. p. 93. 1. 10. Ed. Syll. 
 
 [p) It is fomewhat furprizing that the politeft and 
 moft elegant of the Jtt'ic Writers, and Plato above all 
 
 S 2 the
 
 26o H E R M E S. 
 
 Ch. IL And fo much for Conjunctions, 
 their Genus, and their Species. 
 
 the reft, fhould have their works filled with Particles 
 of all kinds, and with Conjimclions in particular ; while 
 in the modern ^polite works, as well of ourfelves as of 
 our neighbours, fcarce fuch a Word as a Particle, or 
 Conjun&ton is to be found. Is it, that where there is 
 G^nne£iion in the Meanings there muft be Words had to 
 £mne£i j but that where the Connexion is little or none, 
 fuch Conne(Slives are of little ufe? That Houfes of 
 Cards, without cement, may well anfwer their end, but; 
 not thofe Houfes, where one would chufe to dwell ? Is 
 this ilie Caufe ? or have we attained an Elegance, to the 
 Antients unknown ? 
 
 Venlmus adfuinmamfoHtma.^ &c. 
 
 C H A P.
 
 Book the Second, 261 
 
 CHAP. IIL 
 
 Concerning thofe ConneBrveSf ailki 
 Prefofiiions, 
 
 PREPOSITIONS by tlieir name exprefs ChJII. 
 their Place, but not their Character. 
 Their Definition will diftinguiih them 
 from the former Connedives, A Pre- 
 position is a Part of Speech y devoid itfelf 
 of Signification, but fo formed as to unite 
 two Words that arefigtiificant, and that re^ 
 fufe to co-alefce or unite of themf elves {d). 
 
 This 
 
 (^7) The Stoic Name for a Prepofition was Il^o^t- 
 tDioq "xlvviscr^o^y Pr^cpofttivct Conjun^h^ a Prepojitive 
 ConjunSlion. 'X2? ^\v iv Xj xara raj kXXa.^ "srix.pa.^i- 
 C£i? «{ Tsr^o^tcesg (rvv$£^^iK-i\g (rvi^a^sug yivovlact ■sra.- 
 fSlMpocTiycciiy A£A£x,7«i ri[/Au' l'^ wv 3^ d^op^n vjanrstt 
 sroiPa, TO?? ^TWJKorf m JcaAt-urSaj dvjoli TloohriiLS^ 
 2uv(?£VjiA«f . Now in vjhat manner even in other appHca- 
 t'mis (befides the prefent) Prepo/itions give prmf e^ their 
 Qnjmn^ive Syntax^ we have mentianed already^ whence tss 
 
 s 3 ty
 
 262 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.III. This connediive Power, (which relates to 
 Words only, and not Sentences) will be 
 better underftood from the following 
 Speculations, 
 
 Some things co-alefce and unite qf 
 themfelves ; others refufe to do fo without 
 help, and as it were compuliion. Thus in 
 Works of Art, the Morter and the Stone 
 co-alefce of themfelves ; but the Wainfcot 
 and the Wall not without Nails and Pins. 
 In nature this is more confpicuous, For 
 example 3 all Quantities, and Qualities co- 
 alefce immediately with their Subflances, 
 Thus it is we fay, a fierce Lion, a vafi MoujZ" 
 tain; and from thisNaturalConcordofSub- 
 f€5l and Accident, arifes the Grammatical 
 Concord of Sub/lantive and AdjeBi've. In 
 
 like 
 
 the Stoics took occafton to call them Prepositiye Con- 
 junctions, Apollon. L. IV. c. 5. p. 313. Yet is this, 
 in fa6l rather a defcriptive Sketch., than a complete De- 
 finition., fiqce there are other Conjun£lions, which are 
 Prepofitive as well as thefe. See Ga%. L. IV, de Prae- 
 pofxt. Frijc. L. XIV. p. 983.
 
 Book the Second. 263 
 
 like manner A6tions co-alefce with their Ch.III. 
 Agents, and Paffions with their Patients. 
 Thus it is we fay, Alexander conquers-, Da- 
 rius is conquered. Nay, as every Energy is 
 a kind of Medium between its Agent and 
 Patient, the whole three. Agent j Energy, 
 and Patient, co-alefce with the fame faci- 
 lity; as when we fay, Alexander conquers 
 Darius. And hence, that is from thefe 
 Modes of 7iatural Co-alefcence, arifes the 
 Grammatical Kegimen of the Ferb by its No-- 
 minatime, and of the Accufative by its Verb. 
 Farther than this. Attributives themfelves 
 may be moft of them characterized; as 
 when we fay of fuch Attributives as raii^ 
 beautiful, learned, he ranfwiftly, fhe was 
 <Dery beautiful, he was moderately learned , 
 &c. And hence the Co-alefcence of the Ad- 
 verb with Verbs, Participles, and AdjeSlives, 
 
 The general Concluiion appears to be 
 
 this. **ThOSePaRTS OfSpEECH UNITE 
 ** OF THEMSELVES I nGrAMMARjWHOSE 
 
 "original Archetypes unite of 
 
 S 4 " them-
 
 264 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.III. " THEMSELVES inNature.*' To which 
 we may add, as following from what has 
 been faid, that the great ObjeBs of Nat u^ 
 ral Union are Substance ^W Attri- 
 bute. Now tho' Subjiances naturally co- 
 incide with their Attributes, yet they ab- 
 folutely refufe doing fo, one with an^ 
 other {b). And hence thofe known Max- 
 ims in Phyfics, that Body is impenetrable ; 
 that two Bodies cannot pojjefs the fame place ; 
 that the fame Attribute cannot belong to 
 different Subfances, &c. 
 
 From thefe Principles it follows, that 
 when we form a Sentence, the Subjiajitive 
 without difficulty co-incides with the/^^r^, 
 from the natural Co-incidence oi Subjlance 
 &nd Energy — The Sun warmeth. So 
 likewife the Energy with the SubjeB, on 
 
 which 
 
 {b) Canja^ propter qiiam duo SnhJlanUva non poniintur 
 Jine copula^ e Pkihfophia petenda eft : neque enitn duo Jub- 
 Jiantialiter unum ejje potejl^ ftcut Subjlantia ei Acc'idem ; 
 
 itaque non d\ca$^ C^sar, Cato pugnat. Seal, dc 
 
 Cauf. Ling. Lat. c. 177.
 
 Book the Second. ^ 265 
 
 ^hich it operates' warmeth the Ch.IIL 
 
 Earth. So likewife both /Sz/^j/zr^and 
 "Energy with their proper Attributes, — 
 
 TheSpLENDIdSuN,— genially WARM- 
 ETH — THE fertile Earth. But fup- 
 pofe we were delirous to add other Sub- 
 ilantives, as for inilance. Air, or Beams. 
 How would thefe co'-incide, or under what 
 Charadler could they be introduced ? Not 
 as Nominatives or Accufativesj for both 
 thofe places are already filled ^ the Nomi- 
 native by the Subflance, Sun; the Accu- 
 fative by the Subflance, Earth. Not as 
 Attributes to thefe laft, or to any other 
 thing I for Attributes by nature they nei^ 
 ther are, nor can be made. Here then we 
 perceive the Rife and Ufe of Preposi- 
 tions. By thefe we conned: thofe Sub- 
 flantives to Sentences, which at the time 
 are unable to co-alefce of t hem/elves. Let 
 us affumc for inflance a pair of th-efe Con- 
 nedives. Thro', and With, and mark 
 their EfFed: upon the Subflances here men- 
 tioned . I'hefplaidid Sun with his Bea^ns 
 
 genially
 
 266 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.III. genially warmeth thro' the Air the fertile 
 Earth. The Sentence, as before, remains 
 intire and one -, the Subfta?itives required 
 are both introduced; and not a Word, 
 which was there before, is detruded from 
 its proper place. 
 
 It mull here be obferved that moft, if 
 not all Prepofitions feem originally form- 
 ed to denote the Relations oj' Flace (c). 
 The reafon is, this is that grand Relation, 
 which Bodies or natural Subjlances main- 
 tain at all times one to another, whether 
 they are contiguous or remote, whether 
 in motion or at reft. 
 
 It may be faid indeed that in the Con- 
 tinuity of Place they form this Universe 
 
 or 
 
 {c) 0mm corpus aiit niovetur aut quiefcit : quare opus 
 fuh aliqua nota^ qua TO nOT figmficareU five effet 
 inter duo extrema^ inter qua motus fit^ five ejfiet in altera 
 extremorum^ in quibus fit quies. Hinc elicicrnus Prapofi- 
 iionis ejfientialem dcfi^nitioncm. Seal, de Cauf. Ling. Lat. 
 
 €. 152.
 
 Book the Second. 267 
 
 or VISIBLE Whole, and are made as Ch.III. 
 much One by that general Comprehen- 
 fion, as is confiftent with their feveral Na- 
 tures, and fpecific Diflinftions. Thus it 
 is we have Prepofitions to denote the coii- 
 tiguous Relation of Body, as when we fay, 
 Caius walketh with a Staff; the Statue 
 Jiood UPON a Fedefial-, the River ran over 
 a Sand', others for the detached Relation, 
 as when we fay. He is going to Italy ; the 
 Sun is rijcn above the Hills ; thefe Figs 
 came from 'J'urky. So as to Motion and 
 Reji, only with this difference, that here 
 the Prepolition varies its charadler with 
 the Verb. Thus if we fay, that Lamp 
 hangs FROM the Ceiling, the Prepofition, 
 From, ailumes a Charadier oi ^liefcence. 
 But if we fay, that Lamp is falling from 
 the Ceiling, the Prepofition in fuch cafe 
 affumes a Characfler of Motion. So in 
 Milton, 
 
 — 'Tofupport uneajie Steps 
 Over the burning Mar le^^V'S^x. L. I. 
 
 Here over denotes Motion, 
 
 Again
 
 268 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.III. Again— 
 
 — /i> — with looks of cordial Love 
 Hung OYi£.K ber enamour d — Par. L. IV. 
 
 Here over denotes Refl, 
 
 But though the original ufe of Prepofi- 
 tions was to denote the Relations of Place, 
 they could not be confined to this Office 
 only. They by degrees extended them- 
 felves.to Subjeds incorporeal, and came to 
 denote Relations, as well intelledfual as 
 local. Thus, becaufe in Place he, who is 
 above, has commonly the advantage over 
 him, Vy'ho is below, hence we transfer over 
 and UNDER to T>omimon and Obedience-^ of 
 a King v^^e fay, he ruled over his People ^ 
 of a common Soldier, be ferved vii'D^K 
 fiich a General, So too we fay, untb 
 Thought ; without Attention ; thinking 
 over a Subject: ; under Anxiety ^,from Fear ; 
 outofl^o-VQ; through ]t2\oviiy, &£. All 
 which inilanccs, with many others of like 
 
 kind»
 
 Book the Second. 269 
 
 kindj (hew that tht Jlrjl Words of Men, ChJIL 
 like thoivjirji Ideas , had an immediate re- 
 ference to fenjible ObjeBs, and that in af- 
 terdays, when they began to difcern with 
 their Intelkfi^ they took thofe Words, 
 which they found already made, and 
 transferred them by metaphor to intelkc- 
 tual Conceptions. There is indeed no 
 Method to exprafs new Ideas, but either 
 this of Metaphor, or that of Coining new 
 Wordsy both which have been pradifed 
 by Philofophers and wife Men, accord- 
 ing to the nature, and exigence of the oc- 
 
 calion [d). 
 
 In 
 
 (i) Among the Words new coined we may afcribe 
 to Anaxagoras^ Otj.Qio^iau<x, ; to Plato, HoiCTTif y to 
 
 Ckero^ ^aiifai j to Arljjotle^ 'Ei/leXiy^siOi ; to the 
 Stoicsj 'Oyrif, k£^«tk, and many others.— Among 
 the Words transferred by Metaphor from common to 
 fpec'ial Meanings, to the Platonics we may afcribe !<?£«; 
 £0 the Pythagoreans and Peripatetics^ YLarriyo^iOiy and 
 KxTTiyooii^ ; to the Stoics^ KaraA^i^'K , uVoA»4'i?> KOi- 
 ^aiKO}/ 1 to the Pyrrhsnijfsy E'^sfi, u/^s^eroctf sTriprUf 
 
 Mi
 
 270 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.III. In the foregoing ufe of Prepolitions, 
 we have feen how they are applied koltoc 
 
 'STOLpx&sffiVf by way of yuxta-pofition, that is 
 to fay, where they are prefixt to a Word, 
 
 with- 
 
 And here I cannot but obferve, that he who pretends 
 to difcufs the Sentiments of any one of thefe Philofo- 
 phers, or even to cite and tranilate him (except in trite 
 and obvious Sentences) without accurately knowing the 
 Greek Tongue In general ; the nice differences of many 
 Words apparently fynonymous ; the peculiar Stile of the 
 Author whom he prefiunes to handle ; the new coined 
 Words, and new Significations given to eld Words, 
 ufed by fuch Author, and his Sedl ; the whole Philofo- 
 phy of fuch Seft, together with the Connexions ind 
 Dependencies of its feveral Parts, whether Logical, 
 Ethical, or Phyfical ; — He I fay, that, without this pre- 
 vious preparation, attempts what I have faid, will fhoot 
 in the dark ; will be liable to perpetual blunders j will 
 explain, and praife, and cenfure merely by chance ; and 
 though he may poilibly to Fools appear as a wife Man, 
 will certainly among the wife ever pafs for a Fool. 
 Such a A'lan's Intelleifl comprehends antient Philofophy, 
 as his Eye comprehends a diftant Profpe6l. He may 
 lee perhaps enough, to know Mountains from Plains, 
 and Seas from Woods ; but for an accurate difcern- 
 ment of particulars, and their chara6^er, this without 
 farther helps, it is impoHible he (hould attain.
 
 Book the Second. 271 
 
 without becoming a Part of it. But they Ch.III. 
 may be ufed alfo ko(,tol cw^effiv, by way of 
 Compofitioriy that is, they may be prefixt to 
 a Word, fo as to become a real Part of 
 it [e). Thus in Greek we have 'ETn'gaff^oLi , 
 in Latm, IntelUgerey In Ei?igliJIjy to Under- 
 Jland, So alfo, to foretel, to overa^iy to 
 undervalue, to outgo, &c. and in Greek and 
 Latin, other Inftances innumerable. In 
 this cafe the Prepolitions commonly trans- 
 fufe fomething of their own Meaning into 
 the Word, with which they are com- 
 pounded; and this imparted Meaning in 
 moft inftances will be found ultimately 
 refolvable into fome of the Relations of 
 Place, ffj as ufed either in its proper or 
 Tnetaphorkal acceptation . 
 
 Lastly, 
 
 (^) See Gaz, Gram. L. IV. Cap. de Praepofitione. 
 
 (f) For example, let us fuppofe fome given Space. 
 
 E & Ex fignify out o/"that Space; Per, through it^ 
 
 from beginning to end j In, vjithln it\ Sub, under it, 
 
 1% Hence
 
 272 
 
 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.III. Lastly, there are times, when Prepo- 
 fitions totally lofc their connedive Nature, 
 
 being 
 
 Hence then E and Per in compofition augment ; Enor-' 
 ?nisy fbmething not fimply big, but big in excefs ; fome- 
 tlijng got out of the rule^ and beyond the mcafure ; DicOy 
 to fpeak ; Edico^ to /peak out ; whence Edi£ium., an 
 Edkl, fomething fo effedlually fpoken, as all are fuppofed 
 to hear, and all to obey. So Terenccy 
 
 picOf Edico vobis — Eun. V. 5. 20. 
 
 which (as Donatus tells us in his Comment) is an 
 Au^t]<r»?. Fari^ to fpcak ; Effar'i^ to fpeak out — hence 
 Effatwiiy an Axiom^ or felf-evident Proportion, fome- 
 thing addreffed as it were to all men, and calling for 
 univerfal Aflent. Ck» Acad. II. 29. Permagnus^ Per^ 
 ut'ilis, great throughout^ ufeful through every part. 
 
 On the contrary. In and Sub diminifh and leflen. 
 hijufius^ Iniquiis^ unjufi^ inequitable.^ that lies within 
 Juftice and Equity, that reaches not fo far, that falls 
 jhort of them ; Subniger., blackifn ; Subrubicundus^ reddijh ; 
 tending to black, and tending to red, but yet under the 
 ftandard, and below perfeilion. 
 
 Emo originally fignified to take away ; hence it came 
 to fignify to buy^ becaufe he, who buys, takes aivay 
 his purchafe. Inter, Between., implies Difcontinu- 
 
 ance.
 
 Book the Second. 273 
 
 being converted into Adverbs,, and ufed Ch.III. 
 in Syntax accordingly. Thus Homers 
 
 -m^And Earth fmird all around, 
 
 L\. T. 362. 
 
 But of this we have fpoken in a preceding 
 Chapter, {^g). One thing we muil how- 
 ever obferve, before we finifh this Chap- 
 ter, which is, that whatever we may be 
 told of Cases in modern Languages, 
 there are in fa6t no fuch things ; but their 
 force and power is expreft by two Me- 
 thods, 
 
 ance^ for in things continuous there can nothing lie 
 between. From thefe two comes, Interimo., to kill^ 
 that is to fay, to take a Man away in the mid/i of Life ^ 
 by ?naking a Difcontinuance of his vital Energy. So alfo 
 Perimo^ to kill a Man, that is to fay, to take him away 
 thoroughly ; for indeed what more thorough taking 
 away can well be fuppofed? The Greek Verb, ^Avoh^hv^ 
 and the EngUJh Verb, To take off^ feem both to carry 
 the fame allufion. An4 thus it is that Prepofitions be- 
 come Parts of other Words. 
 
 {£) See before, p. 205. 
 
 T
 
 274 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.III. thods, either by Situation, or by Prepofi^ 
 tions ; the Nominative and Acctifative Cafes 
 by Situation; the rejl, by Prepofitions. 
 But this we fhall make the Subjed of a 
 Chapter by itfelf, concluding here our 
 Inquiry concerning Prepofitions. 
 
 C H A P,
 
 Book THE St. CON D. 27 
 
 /J> 
 
 CHAP IV. 
 
 Concerning Cafes. 
 
 AS Cases, or at leail their various Ch.IV, 
 Powers, depend on the knowledge 
 partly of Nouns, partly of Verbs, and 
 partly of Prepojitions ; they have been re- 
 fer ved, till thofe Parts of Speech had 
 been examined and difculTed, and are for 
 that reafon made the Subjed: of fo late a 
 Chapter, as the prefent. 
 
 There are no Cases in the modern 
 Languages, except a few among the pri- 
 mitive Pronouns, fuch as I, and Me ; Je, 
 and MoY -, and the EngliJJj GcJiitivei 
 formed by the addition of s, as when 
 from Lion, we form Lions -, from Ship, 
 Ship's. From this defed however we may 
 be enabled to difcover in fome inflances 
 nvhat a Cafe is, the Periphrafis, which fup- 
 
 T 2 plies
 
 276 H E R M E S. 
 
 Ch.IV^ plies its place^ being the Cafe (as it were) 
 unfolded. Thus £^«/ is analized into T>u 
 Cheval, Of the Horfe, Equo into Au Che- 
 valy I'd the Horfe. And hence we fee 
 that the Genitive and Dative Cases 
 imply the joint Power of a Noun and a 
 Frepoftion, the Genitive's Prepofition be- 
 ing Af De, or Ex, the Dative's Prepofi- 
 tion being Ad, or Verfus, 
 
 We have not this afliftancc as to the 
 Accusative, which in modern Lan- 
 guages (a few inftances excepted) is only 
 known from its pofition, that is to fay, 
 by being fubfequent to its Verb, in the 
 collocation of the v/ords» 
 
 The Vocative we pafs over from its 
 little ufe, being not only unknown to the 
 modern Languages, but often in the an- 
 tient being fupplied by i\\& Nominative. 
 
 The Ablative likewife was ufed by 
 the Romans only; a Cafe they feem to have 
 
 adopted
 
 Book: the Second. 277 
 
 adopted to ajfociate with their Prepofitions, ChJV". 
 as they had deprived their Genitive and 
 Dative of that privilege; a Cafe certainly 
 not necelfary, becaufe the Greeks do as 
 well without it, and becaufe with the Ro^ 
 mans themfelves it is frequently undiftin- 
 guifhed. 
 
 There remains the Nominative, 
 which whether it were a Cafe or no, was 
 much difputed by the Antients. The Pe^ 
 ripatetics held it to be no Cafe^ and likened 
 the Noun, in this its primary and original 
 Form, to a perpendicular Line, fuch for 
 example, as the line AB. 
 B 
 
 The Variations from the Nominative, they 
 confidered as if A B were to fall from its 
 perpendicular, as for example, to A C, or 
 A D, Hence then they only called thefs 
 
 T 3 Varia-
 
 278 HER M E S. 
 
 Ch.IV. Variations, nrnSEii:, Casus, Cases, or 
 Fallings. The Stoics on the contrary^ 
 and the Grammarians with them, made the 
 Nominative a Case alfo. Words they con- 
 fidered (aS it were) to fall from the Mind, 
 or difcurfve Faculty. Now when a Noun 
 fell thence in its primary Form, they then 
 called it iiTXisis OP0H, Casus rec- 
 tus, AN ERECT, or UPRIGHT CaSE Or 
 
 Falling, fuch as A B, and by this name 
 they diitinguiihed the Nominative, When 
 it fell from the Mind under any of its varia- 
 tions, as for example in the form of a Ge- 
 nitive, a Dative, or the like, fuch varia- 
 tions they called nrnsElS nAAFIAI, Ca^ 
 
 SUS OBLIQUI, OBLIQUE CaSES, Or SIDE- 
 LONG Fallings (fuch as AC, or AD) in 
 oppofition to the other (that is AB) which 
 was ered and perpendicular [a). Hence 
 too Grammarians called the Method of 
 enumerating the various Caies of a Noun,. 
 KAisis, Declinatio^ a Declension, 
 
 it 
 
 {a) See Ammon. in Libr. de Interpr. p. 35,
 
 Book the Second, 279 
 
 it being a fort oi progrejjive Defcent from Ch.IV, 
 the Nouns upright Form thro' its various 
 declining Forms, that is, a Defcent from 
 AB, to AC, AD, Gf^. 
 
 Of thefe Cases we fhall treat but of 
 four, that is to fay, the Nominative, 
 the Accusative, the Genitive, and 
 the Dative. 
 
 It has been faid already in the preced- 
 ing Chapter, that the great Objedis of 
 natural Union are Substance and At- 
 tribute. Now from this Natural Con- 
 cord arifes the Logical Concord of Subject 
 and Predicate, and the Grammatical 
 Concord of S\5B^T A'^T iwE. and Attribu- 
 tive {b), Thefe Concords in Speech 
 produce Propositions and Sentences, 
 as that previous Concord in Nature 
 produces NATURAL Beings. This being 
 
 T 4 admitted. 
 
 [b) See before, p. 264.
 
 28o. HERMES. 
 
 Ch.IV. admitted, we proceed by obfervlng, that 
 when a Sentence is fegular and orderly. 
 Nature s Subflafice, the Logiciaji s Subje5i, 
 and the Grammarian s Subjiantive are all 
 denoted by that Cafe, which we call the 
 Nominative. For example, C^sar 
 pugnat, N^% fingltiir, Domus cedificatur* 
 We may remark too by the way, that the 
 CharaSfcr of this Nominative may be learnt 
 from its Attributive. The Action implied 
 inpiignaty fhews its Nominative C^sar 
 to be an Ad:ive efficient Caufe; thePalTion 
 " implied mjingitur, fhews its Nominative 
 iEs to be a Paffive Subjedt, as does the 
 Paiiion in cedijicatur prove Domus to be 
 an EfFed. 
 
 As therefore every Attributive would 
 as far as pofTible conform itfelf to its Sub- 
 ftantive, fo for this reafon, when it has 
 Cafes, it imitates its Subflantive, and ap- 
 pears as a Nominative alfo. So we find it 
 in fuch inftances as — 'Cicero eji elo- 
 
 QUENS; VlTIUM ejl TURPEj HoMO ^ 
 
 ANIMAL,
 
 Book the Second. 2Ss 
 
 ANIMAL, &c. When it has no Cafes, Ch.IV, 
 (as happens with Verbs) it is forced to 
 content itfelf with fuch affimilations as it 
 has, thofe of Number and Perfon '^ y as 
 when we fay, Cicero loquitur 5 nos 
 LOQuiMUR j Homines loquuntur. 
 
 From what has been faid, we may 
 make the following obfervations — that as 
 there can be no Sentence without a Sub-- 
 Jiantive, fo that Subftantive, if the Sen- 
 tence be regular, is always denoted by a 
 Nominative — that on this occafion all the 
 Attributives, that have Cafes, appear as 
 Nominatives alfo — that there may be a re- 
 gular and perfed; Sentence without any of 
 th€ other Cafes, but that without one Nomi- 
 native at leaf, this is utterly impollible. 
 Hence therefore we form its Charadcer and 
 Defcription — the Nominative is that 
 Cafe, without which there can be no regii^ 
 
 lar 
 
 * What fort of Number and Perfon Verbs have, fee 
 before, p. 170, 171.
 
 282 HERMES. 
 
 Ch. IV. lar (f) and perfedi Sentence, We are now 
 to fearch after another Cafe. 
 
 When the. Attributive in any Sentence 
 is fome Verb denoting ABion, we may be 
 affured the principal Subjiantive is fome 
 aBive ejpcient Caufe. So we may call 
 Achilles and Lyfippus in fuch Sentences as 
 Achilles vulneravit ^ Lyjippus fecit. But 
 though this be evident and clearly under- 
 flood, the Mind is flill infufpence, and fields 
 its concQ^iion incomplete. Action, it well 
 knows, not only requires fome Agents but 
 it muft have a SubjeB alfo to work on, and 
 it mufl produce fome EffeB. It is then to 
 denote one of thefe (that is, the SubjeB 
 or the Effect) that the Authors of Lan- 
 guage 
 
 (r) We have added regular as well as /)^r/^^7, becaufe 
 there may be irregular Sentences, which may be perfe^ 
 without a Noininativc. Of this kind are all Sentences, 
 made out of thofe Verbs, called by the Stoics Ux^oc- 
 o-u,w,S*^M.5iTa or n.oc^»zxTnyoor.[ji.xTOiy fuch as Sajx^arft 
 fMToifAB>.tif SocTatefn pceniiety Sic. See before, p. 180.
 
 Book the Second. 283 
 
 guage have deftined the Accusative. Ch.IV. 
 Achilles vulneravit Hector em — here the 
 Accufative denotes the Subjed:. Lyjippus 
 
 fecit STATUAS here the Accufative 
 
 denotes the EfFed:. By thefe additional 
 Explanations the Mind becomes fatisfied, 
 and the Sentences acquire a Perfedlion, 
 which before they wanted. In whatever 
 other manner, whether figuratively, or 
 with Prepofitions, this Cafe may have 
 been ufed, its firft deflination feems to 
 have been that here mentioned, and hence 
 therefore we fhall form its Character and 
 Defcription- — the Accusative ,is that 
 Cafe, which to an efficient Nominative and 
 a Verb of ASlion fubjoins either the EffeB 
 or the pafjive StibjeB, We have flill left 
 the Genitive and the Dative, which we 
 invefligate, as follows. 
 
 It has been faid in the preceding Chap- 
 ter (</), that when the Places of the No- 
 
 minative 
 
 [d) See before, p. 265.
 
 284 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.IV. minative and the Accufative afe filled "by 
 proper Subftantives, other Subflantives are 
 annexed by the help of Prepofitions, Now, 
 though this be fo far true in the modern 
 Languages, that (a very few inflances ex- 
 cepted) they know no other method j yet 
 is not the rule of equal latitude with re- 
 fped to the Latin or Greek, and that from 
 reafons which we are about to offer. 
 
 Among the various Relations of Sub- 
 ilantives denoted by Prepofitions, there 
 appear to be two principal ones; and thefe 
 are, the T^erm or Point, which fomething 
 commences from, and the Term or Point, 
 which fomething tends to. Thefe Re- 
 lations the Greeks and Latins thought of 
 fogreat importance, as to diftinguifh them, 
 when they occurred, by peculiar Termina-^ 
 tions of their own, v/hich exprefl: their 
 force, without the help of a Prepoftion. 
 Now it is here we behold the Rife of the 
 antient Genitive, and Dative, the Geni- 
 tive bein^ formed to exprefs all Relations 
 
 co7n'
 
 Book the Second. 285 
 
 c-ommencing from it/elf-, the Dative, Ch.IV. 
 all Relations tending to it/elf. Of this * 
 there can be no flronger proof, than the 
 Analyfis of thefe Cafes in the modern 
 Languages, which we have mentioned 
 already (d-). 
 
 It is on thefe Principles that they fay in 
 Gr^^i — Af ofjiflc/ SOI, 1'i^i^ij.l XOI, Of 
 thee I ajk. To thee I give. The reafon 
 is, in requefls the perfon requeued is one 
 whom fomething is cx^^&x^ from -, in 
 donations, the perfon prefented, is one 
 whom fomething palTes to. So again-— 
 .(fj UsTTolviToii hlQ^, it is made of Stojie, 
 Stone was the paffive Subjed:, and thus 
 it appears in the Gejiitive^ as being the 
 T^erm from, or out of which. Even in 
 JLatin, where the Syntax is more formal 
 and ftridl, we read — 
 
 Lnplentur 
 
 [e) See before, p. 275, 276. 
 
 (y) XoMiToZ ar£7roi»jU,£K)?, >£y IXiipoiulogy made of Gold 
 and Ivory. So fays Panfanias of the Olympian Jupittr, 
 J^. V, p. 400. See alfo Ho?fi, Iliad. 2. 574.
 
 286 H E R M E S. 
 
 Ch.IV. Impkntur veteris Bacchiy pinguifque fi^- 
 
 rince, Vi^g« 
 
 The old Wine and Venifon were the funds 
 or flores, of or from which they were 
 filled. Upon the farrie principles, Il/vcc 7« 
 'j^jjtTo?, is a Phrafe in Greek j and fe boh 
 de reauy a Phrafe in French, as much as 
 to fay, Itakefome or a certain part, FRorvi 
 or OUT OF a certain whole. 
 
 When we meet in Language fuch Ge- 
 nitives as the Son of a Father ; the Father 
 of a Son ; the Figure of a Fainter ; the 
 Fainter of a Fi5fure, &c. thefe are all Re- 
 latives, and therefore each of them re- 
 ciprocally a I'erm or Foint to the other, 
 FROM or OUT OF whicli it derives its Ff 
 fence, or at leail its IntelleBion (^). 
 
 The 
 
 {g) AH Relatives are faid to reciprocate, or mutually 
 infer each other, and therefore they are often expreft by 
 this Cafe, that is to fay, tlie Genitive. Thus Arijhtlc^
 
 Book the SeconDo 287 
 
 The 'Dative i as it implies Tendency to, Ch.IV. 
 is employed among its other ufes to denote 
 the Final Cause, that being the Caufe 
 to which all Events, not fortuitous, may be 
 faid to tend. It is thus ufed in the follow- 
 ing inftances, among innumerable others. 
 
   TiBifiiaveis dcedala tellus 
 
 Submittit Jlores-^^ Lucret. 
 
 -— — Tib I brachia contrahit ardens 
 Scorpios— Virg. G. I. 
 
 — — Ti^iferviaf ultima T!hule, 
 
 Ibid. 
 
 And fo much for Cases, their Origin 
 and Ufe -, a Sort of Forms, or Termina- 
 tions, 
 
 0101/ JsA©-' jTECTroTa J'aA©^, Jt, o J^stT/roT'/j? ^zXa ^£<r- 
 7rorv\q Xiyirai liuaiy Xy ro SiirXacriov '/iy.i(r£^ ^nrXoc- 
 CioV} Jty TO rijUKTU itTTXcitris 7)^4(711. Omnia vero, qucs 
 flint ad aliqiiidy refer untiir ad m, qua reciprocantur. Ut 
 fervus dicitur domini fervus ; et dominus., fervi dnminus ; 
 necnon dupiunij dhnidii duplum i et dimidhim, dupU dimi" 
 dium. Categor, C. VII.
 
 2SS HERMES. 
 
 Ch.IV. tlons, which we could not weltpafs over, 
 from their great importance (^) both in 
 the Greek and Latin Tongues ; but which 
 however, not being among the ElTentials 
 of Language, and therefore not to be 
 found in many particular Languages, can 
 be hardly faid to fall within the limits of 
 our Inquiry. 
 
 (/;) Annon et illud objervat'wie dlgmim (licet nobis mO" 
 dernis Jpij'itus mnnihil redundat) antiquas Linguas ple- 
 nas deelinat'ionirm^ cajuion^ conjugationum-y et fimlliiim fu^ 
 iffe J modernas, his fer} deJliiutaSy plurima per prapoji- 
 iiones ct verba auxiliaria fegniter expedire? Sane facile 
 quis cmjiciat (utcunque nobis ipji placeajnus) ingenia pri- 
 orum feculorum noftris fuifle multo acutiora et fubti- 
 iiora. Bacon, de Aitgnu Scient, VI. i. 
 
 C H A P.
 
 Book THE Second, 289 
 
 C H A P. V» 
 
 Concerning InterjeBions — 'Recapitulation^' 
 
 Conclujion, 
 
 BESIDES the Parts of Speech before Ch. V. 
 mentioned, there remains the In- 
 terjection. Of this Kind among the 
 Greeks are^f}, 4)6y, ""hiy &c. among the 
 Latins i Ah 1 Heu! Hei! &c. among the 
 Englijh, Ah! Alas! Fie! &c. Thefe 
 the Greeks have ranged among their Ad- 
 verbs ; improperly, if we coniider the Ad- 
 verbial Nature, which always co-incides 
 with fome Verb, as its Principal, and to 
 which it always ferves in the characfter of 
 an Attributive. Now Interjections 
 co'incide with no Part of Speech, but are 
 either uttered alone, or elfe thrown into a 
 Sentence, without altering its Form, either 
 in Syntax or Signification. The Latins 
 feem therefore to have done better in *f fe- 
 
 parating 
 
 ■f FU. Serz/ium in /Eneid Kll. v. 486. 
 
 u
 
 290 H E R M E S. 
 
 Ch.V. parating them by themfelves, and givinc 
 them a name by way of diftind:ioa from 
 the reft. 
 
 Should it be aik'd, if not Adverbs, 
 what then are they ? It may be anfwered, 
 not fo properly Parts of Speech, as adven- 
 titious Sounds ; certain Voices of Na- 
 ture, rather than Voices o^ Art, expref- 
 fing thofe Paffions and natural Emotions, 
 which fpontaneoufly arife in the human 
 Soul, upon the View or Narrative of in- 
 tereiling Events [a). 
 
 <t 
 
 And 
 
 (rt) Interjection ES~ a Gracls ad Adverbla refe- 
 runtur^ atqiie eos feqiuhir etlam Boeihius. Et rsSie qui~ 
 dem de iis, quando cajiim 7'eguHt. Sed quando orat'icni 
 folu?n infcruntui\ ut nota affeSius, velut fufpiyii ai't me- 
 tiis^ vix videntur ad chjfon aliquam pertinere^ ut qutz 
 NATURALEsyJw^ NOT^ ; tioii^ alianofi "jocum In/iafy 
 ex hijl'ituto f.gnificant. Voff. de Anal. L. I. c. I. In- 
 TERjECTio ejl Vox affectum ynenth fignificatis^ ac c'lira 
 verbi opemfententiam comple72S. Ibid. c. 3. Rcjlat claf- 
 fium extrema^ Interject 10. Hujui appellatio mn 
 
 firni'
 
 Book tke Secondi. - 291 
 
 " And thus we have found that all Ch. V. 
 ^' Words areeither significant by 
 
 <c 
 
 THEMSELVES, OR ONLY SIGNIFICANT, 
 
 * 
 
 U2 ** W^HEN 
 
 fmiUiterfe hahet ac Conjun^lonis, Nam cum hccc dicatur 
 QinjwiSlio, quia conjungat ; InterjeSlio iameVj non quia 
 interjacet^fed quia inteTJicitur, nomen accept. Nee tamen 
 de siTia, ejus e/i, ui interjiciatur ; cum per fe compleat fcii" 
 tentiaJYi-i nee raro ah ed incipiat oratio. Ibid. L. IV, 
 c. 28. Inter JECTIONEM non ejje partem Orationis Jic 
 cflendo : ^uod naturale eji^ idem e/i apudomnes : Sed ge- 
 mitus & Jigna latitia idem junt apud omnes : Sunt igitur 
 fiaturales. Si vera naturales, noti funt partes Orationis. 
 Nam ees partes^ Jecundum Arijlotelein^ ex injiituto^ non 
 naturay debent conjiare. Inter jeclionem Grceci Adverbiis 
 adnumerant 3 fedfalfo. Nam neque^ &c. San£t. Miner, 
 L. L c. 2. Interjectionem Grceci inter Adverhia 
 ponunt^ quofiidm hcec quoque vel adjungitur verbis^ yel 
 verba ei fubaudiuntur. Ut Ji dicam — Pap^e ! quid vi- 
 deo }-—vel per fe — Papae ! — etiamfi non addatur^ Miror ; 
 habet in fe ipfius verbi ftgnificationem. ^uce res ynaxime 
 fecit Romanarum artium Scriptores feparatim banc partem 
 ah Adverbiis accipere ; quia videtur affeSlum habere infefe 
 Verbi.y et plenam 7notus ani??ii fignificationem^ etiamfi non 
 addatur Verbum^ demonjlrare. Inter je^lio tamen nonfolinn 
 illa^ qua: dicunt Gra:ci (T-)(irXio(.a-^l)/i fig7iifcat ; fed etia?n 
 voces, quts cujifcunque pajfonis animi pufti per exclama~ 
 iioncm interjiciuntur. Prifc. L. XV,
 
 292 HERMES. 
 
 Ch. V. **WHEN Associated — that thcfe figni- 
 '^jicant by themf elves, denote either Sub- 
 ** ST AN CES or Attributes, ^2;^^^;-^^^//- 
 *^ ed for that reafon Substantives and 
 ** Attributives — that the Subfiantives 
 *' are either ^OM us or Pronouns — that 
 ** //^^'Attr I BUTivEs^rf^/>y^fr Primary 
 *' or Secondary — that the Primary At^ 
 * ' tributives are either Verbs, Partici- 
 ** PLEs, or Adjectives^ the Secondary, 
 ** Adverbs — Again, that the Parts of 
 * ' Speech, onlyfgnifcant when affociated, are 
 *' either Definitives or Connectives 
 *' — that the Definitives are either Arti- 
 ** cular or Pronominal — and that the 
 ** Conne5fives are either Prepos i tions or 
 " Conjunctions." 
 
 And thus have we refolvedLANGUAGf:^, 
 as a Whole into its constituent 
 Parts, which was the iirft thing, that we 
 propofed, in thecourfeof this Inquiry (^). 
 
 But 
 
 [h] See before, p. 7.
 
 Book the Second, 293 
 
 But now as we conclude, methlnks I Ch. V. 
 licar fome Objedor, demanding with an ' ^"^ 
 airof pleafantry, and ridicule — " Is there 
 • ' no /peaking then without all this trouble F 
 * ' Do we not talk every one of usy as well 
 ** unlearned J as learned -, as well poor Pea- 
 ^'fantSy as profound Philofophers T' We 
 may anfv/er by interrogating on our part 
 —Do not thofe fame poor Peafants ufe 
 the Levar and the Wedge, and many 
 other Inflruments, with much habitual 
 readinefs ? And yet have they any con- 
 ception of thofe Geometrical Principles, 
 from which thofe Machines derive their 
 Efficacy and Force ? And is the Ignorance 
 of thefe Peafants, a reafon for others to 
 remain ignorant; or to render the Subjed: 
 a lefs becoming Inquiry ? Think of Ani- 
 mals, and Vegetables, that occur every 
 day — of Time, of Place, and of Motion 
 — of Light, of Colours, and of Gravita- 
 tion — of our very Senfes and Intelled:, 
 by which we perceive every thing elfe— 
 
 U 3 That
 
 294 H E R M E S. 
 
 Ch.V. That they are, we all know, and a^e 
 perfe(flly fatlsfied — What they are, is 
 a Subjed: of much obfcurity and doubt, 
 "Were we to rejedt this lafl Queftion, be- 
 caufe we are certain of the firft, we fhould 
 baniih all Philofophy at once out of the 
 world {c)\ 
 
 But a graver Objedor now accofts us, 
 ^' W^at (fays he) is the Utility ? 
 ** Whence the Profit, where the Gain ?" 
 Every Science whatever (we may an- 
 fwer) has its Ufe. Arithmetic is excel- 
 lent 
 
 tTS HimiTi?, 7Cf roTTO^y iTi §i y,x\Xov o ^oopog. 
 'Ex«ra yap mruv to f/,iv ilvoci y]iu^i[xov Xj a\/a^(pi~ 
 AfHTOi/* Tj; J's uTSTH ifiv cc\)ruv *) ao"i«, Tuv •yjx'Ki'iria- 
 TBiTuu opa.^riiix,i. Eft $\ $'/> rt tuv toihtuv X; y\ ^/vy-i)' 
 TO jWEi/ yap livxi ri ttw ^v^riV^ yi/u^iyacTUTOv Xj (pa~ 
 
 VBOUTIZrOU' Ti Si TJOTi iflVy H fccSlOV K0CTK[J.l!i^s7lf,^
 
 Book: the Second. 295 
 
 lent for the gauging of Liquors ; Geome- Ch. V. 
 try, for the meafuring of Eflates 3 Aftro- 
 nomy, for the making of Almanacks ; 
 and Grammar perhaps, for the drawing of 
 Bonds and Conveyances. 
 
 Thus much to the Sordid — If the 
 h'lberal afk for fomething better than 
 this, we may anfwer and affure them from 
 the beft authorities, that every Exercife 
 of the Mind upon Theorems of Science, 
 like generous and manly Exercife of the 
 Body, tends to call forth and ftrengthen 
 Nature's original Vigour. Be the Sub- 
 je6l itfelf immediately lucrative or not, 
 the Nerves of Reafon are braced by the 
 mere Employ, and we become abler Ac- 
 ~tors in the Drama of Life, whether our 
 Part be of the bufier, or of the fedater 
 kirtd. 
 
 U 4 Perhaps
 
 296 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.V. Perhaps too there is a Pleafure even in 
 Science itfelf, diftindt from any End, to 
 which it may be farther conducive. Are 
 not Health and Strength of Body defirable 
 for their own fakes, tho' we happen not 
 to be fated either for Porters or Draymen ; 
 And have not Health and Strength of 
 Mind their intrinlic Worth alfo, tho' not 
 condemned to the low drudgery of fordid 
 Emolument ? Why fhould there not be 
 a Good (could we have the Grace to re- 
 cognize it) in the mere 'Energy of our In- 
 telleBy as much as in Energies of lower 
 degree ? The Sportfman believes there is 
 Good in his Chace j the Man of Gaiety, 
 in his Intrigue ; even the Glutton, in his 
 Meal. We mayjuftly afk of thefe, why 
 they pur Jue fuch things ^ but if they an- 
 fwer, they purfue them, hecaufe they are 
 Good, it would be folly to afk them far- 
 ther, WHY they PURSUE what is Good. 
 Jt might well in fuch cafe be replied on 
 
   theiy
 
 Book the Second, 297 
 
 their behalf (how ftrange foever it may Ch.V. 
 at firft appear) that If there was not fome- 
 thing Good, which was in no refpeB use- 
 ful, even things ufeful themf elves could not 
 pojibly have exijience. For this is in fai6l 
 no more than to alTert, that fome things 
 are Ends, fome things are Means, and 
 that if there were no Ends, there could 
 be of courfe no Means. 
 
 It ihould feem then the Grand Quef- 
 tion was, what is Good — that is to fay, 
 what is that which is dejirabk, not for 
 fomething elfe, but for itfelf', for whe- 
 ther it be the Chace, or the Intrigue, or 
 the Meal, may be fairly queftioned, fmce 
 Men in each inftance are far from being 
 agreed. 
 
 In the mean time it is plain from daily 
 experience, there are infinite Pleafures, 
 Amufements, and Diverfions, fome for 
 Summer, others for Winter 3 fome for 
 
 Country,
 
 293 H E R.M E S. , 
 
 Ch. V, Country, others for Town.; fome, eafy, 
 indolent, and foft; others, boifcerous, 
 a6tive, and rough ; a multitude diverfified 
 to every talle, and which for the time are 
 enjoyed as perfect Good, without a 
 thoUight of any End, that may he farther 
 ob tamed. Some Obje<5ls of this kind are 
 at times fought by all men, excepting 
 alone that contemptible Tribe, who, from 
 a love to the Means of life wholly forget- 
 ting its End, are truly for that reafoa 
 called Mifers, or Miferable, 
 
 If there be fuppofed then a Pleafure, 
 a Satisfadion, a Good, a Something valu- 
 able for its felf without view to any thing 
 farther, in fo many Objeds of the y«<^- 
 ordinate kind; fhall we not allow the fame 
 praife to thefublimef of all Objeds ? Shall 
 THE Intellect alone feel no pleafures 
 in its Energy i when we allow them to the 
 groliefl Energies of Appetite, and Senfe ? 
 Or if the Reality of all Pleafure§,and Goods 
 
 were
 
 Book, the Second. 299 
 
 were to be controverted, may not the In^ Ch. V. 
 telle5^ual ^oxt be defeno^ii, as rationally as 
 any of them ? Whatever may be urged in 
 behalf of the reft (for we are not now- 
 arraigning them) we may fafely affirm of 
 Intellectual Good, that it is " the 
 ** Good of that Part, which is moil ex- 
 ** cellent within us; that it is a Good ac- 
 ** commodated to ail Places and Times j 
 ** which neither depends on the will of 
 *' others, nor on the affluence of external 
 ^' Fortune; that it is a Good, which de- 
 ** cays not with decaying Appetites, but 
 ** often rifes in vigour, when thofe are no 
 ** more {d).'* 
 
 There is a Difference, wemuft own, 
 between this IntelleBiial Virtue, and Mo^ 
 ral Virtue. Moral Virtue, from its 
 Employment, may be called more Hu- 
 man, 
 
 \d) See Vol. I. p. 119, 12,0, &c.
 
 300 HERMES. 
 
 Ch. V. MAN, as it tempers our Appetites to the 
 purpofes of human Life. But Intel- 
 lectual Virtue may be furely called 
 more Divine, if we confider the Nature 
 and Sublimity of its End. 
 
 Indeed for Moral Virtue, as it is al- 
 moft wholly converfant about Appetites, 
 and Affection s, either to reduce the natural 
 ones to a proper Mean, or totally to expel 
 the unnatural and vitious, it would be im- 
 pious to fuppofe the Deity to have oc- 
 calion for fuch an Habit, or that any 
 work of this kind fhould call for his at- 
 tention. Yet God Is, and Lives. So 
 we are aflured from Scripture it felf. 
 What then may we fuppofe the Divine 
 Life to be? Not a Life of Sleep, as 
 Fables tell us of Endymion. If we may 
 •be allowed then to conjecture with a be- 
 coming reverence, what more likely, than 
 A PERPETUAL Energy OF the PUREST 
 Intellect about the first, all- 
 
 comprehensive
 
 Book the Second. 301 
 
 COMPREHENSIVE OBJECTS OF InTEL- Ch. V. 
 LECTION, WHICH OBJECTS ARE NO 
 OTHER THAN THAT INTELLECT IT- 
 SELF ? For in pure Intellection it 
 holds the reverfe of all Senfation, that 
 
 the PERCEIVER AND ThING PER- 
 CEIVED are always one and the 
 SAME {e). 
 
 It 
 
 e) b» sv nTug £u i^^tj wf *]/Afi? wore, o vfsog a£«, 
 
 uSiy Xj ^uri Si ye OTra^j^st* -/] yap Na hs^ytix, ^w>i* 
 ^E)i£7]/og cTf, 15 Ivipyncc' ivieyBicc $1 n )ta9' aurriu, £)i£n«» 
 
 ^WTl (HpiTn Xj diSiOq. ^OC^lV S\ TOV Qiov ilvoii ^wo* 
 
 vTToi^X^i Tw 0£w tot TO yap O ©EOS. Twy 
 ^£Ta Tx pvc-' a'. ^. It is remarkable in Scripture 
 that God is peculiarly chara6lerized as a Living 
 God, in oppofition to all falfe and imaginary Deities, 
 of whom fome had no pretenfions to Life at all ; others 
 to none higher than that of Vegetables or Brutes ; and 
 the beft were nothing better than illuftrious Men, whofe 
 exiftence was circumfcribed by the Ihort period of Hu- 
 manity. 
 
 To
 
 362 H E R lyi E S. 
 
 Ch. V. It was Spec-ulatlon of this kind con- 
 ceiTiing THE Divine Nature, which 
 induced one cf the wifefl: among the 
 Antients to believe — ** That the Man, 
 *' who could live in the pure enjoyment 
 *' of his Mindy and who properly culti- 
 ** vated that divine Principle, was happieji 
 ** in hifnfelf, and moji beloved by the Gods, 
 *' For if the Gods had any regard to 
 ** what pafb among Men (as it appeared 
 " they had) it was probable they fliould 
 ** rejoice in t/jat which 'was moJi excellent y 
 ** and by nature the moJi nearly allied to 
 ** themfelves 'y and, as this was Mind, 
 *' that they fhould requite the Man, who 
 ** moft loved and honoured Hhisy both 
 ** from his regard to that which was 
 
 *' dear 
 
 To the paflage above quoted, may be added another, 
 which immediately precedes it. 'Autov Je )/oii >»j 
 Kara ^iroiX7\-^iv t3 voy^-ra' votiTOf yap yiVcTOcij B'lylx,- 
 v(^ ^ voZv wre TATTON N0T2 KAI NOHTON. 
 
 12
 
 Book the Second. 303 
 
 " dear to themfelves, and from his a6l- Ch. V. 
 *' ing a Part, which was laudable and 
 "right//;." 
 
 And thus in all Science there is 
 
 fomething valuable for itfelf, becaufe it 
 
 contains within it fomething which is 
 divine. 
 
 (f) 'H9ix* NixojtAax* TO K'. Ktfp, r'. 
 
 End of the Second Book, 
 
 H E R-
 
 '? 
 
 05 
 
 HERMES 
 
 OR A PHILOSOPHICAL INQUIRY 
 
 CONCERNING UNIVERSAL GRAMiAlAR. 
 
 BOOK III. 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 
 IntroduBion — Divifion of the Subjedl into 
 ite principal Parts. 
 
 SOME things the Mind performs Ch.L 
 thro' the Body 3 as for example, 
 the various Works and Energies of 
 Art. Others it performs without fuch 
 Medium-^ as for example, when it thinks, 
 and reafons, and concludes. Now tho' 
 the Mind, in either cafe, may be called 
 the Principle or Source, yet are thefe lafr 
 
 X more
 
 3o6 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.I. more properly its owft peculiar Adis, as 
 being immediately referable to its own 
 innate Powers. And thus is Mind ul- 
 timately the Caufe of all -, of every thing 
 at kail that is Fair and Good, 
 
 Among thofe Ads of Mind more im- 
 mediately its own, that of mental Repara- 
 tion may be well reckoned one. Corporeal 
 Separations, however accurate otherwife, 
 are in one refped incomplete, as they may 
 be repeated v/ithout end. The fmallefl 
 Limb, fevered from the fmallefl Animal- 
 cule (if we could fappofe any inflrument 
 equal to fuch dilTedion) has ftill a triple 
 Extenlion of length, breadth, and thick- 
 nefs i has a figure, a colour, with perhaps 
 many other qualities; and fo will continue 
 to have, tho' thus divided to infinity. But 
 [a) the M/i^furmounts all power of Con- 
 
 cretion. 
 
 {a) Itaque Naturts facunda eji prorfus Solutio ^ Sepa- 
 ratio J non per Ignern certe^ fed per Mentem^ tanquam ig- 
 mm divi}7iim. Bacon. Organ. Lib. II. i6.
 
 Book the Third. . 307 
 
 cretioHy and can place in the limpleil Ch.I. 
 manner every Attribute by itfelf ; convex 
 without concave 3 colour without fuper- 
 ficiesj fuperficies without Body; andBody 
 without its Accidents; as diftinitly each 
 one, as tho' they had never been united. 
 
 And thus it is that it penetrates into the 
 recefles of all things, not only dividing 
 them, as Wholes, into their Jtiore confpicuous 
 Tarts, but perlifling, till it even feparate 
 thofe 'Elementary Frinciples, which, being 
 blended together after a more myfterious 
 manner, are united in the miniitefi Fart, 
 as much as in the mightiejl Whole [b). 
 
 Now if Matter and Form are among 
 thefe Elements, and deferve perhaps to be 
 elleemed as the principal among them, it 
 may not be foreign to the Defign of this 
 Treatife, to feek whether thefe, or any 
 things analogous to them, may be found in 
 
 X 2 Speech 
 
 {b) See below, p. 312,
 
 HERMES. 
 
 Speech or Language (i?). This there- 
 fore we {hall attempt after the following 
 method. 
 
 Every 
 
 [c) See before, p. 2. 7. Matter and Form (in 
 Greek T AH and EIAOS) were Terms of great im- 
 port in the days of antient Philofophy, when things 
 were fcrutinized rather at their beginning than at their 
 End. They have been but little regarded by modern 
 Philofophy, which almoft wholly employs itfelf about 
 the laft order of Subftance, that is to fay, the tangible, 
 corporeal or concrete^ and which acknowledges no fepara- 
 tions even in this, but thofe made by mathematical In- 
 ftruments or Chemical Procefs. 
 
 The original meaning of the Word TAH, was 
 Sylva, a Wood. TYms Homery 
 
 T^if/.B ^' k^ssc fAOiX^cc >cy T AH, 
 
 As Neptune poj}, the Mountains and the Wood 
 Tre?nbled beneath the God'' s immortal Feet. 
 
 Hence as Wood v;as perhaps the firft and moft 
 ufefxil kind of Materials, the Word "TA>i, which de- 
 noted it, came to be by degrees extended, and at length 
 to denote TvIatter or Materials in general. In 
 .this fenfe Brafs was called the'TA>5 or Matter of a Sta- 
 tue j Stone, the "TXn or Matter of a Pillar ; and fo in 
 other inftances, The Platonic Chalcidius, and other 
 
 Authors
 
 Book the Third. 
 
 3^9 
 
 Every thing in a manner, whether Ch,I. 
 natural or artificial, is in its conftitution 
 
 corn- 
 
 Authors of the latter Latinity ufe Sylva under the 
 fame extended and comprehenfive Signification. 
 
 Now as the Species of Matter here mentioned, 
 (Stone, Metal, Wood, i^^c.) occur moft frequently in 
 common life, and are all nothing more than natural 
 Subftances or Bodies, hence by the Vulgar, Matter 
 and Body have been taken to denote the fame thing; 
 Material to mean Corporeal', bnmater'ial^ IncorporeaL 
 &c. But this was not the Sentiment of Philofophers 
 of old, by whom the Term Matter was feldom ufed 
 under fo narrow an acceptation. By thefe, every 
 thing was called TAH, or Matter, whether cor- 
 poreal or incorporeal, which was sapable of becoming 
 fomething elfe^ or of being jmiilded into fornething elfe, 
 whether from the operation of Art, of Nature, or a* 
 higher Caufe. 
 
 -- In this fenfe they not only called Brafs the "TXri of 
 a Statue, and Timber of a Boat, but Letters and 
 Syllables they called the 'TAa* of Words ; Words or 
 fimple Terms, the'TAaj of Propofitions ; and Propo- 
 fitions themfelves the'TAa* of Syllogifms. The Stoics 
 held all things out of our own power (ra aV ip Ji^u-) 
 Tuch as Wealth and Poverty, Honour and Diihonour, 
 
 X 3 Health
 
 3IO HERMES. 
 
 'Ch-I. compounded of fomething Common, and 
 fomething Peculiar ; of fomething C'o;«- 
 
 Health and Sicknefs, Life and Death, to be the "TAat, 
 or Materials of Virtue or Moral Goodnejs^ which had its 
 ellence in a proper condu6t with refpeft to all thefe, 
 (Vid. Jrr. Epia. L. I. c. 29. Alfo Vol. the firft of 
 thefe mifccllaneous Treatifes, p. 187, 309. M. Ant. 
 XII. 29. VII. 29. X. 18, 19. where the 'XAtxoi/ and 
 ^Amca^ig are oppofed to each other). The Peripateticsy 
 tho' they exprefsly held the Soul to be d(ru>^xTo<;y or 
 Incorporeal^ yet ft ill talked of a Naj 'TAi>io?, a mate- 
 rial Mind or IntelleSi. This to modern Ears may pof- 
 fibly found fomewhat harfhly. Yet if we tranflate the 
 Words, Natural Capacity^ and confider them as only 
 denoting that original and native Power of IntellecSlion, 
 which being previous to all human Knowledge, is yet 
 neceiTary to its reception \ there feems nothing then to 
 remain, that can give us offence. And fo much for 
 the Idea of TAH, or Matter. See Alex. Aphrod. 
 de Anira. p. 144, b. 145. Ariji. Metaph. p. 121, 122, 
 141. Edit. Sylb. Prod, in Euclid, p. 22, 23. 
 
 As to EIA02, its original meaning was that of 
 Form or Figure, confidered as denoting vifible Sym- 
 metry, and Proportion; and hence it had its name from 
 ETJ'w to fee^ Beauty of perfon being one of the nobleft-, 
 and moft excellent Objedls of Sight. Thus Euripides, 
 
 Fair Form to Empire gave the fr/i pretence. 
 
 Now
 
 Book the Third. 311 
 
 nmit and belonging to many other things ; Ch. I. 
 and of fomething Peculiar, by which it 
 
 is 
 
 Now as the For?n or Figure of vifible Beings tended 
 principally to di/iinguijlj them, and to give to each its 
 Name and Effence ; hence in a more general fenfe, 
 %vhatever of any kind (tuhether corporeal or incorporeal) 
 was peculiar, eflential, and diftindive, fo as by its 
 acceflion to any Beings, as to its ' TA'/i or Matter^ to 
 mark them with a Character, which they had not be- 
 fore, was called by the Antients EIA02 or Form. 
 Thus not only the Shape given to the Brafs was called 
 the "EaSo; or Form of the Statue ; but the Proportion af- 
 figned to the Drugs was the ElSoq or Form of the Me- 
 dicine ; the orderly Motion of the human Body was the 
 ETJ'o? or Form of the Dance j the jufi Arrangement of 
 the Propofitions, the EiJ'oj or Form of the Syllogifm. 
 In like manner the rational and accurate ConduSl of a 
 wife and good man^ in all the various Relations and Oc- 
 currences of life, made that EjJ'o? or Form.^ defcribed 
 by Cicero to his Son, — For mam qiiidam ipfam^ Marce 
 fili^ et tanquarn faciem Hon EST I vides : qua:, fi oculis 
 cerneretur, rnirabiles amores (ut ait Plato) excitaret fa- 
 pieyitia, &c. De Offic. I. 
 
 We may go farther ftill — the supreme Intel- 
 ligence, which pafTes thro' all things, and which is 
 the fame to our Capacities, as Light is to. our Eyes, 
 
 X 4 this
 
 312 H E R M E S. 
 
 Ch.I. is diftinguiflied, and made to be its true 
 and proper felf. 
 
 Hence 
 
 this fupreme Intelligence has been called EIAOS 
 EIAUT^, THE Form of Forms, as being the 
 Fountain of all Symmetry, of all Good, and of all 
 Truth ; and as imparting to every Being thofe ejfential 
 and ^y?i«^/--y^ Attributes, which make it toht itfdf^ and 
 not any thing elfe. 
 
 And fo much concerning Form, as before concern- 
 ing Matter. We ftiall only add, that it is in 
 the uniting of thefe, that every thing generable be- 
 gins to exift ; in their feparating, to perijh, and be at 
 an end — that while the two co-exift, they co-exiii 
 not by juxta-pofttion^ like the ftones in > wall, but 
 hy a more intimate Co-incide7ice^ complete in the mi- 
 nutefc part— that hence, if we were to perfilt in di- 
 viding any fubftance (for example Marble) to infinity, 
 there would ftill remain after every fedlion both Matter 
 and Form^ and thefe as perfe£l:ly united, as before the 
 Divifion began — laftly, that they are both pre~exijient 
 to the Beings, which they conftitute ; the Matter being 
 to be found in the world at large ; the Forrn^ if artifi- 
 cial, pre-exifling within the Artificer^ or if natural, 
 within the Juprcme Cauje^ the Sovereign Artift of the 
 Univerfe, 
 
 —P'ukhrum pulcherjimus ipfe 
 
 Mundutn mente gere7is^fmiliqne in imagine forinam. 
 
 Even
 
 Book the Third* 313 
 
 Ch.I. 
 
 Hence Language, if compared ac- 
 cording to this notion to the murmurs of 
 
 a Foun- 
 
 Even without fpeculating fo high as this, we may fee 
 among all animal and vegetable Subftances, the f orm 
 pre-exifting in their immediate generating Caufe j Oak 
 being the parent of Oak, Lion of Lion, Man of Man, 
 
 tfc. 
 
 Ci/cero's account of thefe Principles is as follows. 
 
 Matter. 
 Sed fubjeSiam putant omnihus fine ulla fpecicy atque ca-- 
 rentem omni ilia qualitate (faciamus enim traSlando ufita^ 
 tius hoc verbum et tritius) materiam quandam^^ ex qua 
 omnia expreffa atqiie effiSia fmt : {qua iota omnia accipere 
 pojjit-i omnibufque modis mutarl atque ex omni parte) eoque 
 etiam intertre^ non in nihilwn^ &c. Acad. L 8. 
 
 Form. 
 
 Sed ego fic Jiatuo^ nihil ejfe in ullo genere tarn pukhrum, 
 quo non pulchrius idfit^ unde illud^ ui ex ore aliquo^ quoji 
 hnago^ expritnatur^ quod neque oculis^ neque auribus^ neque 
 ullo Jenfu percipi poteji : cogitatt07ie tantiim et mente complec- 
 
 titfiur. Has rerum for mas appellat Ideas ille non 
 
 intelligendi folum^ fed eiiam dicendi gravijfimus au^or et 
 magifler^ Plato : eafqiie gigni negat, et aitfemper ejje^ ox 
 ratione et intelligentia contineri : cater a nafci, occidere, 
 fiuercy kbl ; nee diutius effe una et eodemflatu, ^idquid 
 
 eji
 
 p4 . HERMES. 
 
 Ch. I. a Fountain, or the dafhings of a Cataract, 
 has in common this, that like them, it is 
 a Sound. But then on the contrary it has 
 in peculiar this, that whereas thofe Sounds 
 have no Meaning or Signification, to Lan- 
 guage a Meaning or Signification is 
 ejfential. Again, Language, if compared 
 to the Voice of irrational Animals, has in 
 common this, that like them, it has a 
 Meaning. But then it has this in peculiar 
 to diftinguifh it from them, that whereas 
 the Meaning of thofe Animal Sounds is 
 derivedj^^i?;;? Nature, that of Language 
 is derived, not from Nature, but froj?i 
 Compact {d). 
 
 From 
 
 W? Igitur^ de quo rati one et via dlfputetitr^ id ejl ad ulthyiayn 
 fui generis Fonnam fpeciemque redigendum. Cic. ad M. 
 Brut. Orat. 
 
 (i) The Peripatetics (and with juft reafon) in all 
 their definitions as well of Wdrds as of Sentences, 
 made it a part of their character to be fignificant xara 
 a-uMv-rw, by Compaq. See Arijlot. de Interp. c. 2. 4. 
 Bocthiui tranflates the Words iio!.7a o-uvfirixnv, ad placi-
 
 Book the Third. 31^ 
 
 From hence it becomes evident, that Ch.L 
 Language, taken in the moft compre- 
 heniive view, implies certain Sounds^ hav^ 
 ing certain Meaiiings • and that of thefe 
 two Principles, the Sound is as the 
 Matter, common (like other Matter) 
 to many different things ; the Meaning 
 as that peculiar and charaderiftic Form, 
 by which the Nature or Effence of Lan- 
 guage becomes complete. 
 
 iumy or fecundum plackumf and thus explains them in his 
 comment — Secundum placitum vera eji^ quod fe^ 
 cundum quanda?n pofitionem^ plackumque ponentis aptatur ; 
 nullum enim nomen naturaliter conJlHuium e/i, neque un- 
 quam^ ftcut fubje£ia res a naturd e/i, ita quoque a naturd 
 'veniente vocahulo nuncupatur. Sed hoynmum genus^ quod 
 £t ratione^ et orations vigerety nomifza pofuit, eaqiie quibus 
 libuit Uteris fyllohifque conjungens^ JinguUs fuhjeSlarum 
 rerum fubjiantiis dedit, Boeth. in Lib. de Interpret. 
 p. 308. 
 
 CHAP,
 
 3iS M E R M E S. 
 
 CHAP. II. 
 
 Upon the Matter, or common Subject of 
 Language, 
 
 Ch.II. ripHE TAH or Matter of Lan- 
 JL GUAGE comes iirfl to be confider- 
 ed, a Subjed, wbich Order will not fuf- 
 fer us to omit, but in which we fhall en- 
 deavour to be as concife as we can. Now 
 this TAH or Matter is Sound, and Sound 
 is that Sejtfafion peculiar to the Senfe of 
 Hearing, luhen the Air hath felt a Per- 
 cuffton, adequate to the producing fuch Ef 
 
 fea^a). 
 
 ^ As 
 
 {a) This appears to be Prifcian's Meaning when he 
 fays of a Voice, what is more properly true of Sound 
 in general, that it \?,—fiam fenfibile aurium, id ejl^ quod 
 prcprie aunbiis accidit. Lib. I. p. 537. 
 
 The following account of the Stoics, which refers 
 the caufe of Sound to an Undulation in thf! Jir propa- 
 gated circularly, as when we drop a ftone into a Ciftern 
 cf v>'ater, feems to accord with the modern Hypothefis, 
 
 and
 
 Book the Third; 317 
 
 As the Caufes of this Percuflion are Ch. II. 
 various, fo from hence Sound derives the 
 Variety of its Species. 
 
 Farther, as all thefe Caufes are either 
 Animal or Inanimate, fo the two grand 
 Species of Sounds are likewife Animal or 
 Inanimate. 
 
 There is no peculiar Name for Sound 
 Inanimate -, nor even for that of Animals, 
 when made by the trampling of their Feet, 
 the fluttering of their Wings, or any other 
 Caufe, which is merely accidental. But 
 
 that. 
 
 and to be as plaufible as any — ""hx^xiiiv tJ's, tS /a£t«^u 
 
 C(poa^oii^wgy hra KUjaaTOUjafi/jj, Xj roug a,y.ox7q Trootr- 
 'n-iTrjovTog, ug avfxiXTiiTxi to iv rj) §i^!x,y.iVYi v^up xara 
 avy.Xovg uVo t« i[/.QXri^iVTog A*6« — Porro audire^ cum 
 is J qui medius inter loquentem^ et aud'iejitem eji^ aer verbe- 
 ratur orhicularitei\ deinde agitatus aurlbus influ'it, quemad- 
 modiMi et c'l/iernce aqua per orbes injedo agitatur lapidg. 
 Diog. Laert. VIL
 
 3i8 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.II. that, which they make by proper Organs ^ 
 in confeqiience of fome Senfation or inward 
 Impulfe, fiich Animal Sound is called a 
 Voice. 
 
 As Language therefore implies that 
 Sound called FIuman Voice ; we may 
 perceive that to know the Nature and 
 Powers of the Human Voice, is in fad: to 
 know THE Matter (5r common Subjedl of 
 Language, 
 
 Now the Voice of Man, and it fhould 
 feem of all other Animals, is formed by 
 certain Organs betv/een the Mouth and 
 the 'Lungs, and which Organs maintain 
 the intercourfe between thefe two. The 
 Lungs furnifli Air, out of which the 
 Voice is formed ; and the Mouth, when 
 the Voice is formed, ferves to publifli it 
 abroad. 
 
 What thefe Vocal Organs precifely 
 
 are, is not in all refpeds agreed by PJiilo- 
 
 3 fophers
 
 Book the Thikd. 31^ 
 
 fophers and Anatomifts. Be this as it Ch.II. 
 will, it is certain that the mere pritnary and 
 Jimfle Voice is completely formed, before ever 
 it reach the Mouth, and can therefore (as 
 well as Breathing) find a PafTage thro' the 
 Nofe, when the Mouth is fo far flopt, as 
 to prevent the leall: utterance. 
 
 Now pure 2in^ fmiple Voice, being thus 
 produced, is (as before was obferved) 
 tranfmitted to the Mouth . Here then, by 
 means of certain different Organs, which 
 do not change its primary Qualities, but 
 only fuperadd others, it receives the Fo?i7i 
 cr CharaBer 0/' Articulation. For 
 Articulation is in fadt nothing ^S^^ 
 than that Form or CharaBer, acquired ta 
 Jimple Voice, by means of the Mouth and 
 its fever al Organs, the T^eeth, the Tongue, 
 the Lips, &c. The Voice is not by Ar- 
 ticulation made more grave or acute, more 
 loud or foft (which are its primary Qua- 
 lities) but it acquires to thefe Charadlers 
 
 certain
 
 320 H E R M E S. 
 
 Ch.II. certain others additional^ which are per- 
 
 fed:ly adapted to exijl along with toem [b') , 
 
 The 
 
 [b) The feveral Organs above mentioned not only 
 lerve the purpofes of Speech, but thofe very different 
 ones likewife of Mojlkaiion and Rejpiration j fo frugal 
 is Nature in thus afligning them double duty, and io 
 careful to maintain her character of doing nothing i?z 
 vain. 
 
 He, that would be informed, how much better the 
 Parts here mentioned are framed for Difcourje in Man, 
 tvbo is a Difctirfwe Animal, than they are in other Ani- 
 mals, who are not fo, may confult Arijlotle in his Trea- 
 ii(Q de Jnitnal Part. Lib. II. c. 17. Lib. III. c. I. 3. 
 De J) lima. L. II. c. 8. § 23, &c. 
 
 And here by the way, if fuch Inquirer be of a Genius 
 truly modern, he may poflibly wonder how the Philo- 
 fopher, confidering (as it is modeftly phrafed) the Age 
 in which he lived, Ihould know fo much, and reafon 
 fo well. But if he have any tafte or value for antient 
 literature, he may with much jufter caufe wonder at the 
 Vanity of his Contemporaries, who dream all Philofo- 
 phy to be the Invention of their own Age, knowing no- 
 thing of thofe Antients flill remaining for their perufal, 
 tho' they are fo ready on every occafion to give the pre- 
 ference to themfeives. 
 
 The following account from Ammonius will fhew 
 whence the Notions in this chapter are taken, and 
 
 what
 
 Book THE Third. 321 
 
 Tn^E fmpleft of thefe new Charaders Ch. IL 
 are thofe acquired thro,' the ?ncre Openifigs 
 
 of 
 
 ' what authority we have to diftinguiili Voice from 
 mere Sound j and articulate Voice from sim- 
 ple Voice. 
 
 $X2NH <?"£, ^o(po<; i^ £/A^u^8 yiv6y.£vogf Irocv hu rni 
 cufoA^? Ta B'upaKO? iK^XiQo[j,ivog utto ra Tirvev[j.oi/og I 
 il(77rvi\i^i\<; ccYip Ts-poc7ri7r]Yi aOo&w? t»7 ita,Xisy.Brii xpa- 
 p^£ia. dprriPiOCy Xy -rn VTrs^ocix, rjTot tw yixpyapiu'i/t, Xj 
 ^KX Trie uTA'/iyJ)? drronXin nva 7\yov cho-^titov, xarot 
 
 To7f ^strjxorj xcnKii[J!.ivuv o^ya-yuv cru^ba*va, ojov ix-vAocv 
 
 Xy (Tvciyyav rn? yAwTM?, >fcj twi/ odo^Tcoi'j x^ X"'" 
 
 Atcov Tzrpog jU£V THN AIAAEKTON avayxatw!/ ovtuv, 
 
 zrfoq Si THN 'AnAnS <^nNHN a T^avTw? o-u^- 
 
 toiXXofxivuv^ — Efique SoNUS, tclii$ aeris qui audkufen- 
 
 i'ltur : Vox cutum ejl fonus^ quern animans edity cmn per 
 
 thoracis comprrjjionem aer attraSlui a pulmone.) elifus fimid 
 
 totus in arteriam^ quam afperam vocant, et palatinn^ ant 
 
 gurgidionem impingit^ et ex iftii fomcm quendam fenfibikm 
 
 pro animi qiiodain impetu perficit. Id quod in injhumentis 
 
 qucs qida infiant^ idea iy.TrviVfO. a muficis dicuntur^ ujit 
 
 venity ut in tlbtisy ac fjiulis cofitingit^ cum lingua^ de?7teSy 
 
 labiaque ad^ loquclam necejjaria fmty ad vocem vero fimpli- 
 
 ce?n 7ion omnino conferant. Ammon. in Lib. de Intepr. 
 
 p. 25. b. Vid. etiam Boerhaave Inftitut. Medic. Sect. 
 
 626. 630. 
 
 Y It
 
 322 PI E R M E S. 
 
 Ch.II. of the Mouthy as thefe Openings differ \xi 
 giving the Voice a Pailage. It is the Va- 
 riety of Configurations in thefe Openings 
 only, which gives hirth and origin to the 
 feveral Vowels ; and hence it is they de- 
 rive their Name, by being thus eminently 
 Vocal (d:), and eafy to be founded of them" 
 fehes alone, 
 
 T H E R E are other articulate FcrWvf,which 
 the Mouth niakes not by pieie Openings, 
 but by different ContaBs of its different 
 farts ; fuch for in fiance, as it makes by 
 the Juncftion of the two Lips, of the Tongue 
 
 with 
 
 It appears that the Stoics (contrary to the notion of 
 the Peripatetics) ufed the word 4>IiNH to denote Sound 
 in general. They defined it therefore to be — To \^iov 
 aia^nTov dy.orig^ which juftifies the definition given by 
 Prifcian^ in the Note preceding. Aximal Sound 
 they defined to be — 'Arjp, utto o^a^j zs-sTrXnyt^ivo^y Jir 
 (Iruck (andfo made audible) by jorne animal invpulje ; and 
 Human or Rational Sound they defined— •''Ei'«/»- 
 G^o? >cj aTTo hoi.-jLix<; l>nri[jt,7ro[Aiurij Sound articulate and 
 derived from the difctirfwe faculty. Diog. Laert.Vll. 55,
 
 Book the Third. 32^ 
 
 with the Teeth, of the Tongue with the Ch.II, 
 Palate, and the like. 
 
 Now as all thefe feveral Contads, un- 
 lefs fome Opening of the Mouth either 
 immediately precede, or immediately fol- 
 low, would rather occalion Silence, than 
 to produce a Voice ; hence it is, that with 
 fome fuch Opening, either previous or 
 fubfequent, they are always connected. 
 Hence alfo it is, that t\iQ Articulations fo 
 produced are called Consonant, becaufe 
 they found not of themfelves, and from 
 their own powers, but at all times in com^ 
 fany with fome auxiliary Vowel (J), 
 
 There are other fubordinate Diflinc- 
 tions of thefe primary Articulations, 
 which to enumerate would be foreign to 
 the defign of this Treatife. 
 
 It is enough to obferve, that they are 
 all denoted by the common Name of Ele- 
 
 Y 2 MENT 
 
 id) 2TM$aNA.
 
 If 
 
 324 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.II. MENT {e)t in as much as every Articu- 
 ^■^'^^''^'-^ lation of every other kind is from them de- 
 rived, and into them refolved. Under their 
 fmalkjl Combination they produce a Sylla- 
 ble; Syllables properly combined produce 
 a Word', Words properly combined pro- 
 duce a Sentence y and Sentences properly 
 combhied produce an Oration ox D if coiirfe , 
 
 And thus it is that to Principles appa- 
 rently fo trivial ffj, as about twenty plain 
 
 ele- 
 
 [e) The Stoic Definition of an Element is as fol- 
 lows — ^Efj (?£ fOiyjiXoVt ^t ^'^ uT^wra yti/BTCci ra "j/jj/o- 
 fj^svcc, xj iU 'iTyurov dvaXvirai. An Element ii 
 thaty out of which, as their firji Principle, things gene- 
 rated are made, and irAo which, as their lajl remains, they 
 are refolved. Diog. Laert. VII. 176. What Ariftotle 
 fays upon Elements with refpect to the Subject here 
 treated, is worth attending to — Owvrif ^oiyfia, V^ #v 
 
 - cXiyyiiXT c/A ti (pwi/r), y^ £i? « StxipsTrcci iir^^^ccra' vahvoc 
 S\ [/.TiKiT sU ocKhag (puva,^ Irs^ocg too ejJ'ej ocvtoov. The 
 Elements of articulate Voice are thofe things, 
 Old of which the VoiCE is compounded^ and into luhich, as 
 its I'lfl rejnains, it is divided : the Ehnents thcmjelves be- 
 ing no farther divifible i?ito other articulate Voices, differ- 
 ing in Specie; from the?n. Metaph. V. c. 3. 
 
 (f) The Egypt i an s,p^id divine Honours to the In- 
 ijrntQr of Letters^ and Regulator cf Language^ whom 
 
 they
 
 .fWn.f.;, /, ^J4.. 
 
 ;://;/ ■;/ /i/   Ou^'f
 
 Book the Third. 325 
 
 elementary Sounds, we owe that variety Ch.II. 
 of articulate Voices, v/hich have been fuf- 
 ficierlt to explain the Sentiments of fo in- 
 numerable a Multitude, as all the prefent ' 
 andpafl; Generations of Men. 
 
 It 
 
 they called Theuth. By the Greeks he was wor- 
 ihipped under the Name of Hermes, and reprefented 
 commonly by a Head alone vjithout other L'lmbs^ ftanding 
 upon a quadrilateral Bafa. The Head itfelf was that 
 of a beautiful Touth^ having on it a Petafus^ or Bonnet^ 
 adorned with two Winp-s. 
 
 There was a peculiar reference in this Figure to the 
 EPMHS AOnoS, THE Hermes of Lan- 
 guage OR Discourse. He poircfTed no other part 
 of the human figure but the Head, becaufe no other 
 was deemed requijite to rational Coimnuni cation. TVords 
 at the lame time, the medium of tliis Communication, 
 being (as Horrttr well defcribes them) E7rf» -ufli^oiVTocy 
 Winged Words^ were reprcfcntcd in their Velocity by the 
 Wings of his Bonnet. 
 
 Let us fuppofe fuch a Hermes, having the Front of 
 his Bafts (the ufual place for Infcriptions) adorned with 
 fome old Alphabet^ and having a Veil filing acrofs^ by which, 
 that Alphabet ispai-tly covered. Let a Youth befeen 
 drawing off this Veil y and a Nymph, near the Youth, 
 i}-a)fcribifig what She there difcovers. 
 
 Such a Defign would eafily indicate its Meaning. 
 The Youth we might imagine to be the Genius 
 
 Y 3 OF
 
 326 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.II. It appears from what has been fald, 
 that THE Matter or common Sub- 
 ject OF Language is that species of 
 Sowids called Y 01 CES articulate. 
 
 What 
 
 OF Man (Natures Deus humams, as Horace ftiles him ;) 
 THE Nymph to be MNHMOSYNH, or Memo- 
 ry ; as much as to infinuate that " Man, for the 
 *' Prefervation of his Deeds and Inventions, was necef- 
 ^^ Jarily obliged to have recourfe to Letters ; and that 
 *' Memory, being confcious of her oiun Infiifficiency, 
 " was glad to avail herfelf of fo valuable an Acquifi- 
 " tion." 
 
 Mr. Stuart, well known for his accurate and ele- 
 gant Edition o{ the Antiquities o/'Athens, has adorned this 
 Work with a Frontifpiece agreeable to the above Ideas, 
 and that in a tafte truly Attic and Simple, which no one 
 pollelles more eminently than himfelf. 
 
 As to Hermes, his Hiftory, Genealogy, Mytholo- 
 gy, Figure, ^c, Vid. Platon. Phileb. T. 11. p. 1 8. 
 Edit. Serran. Diod. Sic. L. I. Horat. Od. X. L. I. 
 Hef.od. Theog. V. 937. cu7n Cotmnent. Joan, Diaconi» 
 Thycid. Yl. 2'j. et Scholiajl. in loc, Pighium apud Gro- 
 nsv.Thefaur. T. IX. p. 1164. 
 
 For the value and importance of Principles, and the 
 dificulty in attaining them, fee Arijlot. dc Sophijl. Eknch. 
 c. 34. 
 
 12 The
 
 Book the Third. 
 
 I'^l 
 
 What remains to be examined in the Ch.IL 
 following Chapter, is Language under its 
 charadieriftic and peculiar Form, that is 
 to fay. Language conlidered, not with 
 refped: to Sounds but to Meaning, 
 
 The following PafTagc, taken from that able Ma- 
 thematician Tacquet^ will be found peculiarly pertinent 
 to what has been faid in this chapter concerning Ele- 
 mentary Sonmh^ p. 324, 325. 
 
 Mille fnilliones fcuptoriun mllle annorum mUlioiulus 7ion 
 
 fcr'ibent omnes 24 Utter arum alphabet i permutationes^ licet 
 
 Jinguli quotidi} abfolverent 40 paginas, quarum unaqu(squ€ 
 
 cont'ineret diverfos ordlnes lltteraru7n 24. Tacquet Arith- 
 
 metkivTheor, p. 381. Edit. Antverp. 1663. 
 
 Y 4 CHAP.
 
 32S H E R xM E S. 
 
 CHAP III. 
 
 Upon the FQr?7iy or peculiar CharaBer of 
 
 Language. 
 
 Ch.III. TT7HEN to any articulate Voice 
 V 7 there accedes by compaSl a Mean- 
 ing or Signification, fuch Voice by fuch 
 jicceffion is then called a Word; and 
 many Words, pofTeiTing their Significa- 
 tions (as it were) under the fame Co7npaB 
 (^), unite in conftituting a particu- 
 lar Language. 
 
 It 
 
 {a) See before Note [c) p. 314. See alfo Vol. I. 
 Treatife II. c. i. Notes [a) and (c). 
 
 The following Quotation from Ammm'tm is remark- 
 able KoC^CCTTSp iy TO fM^V y.UTol rOTTOV ynv{i<T^cciy (pvtTtij 
 
 TO §i o^y^£i(T^<x,iy S-£(rfi ^ xara (n;^9«'>ojj>, xj to jwU' ^u- 
 Aov, (pua-ci, n S\ 3-u^ia;, ^iirn' »tw xJ to fAv (puviTv, 
 ^•jo-ii, TO de at ovo^ocruv v) pr)[ji.ix,TCov cr ri". a i'vfiv, ■S'fcrfi— 
 Xj ioiyts Tnv [j.iv (puvviTiKr)V S\!VO(.u.iVy avyocvocv »<r«v rwv 
 
 fujiv tyj^iv I avO^WT^ -arKgaTrArxr/wf Tor? aXcyoir,
 
 Book the Third. 329 
 
 It appears from hence, that a Wor.d Ch JII, 
 may be defined a Voice articulate , and 
 Jignijicant by Compact — and that Lan- 
 guage may be defined a Syjietn of fuch 
 Voices, fo Jignijicant . 
 
 It is from notions like thefe concern- 
 ing Language and Words, that one may 
 
 be 
 
 C,uoig* JO §\ ovo^acTi]/, ri fr)iJ.a(riVj h roTg Ik tjjtwv (Tvy- 
 xn^fi/oi? Xoyoig ^^na-^ai zr^og rnv dniAcccTiuv (Jk^ti 
 (pucEt 8<rjv, dxXy, ^•£0"£j) i^xtp^Tov 'lyt'-v 'uplg t« «Ao- 
 yo(. Cpxx-y SiOTi y^ y,ov^ tuov ^i/YjTUi/ duTOXivr.TS fji.STi^ 
 p^f» ^v^r.g, ^ ri-xvix(x>q luB^yeTv ^vvtzij,ivng, 7vx >cj Iv 
 
 JrjAao-t (?£ roAJToc. ol elg KaAA©^ (ruvTiO/^f^oj Xoyoi iUf- 
 ra ^iT^uv, V) aviv //£t^wv. In the fame rnanner there- 
 fore^ as local Motion is from Nature^ but Dancing is fsme- 
 thing pofttive; and as Timber exijis in Nature^ but a 
 Door isfomething pofitive ; fo is the power of producing a 
 vocal Sound founded in Nature^ but that of explairdng our- 
 fives by Nouns, or Verbs., fo7nething pofitive. Aiid hence it 
 is, that as to the ftmple power of producing vocal Sound 
 (which is as it were the Organ or Injlrument to the Soul's 
 faculties of Knoivledge or Volition) as to this voctil paiver I 
 fiiyy Manfecnn to pofjif it from Nature, in like manner as 
 
 irra-
 
 330 fl E R M E S. 
 
 Ch.III. be tempted to call Language a kind of 
 Picture of the Universe, where the 
 Words are as the Figures or Images of all 
 particulars. 
 
 And yet it may be doubted, how far 
 this is true. For if PiSlures and Images 
 are all of them Imitations, it will follow, 
 that whoever has natural faculties to know 
 
 the 
 
 irrational animals : but as to the employing of Nbuns^ or 
 Verhs.^ or Sentences compojed out ofthem^ in the explanation 
 of our Sentiments (the thing thus employed being founded not 
 in Nature., but in Pofition) this hefeems to pojfefs by way of 
 peculiar e?7iinence^ becaufe he alone of all juortal Beings par- 
 takes of a Soulj which can move itfelf and operate arti- 
 ficially ; fo that even in the Subject of Sound his artificial 
 Power Jhews itfelf', as the various elegant Cornpofitions both 
 in Metre.) and without MetrCj abundantly prove. Amnion, 
 delnterpr. p. 51. a. 
 
 It muft be obferved, that the operating artificially, 
 {\yipyiiv nyj/Diug^ of which y/A/zw(?;««5 here fpeaks, and 
 ■which he confiders as a diftincllve Mark peculiar to the 
 Human Soul, means fomething very different from the 
 jncrg producing works of elegance and defign ; elfe it could 
 never be a mark of Diftindtion between Man, and many 
 other Species of Animals, fuch as the Bee, the Beaver, 
 the Swallow, &c. See Vol. I. p. 8, 9, 10. 158, 159,
 
 Book the Third. 331 
 
 the Original, v/ill by help of the fame Ch.IIL 
 faculties know alfo its Imitations. But it 
 by no means follows, that he who knows 
 any Being, fhould know for that reafon 
 its Greek or Latin Name. 
 
 The Truth is, that every Medium 
 through which we exhibit any thing to 
 another's Contemplation, is either derived 
 from Natural Attribiitesy and then it is 
 an Imitation ; or elfe hom. Accidents 
 quite arbitrary t and then it is a Sym- 
 bol {b). 
 
 Now, 
 
 {h) Aiaipi^n ^i TO CMOHIMA tS ZTMBO- 
 
 AOT, Kxwocov TO f^lv c^.oiu^a rnv (pXKTiV aVTYi'V t5 
 TS^^ccy^xroq v.a.rcc ro ^-ovxrov ccTrstzoviPsa^xi j3iiAfTa<, 
 ?t, 8;c ifiv i<p n^7v avTo f/.ira,TrXoc<TXi' to yap Iv rvi 
 ik-Aovi yEy^oi[/.[/.si/ii Ta Swx^aTa? Ojac/cOjOca, l» [mv, y^ to 
 ^aAax^ov, h, to cn^oy, >c, to l^ui(p^ccK^ov fVst t5 
 2wxpaT8?, 8>c£t' uv avTH XiyoiTQ ilvai oiaoiu^x' to 
 d£ yi (TUjiaSoAo!/, r)TOi (rtjjtxfrov, (^cii[x(p6r£poc, yxp o (piXo- 
 <ro(p(^ ccvro ovoy.a,^si) to oAov i(p' %^'iv '-PC^'j ^"^^ ^ 
 fx p.&vi5j U(pir«jW£i/ov T»f riixiTi^ocg l-Trivoixg' oTcv, ts 
 -fircTf diT (TVu^ccXXctv «AA>iAoj? t^j TxroKtu.^vroc';, ^v~ 
 
 l/XTXl
 
 332 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.III. Now, if it be allowed that in far the 
 greater part of things, not any of their 
 ;z^/?^rj/ Attributes are to be found in arti- 
 culate Voices, and that yet through fuch 
 Voices things of every kind are exhibit- 
 ed, it will follow that Words mufi of ne- 
 cejjity <^^ Symbols, becaufe it appears that 
 they cannot be Imitations, 
 
 But here occurs a Quellion, which de- 
 ferves attention — *' Why, in the common 
 •' intercourfe of men with men, have 
 '* Imitations been neglected, and Symbols 
 
 " pre- 
 
 7 
 
 HxXTTiyfog r^yog-, <nii(/.cx. tpoiviox) (t/ap^rif. 
 Avvxrai $i rig viro^io-^oci jc, So^ctx^ dixxrcccriVj tc, jQt- 
 Aa? a^fcrji', x^ ocXXa [A^vaia. — A Representation 
 cr Resemblance differs from a Symbol, in as much as 
 the Resemblance aims as far as poffthk to refrefcnt the 
 very nature of the things nor is it in our p&iuer to JJ?ift or 
 %'ary^it. Thus a Representation intended for So- 
 crates in a Pitiiure, ifiVhave not thcfe circuniftances pe- 
 
 culiar
 
 Book the Third. 333 
 
 *"* preferred, although Symbols are only Ch.III. 
 ** known by Habit or Inftitution, while 
 ** Imitations are recognized by a kind of 
 *' natural Intuition?" — To this it maybe 
 anfwered, that if the Sentiments of the 
 Mind, like the Features of the Face, were 
 ioimediately vifible to every beholder, the 
 Art of Speech or Difcourfe would have 
 been perfectly fuperfluous. But now, 
 while our Minds lie inveloped and hid, 
 and the Body (like a Veil) conceais every 
 thing but itfelf, we are necelliirily compel- 
 led, when we communica/e ourThoughts, 
 
 to 
 
 culiar to Socrates, the ba'ld^ the jiat-nofid^ and the Eyes 
 proje£ling^ cannot -properly be called a R.epre.fentation of 
 hhn. But a Symbol or Sign (for the Ph'ilofopher . 
 Ariftotle ufes both names) is mhoUy in our own pow- 
 er^ as depending ftngly for its cxijlence qn our imagina- 
 tion. Thus for example^ as to the time when two armies 
 fi)Ould engage, the Sy??ihol or Sign may be the founding of 
 a Trumpet, the throwing of a Torch, [according to what 
 Euripidesylvj'j", 
 
 But when the flaming Torch was hiirPd, the fign 
 Of purple fight, as when the Trumpet founds. Sec.) 
 
 cr elfe one rnay fuppofe the elevating of a Spear, the darting 
 cf a Weapov, and a thoufand ways befides. Amnion, m 
 Lib. de Intcrp. p. 17. b.
 
 334 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.III. to convey them to each other through a 
 Medium which is corporeal {c) . And hence 
 it is that all Signs, Marks, Imitations, 
 and Symbols muft needs ht fenjible, and 
 addrelTed as fiich to the Senfes [d). Now 
 THE Senses, we know, never exceed 
 their natural Limits ; the Eye perceives 
 no Sounds ; the Ear perceives no Figures 
 nor Colours. If therefore we were to 
 converfe, not by Symbols but by Imitations, 
 as far as things are charaderized by Fi- 
 gure 
 
 fi-WjuaTCt'i/j kovvoiVTO $t avTuv tccv vo'/]iJ.ac,TUV (rrifxctivBiv 
 (xAA^Aaj? Tflj ziTpoi'yixa.rx' EttjiJ'/I Si (yufj^xtn (rvvSiSev- 
 Ta», SixYiV vsipsg zrB^ixa,Xv7rJii(rni dvruv ro vos^ov, iSiTi- 
 Qncsiv ruv ovo[/,(x,rooi/, S^ ui> <rr)uocivH(yiv dxXnXcxig roi 
 'syocx.yfj.xra., Animi nojlri a corporh compage fecreti res 
 iiicijfmi anmi conceptionibus fignificare pojfent : cum au- 
 tem corpor'ibus involutl pntt perinde ac nebula^ ip forum 
 intelUgendi vis ohtegitur : quocirca cpus eis fuit nomin'ibuSy 
 qu'ibus res inter fe fignijicarent. Amman, in Prapdicam. 
 p. 1 8. a. 
 
 [d) ^licqiiid fcitidi pojftt in differ enti as fatis nume^ 
 rofa'S^ ad notionum varietatem explicandam (modo differ- 
 entice ilia fenfui ^txc^'^iihWtsfint) fieri poteji vehiculum 
 cogiiationum de homine in horninem. Bacon, de Augm, 
 Scient. VI. i.
 
 Book the Third, 335 
 
 gure and Colour, our Imitation would be Ch.III. 
 necefTarily thro* Figure and Colour alfo. 
 Again, as far as they are charadlerized by 
 Sounds, it would for the fame reafon be 
 thro' the Medium of Sounds. The like 
 may be faid of all the other Senfes, the 
 Imitation ftill fliifting along with the 
 Objects imitated. We fee then how com- 
 -plicated fuch Imitation would prove. 
 
 If we fet Language therefore, as a 
 Symboly in oppofition to fuch hnitation -, if 
 we refledon the Simplicity of the one, and 
 the Multiplicity of the other ; if we con^. 
 fider the Eafe and Speed, with which 
 Words are formed (an Eafe which knows 
 no trouble or fatigue j and a* Speed, which 
 equals theProgrefs of our very Thoughts) 
 if we oppofe to this the ditEculty and 
 length of Imitations ; if we remember 
 that fome Objects are capable of no Imi- 
 tations at all, but that all Obje<5ts univer- 
 fally may be typified by Symbols ; we may 
 
 plainly 
 
 <M^"'"J".i " '■ " " I— — -'^■■-' ..-« -I .11-11   I" fc. — —..--. -i- . - . ~ .-..I .1 . —■ — 
 
 * F^TTicc Vlffojj/Ta— See before, p. 325.
 
 ^36 HERMES.^ 
 
 Ch.III. plainly perceive an Anfwer to the Quef- 
 tion here propofed, ** Why, in the com- 
 " mon intercourfe of men with men, 
 ** Imitations have been rejedled, and 
 ** Symbols preferred." 
 
 Hence too we may perceive a Reafon, 
 w^y there never id as a Language , nor in- 
 deed can pojjibly be framed 02ie, to exprefs 
 the Properties and real EJfences of things, 
 as a Mirrour exhibits their Figures and 
 their Colours. For if Language of itfelf 
 imply nothing more, than certain Species 
 of Sounds with certain Motions concomitant-, 
 if to fome Beings Sound and Motion are 
 no /^.ttributes at all ; if to many others, 
 where Attributes, they are no way effen- 
 tial (fuch as the Murmurs and Wavings 
 of a Tree during a florm) if this be true — 
 it is impofliblethe Nature of fuch Beings 
 fhould be expreffed, or the leafl: effential 
 Property be any way imitated, while be- 
 tween the Medium and themfehes there is 
 
 nothing connatural [e). 
 
 It 
 
 {() See Vol. I. Treatifc II. c. 3. p. 70.
 
 Book the Third., 337 
 
 It is true indeed, when Frimitives were Ch.III. 
 once eftablifhed, it was eafy to follow the 
 Connedtion and Subordination of Nature, 
 in the juft dedudiion of Derivatives and 
 Compounds, Thus the Sounds, Water, 
 and. Fire, being once annexed to thofe two 
 Elements, it was certainly more natural 
 to call Beings participating of the firfl:, 
 Watry, of the laft. Fiery, than to com- 
 mute the Terms, and call them by the 
 reverfe. But why, and from what natu-^ 
 ral ConiteBions the Primitives themfelves 
 might not be commuted, it will be found, 
 I believe, difficult to affign a Reafon, as 
 well in the inftances before us, as in mofl 
 others. We may here alfo fee the Reafon, 
 why ALL Language is founded in 
 Compact, and not in Nature ; for fo are 
 all Symbols, of which Words are a cer- 
 tain Species. 
 
 The Queftion remains if Words are 
 Symbols, then Symbols of what ? — 
 
 Z If
 
 338 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.III. If It be anfwered, of things, the Que- 
 ilion returns, of what Things ? — If it 
 be anfwered, of the feveral Individuals of 
 Senfe, the various particular Beings, which 
 exiji around us — to this, it is replied, may 
 be raifed certain Doubts. In the firfl 
 place every Word will be in fad; a proper 
 Name. Now if all Words are proper 
 Names, how came Lexicographers, whofe 
 exprefs bufinefs is to explain Words, 
 either wholly to omit proper Names, or 
 at leafl to explain them, not from their 
 own Art, but from Hiflory ? 
 
 Again, if all Words 2xt proper Names, 
 then in llridtnefs no Word can belong to 
 more than one Individual. But if fo, 
 then, as Individuals are infinite, to make 
 a perfect Language, Words muji be infinite 
 alfo. But if infinite, then incomprehen- 
 fible, and never to be attained by the wifeft 
 Men ; >\'hofe labours in Language upon 
 this Hypothelis would be as idle as that 
 iludy of in6nite written Symbols, which 
 
 Miffion-
 
 Book the Third. 339 
 
 Miffionaries (if they may be credited) at- Ch.III. 
 tribute to the Chinefe. 
 
 Again, if all Words are. proper Na?neSf 
 or (which is the fame) the Symbols of 
 Individuals-, it will follow, as Individuals 
 are not only infinite, but ever pqf/iizg, that 
 the Language of thofe, who lived ages 
 ago, will be as unknown now, as the very 
 Voices of the Speakers. Nay the Lan- 
 guage of every Province, of every Town, 
 of every Cottage, muft be every where 
 different, and every where changing, fince 
 fuch is the Nature of Individuals, which 
 it follows. 
 
 Again, if all Words are proper Names, 
 the Symbols oi Individuals, it will follow 
 that in Language there can be no general 
 Propofition, becaufe upon the Hypothecs 
 all Herms are particidar ; nor any Ajjlrma- 
 five Propofition, becaufe no one Individual 
 in nature is another. It remains, there can 
 be no Propofitions, but Particidar Nega- 
 
 Z 2 tives.
 
 340 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.III. tives. But if fo, then is Language Inca- 
 pable of communicating General Affirma- 
 tive I'ruths — If fo, then of communicat- 
 ing Demonjiration — If fo, then of commu- 
 nicating Sciences t which are fo many Syf- 
 tems of Demonftrations — If fo, then of 
 communicating Arts, which are the 
 Theorems of Science applied pradlcally 
 .—If fo, we fliall be little better for it 
 either in Speculation or in Practice (^). 
 And fo much for this Hypothefis ; let 
 us now try another. 
 
 If Words are not the Symbols o^ ex- 
 ternal Particulars, it follows of courfe, 
 they mufl be the Symbols of our 
 Ideas : For this is evident, if they are not 
 
 Symbols 
 
 [e] The whole of Euclid (whofe Elements may be 
 called the bafis of Mathematical Science) is founded 
 upon general Terms^ and general Propofittom^ moft of 
 which are affirmative. So true are thofe Verfes, how- 
 ever barbarous as to their ftile, 
 
 Syllogizari non eji ex Particiilari, 
 Neve Negativisj reife concluderefi vis.
 
 Book the Third. 341 
 
 Symbols of things without, they can only Ch.III. 
 be Symbols of fomething within. 
 
 Here then the Queftion recurs, if 
 Symbols of Ideas, then of what 
 Ideas ? — Of sensible Ideas. — Be it 
 fo, and what follows? — Every thing in 
 fadl, which has followed already from the 
 fuppofition of their being the Symbols of 
 external Particulars ; and that from this 
 plain and obvious reafon, becaufe the fe- 
 veral I^leas, which Particulars imprint, 
 muft needs be as infinite and mutable, as 
 they are themfelves. 
 
 If then Words are neither the Symbols 
 of external Particulars, nor yet of parti- 
 cular Ideas, they can be Symbols of no- 
 thing elfe, except of general Ideas, 
 becaufe nothing elfe, except thefe, re- 
 mains. — And what do we mean by ge- 
 neral Ideas ? — We mean such as 
 
 ARE COMMON TO MANY INDIVIDUALS ; 
 
 not only to Individuals which exifl now, 
 
 Z 3 but
 
 342 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.III. but which exifted in ages pad, and will 
 exifl in ages future j fuch for example, as 
 the Ideas belonging to the Words, Man, 
 Lion, Cedar. — Admit it, and what fol- 
 lows ? — It follows, that if Words are the 
 Symbols of fuch general Ideas, Lexicogra- 
 phers may find employ, though they 
 meddle not with proper Names. 
 
 It follows that one Word may be, not 
 homonymoifly , but truly and ejfentially com- 
 vion to many Particulars, pa ft prefent and 
 future 3 fo that however thefe Particulars 
 may be infnite, and ever fleeting, yet Lan- 
 guage notwithstanding may ht deflnite 2ind 
 fleady. But if fo, then attainable even by 
 ordinary Capacities, without danger of 
 incurring the Chinefe Abfurdity *", 
 
 Again, it follows that the Language 
 of thofe, v;ho lived ages ago, as far as it 
 
 ftands 
 
 * See p. 338, 339.
 
 Book the Third." 343 
 
 Rdinds Jhr the fame general Ideas, may be as Ch.III. 
 intelligible nowy as it was then. The like 
 may be faid of the fame Language being 
 accommodated to diilant Regions, and 
 even to diflant Nations, amidfl all the va- 
 riety of ever new and ever changi?ig Ob- 
 jeds. 
 
 Again, it follows that Language may 
 be expreffive oi general Truths -, and if fo, 
 then of Demonftration, and Sciences, and 
 Arts 5 and if fo, become fubfervient to 
 purpofes of every kind ffj. 
 
 Now if it be true ** that none of thefe 
 ** things could be aiTerted of Language, 
 ** were not Words the Symbols o^ general 
 ** Ideas — and it be further true, that thefe 
 ** things may be all undeniably alTerted 
 ** of Language" — -it will follow (and that 
 neceffarily) that Words are the Sym- 
 bols OF GENERAL IdEAS. 
 
 Z 4 And 
 
 (f) See before Note {e).
 
 344 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.III, And yet perhaps even here may be an 
 Objeftion. It may be urged, if Words are 
 the Symbols of general Ideas, Language 
 may anfvver well enough the purpofe of 
 Philofophers, who reafon about general^ 
 and abjiradi Subje6ls — but what becomes 
 of the bufmefs of ordinary Life ? Life we 
 know is merged in a multitude of Parti- 
 n^/^rj", where an Explanation by Language 
 is as requifite, as in the higheft Theorems. 
 The Vulgar indeed want it to no ot/jer^nd. 
 How then can this End in any refped; be 
 anfwered, if Language be expreffive of 
 nothing farther than general Ideas f 
 
 To this it may be anfwered, that Arts 
 furely refped: the bufmefs of ordinary Life ; 
 yet fo far are general I'erms from being 
 an Obftacle here, that without them no 
 Art can be rationally explained. How 
 for inftance fliould the meafuring Artifl 
 afcertain to the Reapers the price of their 
 labours, had not he firft through general 
 
 I'erms
 
 Book the Third. 34^ 
 
 Therms learnt thofe general T^heorems, that Ch.III. 
 refped: the doctrine and prad:ice of Men- 
 fu ration ? 
 
 But fuppofe this not to fatlsfy a perfe- 
 vering Objedtor — fuppofe him to infift, 
 that, admitting this to be true, there were 
 fiill a multitude of occajions for minute 
 particularizing, of which it was not -pofible 
 for mere Generals to be fufceptible — fup- 
 pofe, I fay, fuch an Objed:ion, what fhould 
 
 we anfwer ? T^hat the ObjeBion was 
 
 juji ; that it was necelfary to the Perfec- 
 tion and Completion of Language, that 
 it fiould be exprejjive ^Particulars, 
 as well as of Generals. We mu ft how- 
 ever add, that its general Terms are by 
 far its moft excellent and ejfential Part, 
 fmce from thefe it derives ** that com- 
 ** prehenfive Univerfality, that juft pro- 
 ** portion of Precifon and Permanence^ 
 ** without which it could not poflibly 
 ** be either learnt, or underflood, or ap- 
 ** plied to the purpofes of Reafoningand 
 
 5 ** Science;"
 
 346 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.III. ** Science;" — th^tfarticu/ar Terms have 
 their Utility and End, and that therefore 
 care too has been taken for a fupply of 
 thefe. 
 
 One Method of cxpreffing Particulars^, 
 is that of Proper Names. This is the 
 leaft artificial, becaufe praper Names be- 
 ing in every diflrid: arbitrarily applied, 
 may be unknown to thofe, who know the 
 Language perfed:ly well, and can hardly, 
 therefore with propriety be confidered as 
 parts of it. The other and more artificial 
 Method is that of Definitives or Ar- 
 ticles (^), whether we aiTume the pro- 
 nominal, or thofe more Jiriclly fo called . 
 And here we cannot enough admire the 
 exquilite Art of Language, which, with- 
 ' cut wandermg into infinitude y contrives how 
 to denote things infinite ; that is to fay in 
 other words, which, by the fmall Tribe 
 of Definitives properly applied to general 
 
 I'ennsy 
 
 (-) Sec before, p. 72, ^c, 233, &c.
 
 Book the Third. 347 
 
 ^ermsy knows hov/ to employ thefe laft, Ch.III. 
 tho' in numhtvjifiite, to the accurate ex- 
 preffion of infinite Particulars. 
 
 To explain what has been faid by a 
 fingle example. Let the general Term be 
 Man. I have occafion to apply this Term 
 to the denoting of fome Particular. Let 
 it be required to exprefs this Particular, 
 as unk?2own -, I fay, a Man — known -y I fay, 
 THE Man — indefinite ; A n y Man — definite ; 
 A CERTAIN Maji — prefent and near ', this 
 Man-^-prefent and difiant ; that Man^^ 
 like tofi)me other-, such a MaU'-^an inde^ 
 Jinite Multitude -, many Men — a definite 
 Multitude -, a thousand Men — tLe ones 
 of a Multitude y take?z throughout ; every 
 Man — the fame ones y taken with difiinSiion; 
 EACH Man — taken in order j first Man, 
 SECOND Many &c. — the whole Multitude 
 of Particulars taken collectively j all Men 
 '—the Negation of this Multitude -, no Man, 
 But of this we have fpoken already, when 
 Y^c inquirec} concerning Definitives. 
 7 The
 
 348 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.III. The Sum of all is, that Words are 
 THE Symbols of Ideas both gene- 
 ral AND PARTICULAR; YET OF THE 
 GENERAL, PRIMARILY, ESSENTIALLY, 
 AND IMMEDIATELY; OF THE PARTI- 
 CULAR, ONLY SECONDARILY, ACCI- 
 DENTALLY, AND MEDIATELY. 
 
 Should it be afked, ** why has Lan- 
 ** guage this double Capacity ?" — May we 
 not afk, by way of return. Is it not a kind 
 of reciprocal Commerce, or Inter courfe of 
 our Ideas'^ Should it not therefore be 
 framed, fo as to exprefs the whole of our 
 Perception ? Now can we call that Per- 
 ception intire and whole, which implies 
 either Intellection without Senfation, 
 or Sensation without IntelleSlion^ If 
 not, how Hiould Language explain the 
 whole of our Perception, had it not Words 
 to exprefs the Obje(5ts, proper to each of 
 the two Faculties ? 
 
 To
 
 Book the Third. 349 
 
 To conclude — As in the preceding Ch.IIL 
 Chapter we conlidered Language with a 
 view to its Matter, fo here we have 
 confidered it with a view to its Form. 
 Its Matter is recognized, when it is 
 Confidered as a Voice-, its Form, as it is 
 Jignijica7it of our feveral Ideas ; fo that 
 upon the whole it may be defined — A 
 System of articulate Voices, the 
 Symbols of our Ideas, but of those 
 principally, which are general 
 or universal. 
 
 C H A P.
 
 SS^ HERMES. 
 
 CHAP. IV. 
 
 Concerning general or univerfal Ideas 4 
 
 Ch.IV. A /f UGH having been faid in the pre^ 
 XVJL ceding Chapter about general 
 OR UNIVERSAL Ideas, it may not per- 
 haps be amifs to inquire, by what procefs 
 we come to perceive them^ and what kind 
 of Beings they are -, lince the generality of 
 men think fo meanly of their exiflence, 
 that they are commonly confidered, as 
 little better than Shadows. Thefe Sen- 
 timents are not unufual even with the 
 Philofopher now a days, and that from 
 caufes much the fame with thofe, which 
 influence the Vulgar. 
 
 The Vulgar merged in Senfe from 
 their earlieft Infancy, and never once 
 dreaming any thing to be worthy of pur- 
 fuit, but what either pampers their Appe- 
 tite, or fills their Purfe, imagine nothing 
 
 t©
 
 Book the Third. 35I 
 
 to be real, but what may be tafted, or Ch.IV. 
 touched. The Philosopher, as to thefe 
 matters being of much the fame Opinion, 
 in Philofophy looks no higher, than to 
 experiment alAmufements, deeming nothing 
 Demonjlration, if it be not made ocular. 
 Thus inftead of afcending from Senfe to 
 IntelleSi (the natural progrefs of all true 
 Learning) he hurries on the contrary into 
 the midfl of Senfe, where he wanders at 
 random without any end, and is loft in a 
 Labyrinth of infinite Particulars. Hence 
 then the reafon why the fublimer parts of 
 Science, the Studies of Mind, Intellec- 
 tion, and INTELLIGENT PRINCIPLES, 
 
 are in a manner neglefled ; and, as if the 
 Criterion of all Truth were an Alembic or 
 an Air-pump, wliat cannot be proved by 
 BjXperimenty is deemed no better than 
 mere Hy pot he/is. 
 
 And yet it is fomewhat remarkable, 
 amid the prevalence of fuch Notions, that 
 there fliould {till remain two Sciences in 
 
 fifhion.
 
 352 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.IV. fafhion, and thefe having their Certainty 
 of all the lead controverted, which are not 
 in the minutejl article depending upon Expe^ 
 ri?nent. By thefe I mean Arithmetic, 
 and Geometry (^). But to come to our 
 Subjed: concerning general Ideas. 
 
 Man's 
 
 {a) The many noble Theorems (fo ufeful in life, 
 and fo admirable in themfelves) with which thefe two 
 Sciences fo eminently abound, arife originally from 
 Principles, the most obvious imaginable; 
 Principles, fo little wanting the pomp and apparatus of 
 Experiment, that they zrt felf-evident to every one, 
 poffefled of common fenfe. I would not be underftood, 
 in what I have here faid, or may have faid elfewhere, to 
 undervalue Experiment; whofe importance and uti- 
 lity I freely acknowledge, in the many curious Noftrums 
 and choice Receipts, with which it has enriched the 
 neceflary Arts of life. Nay, I go farther — I hold all 
 jti/l'ifiable Pra^ice In every kind of Subje^ to be founded 
 in Experience, which is no more than the refidt of 
 many repeated Experiments. But I muft add with- 
 al, that the man who a£ls from Experience alone^ tho* 
 he adl ever fo well, is but an Empiric or ^ack^ and 
 that not only in Medicine, but in every other Subject. 
 It is then only that we recognize Art, and that the 
 Empiric quits his name for the more honourable one 
 of Artist, when to his Experience he adds 
 
 Science,
 
 Book the Th'ird. 353 
 
 Man's first Perceptions are thofe Ch.IV". 
 of the Senses, in as much as they com- 
 mence from his earlieft Infancy. Thefe 
 Perceptions, if not infinite, are at leafb 
 indefinite y and movQ Jleeting and trai2jienty 
 than the very Objeds, which they exhibit, 
 
 becaufe 
 
 Science, and is thence enabled to tell us, not only, 
 WHAT h to he done^ but WHY it is to be doney for Art 
 is a compojite of Experience and Science^ Experience 
 providing it Materials^ and Science giving them a 
 Form. ^ 
 
 In the mean time, while Experiment is thus ne- 
 ceflary to all practical Wisdom, with refpeit to 
 PURE and SPECULATIVE Science, as we have 
 hinted already, it has not the leaft to do. For who 
 ever heard of Logic^ or Geometry^ or Arithmetic being 
 proved experimentally ? It is indeed by the application 
 of thefe that Experiments are rendered ufeful ; that they 
 are aflumed into Philofophy, and in fome degree made 
 apart of it, being otherwife nothing better than puerile 
 amufements. But that thefe Sciences themfelves fhould 
 depend upon the Subje(5ls, on which they work, is, as 
 if the Marble were to fafhion the Chizzle, and not the 
 Chizzle the Marble. 
 
 A a
 
 354 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.IV. becaufe they not only depend upon the 
 exijlence of thofe Objects, birt becaufe 
 they cannot fubfifl, without their imme- 
 diate Frefence, Hence therefore it is, that 
 there can be no Senfation of either Paji or 
 Future, and confequently had the Soul no 
 other Faculties, than the Sefifes, it never 
 could acquire theleail: Idea of Time (^). 
 
 But happily for us we are not deferted 
 here. We have in the firfl: place a Faculty, 
 called Imagination or Fancy, which 
 however as to its energies it may be fub- 
 fequent to Senfe, yet is truly prior to it 
 both in dignity and iife. This it is which 
 retains the jieeting Forms of things, when 
 Things themfelves are gone, and all Sen* 
 fat ion at an end. 
 
 That this Faculty, however connedled 
 with Senfe, is iiill perfe(5tly diiferent, may 
 
 be 
 
 {b) See before, p. 105. See alfo, p. 112. Note (f).
 
 Book THE Third. 35.^ 
 
 be feen from hence. We have an Imagi- Ch.IV. 
 nation of things, that are gone and ex- 
 tin(5t ; but no fuch thmgs can be made 
 objects of Senfation, We have an eafy 
 command over the Objecfts of our h?iagi- 
 nation, and can call them forth in almoft 
 what manner we pleafe -, but our Senfa^ 
 tions are neceflary, when their Objed:s are 
 prefent, nor can we controul them, but 
 by removing either the Objed:s, or our-, 
 felves (c). 
 
 A9 
 
 (r) Befides the diftingulfhing of Sensation from 
 Imagination, there are two other Faculties of the 
 Soul, which from their nearer alliance ought carefully 
 to be diftinguiihed from it, and thefe are MNHMH, 
 and ANAMNHSIS, Memory, and Recollec- 
 tion. 
 
 When we view fome reUil of fenfation repofed within 
 us, without thinking of its rife^ or referring it to any fcn~ 
 fible ObjeSf, this is Phansy or Imagination. 
 
 When we view fome fuch reli^^ and refer it ivithal to 
 that fenfible ObjcSl^ which in time ^pafi was its caife a?]d 
 original^ this is Memory. 
 
 A a 2 Laftly
 
 356 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.IV. As the Wax would not be adequate 
 to its bufinefs of Signature, had it not a 
 Power to retain y as well as to receive; the 
 fame holds of the Soul, with refped: to 
 Senfe and Imagination. Sense is its re^ 
 
 ceijtive 
 
 J. 
 
 Ivaftlv the Road, which leads to Memory through aferies 
 cf Ideas^ ho%vever conne£led^ whether rationally or cafually^ 
 this is Recollection. I have added cajually^ as well 
 as rationally^ becaufe a cafual connection is often fuf- 
 ficient. Thus from feeing a Garment, I think of its 
 Owner \ thence of his Habitation ; thence of Woods ; 
 thence of Timber j thence of Ships, Sea-fights, Ad- 
 mirals, <^c. 
 
 If the Diftin6lion between Memory and Phanfy be not 
 fufficientiy underftood, it may be illuilrated by being 
 compared to the view of a Portrait. When we con- 
 template a Portrait, without thinking of whom it is the 
 Portrait J fuch Contemplation is analogous to Phan- 
 SY. When we viev/ it with reference to the Original, 
 who7n it reprefents^ fuch Contemplation is analogous to 
 Memory. 
 
 We may go farther. Imagination or Phansy 
 may exhibit (after a manner) even things that are to 
 come. It is here that Hope and Fear paint all their plea- 
 fant, and all their painful Piftures di Futurity. But 
 Memory is confined in the ftrideft manner /(? //;^ Z"^/?. 
 
 What
 
 Book the Third. 357 
 
 eeptive Power; Imagination, its re- ChJV. 
 tefitive. Had it Senfe without Imagi- 
 nation, it would not be as Wax, but as 
 Water, where tho' all Impreffions may 
 be inftantly m.ade, yet as foon as made 
 they are as inftantly loft. 
 
 Thus then, from a view of the two 
 Powers taken together, we may call 
 Sense (if we pleafe) a kind of tranfient 
 Imagination.', and Imagination on the 
 contrary a kind of permanent Senfe {d). 
 
 Now 
 
 What we have faid, may fuffice for our prefent pur- 
 pofe. He that would learn more, may confult Arifiot. 
 de Jnima, L. III. c. 3, 4. and his Treatife de Mem, et 
 Reminifc. 
 
 (^d) Ti roiuvv If IV r\ cpoi,v\ii(nx u^s ocv yvu^Kroiiy-sv* 
 $u voiiv Iv TifMV OjIto tmv Ivspysioov tcou "unpt roc dio-^ri-' 
 ra, biov tuttJov ( '^^^ tuttoi/) Tiuoi Xj dvcc^ccypapnfAX 
 
 Iv TU ZT^UTCp aKr9»]T*)^J&:), lyXAT dKn^y.oi Tt T?)9 UTTO Ta 
 
 A a 3 tftuTtf,
 
 358 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.IV. Now as our Feet in vain venture to 
 walk upon the River, till the Frofl bind 
 the Current, and harden the yielding Sur- 
 face; fo does the Soul in vain feek to 
 exert its higher Powers, the Powers I 
 mean of Reason and Intellect, till 
 Imagination firil: fix the Jiiiency of 
 Sense, and thus provide a proper Balls 
 for the fupport of its higher Energies. 
 
 After 
 
 aura, o -^ T»f? fx\/r\[jt,r,g tjimv crooc^o^ivov oitjion yivsTUi' 
 ro roi^Tov lyy.ot,rxXiiif.i/.o(,i X; tov roi^rov ucrirsp rxiiroVy 
 ^ANTASIx^N :t<xA8o-iv. Now what Phansy or 
 Imagination /j, we may explain as follows. We jnay 
 conceive to' be formed within iis^from the operations of our 
 Senfes about fenfihle SubjeSls^ foJJie Impreffion (as it ivere) 
 cr Picture in our original Senforium^ being a relict of that 
 ?notion caufed within us by the external objeSi ; a rcli^, 
 tvhich when the external object is no lo}2ger prejent, remains 
 andisjhllprefcrved^ being as it were its hnage, and which, 
 h being thus preferved, becomes the caufe of our having 
 Memory. Nowfuch a fort of relitl and (as it were) Im- 
 prejfion they call Phansy or IMAGINATION. Jh>i.» 
 Jphn?d, de-Jnim^y p. 135. b. Edit. AkL
 
 Book the Third. 359 
 
 After this manner. In the admirable Ch.IV. 
 Oeconomy of the Whole, are Natures 
 fubordinate made fubfervient to the high- 
 er. Were there no Tubings externaly the 
 Senfes could not operate ; were there no 
 Se?ifatio?iSf the Imagination could not ope- 
 rate j and were there no Imagination , there 
 could be neither Reafoning nor Intelle^ion, 
 fuch at leaft as they are found in Man^ 
 where they have their Intenfions and Re- 
 millions in alternate fucceflion, and are 
 at firfl nothing better, than a mere Ca- 
 pacity <5r Power. Whether every In- 
 tellecft begins thus, may be perhaps a 
 queftion i efpecially if there he any one 
 of a nature i72ore divine, to which *' Inten- 
 ** fion and Remiflion and mere Capacity 
 ** are unknown {/),'' But not to digrefs. 
 
 It 
 
 (ej Sec p. 162. The Ltfe^ Energy^ or Manner of 
 Man's Exigence is not a little different from that of 
 th« DiiiTY. The Life of Man has its Eflence in 
 
 A a ^ Motion^
 
 360 H E R M E S. 
 
 Ch.IV. It is then on tht{cpermanef2tPh2intdi{ms 
 that THE HUMAN MiND firft works, and 
 
 by 
 
 Motion. This is not only true with refpedl to that 
 lower and fubordinate Life, which he fhares in com- 
 mon with Vegetables, arid which can no longer fubfift 
 than while the Fluids circulate, but it is likewife true in 
 that Lifi, which is peculiar to him as Alan. Objefts 
 from witliout Jir/i move our faculties, and thence we 
 move of ourfelves either to Praol'tce or Contemplation. 
 But the Life or Existence of God (as far as we can 
 conjecture upon fo tranfcendent a Subje6l) is not only 
 complete throughout Eternity, but complete in every 
 Liftant, and is for thatreafon immutable and supe- 
 rior TO ALL Motion. 
 
 -■* 
 
 It is to this diftinftion that JrJJiotk alludes, when 
 he tells us — OJ yolp [/.ovov Kivritrswg triv ivi^yzicc^ xKXoe. 
 t^ olyiH/ri(nccg' Xy 7^J'o^?l [xxXXou Iv ripsj^ioi, tfii/, r iv xk- 
 VYiCik' usTccQoXn ^£ -nyoiVTUv yAuxu, xara rov 7!roir\TYiv, 
 $ia, zTO]/"/iPiciv Tivoc," uxTTTip yccp ai/uPcoTTO'; ivy.ETa.QoXo^ 
 ZTOvr,Dog, j{y y\ (pucrig -/i ^£Ojj.ivrt [xsroiQaXvi;' 8 yccp 
 airMy o\)0 iinsiyJi?. For there is not only an Energy 
 of MoTio-^y but cf Immobility ; and Pleasure or 
 Felicity exi/Is rather in Rest than in Motion ; 
 Change of all things being fooeet (according to the Poet) 
 from a principle of Pravity in thofe who believe Jo. For 
   ' , 3 in
 
 Book the Third. 361 
 
 by an Energy as fpontaneous and familiar Ch.IV. 
 to its Nature, as the feeing of Colour is 
 familiar to the Eye, it difcerns at once 
 
 what 
 
 :77 the fame manner as the bad man is one fickle and change^ 
 able^ fo is that Nature bad that reqidreth Variety^ in as 
 much as fuch Nature is neither fimple nor even. Eth. 
 Nicom. VII. 14. & Ethic. Eudem. Yl.fub.fin. 
 
 It is to this UNALTERABLE NaTURE OF THE 
 
 Deity that Boethius refers, when he fays in thofe ele- 
 gant verfes, 
 
 — — — Tempus ab JEvo 
 
 Ire jubes stabilisqjje manens das cun^a 
 moveri. 
 
 From this fingle principle of Immobility, may be de- 
 rived fome of the noblefl: of the Divine Attributes ; fuch 
 as that of Impassive, Incorruptible, Incorpo- 
 real, &c. Vide Jri/lot. Phyfic. VIII. Metaphyf. 
 XIV. c. 6, 7, 9. 10. Edit. Du Val. See alfo Vol. I. 
 of thefe Treatifes, p. 2,62 to 266 — alfo p. 295, where 
 the Verfes of Boethius are quoted at length. 
 
 It muft be remembered however, that tho' we are not 
 Gods^ yet as rational Beings we have within us fome- 
 thing Divine^ and that the more we can become fupe- 
 rior to our mutable, variable, and irrational part, and 
 place our welfare in that Good, which is immutable, 
 
 per-
 
 362 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.IV. what in many is one 5 what in things 
 
 DISSIMILAR and DIFFERENT is SIMILAR 
 
 and the same (f). By this it comes to 
 
 behold 
 
 permanenr, and rational, the higher we fhall advance in 
 real Happinefs and Wifdom. This is (as an antient 
 writer fays) — '(jjW,o<w(ri? tw ©sm xara to J^ui/arov, the 
 hecoming like to God, as far as in our poxver. Tok /"■£" 
 yap ^ioiq T^aq o |3i'(^ ^ccKOi^i^' roTg $' a^9fW7ro^?, 
 itp oa-ov oiJi.oiu[j:.oi tj Trig TOiOivrn; ivi^yiiaq Vfrd^^Bi. 
 For to THE Gods (as fays another antient) the whole of 
 life is one continued happinefs; hut to Men, // is fo far 
 happy^ as it rifes to the refe?nblance off divine an Energy, 
 See Plat. inThejetet. Jri/l Eth. X. 8. 
 
 (f) This CONNECTIVE AcT of the Soul, by 
 which it views one in many, is perhaps one of the 
 principal Ads of its moft excellent Part. It is this re- 
 moves that impenetrable mift, which renders Objc^s of 
 Intelligence invifible to lower faculties. Were it not for 
 this, even the fcnfible World (with the help of all our 
 Senfations) would appear as unconnected, as the words 
 of an Index. It is certainly not the Figure alone, nor 
 the Touch alone, nor the Odour alone, that makes 
 the Rofe, but it is made up of all thefe, and other at- 
 tributes UNITED ; not an utiknown Conftitution of /«- 
 f-nfiUe Parts, but a hioum Conftitution o'i fenfthle Parts, 
 imlcfs we chufc to extirpate the poffibility of natural 
 
 Knowledge, 
 
 L What
 
 Book the Third. ^^3 
 
 behold a kin^ oi fiiperior Objects; a d'"'' ^"•-^^• 
 Race of Perceptions, more compr*"-'"^"^^^ 
 
 than 
 
 What then perceives this Constitution or 
 Union ? — Can it be any of the Senfes ? — ^No one of 
 thefe, v/e know, can pafs the limits of its own pro- 
 vince. Were the Smell to perceive the union of the 
 Odour and the Figure, it would not only be Smell, 
 but it would be Sio-ht alfo. It is the fame in other in- 
 ftances. We mull neceffarily therefore recur to fome 
 HIGHER COLLECTIVE PowER, to give US a profpcit 
 of Nature, even in tliefe her fuhordinate Wholes^ much 
 more in that co?nprchcnfive TVJoole^ whofe Sympathy is 
 univerfal, and of which thefe fmaller Wholes are all no 
 more than Parts, 
 
 But no where is this collcSilng^ and (if I may be al- 
 lowed the expreflion) this unifying Power more con- 
 fpicuous, than in the fubje£ls of pure Truth. By 
 virtue of this power the Mind views One general Idea^ 
 in 7nany Individuals ; One Propofition m many general 
 Ideas ; One Syllogijm in many Propofitions ; till at length, 
 by properly repeating and connefting Syllogifm with 
 Syllogifm, it afcend into thofc bright zn^Jieady regions of 
 Science, 
 
 ^las neque concutiimt venti, ncquc nubila ni?7ibls 
 Jdfpergmit^ he, Lucr. 
 
 Even
 
 y4, H E R M E S. 
 
 ^_^ . ^han thofe of Senfe i a Race of Percep- 
 
 tioi.. ^^^/j Q^^^ of which may be found intire 
 
 and 
 
 Even negative Truths and negative Conclufions can- 
 not fubrift,'but by bringing Terms and Propofitions 
 together, fo necejjary is this uniting Power to every 
 species (?/'Knowledge. See p. 3. 250. 
 
 He that would better comprehend the diftinilion be- 
 tween SENSITIVE Perception, and intellec- 
 tive, may obferve that, when a Truth is fpoken, it 
 is heard by our Ears, and underjiood by our Minds. 
 That thefe two A<3:s are different, is plain, from the 
 example of fuch, as hear the founds, without know~ 
 ing the language. But to iliew their difference ftill 
 ftronger, let us fuppofe them to concur in the fame 
 Man, who fhall both hear and underjland the Truth 
 propofed. Let the Truth be for example. The Angles 
 ef a Triangle are equal to two right Angles. That this 
 is ONE Truth, and not two or 7nany Truths, I believe 
 none will deny. Let me allc then, in what manner 
 does this Truth become perceptible (if at all) to Sen^ 
 SATION ? — The Anfwer is obvious ; it is by fucceffive 
 Portions of little and little at a time. When the firft 
 Word is prefent^ all the fubfequent are abfent ; when 
 the laft Word is prejeyit^ all the previous are abfent ; 
 when any of the middle Words are prefe)it, then arc 
 there fome abfefit, as well of one fort' as the other. 
 No more exifts at once than a fingle Syllable, and the 
 Remainder as much is not^ (to Senfation at leaft) as 
 
 tho'
 
 Book the Third. 365 
 
 and whole in the feparate Indwidimls of an Ch.IV. 
 infinite and fleeting Multitude , without de- 
 farting 
 
 tho' it never had been, or never was to be. And fo 
 much for the perception of Sense, than which we fee 
 nothing can be more dijfipated-i fleeting^ and detached, 
 — And is that of the Mind fimilar ? — Admit it, and 
 what follows ? — It follows, that one Mind would no 
 more recognize one Truth, by recognizing its Terms 
 fuccejfwely and apart^ than ?nany diltant Minds would 
 recognize it, w^ere it diilributed among them, a dif- 
 ferent part to each. The cafe is, every Truth is 
 ONE, tho' its Terms are many. It is in no refpedl 
 true by parts at a timej but it is true of neceffity at 
 once and in an tnjiant. — What Powers therefore re- 
 cognize this Oneness or Unity ? — Where even 
 does it refide, or what makes it ? — Shall we anfwer 
 with the Stagirite, To ti EN nOIOTN ■r'iro o 
 NOT 2 ixarov — If this be allowed, it fliould feem, 
 where Sensation and Intellection appear to 
 concur, that Senfation was of Many, Intelle6lion was 
 of One j that Senfation was temporary^ divifible and 
 fuccejftve j Intellection, irijiantaneous^ indwlfthle^ and at 
 once. 
 
 If we confider the Radii of a Circle, we fhall find 
 at the Circumference that they are many; at the 
 Center that they are one. Let us then fuppofe Sense 
 and Mind to view the fame Radii, only let Senfe 
 view them at the Circumference^ Mind at the Qnter ; 
 
 and
 
 366 H E R M E S. 
 
 QhAV » parthig from the unity and permanence of 
 its ow?i nature. 
 
 And 
 
 and hence we may conceive, how thefe Powers differ, 
 even where they jointly appear to operate in perception 
 of the fame objed:. 
 
 There is another Act of the Mind, the 
 very reverfe of that here mentioned ; an A£l, by 
 which it perceives not one in ?nany, but many in 
 ONE. This is that mental Separation^ of which we 
 have' given fome account in the firft Chapter of this 
 Book; that Refolution or Analyfis which enables us 
 to Invejligate the Caufes^ and Principles^ and Elenmits of 
 things. It is by Virtue of this, that we are enabled 
 to abftraiSl any particular Attribute, and make it hy 
 iifelf the Subject of philofophical Contemplation. 
 Were it cot for this, it would be difficult for particu- 
 lar Sciences to exift ; becaufe otherwife they would be 
 as much blended, as the feveral Attributes of fenfible 
 Subftances. How, for example, could there be fuch 
 a Science as Optics, were we neceHitated to contem- 
 plate Colour concreted with Figure, two Attributes, 
 which the Eye can never view, but aflbciated ? I men- 
 tion not a multitude of other fenfible qualities, fome 
 of which ftill prefent themfelvcs, whenever we look on 
 any coloured Body. 
 
 Thofc
 
 Book the Third* ^^j 
 
 \ 
 \ 
 
 And thus we fee the Procefs hy which Ch.lV. 
 we. arrive at general Ideas -, for the 
 
 Per- 
 
 Thofe two noble Sciences, Arithmetic and 
 Geometry, would have no Bafis to ftand on, were 
 it not for this feparative Power. They are both con- 
 verfant about Quantity i Geo?netry about conti- 
 nuous Quantity, Arithmetic about Discrete. Ex» 
 TENSION is eflential to continuous Quantity ; Mo- 
 nads, or Units, to Difcrete. By feparating from 
 the infinite Individuals, with which we are furrounded, 
 thofe infinite Accidents, by which they are all dherji- 
 fied^.-we leave nothing but thofe simple and per- 
 fectly SIMILAR Units, which being combined 
 make Number, and are the Subjeft of Arithme- 
 tic. Again, by feparating from Body every pofHble 
 fubordinate Accident, and leaving it nothing but its 
 triple Extenfion of Lengthy Breadth^ and Thicknefs^ (of 
 which were it to be deprived, it would be Body no lon- 
 ger) we arrive at that pure and unmixed Magnitude, 
 the contemplation of whofe properties makes the Sci- 
 ence of Geornetry. 
 
 By the fame analytical ox feparative Power, we invef- 
 tigate Definitions of all kinds, each one of which Is 
 a developed JVord^ as the fame Word is an invelobed De-^ 
 finition. 
 
 To conclude — In Composition and Division 
 consists the whole of Science, Composi- 
 tion
 
 368 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.IV. Perceptions here mentioned are in fadl no 
 other. In thefe too we perceive the ob- 
 je(5ls of Science andREALKNowLEDGE, 
 which can by no means be, but of that 
 ivhicb is general, and definite, andjixt (^) , 
 
 Here 
 
 TION MAKING AFFIRMATIVE TrUTH, AND 
 SHEWING US THINGS UNDER THEIR SIMILARI- 
 TIES AND Identities ; Division making Ne- 
 gative Truth, and presenting them to 
 us under their Dissimilarities and Diver- 
 sities. 
 
 And here, by the way, there occurs a Queflion.— 
 If all Wifdom be Science, and it be the bufinefs of 
 Science as well to compow2d zs to feparate^ may we not 
 fay that thofe Philofophers took Half of W\(dom. for the 
 Whole^ who diftinguifhed it from Wit, as if Wisdom 
 ovAy feparated^ and Wit only brought together P — Yet 
 fo held the Philofopher of Malmjbury^ and the Author 
 efthe Ejjay on the Human Xjyiderjlanding, 
 
 {g) The very Etymologies of the Words EIII- 
 2THMH, Scientia, and Understanding, may 
 ferve in fome degree to fhew the nature of thefe 
 Faculties, as well as of thofe Beings, their true and 
 proper Obje6ts. E11I2THMH uvoy,ocfccij cTt* to 
 Em 2)TA2IN X, opov Ti/iu ■nypa.y^oi.ruv ocyuv vfJ-o^?,
 
 Book the Third. 369 
 
 Here too even Individuals y however of Ch JV. 
 themfelves unknowable, become objects of ~ "' "^ 
 
 Knowledge, 
 
 yiviTxi' Science {KHI'LT HMH) has its name from 
 bringing us (Ell I 2TA2IN) to some Stop and 
 Boundary of things^ taking us away from the unbounded 
 nature and inutahility of Particidars \ for it is converfant 
 about Subject Sy that are general^ and invariable. Niceph. 
 Blem. Epit. Logic, p. 21. 
 
 This Etymology given by Blemmides, and long be- 
 fore him adopted by the Peripatetics^ came originally 
 from Plato^ as may be feen in the following account of 
 it from his Cratylus. In this Dialogue Socrates^ having 
 firft (according to the HeracUtcan Phllofophy, which 
 Cratylus favoured) etymologized a multitude of Words 
 with a view to that Flow and undeafing Mutation^ fup- 
 pofed by Heraditus to run thro' all things, at length 
 changes his Syilem, and begins to etymologize from 
 another, which fuppofed fomething in nature to be per- 
 manent znd fixed. On this principle he thus proceeds 
 ••—•l^x.OTru{j.zv ^rij l^ avruv ocvccXahCyTiq ■^purov ulv 
 tSto to ovo{xoi rrtv EniZTHMHr>J^ ug a/>K?>»^sAoy 
 
 r,^m EIII Tor? w^ocy^oc(n tyiV v|'up^>;j'j ri oti (ruuTTfOi- 
 <pi^iTXi. Let us cofifider thm (fays \\s.) fome of the very 
 
 B b Words
 
 -^^0 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.IV. Knowledge, as far as their nature will per- 
 mit. For then only may any Particular 
 
 be 
 
 Words already examined-, and in the firji place, the Word 
 Science ; hotu difputable is this (as to its former Ety- 
 mology) how much more naturally does it appear tofigni- 
 Jy^ that IT STOPS the Soul at things, than that 
 it is carried about with them. Plat. Cratyl. p. 437. Edit. 
 Serr. 
 
 The difputable Etj'mology, to which he here alludes, 
 was a ftrange one of his own making in the former 
 part of the Dialogue, adapted to the foiving Syftem 
 of HeracUtus there mentioned. According to this no- 
 tion, he had derived EniSTHMH from iTrsa-Qoit and 
 fAiyHVy as if it kept along with things, by perpetually 
 following them in their motions. See Plato as before, 
 p. 412. 
 
 As to Scientia, we are indebted to Scaliger for the 
 follow^ing ingenious Etymology. Ratiocinatio, 
 motus quidam eji : SciENTiA, jz//Vj ; unde et nomen, turn 
 apud Grcscos, turn etiam nojirum. Ylocpoi to EIII 12- 
 TA20AI, EniZTHMH. Sl/liiur enim tnentis agitatio, 
 etjit fpecies in animo. Sic Latinum SciENTiA, otj yt' 
 ViTCci SXE2I2 TOY 0NT02. Nam Latini, qucd no- 
 men entis fimplex ah ufu abjecerunt atque repudiarunt^ om- 
 nibus a^ivis participiis idem adjunxerunt. Aiidiens, ockxxv 
 ocv. Sciens, p^wc ccv» Seal, in Theophr. de Caufis 
 Plant. Lib. I. p. 17. 
 
 2 The
 
 Book the Third. 371 
 
 be faid to be known, when by averting It Ch. IV. 
 to be a Man, or an Animal, or the like, ' '""'^ 
 
 we 
 
 The Englijh Word, Understanding, means 
 not fo properly Knoivledge^ as that Faculty of the Sou/, 
 where Knowledge refides. "Why may we not then 
 imagine, that the framers of this Word intended to re- 
 prefent it as a kind of firm Ba/Is-^ on which the fair 
 Structure of Sciences was to reft, and which was fup- 
 pofed to STAND UNDER them, as their immoveablv; 
 Support ? 
 
 Whatever may be faid of thefe Etymologies, whe- 
 ther they are true or falfe, they at leaft prove their 
 Authors to have confidered Science and Under- 
 standing, not -is Jieeting powers of Perception, like 
 Senfc^ but rather as Jleady^ penrurnent^ and durable 
 Comprehensions, But if fo, we mull fomewhere 
 or other find for them certain Jieady^ permanent^ and 
 durable Objiects ; fince if Perception: of any 
 
 KIND BE different FROM THE THING PER- 
 CEIVED, (whether it perceive ftraight as crooked, or 
 crooked as ftraight ; the moving as fixed, or the fixed 
 as moving) such Perception must of necessi- 
 ty BE erroneous and FALSE. The following paf- 
 (iige from a Greek Platonic (whom we fliall quote again 
 hereafter) feems on the prefent occafion not without 
 its weight — Et eV' yewcrji aK^i^BfiCioe, rr/g ato-Orio-fcof, 
 £1^ xv Jt, yvufoi OiXrihfi^a t'^u <Ki(r^riTwv. If there he 
 
 B b 2 A Know-
 
 72 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.IV. we refer it to fome fuch comprehenfive, or 
 general Idea, 
 
 Now it is of thefe coMPREHENSivEand 
 permanentIdeaSjThegenuinePer- 
 
 CEPTIONS OF PURE MiND, that WoRDS 
 
 of all Languages, however different, are 
 .the Symbols. And hence it is, that as 
 the Perceptions include y iodo thefe their 
 
 Symbols 
 
 A Kn'owledge rmre accurate than Sensation ; there 
 niujl be certain objects of fuch knowledge more true 
 
 THAN OBJECTS OF SeNSE. 
 
 The following then are Queftions worth confider- 
 ing^ — fnat thefe Objects are ? — Where they refide ? — 
 -And how they are to be difcovered ? — Not by experi- 
 nietital PhilofopJjy it is plain; for that meddles with no- 
 thing, but what is tangible, corporeal, and mutable—^ 
 nor even by the more refined and rational fpeculation 
 of Math£7natics ; for this, at its very commencement, 
 takes fuch Obje<Sls for granted. We can only add, 
 that tfihey refuk in eur oivn Minds, (and who, that has 
 never looked there, can afErm they do not r ) then will 
 the advice of the Satirift be no ways improper, 
 
 ——NEC Te QU^SIVERIS EXTRA. 
 
 Per/.
 
 Book the Third. 373 
 
 Symbols exprefs, not this or that fet £/'Ch.IV. 
 Particulars only, but all indifferently, as 
 they happen to occur. Were therefore the 
 Inhabitants of Salijbury to be transferred 
 toYork, tho' new particular obje^fts would 
 appear on every iide, they would ilill no 
 more want a new Language to explain 
 themfelves, than they would want new 
 Minds to comprehend what they beheld. 
 All indeed, that they would want, would 
 be the local proper Names-, which Names, 
 as we have faid already*, are hardly apart 
 of Language, but muft equally be learnt 
 both by learned and unlearned, as often 
 as they change the place of their abode. 
 
 It is upon the fame principles we may 
 
 perceive the reafon, why the dead Lan- 
 guages (as we call them) are noio intelli- 
 gible ', and v/hy the Language of modern 
 England is able to defcribe antient Ro7ne ; 
 
 B b 3 and 
 
 * Sup. p. 345, 346.
 
 374 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.IV. and that o^antient "Rome to defcribc modemi, 
 'England {h). But of thefe matters we 
 have fpokcn before. 
 
 § 2. And now having viewed the 
 Frocefs, by which we acquire general Ideas ^ 
 let us begin anew from other Principles, 
 and try to difcover (if wc can prove fo 
 fortunate) whence it is that thefe Ideas ori^ 
 gi?ially come. If we can fucceed here, we 
 may difcern perhaps, what kind of Beings 
 they are, for this at prefent appears fome- 
 what obfcure. 
 
 Let 
 
 [h) As far as Human Nature^ and the primary Genera 
 both of Suh/Iance and Occident are the fame in all places, 
 and have been fo thro* all ages : fo far all Languages 
 fhare one common Identity. As far as ■peculiar fpe- 
 cies of Suhjlance occur in different regions ; and much 
 more, as far as the poftive hiftitutions of religious and civil 
 Politics are every zvhere different ; fo far each Language 
 has its peculiar Diversity. To the Caufes of Di- 
 verfity here mentioned, may be added the dijlinguifhing 
 Qmratler and Genius of every Nation-y concerning which 
 we (hall fpeak hereafter.
 
 Book the Third. ^y^ 
 
 Let us fuppofe any man to look for Ch.IV. 
 the fir ft time upon Jbme Work of Art, as 
 for example upon a Clock, and having 
 fufficiently viewed it, at length to depart. 
 Would he not retain, when abfent, an Idea 
 of what he had (qqw ? — And what is it, to 
 retain fuch Idea f — It is to have a Form 
 INTERNAL correfpoudent to the exter- 
 nal; only with this difference, that the 
 Internal Form is devoid of the Matter -, the 
 External is united with it, being feen in 
 the metal, the wood, and the like. 
 
 Now if we fuppofe this Speiftator to 
 view many fuch Machines, and not fimply 
 to viev/, but to confider every part of 
 them, fo as to comprehend howthefe parts 
 all operate to one End, he might be then 
 faid to poiTefs a kind of intelligible 
 Form, by which he Vv'ould not only un^ 
 derftand, and know the Clocks, which he 
 had feen already, but every Work alfo of 
 like Sort, which he might fee hereafter,'-^ 
 
 Bb4 Should
 
 376 HER M E S. 
 
 Ch.IV. Should it be ailced ^* which of thefe Forms 
 *' is prior, the External and Sejijible, or 
 ** the Internal and Intelligible -y" the An- 
 fwer is obvious, that the prior is the Sen-^ 
 Jihle. 
 
 Thus then we fee, there are in-* 
 telligible forms, which to the 
 Sensible are subsequent. 
 
 But farther ftill — If thefe Machines be 
 allov/ed the Work not of Chance, but of 
 an Artift, they mufl be the Work of one, 
 who knew what he was about. And what 
 is it, to work, and know what one ts about ? 
 ''—It is to have an Idea of what one is 
 doing', topojfefs a Form internal, cor- 
 refponding to the EXTERiiAL, to which ex- 
 ternal it ferves for an Exemtlar or Ar- 
 chetype. 
 
 Here then we have an intelligi- 
 ble Form, which is prior to the 
 sensible Form; which, being truly prior 
 
 as
 
 Book the Third. 377 
 
 as well in dignify as in time, can no more be- Ch.IV. 
 co?nefubfeqiic?it, than Caufe can to EffeB, 
 
 Thus then, with refped to Works of 
 Art, we may perceive, if we attend, a 
 TRIPLE Order of Forms ; o?2e Order, 
 intelligible 2indi previous to thefe Works ; a 
 fecond Otdj&x , fenfibk and concomitant -, and 
 a third again, intelligible iindi fubfequent^ 
 After the iiril of thefe Orders the Maker 
 may be faid to work ; thro' the fecond, 
 the Works themfelves exiji, and are what 
 they are ; and in the third they become 
 recognized, as mere Objects of Contejnpla^ 
 tion. To make thefe Forms by different 
 Names more eafy to be underftood ; the 
 Jirft may be called the Maker's Form 5 
 the fecond, that ofTHESuBjECT; and the 
 third, that of THE Contemplator. 
 
 Let us pafs from hence to Works of 
 Nature. Let us imagine ourfelves 
 viewing fome diverfified Profpecft ; ** a 
 ^* Plain, for example, fpacious and fer- 
 
 7 " tilei
 
 378 H E R M E S. 
 
 Ch.IV. " tile; a river winding thro' it ; by the 
 *' banks of that river, men v^^alking and 
 ** cattle grazing ; the view terminated 
 *' with diflant hills, fome craggy, and 
 '* fome covered with wood." Here it 
 is plain we have plenty of Forms na- 
 tural. And could any one quit fo fair 
 a Sight, and retain no traces of what he 
 had beheld ? — And what is it, to retain 
 traces of what one has beheld f-^\i is to 
 have certain Forms internal corref- 
 pondent to the external, and refem- 
 bling them in every thing, except the 
 being merged in Matter, And thus, thro* 
 the fame retentive and colleBive Powers, 
 the Mind becomes fraught W\\}ciF orms na- 
 tiiraly as before with Forms artificiaL-^-^ 
 Should it be afked, '* ivhich ofthefe natu- 
 ** ral Forms are 'prior, the External ones 
 *' viewed by the Senfes, or the Internal ex- 
 *' \ft^'^g ^^ ^^^ Miiidf the Anfwer is ob- 
 vious, that the prior are the ExternaL 
 
 Thus
 
 Book the Third, 379 
 
 Thus therefore In Nature, as well as Ch.IV. 
 in Art, there are intelligible 
 Forms, which to the sensible are 
 subsequent. Hence then we fee the 
 meaning of that noted School Axiom, Nil 
 eji in Intellectu quod non priusfuit in 
 Sensu; an Axiom, which we mufl own 
 to be fo far allowable, as it refpeds the 
 Ideas of a mere Contemplator, 
 
 But to proceed fo me what farther — Are 
 naitiralV wdi\x&.ions made by Chance, or 
 BY Design ? — Let us admit by Dejig?2, 
 not to lengthen our inquiry. They are 
 certainly* more exquifite than any Works 
 of Art, and yet thefe we cannot bring 
 ourfelves to fuppofe made by Chance.^-^ 
 Admit it, and whatT follows ? — IVe niufi of 
 necejfity admit ^ M i n d alfoy becaufe Design 
 implies Mind, wherever it is to be found, 
 —Allowing therefore this, what do we 
 
 mean 
 
 Jriji. de Part. Animal. L. I. c. it
 
 3^o H E R M E S. 
 
 Ch.IV. mean by the Term, Mind ? — We mean 
 
 ^ fomethingi which, when it a£lsy knows what 
 it is going to do; fomethingfiored with Ideas 
 of its intended Works y agreeably to which 
 Ideas thofe Works are faJJmned, 
 
 That fuch Exemplars, Patterns, 
 Forms, Ideas (call them as youpleafe) 
 mufl of necejjity be, requires no proving, 
 but follows of courfe, if we admit the 
 Caqfe of Nature to be a Mind, as above 
 mentioned, For take away thefe, and 
 what a Mind do we leave without them ? 
 Chance furely is as knowing, as Mind 
 WITHOUT Ideas; or rather Mind 
 WITHOUT Ideas is no lefs blind than 
 Chance, 
 
 The Nature of thefe Ideas is not diffi- 
 cult to explain, if we once come to allow 
 a poffibility of their Exiftence. That they 
 are exquifitely beautiful^ various, and or- 
 derly, is evident from the exquifite Beauty, 
 Variety, and Order, feen in natural Sub- 
 
 A^nces^
 
 Book the Third. 38^ 
 
 ilances, which are but their Copies or Pic- Ch.IV, 
 turi^s. That they are mental is plain, as 
 they are of the EJfence g/'MiND, and con- 
 fequently no Objed:s to any of the Senfes^ 
 nor therefore circumfcribed either by 
 ^ime or Place, 
 
 Here then, on this Syil:em, we have 
 plenty of Forms intelligible, which 
 
 ARE TRULY PREVIOUS TO ALL FoRMS 
 
 SENSiBLEc Here toowe fee that Nature 
 is not defediive in her triple Order, 
 having (like Art) her Forms previous, 
 HER Concomitant, and ker Subse- 
 quent (/). 
 
 That 
 
 (/) Simplkius^ in his commentary upon the Predica- 
 ments, calls the ^r/i Order of thefe intelligible Forms, 
 roc -s^po mg jusSc'^fWf, thofe previous to Participation, 
 and at other times, n i^rt^n^'iVTi noivorrigy thf tranfcendent 
 Univerfality or Soinerufs ; the fecond Order he c^.lis rx 
 h (AiUj^u, thofe tvhich extjl in Participation^ that is, 
 thofe merged in Matter ; and at other times, he calls 
 them Y\ >iccTaTErx<Y[ji.evr KOiuor-n?} the fiibordinateUiiiver- 
 fality or Samenefs y laftly, of the third Order he fays, 
 
 that
 
 382 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.IV. That the Previous may be jujlly {o 
 called is plain, becaufe they are ejfentially 
 
 prior 
 
 that they have no independent exiftence of their own, 
 
 but that — ii]W.£r? d(psX6i/TBg ocvtoc iv ra^s vy-ixi^ocig Iv- 
 voiongj na^ loiVTcx, VTrifrtcocfABV, we ourfehes ahj}ra£iing 
 ihejn in cur own Imaginations^ have given them by fuch ab- 
 JlraSlion an exijience as of thernfehes. Simp, in Praedic, 
 p. 17. In another place he fays, in a language fome- 
 what myfterious, yet ftill conformable to the fame 
 dodlrine — >Mn7roT£ iv r^nlov AuttIjov to aoivov^ to fM,v 
 i^Yi^n^ivQV Toov xaO' 'iyiOifd, x^ ainov t»j? iv dvToTg xoi- 
 voTviTogy xoiroc. rvtv fj.iccv Ixvr^ (pv(yiVj otxnrEp x^ rng Siot,- 
 (pooorriTog xxrx mrv "sroXvuSn T!s-o6K7i^iv~-—Si6TBP0V $1 
 Sft TO xoivovj TO UTTo xoivn diTiz TO?? Sia<popoiq 'iihciv 
 
 IV^iSo^SVOVy Xj iVVTTIX^^OV CCVToTg—TPlTOV ^ij TO iV 
 
 rx7g "^[jt-BTi^Uig ^ixvoiccig l^ diponPia-BCog vipifocfxivovy 
 vfs^oysvlg ov — Perhaps therefore lue mufl admit a 
 TRIPLE Order of what is Universal and 
 THE Same ; that of the firji Ordcr^ tranfcendent andfu- 
 perior to Pai'ticulars.^ which thro' its imiform nature is the 
 caufe of that Samenefs exijiing in them^ as thro' its multi- 
 form pre-conception it is the caufe of their Diverfity — that 
 of the fecond Order.y vjhat is infifed from the frfi univerfal 
 Caife into the various Species of Beings^ and which has its 
 sxijlence in thofe feveral Species — that of the third Order^ 
 whatfuhffts hy alfiradlion in our own Vnderjlandings^ beifig 
 
 efjubfe^uent origin to the other two- Ibid. p. 21. 
 
 To
 
 Book the Third. 383 
 
 frior to all things elfe. The whole visi- Ch. IV. 
 BLE World exhibits nothing more, than 
 
 fo 
 
 To Simpliclus we fliall add the two following Quota- 
 tions from Ammonius and Nicephorus Blem7nideSy which 
 we have ventured to tranfcribe^ without regard to their 
 uncommon length, as they fo fully eftabliih the Doc- 
 trine here axlvanced, and the works of thefc Authors are 
 not eafy to be procured. 
 
 oxiilvhi^ <T<p(ixyi^iT(a rzz x?]^af zrxvlxg' vfBPOv Ss 
 Ti? ilciX^uv Xj B'sxcrxy.iv^ tx x?)^ia, iTni-ritrxg on 
 "srxvlx £^ ivog u<tiv £)c7u7rw^a7(^> Ip^srw t^sx^* xvtm ts 
 tKluTruiJ-x rn Sixvoioc, H roivvv aippxytg n iv tw Sxa- 
 tuA/w Kiyirxi OPO TliN HOAAXiN ma<, ^ SI 
 h TOK x59f/oK, EN TOIS nOAAOIS- i S\ iv 
 TW Sixvoix t5 x'7roy.x^x[j.iuXy EJJl TOIS FIOAAOIX, 
 j^ vfipoysv'Kg* Tare kv luvosKr^ci} Hj jttj tw^ yBuuv Wy 
 iiSoov' Q yx^ A'/jjWja^yo?, %joKav -sravra, i^si •arap 
 iXVTu ra -uyxpTUiv tirx^xSBiyy.xTX' oloi/^ •zs'Oiwf afS^w- 
 woi/, £p/£» TO fic5*o? •srap £«UTW Ta ai/9pw7ra, 73"^of o 
 d(popci)Vy xiTxyrxg zroiBt. E» J'f Tif lufxirt xiyo^Vj wj 
 i5)c £Krj TS'xpx TW Ariy.ii}^yoi> tx £»(?>], xy.niru rxurx^ 
 wf Aj),at«^yof Sr][xixoys7y r Iji^w? tjc utt' aura Srjy.i- 
 scya^ufvai, *i 8)t EJow?. AAA £; jWe;' ^r\ £io«f, 8)c au 
 flr)j«jag')'?';<r£i. T»? y«pj jUt^vAw^ '5ro«'>i(r£«i' t<, a'j'i/oEj o 
 
 jWcAAf*
 
 3^4 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.IV. fo vcvSiny pajjing Pidures of thefe immutable 
 Archetypes. Nay thro' thefe it attains even 
 
 a Sem- 
 
 [AiXXsi zToniv y 8 y«/>j w? T] ^ufl-ij, dXoysji Svva,^n 
 
 xu? Tu yiyvoiAiv^f) 'E» J's rt xaO' e^*:/ AoytXTiv TffoiUy 
 ai$£ ■573 oTavTW? TO yiyvofAivov Jtt' auVS. '£» toivjv 
 
 f^n "XJl^OVj Vt KOCTX «I/0f WTTOV, 0£O? •STOIH, oTcTe TO uV* 
 
 CKUTa ytyi'&^svov' £t J'e'okJ'jv o -syoiu, avro^t SnXoVy ug 
 £fiv iu Tw ilviy,is^yco to, siari. r-r* di to £i^o? £v toj 
 AniAinpytOy w; o Iv tu J'aJtJuAfu tuttoj* jt; Xiytrxi 
 T8T0T0 a^o? nPO TUN nOAAXlN, x) x'^^^^^^ 
 Trig l\vig. Eft J'e to nSog rs dv^oooTrH Xy Iv To7g ax^. 
 moc.s'ov Oii/^^uTTOigj wg roi Iv roTg iir\ooTg ExIuTrwjuaTa' x^ 
 ?^iy£roit rx ToiciVTac, EN TOIS IIOAAOIS Tn/a», 
 X; a%w^tr* T»j? uArf . Qixa-x^ivoi Si t8? x«Ta [xioog 
 uu^^UTTiiSy oTi zTxvTsg TO (ZUTO fiJ'oj T8 dv^owTTx Ep^acrji/, 
 (cof Itt* t8 v^-i^ov Ih^ovTog, >Cy ^iX(TXU.iv}i roi xrioix") 
 
 dv£[Jl.X^X[J^£^X XVTO Iv T'.J SiXVOlX' x) XiyiTXl T8Ta 
 
 Em TO IS nOAAOISj viyovv (jt-erx rx zroXXd, 
 Xy vfspoyEi/ig. IntclUgatur annulus^ qui aliaijuSy ut^ 
 fate Achill'is^ irnaginem infculptam habeat : nmlta infuper 
 cercc finty et ab annulo imprimantur : veniat deinde qu'ij- 
 piatriy videatque ceras omnes un'ius annuli impyejfmie for- 
 mataSy annulique i?npreJJionc?n in mente cantineat : figillum 
 annido infculptuniy ANTE MULTA dicetur : in cerulis 
 imprejfinn^ in multis : (quod "J era in illiuSy qui illo ve~ 
 ?iirat iutMgentid remar.jirity post MULTA, et pojle^ 
 
 rius
 
 Book THE Third* 3^5 
 
 ^ Semblance of Immortality, and con- ChJV. 
 
 tmiies 
 
 rius genitum dicetiir. Ide?n in generibus etformis intelii- 
 gendum cenfeo : etenim ilk Qptimus procreator mundi Deus^ 
 omnium rerum forma s^ at que exempla habet apud fe : id ji 
 hominem efficere velit^ in hominis formam^ quam habet^ 
 intueatur^ et ad illius exemplum cateros facial omnes. At 
 fi quis rejiiteritj dicatque rerum formas apud Creatorem 
 non effe : quafo ui diligenter attendat : O'pifex^ qua facit^ 
 vel cognofcit^ vel ignorat : fed is, qui nefcici, nunqua?n 
 quicquam faciei : quis enim id facer e aggreditur, quodfa^ 
 cire ignorat ? Neque enim facultate quadarn rationis ex~ 
 perte aliquid aget, prout agit natura (ex quo conficitut\ 
 ut natura etiam agat, etfi qua facial, non adverlat :) Si 
 vera ratione quadarn aliquid facit, quodcunque ab eo fac~ - 
 turn ejl omnino cognovit. Si igitur Deus non pejore ra^ 
 tione, quam homo, facit qidd, qucs fecit cognovit : ft cog- 
 novit qua fecit, in ipfo rerum forrnas effe perfpicumn tfh 
 Forma autem in opifice funt perinde ac in annulo figilluni^ 
 hacque forma ante mult a, et avulfa a matef'ia dici^ 
 fur. Atqui hominis /pedes in unoquoque homine eJl, quem- 
 admodum etiam figilla in cerisi et IN MULT is, nee avul/a 
 /i materia diciiur. At cumfingidos homines animo confpi' ' 
 cimus, et eandem in unoquoque formam atque effigi^m vide- 
 mus, ilia effigies in menle nofird infdens post multa, ^Z 
 p'flerius genita dicetur : veluti in illo quoquc dicebamus, qifi 
 ?nulta ftgilla in cera uno el eodem annulo impreffa confpexeratf 
 Amman, in Prophyr. Introdu6l. p. 29. b. 
 
 C c A'iyovl 
 
 at
 
 386 H E R M E S, 
 
 Ch.IV. tinues throughout ages to be specifi- 
 
 CALLY 
 
 Aiyoi/lxi SI Tx yivy) y^ ra ilh 11 PO TXIN 
 nOAAXlN, EN TOI2 nOAAOIS, EHI TOI2 
 nOAAOIS* olov ii/vosia-^u ri <r(ppix.'yi5"^oiov, £yoi> 
 34, l-iilxnrui^a. to rvxlv, i^ % xn^ia, wo7^Koi lAiTOiXm^i" 
 TOO Tn EH/UTTW^oiT^r', xat Tij uV o^/ii/ dyotysTCi} t«u- 
 roi) [J.71 sr^oxaiTtSoov ^7\S oXug to (7(ppa,yifriPiou' Iw- 
 ^xxug Si rcc Iv o\q to iKlvTrctifxa,, y^ iTrifrtcrscs- ort 
 "sycluloi ra auTa [/.ETS^ndiu £>c7ii7rw^aT0^, j^ Ta ^ox5v- 
 Ta ZToXKcx, Tw Koytji <rvvx^ooKTix,g ilg £Vj ly^sru tsto >cx- 
 TO, Stoivoixv. To f/.iv iv (Tippxyii-Tioiov rvTrufxoc Xiyi- 
 TXiIiVO TX2N nOAAnN- tJ <^' £;/ to?? >c-;i^i'ot?, 
 EN TOI2 nOAAOIS- to ^j £0 a'urwv jcaTaAii^- 
 ©£1', ^ xxTcH Sioiuoiav dilXug UTTorai/, EH I TOI2 
 nOAAOIZ. 'OvTug iv kj t« y£i/>7 Jf; ra s'lSn 
 nPO TriN no A A ON i^^i/ s.Viv £v Tw Ar.fAis^- 
 yccy KOiTX Tzg zTOivirixag Xoyug' iv tw 05w yap oi x- 
 <rto7roioi Aoyot Twy ovtwi/ Ivioiioog ■SJ-^ov<p$f7\xa<ri, xaO' 
 af Aoya? uVf^sTtl^ Ta ovia ixra,ifltx, Xy z!r^ow^i(rs xy 
 'vsamya.yiv' v(pBs-yiiiii/xi SI xiyovlai rx yivv] x, too 
 %ayi EN TO 1 2 HOAAOIS, ^»ot* iv ro^g xxrx 
 fjt.ip(^ xM^POiTToig TO Ts cx.]/^^u7rs tlSog Irtj xj ro7g 
 Tixra [J.ip<^ I'TTTTOig to th \mns slS^' Iv ai/G^wTroj? S\, 
 ^ iTrTroig, >^ ro7g xXXoig ^woig to ysv(^ EU^icrxfTat 
 nov TOi^roc]/ itaooVy ottbp £ri to C,wo!/ xot,y rotg (^uoig 
 Cjua >^ TOK ^woCpVTOig to JtaOoAtxwTf^oi/ yEi/©-*, to 
 aiO•0>JT^>c6^, l^cTx^iTXi' (rvv^'^^ivrm SI xj twv ipvTuvy 
 
 I
 
 Book the Third. 387 
 
 CALLY ONE, amid thofe infinite parti- Ch.IV. 
 
 cular 
 
 B'suobTtoii to 'iy^^v^ov' si ^l crui/ To7g i^^l/v^oig l^eKsi 
 TK iTTKritOTrirt' jf; roc a.T^v^Xy ro (toj^x (rvfATroiV xa- 
 nro^JiTOci' <rvu^poc[ji.s(ruv ^l roig lia7iiJ,s]/oig ruv cco-uiack,- 
 rtav ariUf, to zt^cotov y£i/(^ focvBTTXi >c, ysumoorcclov' 
 9^ arw [Ji.iV EN TOIS IIOAAOIS v^ifriKS rd ti^rt >tj 
 roi yivn- KaraAiX^cov §i nq i^i twv xcctoi. j«.£o@j ocv- 
 ^ouTTUU rriu ocuroov tpvcriVy ttiv dv^^wirdrnrx, ix. ^l ruv 
 aoiToc jM,£c©-? tTTXUv civrnv rriv nnrorytroiy k^ stw tov 
 xa9oA8 dv^pooTTOp, Xy rov JcaO&Aa \inroy STnuovcroc?' x^ 
 TO JtaGoAa (^uov in ruv xavinoifOi TwAoyw (rvutscyaycjC]/* 
 Xy TO xaGoAs aKT^nTucoVf y^ to jtaOoAg i^^vy^ov, Xy 
 TO xafioAK cooyCiy Hj Tviu xccQoXiKcaTOiTyiv Hcrioc)/ l^ 
 dTTOiuruu (ruXXoyKrau-sii^f o Toiax)^ iv rvi focvTs §ix- 
 voioc ra, yiuri xj roc s'l^n cuvXug VTrsfna-sv E 11 1 
 TOI2 nOAAOIS, TaT£r<3 ]W£T<?i ra vroXXd x^ 
 VfB^oysvug. Genera vera ■vt Species dicuntur ejfe AN- 
 TE MULTA, IN MULTIS, POST MULTA. JJt pU- 
 
 ta, intelUgatur figillum^ quamlihet figuram hahens^ ex 
 quo midtcE cera ejufdem figure fint participes, et in 
 medium aliquis has proferat, riequaquam pravifo Jigillo» 
 Cum^autem vidijfet eas ceras in quibus jigiira expri'mi- 
 tur, et animadvertijfct omnes eandem figuram partici- 
 pare, et quce videbantur multce, ratione in unum coegijjl't, 
 hoc in 7nente tcneat. Nempe figillufn dicitur eJfe /pedes 
 ANTE MULTA ; ilia vero in ccri-s^ in MULTIS ; qut^ 
 vera ab iis dejuniitur, et in niente immaterialiter fubft/Htj 
 POST MULTA. Sic igitur et Genera et Species ANTE 
 MULTA in Great ore funt, ficimdwn ration es efficient es. 
 
 C c 2 In
 
 388 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.IV. cular changes, that befal it every mo- 
 ment {k). 
 
 May 
 
 t • ■■■■I..   .1 1 -II ^^— ^-^^^— 
 
 Jn Deo enim rerum effe£irices rat'iones una et fimplic'iter 
 pra-exijlunt ; fecundum quas rationes ilk Jupra-fuhjlantia" 
 Us omnes res et pvcsdcJl'inavH et produxit. Ex -'lere autem 
 dicuntur Genera et Species IN mult is, quoniarn in ftn- 
 gulh homihibus hominis Species^ et in ftnguUs equis equ't 
 Species ejl. In hominihus esque ac in equis et aliis ani- 
 malibus Genus invenitur hafum fpecierum^ quod eji ani- 
 mal. In animalibus etiam una cum Zoophytis niagis uni- 
 verfale Genus^ nempe fenfitivum exquiritur. Additis vera 
 plantis^fpeSiatur Genus annnatum. Si vero una cum ani- 
 matis quifquam velit parfcrutari etiam inanimata., tetum 
 Corpus perfpiciet. Cu?n autem entia incorporea conjundla 
 fuerint iis ?nodo tr abatis, apparebit primu7n et generalijfi- 
 mum Genus. Atque ita quidem IN MVLTis fubfi/iunt 
 Genera et Species, Comprehendens vero quifquam ex fin~ 
 gidis hominibus naturam ipfam humanam^ et ex fmgidis 
 equis ipfam equinam^ atque ita univerjalern hominetn et 
 zmiverjalem equiim confiderans, et univerjale animal exfin^ 
 gulis ratione colligensj et univerjale feyipAivum^ et univer- 
 jale animatum^ et univerjale corpus^, et maxim^e univerjale 
 ens ex omnibus colli gens ^ hic-y inquam, injud mente Genera 
 et Species i?nmaterialiter conjiituit EIII TO ID 11 OA- 
 AOIS, hoc eJl, POST MULT A, et pojierius genita. iNi- 
 ceph. Blem. Log. Epit. p. 62. Vid. etiam Akin, in 
 Platonic. Philofoph. Introduce. C. IX. X. 
 
 (^) The following elegant Lines of Firgil are worth 
 attending to, tho' applied to no higher a fubjecSl than 
 £ees. 
 
 4 ^^I*
 
 Book the Third. 389 
 
 May we be allowed then to credit thofe Ch.IV. 
 fpeculative Men, who tell us, ** it is in 
 
 " thefe 
 
 Ergo ipfas quarnvis angujli terminus tsvi 
 Excip'iat : (neque en'un plusfeptima ducitur cetas) 
 At Genus immortale manet G. IV. 
 
 The fame hnmortaUty^ that is, the Immortality of the 
 Kind, may be feen in all perij)able fubftances, whether 
 animal or inanimate ; for tho' Individuals perijhy the 
 fever al Kinds Jiill remain. And hence, if we take TiM E, 
 as denoting theffkm of things temporary^ we may colle6t 
 the meaning of that paflage in the Timaus, where 
 
 the Philofopher defcribes Time to be y.$vovT(^ 
 
 aioov^ Iv ivi v.<x,T d^i^^ov Isarocv dimiov hxovoc, 
 Mternitatis in una permanentis Imagineyn qumidam, certis 
 numerorwn ariiculis progredientem. Plat. V. III. p. qj. 
 Edit. Serran. 
 
 We have fubjoined the following extrail from Boe* 
 ihiusj to ferve as a commentary on this defcription of 
 Time. — ii^TERNITAs igiiur e/l, interminabilis vita 
 totaftmul et perfeSia poffejjto. ^od ex collatione temtora- 
 lium clarius liquet. Nam qiiidquid vivit in TEMPORE, 
 id prafens a prateritis in futura procedit : nihilque ejl in 
 tempore ita conjhtutun^ quod totum vita: fucs fpatium pa" 
 riter pojfit amplcSli j fed croflinujn quidem nondum appj-£~ 
 hendity hejiernum vero jam perdidit. In hodicrna quoque 
 vita non amplius vivitisy quam in illo mobili tranftorioque 
 
 C c 3 md'
 
 390 " HERMES. 
 
 C h . I V . * ' thefe ■permanent andcomprehenfive Forms 
 * ' that THE Deity njiews at once, without 
 *' looking abroad y all pojjlble produdiions 
 ** both prefent, paji, and future — that this 
 great and Jlupendous View is but a View 
 of himfelf where all things lie inveloped 
 ** in their Principles and Exemplars, as be- 
 
 (C 
 
 momento. ^lod tgitur Temporis patitur conditionem, licet 
 illud,ficiii de mimdo cenfutt Ar'ijloteles, nee caperit unquam 
 ejfe^ nee definat^ intaque ejus cum temporis injimtate tenda- 
 ti'.r^ mndum tamen tale ejl^ ut aternum ejfe jure credatur. 
 Non enim totum fimul hijinitts licet vita fpatium compre" 
 hendit^ atque complc£litur, fed futura nondmn tranfaSia 
 jam non habet. ^uod igitur intenninabilis vitce plcnitu- 
 dinem totam pariter coynpreheyidit^ ac pojjldet^ cui neque 
 Juturi quidquam abfit^ nee prateriti fiuxeret^ id jETER- 
 NUM eJfe jure perhibetur : idque necejfe ejl^ et fui compos 
 prcsjem ftbi femper ajfi/iere^ et infinitatem fjiobilis temporis 
 habere prafentem. Undc quidam non reHe., qui cum au-- 
 diunt vijum Platoni, mundum hunc nee habuijje initiwn, 
 nee habiturum eJfe defeSium^ hoc modo conditori conditum 
 mundum fieri co- aternum put ant. Aliud ejl enim PER 
 
 INTERMINABILEM DUCI VITAM, (quod Mundo 
 
 Plato tribuit) aliud interminabilis vitje totam 
 
 PARITER COMPLEXAM ESSE PR^SENTIAM, quod 
 
 Divina Mentis propnum ejje manifejlum ejl, Neque enim 
 
 Dcus
 
 Book the Third. 391 
 
 " ing ejfential to the fulnefs of his iiniverfal Ch.IV. 
 *' IntdleBion T' — If fo, it will be proper 
 that we invert the Axiom before men- 
 tioned. We mufl now fay Nil eji in 
 
 S E N s u , quod non prius fuit in Intellec- 
 TU. For tho' the contrary may be true 
 with refped: to Knowledge merely human, 
 yet never can it be true with refpeft to 
 
 C c 4 Know- 
 
 Deia cond'itis rebus antiquior videri debet temporh quanti- 
 iate, fed fimplicts potlus proprietate nature. Hunc 
 
 ENIM VIT^ IMMOBILIS PR JESENTARIUM STA- 
 TUM, INFINITUS ILLE TEMPORALIUM RERUM 
 
 MOTUS IMITATUR; cumque eiim effingere^ at que cequare 
 non pojftt^ ex im?nobiIitate deficit in motum ; ex ft?nplicitate 
 prcefentia d,ecrefcit in infinitam futuri ac prateriti quanti-^^ 
 iaiem ; ety cum totam pariter ziitiS fua: plenitudine?n ne- 
 queat pojjtderey hoc ipfo, quod aliquo ?nodo nunqumn ejje 
 definite illud^ quod implere atque exprimere non poteji^ 
 idiquatenus videtur amidari^ alligans fe ad qualcmcunque 
 prafentiain hujus exigui volucrifque momenti : qu^^ quo'~ 
 niam manentis illius pr^senti^ quandam 
 GESTAT IMAGINE M, quibufcunque contigerit, id pra-^ 
 Jlaty lit ESSE videantur. ^ioniam vero manere non po- 
 iuitj infinitum Ternporis iter arripuit : eoque ?nodo fa£ium 
 
 eft^ lit CONTINUARET VITAM EUNDO, cujm pkni" 
 
 tudinem compleSli non valuit permanendo. Itaque^ 
 he De Confolat. Philofoph, L, V,
 
 392 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.IV. Knowlege univcrfally, unlefs we give Pre^, 
 cedence to Atoms and lifeless Body, 
 making Mind, among other things, to be 
 firiick out by a lucky Concourfe, 
 
 § 3. It is far from the defign of this 
 Treatife, to infmuate that iVtheifm is the 
 Hypothecs of our latter Metaphyficians. 
 But yet it is fomewhat remarkable, in 
 their feveral Syftems, how readily they 
 admit of the above Frecedence. 
 
 For mark the Order of things, accord- 
 ing to their account of them. Firfl 
 comes that huge Body the fenfible World* 
 Then this and its Attributes h^gtifefifible 
 Ideas. Then out of fenfible Ideas, by a 
 l^ind of lopping and pruning, are made 
 Ideas intelligible, whether fpecific or gener 
 ral. Thus fliould they admit that Mind 
 Y^as coeval v/ith Body, yet till Body gave 
 it Ideas, and awakened its dormant Pow- 
 ers, it could at befl have been nothing 
 
 more.
 
 Book the Third. . 393 
 
 more, than a fort of dead Capacity % for Ch.IV, 
 INNATE IDEAS // could tiot fojjibly have 
 any. 
 
 At another time we hear of Bodies fo 
 
 m 
 
 exceedingly fine, tliat their v.-ry Exility 
 makes them fufceptible oi fenfation and 
 knowledge-^ as if they ihrunk into IntelleSi 
 by their exquifite fubtlety, which render- 
 ed them too delicate to be Bodies any 
 longer. It is to this notion we owe many 
 curious inventions, fuch 2i'i fubtle Mther^ 
 animal Spirits, nervous I^uBs, Vibrationsy 
 and the like; Terms, which modern 
 Philosophy, upon parting with occult 
 ^alities, has found expedient to provide 
 itfelf, to fupply their place. 
 
 But the intelle^ual Scheme , which ne- 
 ver forgets Deity, poflpones every thing 
 corporeal to the primary mental Caufe. It is 
 ()ere it looks for the origin of intelligible 
 Ideas, even of thofe, which exiil in human 
 Capacities. For thol fenfible Obje(5ls may 
 
 be
 
 394 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.IV. be the deftined medium, to awake?! the 
 dormant Energies of Man's Underftand- 
 ing, yet are thole Energies themfelves no 
 more contained in Se/ije, than the Explo- 
 fion of a Cannon, in the Spark which 
 gave it fire (/). 
 
 In 
 
 (/) The following Note is taken from a Manufcript 
 Commentary of the Platonic Olympiodofus, (quoted be- 
 fore, p. 371.) upon the Ph^do of Plato -, who tho' per- 
 haps fome may obje£l to from inclining to the Dodlrine 
 of Platonic Reminifcence^ yet it certainly gives a better 
 account how far the Senfes aflift in the acquifition of 
 Science^ than we can find given by vulgar Philofophers. 
 
 OuJ'sTroTS yap ra "Xji^u >t, ^svts^oc oc^'^oi.i, n anion 
 h<r\ Twi/ k^bitIqvuv' U Si Ss7 7^ rocTg iyy.vxXioi? i^nyri^ 
 <r£(ri ■arii^iO-Qcci' jt^ appi^if ejttejV tyiV ocur^TKriv rng liris-n- 
 M"'!?? As^o/^tjv d-jTriv <y-^X^^ ^X, '^^ ziTOiriTiKYiv, cx,XX ug 
 IpsOi'^acav Triv Yt^.ilipav ^\>yriV eI? clv(x,y.vri<sriv ruv >ca9o- 
 ^s — xara Tccv\r\u ^l rnv ivvoixv ti^mrai y^ to iv Tt- 
 fji.xiuiy on J^t' o^/iwj x^ a,y.ong ro tt)? ^i\o(70(piot.g £7ro- 
 pia-ay.s^(X, yivt^^ §iori Ix. twv xkt^yituv fi? avoo[^v>i(riu 
 a(ptxi/-^y.s^a. Thofe tJmigs^ which are inferior and fe- 
 condary^ are by no means the Principles or Caufes of the 
 more excellent ; and tho* we ad??iit the common interpreta- 
 tions, and allow Sense to be a Principle of Science, 
 u^e tni'Ji hewever call it a Principle, not as if it was the 
 
 efficimt
 
 Book the Third. ,-395 
 
 In fliort ALL Minds, that are, are Si^ Ch.IV. 
 MiLAR and Congenial; and fo too are 
 
 their 
 
 efficient Caiife^ hut as it roufes our Sard to the Recolktiion 
 of general Ideas — According to the jame way of thinking 
 is it/aid in the Tifnaus^ that through the Sight and Hear- 
 ing tve acquire to ourfelves Philofophy^ hecaufe tve pafs 
 from Objects of Seuse to Reminiscence or Recol- 
 lection. 
 
 And in another paflTage he obferves — *E7r£i^ri yxfi 
 •STO'.^j.^optpo]) ayxX^ji^oi. Ifiv v\ yup^v), -aravjwi/ roov ov\iav 
 
 For in as much as the Soul, by containing the Principles 
 of all Beings^ is a fort ^ omniform Representa- 
 tion or Exemplar; when it is roufed by objects of 
 Senfe^ it recoUe£is thoje Principles^ which it contains within, 
 and brings them forth. 
 
 GeorAus Gcmiflus^ otherwife called Pletho^ writes 
 upon the fame fubjecSl In the following manner. Tm 
 ■^vy^'^v (poc(Tiv Oi TO, \i§r\ ri^ef/,svoi o(.vxKoc[ji,^a,U!i(rxv itrys 
 iTTtri/A*!" fa? IV roii; ajtrOjirot? Koy^q^ dx.piQif£pov dvrsg 
 s^ovTocg Xj TsXtUTS^ov iv ixvT'^ 'X^'^j '1 IvroTg aitrO'/iJctV 
 i^acn. To Hv reXiUTspov raro >ey ooipiQifspov ax av 
 ttTTo Tcov di(y^y]Tiov tp^Jiv Tiiy 4^^X,'^Vj oys y.ri Iflv Iv olv- 
 ro7^, Ou (J' oi'V [An^x[ji,^ oIkXq^i ov d,\)rnv l^ dvr^g ^n^-
 
 396 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.IV. their Ideas y or intelligible Forms. Were 
 it otherwife, there could be no intercourfe 
 
 between 
 
 SkzvosT(t^xi' ro(.i; yocp ^£V$i7g twv ^o^cov a'p^i [A-ri ovtuv 
 aAA' ovTbiv [Avi aXXoov Si xar* ccXXuv nv'ai (Tvvbi<TBig 
 Ttfaj, a KXTO, TO o'^Oov yivofJLtvaq. Ainna-^cci Si a.(p 
 irioxq rivo(i (pucnu; troAAw tn v-pn-riovoq n Xj tsAewte- 
 
 ^36? CX,<py]KilV Tin IfUp^^ TC nXsUTSpOV T8T0 TOJV £V TOK 
 
 flijff-OjiTorf Aoywi/. Thofe who fuppcfe Ideal Forms, 
 
 fay that the Soul^ zuhen JJje a/Jumes, for the purpofes of 
 
 Science^ thofe Proportions^ which exi/i in fenfble objediSy 
 
 pojfeffes them with a fuperior accuracy and perfeSiion^^ than 
 
 that to which they attain in thofe fenfible objects. Now 
 
 this fuperior Perfection or Accuracy the Soul cannot have 
 
 from fenfible objects., as it is in fa5l not in them ; nor yet 
 
 can fie conceive it herfelf as from herfelf ivithout its 
 
 having exi/lence any where elfe. For the Soul is not 
 
 formed fo as to conceive that^ which has exijlence no where, 
 
 Jince evenfuch opinions^ as are falfe^ are all of them com- 
 
 poftions irregularly formed^ not of mere Non- Beings, but 
 
 of various real Bei?igs, one with another. It 7'emains 
 
 therefore that this Pcrfe5lion, which is fuperior to the 
 
 Proportions exijVmg in fenfible obje£ls, vuijl defend to the 
 
 Soul from SOME other Nature, which is by 
 
 IWANY DEGREES MORE EXCELLENT AND PERFECT. 
 
 Pieth. de Ariflotel et Platonic. Philoroph. Piff. Edit. 
 Paris 1 541. 
 
 The Aoroi or Proportions, of which Ge- 
 mjius here fpeaks, mean not only thofe relative Pro- 
 portions
 
 Book the Third. ^^7 
 
 between Man and Man, or (what is more Ch.IV. 
 important) between Man and God. 
 
 For 
 
 portions of Equality and Inequality^ which exift in Quan- 
 tity, (fuch as double, fefquialter, &c.) but in a larger 
 fenfe, they may be extended to mathematical Lities.^ 
 Angles^ Figures^ &c. of all which Aoyo* or Proportions^ 
 tho' we poffefs in the Mind the moft clear and precife 
 Ideas, yet it may be juftly queflioned, whether any one 
 of them ever exifted in the fenjihle World. 
 
 To thefe two Authors we may add Boethius, who, 
 after having enumerated many afts of the Mind or 
 Intellect, wholly diftin6t from Senfatio^j) and inde- 
 pendent of it, at length concludes, 
 
 Hac ejl efficiens magis ' 
 Long} caujfa potentior, 
 ^uarn quce materia modo 
 ImpreJ/as patitur notas. 
 Pracedit tamen excitans, 
 Ac vires animi movens^ 
 Vivo in corpore pajjio. 
 Cum vel lux oculos ferity 
 Vel vox auribus injhepit ; 
 Turn MENTIS VIGOR excifus, 
 
 QUAS INTUS SPECIES TENET, 
 
 Ad motus Jimileis vocansy 
 Notts applicat exteris, 
 
 iNTRORSUMqUE RECONDITIS 
 
 Form IS mifcet imagines. 
 
 De Confdat, Philofoph. L. V,
 
 39S HERMES. 
 
 Ch.IV. For vvliat is Converfation between Man 
 and Man ? — It is a mutual intercourfe of 
 Spcakifig and Hearing. — To the Speaker, 
 it is to teach 'y to the Hearer, it is to learn, 
 ' — To the Speaker, it is to defcend from 
 Ideas to Words ; to the Hearer, it is t§ 
 afcend from Words to Ideas, — If the 
 Hearer, in this afcent, can arrive at no 
 Ideas, then is he faid not to underjiand -, if 
 ,he afcend to Ideas diffimilar and hetero-* 
 geneous, then is he faid to mifunderjiand. 
 — What then is requilite, that he may be 
 faid to underjiand f — That he fliould af- 
 cend to certain Ideas, treafured u^ within 
 himfelf, correfpondent and fimilar to 
 thofe within the Speaker. The fame may 
 be faid of a Writer and a Reader -, as when 
 any one reads to-day or to-morrow, or 
 here or in Italy, what Euclid wrote in 
 Greece two thou fan d years ago. 
 
 Now is it not marvelous, there fliould 
 h^fo exaSf an Identity of our Ideas y if they 
 
 were
 
 Book the Third. 39^ 
 
 were only generated iiQvcvfenfibk Objefts, Ch.IV. 
 infinite in number, ever changing, diftant 
 in Time, diftant in Place, and no one 
 Particular the fame with any other ? 
 
 Again, doweallowitpoffibleforGoD 
 to fignify his will to Men; or for Men, to 
 iignify their wants to God? — In both thefe 
 cafes there mufl be mt Identity of Ideas, or 
 elfe nothing is done either one way or the 
 other. Whence then do thefe common 
 Identic Ideas come? — Thofe oi Men, 
 it feems, come all from Senfafion, And 
 whence come God's Ideas? — Not furely 
 from Senfation too ; for this we can hardly 
 venture to affirm, without giving to Body 
 that notable Precedence of being prior to the 
 IntelleBio7tof even Godhimfelf — Let them 
 then be original-, let them be connate, and 
 effential to the divine Mind, — If this be 
 true, is it not a fortunate Event, that 
 Ideas of corporeal rife, and others offnental, 
 (things derived from fubje^s fo totally dif- 
 
 tindl)
 
 400 / HERMES.- 
 
 Ch.lV. tinB ) jhould fo happily co-incidein thtfdiiie 
 wonderful Identity P 
 
 Had we not better rfeafon thus upon fo 
 abftrufe a Subjed: ? — Either all Minds 
 have their Ideas derived-, or all have them 
 original; or Jbme have them original, and 
 fome derived. If all Minds have them de^ 
 rived, they muft be derived from fome- 
 thing, which is itfelf not Mi?id, and thus 
 we fall infenfibly into a kind of Atheifm* 
 If all have them original, then are all 
 Minds divine, an Hypothecs by far more 
 plaufible than the former. But if this 
 be not admitted, then muft one Mind (at 
 leaft) have original Ideas, and the reft 
 have them derived. Now fuppofing this 
 laft, whence are thofe Minds, whofe Ideas 
 are derived, moft likely to derive them ? 
 • — From Mind, or from Body? — From 
 Mind, a thing homogeneous; or from 
 Body, a thing heterogeneous^ From 
 Mind, fuch as (from the Hypothefis) has 
 
 original
 
 Book the Third. 40I 
 
 orlgmal Ideas ', or from Body, which we Ch.IV. 
 cannot difcover to have any Ideas at 
 all? (/)— An Examination of this kind, 
 purfued with accuracy and temper, is the 
 moft probable method of folving thefe 
 doubts. It is thus we fliall be enabled 
 with more afTurance to decide, whether 
 we are to admit the Dodtrine of the £/>/- 
 curean Poet, 
 
 CoRPOREA NATURA anlmum conjiarcs 
 animamque 3 
 
 or truft the Mantuan Bard, when he fings 
 in divine numbers, 
 
 Jgnetis eji ollis vigor, f/CiELESTisoRiGO 
 ^eminibus . » 
 
 But 
 
 (/) NOTN §\ nSiy SflMA y^noi' zsrug yxp ^v 
 rx ANOHTA NOTN <yf wjjVo* 3 M Body pro- 
 duces Mind : for how Jhould Things devoid of 
 yii'Aii produce Mind ? Balhji de Dm ei Mundo^ c. 8= 
 
 P4 
 
 2
 
 402 HERMES. 
 
 Ch.IV. But It is now time, to quit thefe Spe- 
 culations. Thofe, who would trace 
 them farther, and have leifure for fuch 
 fludies, may perhaps find themfelves led 
 into regions of Contemplation, affording 
 them profpe(fls both interefting and plea- 
 fant. We have at prefent faid as much 
 as was requifite to our Subje<ft, and fhall 
 therefore pafs from hence to our con- 
 cluding chapter. 
 
 CHAP.
 
 Book the Third. 403 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 
 Subordination of Intelligence — Difference 
 of Ideas y both in particular Men^ and in 
 mo hole Nations — Differ e?2t Genius of dif- 
 ferent Languages — Character of the 
 Englilli, the Oriental, the Latin, and 
 the Greek Languages — Superlative Ex- 
 cellence of the Lajl — Conclufion, 
 
 ^RiGiNAL Truth (^), having the Ch. V. 
 moft intimate conned-ion with tRe 
 fupreme I?2telligence,vn2.yht faid (as it were) 
 
 to 
 
 [a) Thofe Philofophers, whofe Ideas of Being and 
 Knowledge are derived from Body and Saijation^ have a 
 fliort method to explain the nature of Tr^uth. It is 
 a faciitious thing, made by every man for himfelf ; 
 which comes and goes, juft as it is remembered and for- 
 got ; which in the order of things makes its appearance 
 the lajl of any, being not only fubfequent to fenfible Ob- 
 jedts, but eyen to our Senfations of them. According 
 to this Hypothecs, there are many Truths, which have 
 been, and are no longer ; others, that will be, and have 
 
 D ^ 2. not
 
 4Q4 H E R M E 1 
 
 Ch. V. to Hiine with unchangeable fplendor, en« 
 lightening throughout the Univerfe every 
 poffible Subjed:, by nature fufceptible of 
 its benign influence. Paflions and other 
 obflacles may prevent indeed its efficacy, 
 Jis clouds and vapours may obfcure the 
 Sun i but it felf neither admits Diminu^ 
 tion, nor Change^ becaufe the Darknefs re- 
 fped;s only particular Percipients. Among 
 ihefe therefore snq mufl look fbr ignorance 
 
 and 
 
 not been yet ; and multitudes, that poflibly may never 
 exift at all. 
 
 But there are other Reafoners, who muft furely have 
 had very different notions j thofe I mean, v^^ho repre- 
 sent Truth not as the /a/?, but the^r/? of Beings; 
 who call it immutable^ eternal.^ omnip.r-efent ; Attributes, 
 that all indicate fomething more than human. To 
 thefe it muft appear fomevi'hat ftrange, how men fhould 
 imagine, that a crude account of the method how they 
 perceive Truth, was to pafs for an account of Truth it-. 
 itfelf\ as if to defcribe the road to London^ could be called 
 a pefcription of that Metrppolis. 
 
 For my own part, when I read the detail about Sen- 
 fation and Refledllon, and am taught the procefs at 
 Ji^rge how my Ideas are all generated, I feem to view 
 
 the
 
 Book the Third. 405 
 
 and errour, and for that Subordination of Ch. V. 
 JtitelUgence, which is their natural confe- 
 quence. 
 
 We have daily experience in the Work.? 
 of Art, that 2. partial Knowledge will fuf- 
 fice for Contemplation^ tho' we know not 
 enough, toprofefs ourfelves Artifts. Much 
 more is this true, with refpe6t to Na- 
 ture I and well for mankind is it found 
 
 D d 3 to 
 
 the human Soul in the light of a Crucible, where Truths 
 are produced by a kind of logical Chemiftry. They 
 may confift (for aught we know) ol natural materials, 
 but are as much creatures of our own^ as a Bolus ot 
 Elixir. 
 
 If Milton by his Urania intended to reprefent 
 Truth, he certainly referred her to a much more an- 
 tient, as well as a far more noble origin. 
 
 . I , . ,,.. Heavenly born f 
 Before the hills appear' d, or fountains fiovif d. 
 Thou with eternal JVij'dom didfl converfe^ 
 Wifdom thy Si/ier ; and with her didjl play 
 In prefence ofth'' almighty Father, picas' d 
 fF'ith thy celejlial Song.-^ P, L. VIL 
 
 See Proverbs VIII. 22, &c. Jeremiah X, lO, Marc, 
 Jlntor.in, IX*. I»
 
 4o6 ^ , HERMES. 
 
 Ch. V. to be true, elfe never could we attain any 
 natural Knowledge at all. For if the con-^ 
 jlituti'oe Proportions of a Clock are fo fub- 
 tle, that few conceive them truly, but the 
 Artift himfelf j what fliall we fay to thoj} 
 feminal Proportions, which make the ef- 
 fe-nce and charadler of every natural Sub^ 
 jeB ? — Partial views, the Imperfections of 
 Senfe ; Inattention, Idlenefs, the turbu- 
 lence of Paffions; Education, local Senti- 
 mentsy Opinions, and Belief, confpire in 
 many inftances to furnifh us with Ideas, 
 fome too general, fome too partial, and 
 (what is worfe than all this) with many 
 that are erroneous, and contrary to Truth, 
 Thefe it behoves us to eorre^fl as far as 
 pofiible, by cool fufpenfe and candid ex- 
 amination. 
 
 And thus by a conne(flion perhaps lit- 
 tle expe;^ed, the.Caufe of Letters^ and 
 
 that
 
 Book the Th'iRD. 407 
 
 that of Virtue appear to co-inclde, it Ch. V. 
 being the bufinefs of both to examine our 
 Ideas, and to amend them by the Standard 
 of Nature and of Truth (^). 
 
 In this important Work, we fhall be 
 led to obferve, how Nations, like fingle 
 Men, have thtir peculiar Ideas 5 how thefe 
 peculiar Ideas become the Genius of 
 THEIR Language, (ince tho. Syjnbolvn\i^ 
 of courfe correfpond to its Archetype {f) -, 
 
 D d 4 how 
 
 [h] How ufeful to Ethic Science, and indeed to 
 -Knowledge in general, a Grammatical Disqui- 
 sition into the Etymology and Meaning of Words was 
 efteemed by the chief and ableft Philofophers, may be 
 feen by confulting Plato in his Cratylus ; Xenoph. Mem, 
 IV. 5. -6. Arrian. Epi£l.\. 17. II. 10. Marc, Ardon. 
 III. II. V. 8. X. 8. 
 
 (jt) H0OT2 XAPAKTHP Iji r ai/S^wVa 
 A O r O Z . S tob . Capiuntilr Signa baud lev ia^ fed olfer- 
 vatii dlgna (quodfortaffe quifpiam non putarlt) de ingeniis 
 et moribus populorum et natiomim ex Unguis ipforum. Ba- 
 con, de Augm. Scient. VI. i. Vid. ethm ^iindliL 
 L. XI. p. 675. Edit. Capperon. Diog. L. I. p. 58. et 
 Mgnag. Com, Tufc. Difp. V. 16,
 
 4o8 H E R M E S* 
 
 Ch. V. how the iJDifeJl Nations, having the mojl 
 and bejl Ideas, will confequently have the 
 beji and 7noJi copious Languages', how 
 others, whofe Languages are motley and 
 compounded, and who have borrowed 
 from different countries different Arts and 
 Pradices, dilcover by Words, to whom 
 they are indebted for Things. 
 
 To illuflrate what has been faid, by a 
 few examples. We Britons in our time 
 have been remarkable borrowers, as our 
 inultiform Language may fufiiciently fhew. 
 Our Terms \n polite Literature prove, that 
 this came from Greece-, our Terms in 
 Mujic and Fainting, that thefe came from 
 Italy 'y our Phrafes in Cookery and War, 
 that we learnt thefe from the French; and 
 our Phrafes in Navigation, that we were 
 taught by the Flemings and Low Dutch. 
 Thefe many and very different Sources of 
 our Language may be the caufe, why it is 
 fodeficientin Regularity and Analogy . Ye t 
 we have this advantage to compenfate the 
 
 defedt.
 
 Book tiIe TnlkD. 409 
 
 dcfe(St, that what we want in Elegance, Ch. V. 
 we gain in Copioufnefs ^ in which laft re- 
 fpedt few Languages will be found fupe- 
 rior to our own. 
 
 Let us pafs from ourfelves to the Na- 
 tions OF THE East. The (^) Eaftern. 
 World, from the earliefl days, has been at 
 all times the Seat of enormous Monarchy. 
 On its natives fair Liberty never flied its ge- 
 nial influence. If at any time civil Difcords 
 arofe among them (and arife there did in- 
 numerable) the conteil was never about 
 the Fonyi of their Go'vernmeiit ; (for this 
 was an objedt, of which the Combatants 
 had no conception j) it was all from the 
 poor motive of ,whoJhoidd^e theirM a s t e r, 
 
 whether 
 
 (^) AiK yap TO ^aXixuTS^ot sluai ra, »i9») ci [Kit 
 
 $\j^£^x(vovTe<;. For the Barbarians hy being more favijh 
 In their Manners than the Greeks, and thofe of Afia than 
 ihofe of Europe, fubmit to defpotic Govermnent without 
 murmuring or difcontent. Arift. Polit, III. 4.
 
 4id M E R M E S. 
 
 Ch. V. whether a Cyrus or an Artaxerxes, a Mu'- 
 hornet or a Mujlapha, 
 
 Such was their Condition, and what 
 was the confequence ? — Their Ideas be- 
 came confonant to their fervile State, and 
 their Words became confonant to their 
 fervile Ideas. The great Diilindtion, for 
 ever in their fight, was that oi Tyrant and 
 Slave-, the moft unnatural one conceiva- 
 ble, and the moft fufceptible of pomp, and 
 empty exaggeration. Hence they talked 
 of Kings as Gods, and of themfelves, as 
 the meanefl and moft abjed; Reptiles. 
 Nothing was either great or little in mode- 
 ration, but every Sentiment was heightened 
 by incredible Hyperbole. Thus tho' they 
 fometimes afcended into the Great and 
 Magnificent (^), they as frequently dege- 
 nerated 
 
 (t-) The trued Sublime of the Eaft may be found in 
 the Scriptures, of which perhaps the principal caufe is 
 the intrinfic Greatnefs of the Subjeils there treated; 
 the Creation of the Univcrfe, the Difpenfations of di- 
 vine Providence, SsV,
 
 Book the Third. 41 i 
 
 neratedinto the T'umid iind Bomlfo/i, T6e Ch. V. 
 Greeks too of Afui became infe(!rted by their 
 neighbours, who were often at times not 
 only their neighbours, but their mailers ; 
 and hence that Luxuriance of xhQAfiatic 
 Stile, unknown to the chafte eloquence 
 and ^mity o^ Athens, But of the Gr^fix we 
 forbear to fpeak now, as we fhall fpeak of 
 them more fully, when we have firft confi- 
 dered the Nature or Genius o^ t\iQRomans ^ 
 
 And what fort of People may we pro- 
 nounce the Romans ? — A Nation engaged 
 in wars and commotions, fome foreign, 
 fome domeftic, which for iQ.w&n hun~ 
 dredyears wholly engrofTed their thoughts^ 
 Hence therefore their Language be- 
 came, like their Ideas y copious in all Terms 
 expreffive of things political, and well 
 j^apted to the purpofes both of Hijtory 
 and popular Eloquence, — But what was 
 their Philofophy f-— As a Nation, it was 
 none, if we may credit their ableil Writers, 
 And hence the Unfitnefs of their Language 
 
 to
 
 4ii HERMES. 
 
 Ch. V. to this Subjed ; a defedt, which even C/- 
 cerois compelled to confefs, and morefully 
 makes appear, when he writes Philofo- 
 phy himfelf, from the number of terms, 
 which he is obliged to invent ffj, Firgil 
 
 feems 
 
 (f) See Cic. de Fin. I. C. I, 2, 3. III. C. i, 2, 4, 
 &c. but in particular Tufc. Difp. I. 3. where he fays, 
 VvLlhosovniA jacuit ufque ad banc cEtaUm^ nee ullum ha~ 
 buit lumen LitePvARUM Latinarum j quce idujlran- 
 da et fxcitanda nobis ejl j ut fi^ Sec. See alfo Tujl: Difp. 
 IV. 3. and Jcad. I. 2. where it appears, that 'till Cice- 
 31 o applied himfelf to the writing of PhilcJoph)\ the Ra^ 
 mans had nothing of the kind in their language, except 
 fome mean performances o{ Aniafanius the Epicurean^ 
 and others of the fame feet. How far the Ro?nam were 
 indebted to Cicero for Philofophy, and with what induftry, 
 as well as eloquence, he cultivated the Subjedl, may be 
 feen not only from the titles of thofe Works that are 
 now loft, but much more from the many noble ones ftill 
 fortunately preferved. 
 
 The Epicurean Poet Lucretius, who flouriflied 
 nearly at the fame time, feems by his filence to have 
 ever -looked the Latin writers of his own fe£l j deriving 
 all his Philofophy, as well as Cicero, from Grecian 
 Sources ; and, like him, acknowledging the difficulty of 
 writing in Philofophy in Latin, both from the Poverty of 
 the Tongue, and from the NGvelty of the Subjed.
 
 Book the Third. 413 
 
 feems to have judged the moft truly of his Ch. V, 
 Countrymen, when admitting their infe- 
 liority in the more elegant Arts, he con- 
 cludes at laft with his ufual majefty. 
 
 Nee me animi falUt^ Graiorum ohfcura reperta 
 Difficile inhifirare Latin is verfibifl ejfe^ 
 (Multa novis rebus prcsfertim quoyn fit agendum^) 
 Propter EGESTATEM LINGUA Ct RERUM NO- 
 VITAfEM : 
 
 Bed tua The virtus tamen^ etfperata voluptas 
 Suavis amicitics quemvis perferre labor em 
 Suadct Lucr. I. 137. 
 
 In the fame age, Varro, among his numerous 
 works, wrote feme in the way di Philofophy ; as did the 
 Patriot Brutus, a Treatife concerning Virtue^ much ap- 
 plauded by Cicero 3 but thefe Works are now loft. 
 
 ,Soon after the writers above mentioned came Ho- 
 race, fome of whofe Satires and Epiftles may be juftly 
 ranked amongft the moft valuable pieces of Latin Philo^ 
 fophy^ whether we confider the purity of their Stile, or 
 ^he; great Addrefs, with which they treat the Subject. 
 
 After Horace^ tho' with as long an interval as from 
 the days of Augujius to thofe of Ncro^ came the Satirift 
 Persius, the friend and difciple of the Stoic Cornutus ; 
 eo whofe precepts as he did honour by his virtuous Lifc, 
 
 fo
 
 414 ' HERMES. 
 
 Ch.V. T^U REGER-E IMPERIO POPULOS, Ko^ 
 
 manCy ?nementOy 
 (Hcd tibi ertmt artesj pacifque imponere 
 
 morem, 
 Parcere fubjeBis, et debellare fuperbos. 
 
 From 
 
 ib his v/orks, tho' fmall, fhew an early proficiency in the 
 Science of Morals. Of him it may be faid, that he is 
 almoft the fingle difficult writer among the Latin ClaiUcs, 
 whofe meaning has fufficient merit, to make it worth 
 while to labour thro' his obfcurities. 
 
 In the fame degenerate and tyrannic period, lived alfo 
 Seneca j whofe character, both as a Man and a Wri- 
 ter, is difculled with great accuracy by the noble Au- 
 thor of the Qkira^ier'i/iics.^ to whom we refer. 
 
 Under a milder Dominion, that of Hadrian and the 
 JntonlneSj lived AuLus Gel LIU s, or (as fome call 
 him) Agellius, an entertaining Wiriter in the mif- 
 cellaneous way ; well fkilled in Criticifm and Antiqui- 
 ty ; who tho' he can hardly be entitled to the name of 
 a Philofopherj yet deferves not to pafs unmentioned here, 
 from the curious fragments of Philofophy intcrfperfed 
 in his works. 
 
 With Julus Gellius we range Macrobius, not be- 
 caufe a Contemporary, (for he is fuppofed to have lived 
 
 I , under
 
 Book the Third. 415 
 
 Ch.V. 
 From confidering the Rofnans, let us 
 pafs to THE Greeks. The Grecian 
 
 COMMON- 
 
 under Honorius and Theodoftus) but from his near refem- 
 blance, in the charadler of a Writer. His Works, 
 like the other's, are mifcellaneous ; filled with Mytho- 
 logy and antient Literature, fome Philofophy being in- 
 termixed. His Commentary upon the Somnium Scipio-^ 
 nis of Cicero may be confidered as wholly of the philofo- 
 phical kind. 
 
 In the fame age with Aulus Gellius^ flourifhed Apu- 
 I.EIUS oi Madaura in Africa^ a Platonic Writer, whofe 
 Matter in general far exceeds his perplexed and affe6led 
 Stile, too conformable to the falfe Rhetoric of the Age 
 when he lived. 
 
 Of the fame Country, but of a later Age, and a 
 harfher Stile, was Martianus Capella, if indeed 
 he deferve not the name rather of a Philologijl^ than of 
 9. Philofopher> 
 
 After Capdla^ we may rank Chalcidius the Ph- 
 tome, tho' both his Age, and Country, and Religion 
 are doubtful. His manner of writing is rather more 
 agreeable than that of the two preceding, nor does he 
 appear to be their inferior in the knowledge of Philofo- 
 phy, his work being a laudable Commentary upon the 
 TinKvus of Plato^ 
 
 The
 
 4i6 HERMES. 
 
 Ch. V. Commonweal THs,while they maintain^ 
 ed their Liberty, were the moft heroic 
 Confederacy, that ever exifled. They were 
 
 the 
 
 The laft Latin Philofopher was Boethius, who 
 ' was defcended from fome of the nobleft of the Roman 
 Families, and was Conful in the beginning of the fixth 
 Century. He wrote many philofophical Works, the 
 greater part in the Logical way. But his Ethic piece. 
 On the Co7ifolation afPhilofophy^ and which, is partly profe, 
 and partly verfe, deferves great encomiums both for th? 
 Matter, and for the Stile ; in which laft he approaches 
 the Purity of a far better age than his own, and is in 
 all refpe6ls preferable to thofe crabbed Africans already 
 mentioned. By command of Theod&ric king of the 
 Qgths^ it was the hard fate of this worthy Man to fufFer 
 death ; with whom the Latin Tongue^ and the laft re- 
 mains of Roman Dignity^ may be faid to have funk in 
 the weftern World, 
 
 There were other Romans, who left Philofophical 
 Writings J fuch as Musonius Rufus, and the two 
 Emperors, Marcus Antoninus and Julian ; but 
 as thefe preferred the ufe of the Greek Tpngue to thei^ 
 own, they can hardly be confidered among the number 
 ci Latin Writers. 
 
 Andfo much (by way of fketch) for the Latin 
 Authors of Philosophy ; afmall number for fo vaft 
 an Empire, if we confider them as all the product iJi 
 near fix fucceffive centuries.
 
 SooK THE Third. 417 
 
 thepoliteft, the braveft, and the wifefl of ^h. V. 
 men. In the fliort fpace of little more 
 than a Century, they became fuch Statef- 
 men, Warriors, Orators, Hiflorians, Phy- 
 licians. Poets, Critics, Painters, Sculp- 
 tors, Architecfls, and (lafl of all) Philofo- 
 phers, that one can hardly help confider- 
 ing THAT Golden Period, as a Provi- 
 dential Event in honour of human Na- 
 ture, to fhew to what pej-fe(ftion the Spe- 
 cies might afcend {g). 
 
 Now 
 
 ' (g) If we except Horner^ Hefiod^ and the Lyric Poets, 
 we hear of i^-w Grecian Writers before the expedition 
 <:ii Xerxes. After that Monarch had been defeated, and 
 the dread of the Perfuvi power was at an end, the Ef- 
 fulgence OF Grecian Genius (if I may ufe the 
 expreflion) broke forth, and flione till the time of Alex- 
 ander the Macedonia?}^ after whom it difappeared, and 
 never rofe again. This is that Golden Period fpoken 
 of above. I do not mean that Greece had not many 
 writers of great m.erit fubfequent to that period, and 
 Specially of the philofophic kind ; but the Grcaf^ the 
 Striking^ the Sublifm- (call it as you pleafe) attained at 
 that time to a height, to which it never could afcend in 
 any after age. 
 
 E e The
 
 4i8 H £ R M E S. 
 
 Ch. V. Now THE Language of these 
 Greeks was truly like themfelves, it was 
 
 con- 
 
 The fame kind of fortune befel the people of Ro7nei 
 When the Pwilc wars were ended, and Carthage their 
 dreaded Rival was no more, then (as Horace informs 
 us) they began to cultivate the politer arts. It was 
 foon after this, their great Orators, and Hiftorians^ 
 and Poets arofe, and Rotne^ like Greece^ had her Golden 
 Period, which kfced to the death of Odavius Qe- 
 far» 
 
 I call thefe two Periods, from the two greateft Ge- 
 niufes that flourifhed in each, one the Socratic Pe- 
 riod, the other the Ciceronian. 
 
 There are flili farther analogies fubfifting between 
 them. Neither Period commenced, as long as folici- 
 tude for the common welfare enG;ae:ed men's atten- 
 tions, and fuch wars impended, as threatened their de- 
 ftru£tion by Foreigners and Barbariafts. But when 
 once thefe fears were over, a general fecurity foon en- 
 fued, and inFcead of attending to the arts of defence 
 and felf -prefer vation, they began to cultivate thofe of 
 Elegance and Pleafure. Now, as thefe naturally pro- 
 duced a kind of wanton infolence (not unlike the vi- 
 tious temper of high-fed animals) fo by this the bands 
 of union were inlenfibly dillolvtd. Hence then among 
 
 the
 
 Book ^he Third. ' 419 
 
 conformable to their tranfcendcnt and Ch. V. 
 univerfal Genius. Where Matter fo 
 
 abounded. 
 
 the Greeks that fatal Peloponnejiati War, which together 
 with other wars, its immediate confequence, broke the 
 Confederacy of their Commonwealths ; wafted their 
 ftrength ; made them jealous of each other ; and thus 
 paved a way for the contemptible kingdom of Jllaccdofz 
 to enflave them all, and afcend in a few years to univer- 
 fal Monarchy. 
 
 A like luxuriance of profperity fov/ed difcord among 
 the Romans 3 raifed thofe unhappy contefts between the 
 Senate and the Gracchi ; between Sylla and Marias ; be- 
 tween Pompey and Cajar ; till at length, after the laft 
 ftruggle for Liberty by thofe brave Patriots Brutus and 
 CaJJtus at Philippic and the fubfequent defeat of Antho7}y 
 at A5lium^ the Romans became fabject to the dominion 
 of a Fellow-Citizen. 
 
 It muft indeed be confefled, that after Alexander and 
 Ociavius had eftablifhed their Monarchies, there v/erc 
 many bright Geniufes, who were eminent under their 
 Government. Ariftotle maintained a friendlhip and 
 epiftolary correfpondence with Alexander. In the time 
 of the fame Monarch lived Theophrajlus^ and the Cy- 
 nic, Diogenes. Then alfo Demojihenes and JEfchines 
 fpoke their two celebrated Orations. So likewife.in the 
 time of O^iavius-j Virgil wrote his Eneid,.-' ^xid with 
 
 E e 2 Horace^
 
 426 tl E R M E S. 
 
 Ch. V. abounded. Words followed of courfe, ind 
 thofe exquifite in every kind, as the Ideas 
 for which they flood. And hence it fol- 
 lowed, there was not a Subject to be 
 found, which could not with propriety be 
 exp re/led in Grf^i. 
 
 Here were Words and Numbers for 
 the Humour of an Artjiophanes ; for the 
 
 native 
 
 Horace^ Var'ius^ and many other fine Writers, partook 
 of his protection and royal munificence. But then it 
 muft be remembered, that tliefe men were bred and edu- 
 cated in the principles of a free Government. It was 
 hence they derived that high and manly fpirit, which 
 made them, the adrniration of after-ages. The Suc- 
 ceflbrs and Forms of Government left by Alexander and 
 Oelavtus^ foon ftopt the growth of any thing farther in 
 the kind. So true is that noble faying of Longinus-^ 
 ©f£t|/ai TE yxf lnxi/r, rot (pPOvvy-ocTOc tuv [/.syxXof^ovcou 
 n EAET0EPIA, xj i7nXnl(rociy >^ al(j.x ^iWDfiV to 
 -ar^oOu/xow TJif tjr^of uKXriXm; tPi^og, >Cj rrig •sri^k rot 
 ■ur^wrTia (piKoriiAix^. It is Liberty that is fanned to 
 ninfe tbefentiments of great Genii fes j to injpire them with 
 hope -y to ptifl) forward the propenfity of contcjl one with 
 amiher^ and the generous emulation of being thefirjl in 7'ank, 
 3)e Subl. Sedl. 44.
 
 Book the Third. 421 
 
 native Elegance of a Philemon or Menan' Ch. V. 
 4er ', for the amorous Strains of a Mim^ 
 nermus or Sappho; for the rural Lays of a 
 "Theocritus or Bion i and for the fublime 
 Conceptions of a Sophocles or Homer. The 
 fame in Profe. Here Ifocraies ¥/^as enabled 
 to difplay his Art, in all the accuracy of 
 Periods, and the nice counterpoife of 
 Didlion. Here Demojihenes found mate- 
 rials for that nervous Compolition, that 
 nianly force of unaffeded Eloquence, 
 which rufhed, like a torrept^ too impe- 
 tuous to be withflood. 
 
 Who were more different in exhi- 
 biting their Philofophy, than Xenophoiiy 
 Plato, and his difciple, Arijiotk^ Dif- 
 ferent, I fay, in their charader of Com^ 
 pofition; for as to their Phihfophy iifcify 
 it was in reality the fame. Arijlotky 
 ilrid, methodic, and orderly ^ fubtle in 
 Thought ; fparing in Ornament^ with 
 ^ittle addrefs to the Pailions or Imagi- 
 nation ; but exhibiting the whole with 
 
 E e 3 fuch
 
 422 H E R M E S. 
 
 Ch. V. fuch a pregnant brevity, that in every 
 fentence we feem to read a page. 
 How exquilitely is this all performed in 
 Greek ? Xet thofe, who imagine it may 
 be done as well in another Language, 
 fatisfy themfelves either by attempting to 
 tranflate him, or by perufing his tranlla- 
 tions already made by men of learning. 
 On the contrary, when v/e read either 
 Xenophon or Plato, nothing of this me~ 
 thod and ftrid: order appears. The ^or- 
 mal2.ndi DidaSiic is wholly dropt. What- 
 ever they may teach, it is without profef-« 
 iing to be teachers ; a train of Dialogue 
 and truly polite Addrefs, in which, as 
 in a Mirrour, we behold human Life^ 
 adorned in all its colours of Sentiment 
 and Manners. 
 
 And yet though thefe differ in this 
 manner from the Stagirite, how differ- 
 ent are they likewife in charadter from 
 e^ch other ? —Plato, copious, figura- 
 tive.
 
 Book the Third. 423 
 
 tive, and majeflicj intermixing at times Ch. V. 
 , the facetious and fatiric 3 enriching his 
 Works with Tales and Fables, and the 
 myftic Theology of antient times. Xc" 
 nophon, the Pattern of perfeft fimpli- 
 city ; every where fmooth, harmonious, 
 and pure 3 declining the figurative, the 
 marvellous, and the myflic -, afcending 
 but rarely into the Sublime; nor then 
 fo much trufling to the colours of Stile, 
 as to the intrinfic dignity of the Senti- 
 inent itfelf, 
 
 The Language in the mean time, in 
 which He and Flato wrote, appears to fuit 
 fo accurately with the Stile of both, that 
 when we read either of the two, we can- 
 not help thinking, that it is he alone, 
 who has hit its charadler, and that it 
 could not have appeared fo elegant ia any 
 other manner. 
 
 And thus is the Greek Tongue, 
 from its Propriety and TJniverfalityy made 
 
 E e 4 for
 
 424 H E R M E S. 
 
 Ch. V. for all that is great y and all that Is beauti- 
 fuly in every Subje5iy and under every Form 
 of writing. 
 
 Graiis ingeiiiiimy Graiis dedlt ore 
 
 rotundo 
 Mufa loqui. 
 
 It were to be wifhed, that thofe amongil 
 us, who either write or read, with a view 
 to employ their liberal leifure (for as to 
 fuch, as do either from views more fordid, 
 we leave them, like Slaves, to theirdeftined 
 drudgery) it were to be wifhed, I fay, that 
 the liberal (if they have a relifli for letters) 
 would infped: the finiflied Models of Gr^- 
 cian Literature ; that they would not 
 wafte thofe hours, which they cannot re- 
 call, upon the meaner productions of the 
 French and Englijh Prefs ; upon that fun- 
 gous growth of Novels and of Pamphlets, 
 where, it is to be feared, they rarely find 
 
 any
 
 Book the Third. 425 
 
 any rational pleafure, and more rarely Ch. V. 
 liill, any folid improvement. 
 
 To be competently fkilled in antient 
 learning, is by no means a work of fuch 
 infuperable pains. The very progrefs it- 
 felf is attended with delight, and refem- 
 bles a Journey through fome pleafant 
 Country, where every mile we advance, 
 jiew charms arife. It is certainly as eafy 
 to be a Scholar, as a Gamefter, or many 
 other Chara6ters equally illiberal and low. 
 The fame application, the fame quantity 
 of habit will iit us for one, as cornpletely 
 as for the other. And as to thofe who 
 tell us, with an air of feeming wifdom, 
 that it is Men, and not Books, we muft 
 lludy to become knowing ; this I have 
 always remarked, from repeated Experi- 
 ence, to be the common confolation and 
 language of Dunces. They fhelter their 
 ignorance under a few bright Examples, 
 whofe tranfcendent abilities, without the 
 
 common
 
 426 H E R M E S. 
 
 Ch. V. common helps, have been fufficient of 
 themfelves to great and important Ends. 
 But alas 1 
 
 Decipk exemplar vitiis imtablk-^ 
 
 In truth, each man's Underftanding, 
 when ripened and mature, is a compolite 
 ai natural Capacity, and oi fuper-indiiced 
 Habit, Hence the greateil Men will be 
 jiecefTarily thofe, who poffefs the bejl Ca^ - 
 pacities, cultivated with the bejl Habits. 
 Hence alfo moderate Capacities, when 
 adorned with valuable Science, will fai- 
 tranfcend others the moll acute by na- 
 ture, v/hen either neglected, or applied 
 to low and bafe purpofes. And thus for 
 the honour of Culture and good 
 Learning, they are able to render a 
 man, if he will take the pains, intrinf" 
 cally more excellent than his natural Supe^ 
 riors* 
 
 nr And
 
 Book the Third, 
 
 And fo much at prefent as to ge- 
 neral Ideas; Aow we acquire them', 
 'whence they are derived -, i^'i^nt is their Na^ 
 ture i and what their connexion with Lan^ 
 giiage. So much likewife as to the Sub- 
 jed:of this Treatife, Universal Gram-* 
 MAR. 
 
 End of the Third Book. 
 
 A D.
 
 ADVERTISEMENT. 
 
 ^T^HE following Notes are either Tranf" 
 lations of former Notes, or Additions 
 to them. T!he additional are chiefy Ex" 
 trails from Greek Manufcripts, which 
 (as the Author has faid already concern^ 
 ing others of the fame kind) are valu^ 
 able both for their Rarity, and for their 
 intrinfic Merit*
 
 C 43^ ) 
 
 ADDITIONAL NOTES. 
 
 PAG, 95. — TO Stop, ^c] The Quotation 
 from Prochis m the Note may be thus rendeiied— 
 That thing is at rest, zvhich for a time 
 
 PRIOR AND SUBSEQUENT IS IN THE SAME PLACEj 
 
 loth ttfelfy and its Parts. 
 
 P. 105/ In the Note, for yiyvofi.ivtiv read yfvowEjo?, 
 and render the pallage thus — Fo7- by thh faculty (namely 
 the faculty of Senfe) we neither knoiv the Future^ nor the 
 Pq/f-^ but the Prefeyit only, 
 
 P. io6. Note (^).j The pafTage of Phihponus 
 here referred to, but by miflake omitted, has refped to 
 the notion of beings corporeal and fenfihle^ which were 
 faid -to be nearly approaching to Non- Entity t. The Au- 
 thor explains this 'among «ither reafons, by the follow- 
 ing — JIo)? Js Tcr? ^/j^ atTi yurvid^si j U.oi^ro:/ y-h^ 
 trraJ'si £VT«y^a to zro:^zX(icv l^i x) to ^c'AAo^, raurx 
 ^l {A7i oi/TX' TO y.h yoif ntpdvi^xi >^ bh 'in ir*, to SI 
 HTTU) Bfi' (rv[A7ra.^oe,^i£i SI tw p^oi'W rx ^u<r<xa ZTiXulXf 
 fAxKXov di rns x*n50-fojf uvtuv .■srxpxzQXii^riy.x, eV* ^ 
 X^ovoq. How therefore is h that they approach nearly to 
 Non-Entitys? In the firji place^ becaufe HERE (where 
 they exiii^ exi/is the Past and the Future, and 
 thefe arc Non-Entitys j for the one is vanijhed, and is 
 no more^ the other is not as yet), Now all natural Sul?fance$ 
 pafs aivay along with Time, or rather it is upon their 
 Motion that Time is an Attendant, 
 
 P* no
 
 432 Additional NOTES. 
 
 P. I ig— in the Note here fubjoined mention is made 
 of the Real Now, or Instant, and its efficacy. 
 To which we may add, that there is not only a necejfary 
 Connexion between Exi/ience and the Prefent InJIant^ 
 bccaufe no other Point of Time can properly be faid to hc^ 
 but alfo between Exijlence and Life^ becaufe whatever 
 / llves^ by the fame reafon ncceflarily Is. Hence Sopho" 
 
 cleSj fpeakingof Tirne prefent.^ elegantly fays of it — 
 
 The Living, and Now prefent Time. 
 
 Trachin. V. II 85. 
 
 P. 227. — The Paflage in V'trgll^ of which Servius 
 here fpeaks, is a defcription of Turnus^s killing two 
 brothers, Arnycus and Diores j after which the Poet fays 
 of him, 
 
 currii cbfdjfa DuORUM 
 
 Sufpendit capita—-' —   
 
 This, literally tranilated, is — he hung up on his chariot 
 the heads of Two petfonsy which were cut off\ whereas 
 the Senfe requires, of the Two perfons^ that is to fay, 
 oi Jmycus and Diores. Now this by Amhorum would 
 have been expreft properly, as Amhorum means The 
 Two ; by Duorwyi is expreft improperly, as it means 
 only Two indefinitely. 
 
 P. 259. — The Paflage in Note [0) from ^hcmifi'tus, 
 may be thus rendered — Nature in many injiances ap- 
 pears to make her tranfttion by little and little^ fo that in 
 Jome Beings it may he doubted, whether they are Animal^ 
 
 ar Vegetable, 
 
 P. 294.
 
 Additional NOTES. 43;^ 
 
 P. 294. Note (c) — There are in the number of things 
 viany^ which have a ?noJ} knotvn Existence, hut a moj} 
 unknown Essence ; fuch for example as Motion, Place, 
 and m^re than either of them^ Time. The Existence 
 cf each of thcfe is known and ind!fputable.i but xvhat their 
 Essence /V, or Nature^ is among the moji difficult things 
 to difcern. The Soul alfo is in the fame Clafs : that it is 
 
 fomethingy is 7nofl evident ; hut what it isj is a jnatter not 
 
 fo eafy to learn. Alex. Aphrod. p. 142. 
 
 P. 340. — Language — incapable of commu- 
 nicating Demonstration.] See Three Trea- 
 tifes, or Vol. I. p. 220, and the additional note on tlie 
 words, The Source of infinite Truths^ &c. 
 
 P. 368. — in the l^lote— yet fo held the Philofpher of 
 JMalmeibury, afid the Author of the Ejfay^ Sec. j 
 
 Philoponus^ from the Philofophy of Plato and Pytha- 
 goras, feems to have far excelled thefe Moderns in his 
 account of Wisdom or Philosophy, and its Atri- 
 huteSj or ejjential Chara^crs. — •'iJ'to^ ysc^ (piXotro<piOi.<; 
 ■70 iv TOK •nroAAoK sp^afrt ^ioc(popixv §ii!^a.i rrw KOiVuuiccuy 
 
 ^acrtv* a yoop J'uo-p^f^sf ro ^iH^cci (pccTvrig (^IsgC ipitVJ*);) 
 X; ■srs^jff^a? xoivwn«i» (■sraj'Tt ya,f> ■sypxTrJov^j aAA' « 
 (lege oVa) TO ^icc(po^ou r^TOov liTreTi/' s^l xvvog Xy Wvs 
 i'tcc<poPxVy (xXXoc r'l kqivuv Ep^acrii'. It IS THE PRO- 
 PER business of Philosophy to shew in 
 
 MANY THINGS, WHICH HAVE DIFFERENCE, 
 WHAT IS THEIR CoMMON CHARACTER ; and IN 
 MANY THINGS, WHICH HAVE A CoMMON CHA- 
 RACTER, thro' WHAT IT IS THEY DIFFER. It 
 
 F f is
 
 434 Additional NOTES. 
 
 is indeed no difficult matter to Jljevj the common CharaSier 
 of a Wood-Pigeon and a Dove (for this is evident to 
 every one)^ but rather to tell where lies the Difference • nor 
 to tell the Difference between a Dog and a Horfe^ but ra- 
 ther to Jheii\ what they poffefs in common. Philop. Com. 
 MS. in Nicomach. Arithm. 
 
 P. 379 — THEY ARE MORE EXQUISITE THAN, 
 
 ^c. ] The Words of Arifiotle^ here referred to, are 
 tnele — uo(,aaov o £f» to a iviKcc xy to xocXov iv tok 
 ■TJif (po(rsoc? i^yoigy r\ Iv ro'ig Tn? Ti^vng. The Prin- 
 ciples OF Design and Beauty are ?nore in the 
 Works o/'Natwre, than they are in thofe of Art. 
 
 P. 379. WE MUST OF NECESSITY ADMIT A 
 
 Mind, ^c] The following quotation, taken from the 
 third Book of a nianufcript Comment of Proclus on the 
 Parmenides <?/" Plato, is here given for the fake of thofe, 
 who have curiofity with regard to the do6lrine of 
 Ideas, as held by antient Philofophers. 
 
 E^Je ^z7 (TVVT0[J.U; llTTtTv T'AV OCiTiCCl' TT.q TUV K?£W> 
 tTToGsCTfWC, J"t' TiV IxSlVOig TiOKTly priTiOV OTi TdVTOi'uTa.VtX 
 
 c(rx opxra, ipocvicc Hj vtto (TfATimi/, t) octto ro(,-Jjo[j.ocTis 
 if IV, 7) xar ociTiccv aAA cctto TixvjoiJ.ix,rs cx,o\jvxto]> 
 
 £ft y^p i-V TCK UJ-£^Olf TOC K^'htIcD/OCj i/H?, Xy AoyOf, 
 
 }^ diTix, y^ Tx dnixq, >t, arw tx XTroTiXic^xra 
 
 ^e7 uTPo rcov V.XTX (rUjaSsS/iMoj XiTiiav shxi fx y.ad av- 
 T£t, riru:v yxp sV.Sacn? to kxtx (rvyXiti^xog' ufi tx 
 
 UTTC TXvioy.XTiS ■ZuCiiT^VrSpOl/ XV "hv TO V.XT XiTiXVy £» >t; 
 
 oi-rro TX'Sloi^,xTis tx Qbiotxtx r^v tuv Qxvspoov- If 
 
 there-.
 
 Additional NOTES. 435 
 
 therefore ive are to relate concifely the Caufe^ why THE 
 Hypothesis of Ideas pleajcd' them (namely Parme- 
 nidcSf Zena^ Socrates:^ &c.) we mujl begin by observing 
 thd^^.aU the various vifible obje£is around us^ the hea- 
 venly, as well as the fublunaryy are either from Ch A N'CE, 
 or according to a Cause. From Chance is im-- 
 POSSIBLE ; for then the jnare excellent things (fuch as 
 Mind^ and Reafon^ and Caufey and the Effedis of Caufe) 
 will he a?nong thofe things that come lajl, and fo the End- 
 ings of things will be more excellent than their Begin- 
 nings. To which too may be added what hxi^oile fays -y 
 that Essential Causes ought to be prior to 
 accidental, in as much as every accidental 
 Cause is a Deviation from them; ^0 that what- 
 ever is the Effcd of fuch ejfential Caifc [as is indeed every 
 work of Art and human Ingenuity] mufl needs 'be prior 
 to that which is the Effecl of Chance^ even tho' we were 
 to refer to Chance the mojl divine of vifible objects [tlie 
 Heavens themfelves]. 
 
 The Philofopher, having thus proved a definite 'Caufe 
 of the World in oppofition to Chance, proceeds to fhew 
 that from the Unity and concurrent Order of things 
 this Caufe mull be One. After which he goes on, as 
 follows. 
 
 Et ff-iV iv OiKoyOV T2T0, OiTOTTOV. if 0.1 yoip Tt 
 
 troiXiv rwu vfi^uv rrig Tiirav a,irio(.q k.^';7tIov, to koctoc 
 Koyov ») yvoi(TiV uroiav, ficrw tjj Hcx,]rrog ov, >tj ra'OAa 
 fAiPogj Wiv ocTT ocmag aXoy^ Totaro. Ef ^l Xoyov 
 syov, >tj avTo yivu(rK0Vy oioev iavro omra tcoi/ 'sya.vrwj 
 amo)i ovy ri tuto ayvoat-, (x-yi^o'/itrsi rrtv ixuTH ipva-n/, 
 
 E» h OlOtVi OTl KXT ^(jiXV Efi Ta. uS-XV\oq a«T(Of, TO 
 
 F f 2 SI
 
 43^ Additional NOTES. 
 
 XT)?, <ndt\f a^oi Xy -i i^iv ocmov upitrfAivui; oidiv hv k^ 
 TO H«i/, Xj zroe,)/ioi «^ wf to llai', uv tj-* ><j enTiot/. 
 Ka» £» T«TO, rTOj l»f £auTO aoa (^XiTrov, x^ iavn,: yi- 
 vuay.ov, oiSb ra |m.£t auro. Ao^ok oc^oc jty ii^iciv «u- 
 Xoj? Oij'f T«f Ko(r/AJX8f Ao-yaf, x, t« £k?»], e^ wv to 
 TloiVf Jtj ifiv IV auTw tc Ilav, wj £v atTiw, j^wpj? tti; 
 uAn?. iVaiv IF THIS Cause be void of Rea- 
 son, that indeed would be abfiird ; for then again there 
 would be fomething among thofe things, which came lajl 
 in order, more excellent than their Principle or Cauje. I 
 mean by more excellent, fofnething operatitig according to 
 Reajon and Knowledge, and yet within that Univerfe, and 
 a Part of that Whole, which is, what it is, froin a Caife 
 devoid of Re afon. 
 
 But if, on the contrary, THE Cause of the Uni- 
 verse BE A Cause, having Reason and know- 
 ing itfelf, it of courfe knows itfelf to be the Caufe of all 
 things -y elfe,bting ignorant of this, it xvould be ignorant 
 of its (Twn nature. But if it know, that from its very 
 Essence it is the Cause of the Universe, 
 and if that, which knows one part of a Relation definite^ 
 iy, knows alfo of necejfity the other, it knows for this rea- 
 fon definitely the thing of zvhich it is the Caufe. It 
 KNOVi^s therefore THE UNIVERSE, and all things 
 out of which the Univerfe is compofed, of all which alfo 
 it is the Caufe. But if this be true, it is evident that 
 
 BY LOOKING INTO ITSELF, AND BY KNOWING 
 ITSELF, IT KKOV/S WHAT COMES AFTER IT- 
 SELF, AND IS SUBSEQUENT. It is,thercfore, through 
 certain Reasons and Forms devoid of Matter 
 T I that
 
 Additional NOTES. 437 
 
 that it ktioivs thofe mundane Reafom and Forms, out of 
 ivhich the Univerfe is compofed, and that the Univerfe is in 
 it, as in a Caufe dijVm^ fro7n andwithaut the Matter. 
 
 P. 380 — AGREEABLE TO WHICH IdEAS THESE 
 
 Works are fashioned, ^c.'] It is upon thefc 
 Principles that Nicotnachus in his Arithmetic, p. 7. 
 calls the Supreme Being an Artijl — iv rj? ra Tfyi/i'Ts 
 0£8 ^tavot'a, in Dei artificis mcnte. Where Philo- 
 ponus, in his jnanufcript Co7nment, obferves as follows 
 — T£p^HT»i^ (pnai TO]) @£OVy oog -STKujuv rocg zrpuirccg di- 
 Tixq TCf Taj Xoynq ocvtuv 'i')^o'^oc. He calls God an 
 Artist, as poffl-Jpng zuithin himjelf the firjl Caufcs of 
 all things, and their Reajons or Proportions. Soon after 
 fpeaking of thofe Sketches, after which Painters work 
 
 and finifh their Pictures, he fubjoins wtrTrsp Zv 
 
 riiAiig, £i? ra, TOiocvrx (Ty.ixy^a,<pniJ.xr(x (iXiTroi/'Js;, sroi- 
 HfAiv t'd ^i ri, arw Xj ^Y\[j.m^yo(;, -zs-^og Ikuvx xtto- 
 CAettwv, roi mh -usoivloc y.ix.o<ry'rix.(v' aAA' Ifiou, otj rx 
 fAiV rriSs iy)na.y^a,<pri^ix,TOC ot-rsKri ticriv, iKB^uoi ^i 01 Iv 
 rZ 0£w Xoyoi ol^^iTVTroi Xy t3-«i/1e-X£io»' iKTiv. As there- 
 fore we, looking upon fuch Sketches as thefe, make fuch 
 and fuch particular things, fo alfo the Creator, looking at 
 thofe Sketches of his, hath formed and adorned luith beauty 
 all things here below. IVe muji remember, however, that 
 the Sketches here are i?nperfeit ; but that the others, thofe 
 Reasons or Proportions, which exi/l in God, are 
 Archetypal and all-perfect. 
 
 It is according to this Philofophy, that Milton repre- 
 fents God, after he had created this vifible World, con- 
 templating 
 
 F f 3 how
 
 43S Additional NOTES. 
 
 hotu it Jhoxv'd 
 
 In proJpeSl from his throne^ hotv good^ hozvfair, 
 
 Answ'ring his great Idea 
 
 P. Loft, VII. 556. 
 
 Proclus proves tlie Exiftence of thefe Generai, 
 Ideas or Universal Forms by the following Ar- 
 guments, II TOIVVV if IV C/ATiQC TiS TSyOC'Hoi dvTU TW 
 
 sivoci TS-oid(rix,j TO ^i avrco tw hvxi T^omv cctto ttij Ixvt^ 
 ■zs^o^s7 acrjoi? thto Ift zr^ccTug^ oTrsp to zyomiASVov $b\j- 
 
 TE^WJ >iy Ifl •Z3-^C0TC0?j J'lJ'ctKri TO) ZSOl'dy-iVlii J'tUTf^W?* 
 
 olov TO 13-up >t, Si^oocri S'ffl/xoTjjla aAAw, Xj efi ^s^^ovy 
 % if-up^/T] 6id(jO<Ti (^(Ji'fiv, -Hj iy^si C^unv, Xj tvi is'Ciuloiv 
 t^oig av OiXmn rov Xoyov, ocrtx, auTW tw livai uroisT. tc^ 
 TO cciTiov av Ta iua,y\oq uvru tw lji/at uTOtHV raTO Eft 
 TjyDUTicg . omp xos'fj.og ^iVTiPwz. u Sn ii6(r[j^og -srAj)- 
 pw^oc h^uu Sfi zs-xvjoiuv^ ti7\ av >tj Iv tw a*T«aj ra 
 Koa-fxs rocvTcx. -nr^wrtoq' to yap auTO a^Ttov >c, •jjAtofj 
 Xj (r£A->ii'?;v, >c, ccvu^oottov V7rifri(rsy jtj jttttoi/j Xj oAwj 
 TO. eW)^, Ta £v TW arafli. TauTa af« "zccwtw? £r*i' £« 
 TTi diTioi t8 TO^ai/io?, aAAo? riAjoj uTupx tov iy.(ptx,vr)y Xy 
 <xAAof avQ^WTTOfj >Cj twv ekJw;/ ofAoiug iy.afov. 'ifiv aox 
 TOi ii^Yt VTPO ruv di<j^Y\r()i'jy Tt, cciria. ccvtuv rot, J'fl^iHp- 
 yiY^d v.7.TCi rov 'n^'/i[j.ivov Acyoy, £i/ t?i y.nx tz KQ<r^^ 
 iz-Ciflog dirKX-zToovTrcc^^oi/lcc. If therefore THE Cavse 
 Cf" 'I he Universe be a Caufe which operates merely 
 by exijVmgy and if that ivhich operates merely by exijling 
 operate fro^n its oivn proper Effaice^ such Cause is 
 
 PRIMARILY, M^HAT ITS EfFECT IS SECONDARJ^ 
 
 XY, ana thaty wjnch it is p7'imarilyy it giveth to its Ef- 
 fect fccondarily. It is thus that Fire both giveth TFarmth 
 
 to
 
 Additional NOTES, 439 
 
 iofomething elfe^ and is Itfelf warm ; that the Soul giveth 
 Ufe^ andpoffeffeth Life : and this reajonmg you ?noy per- 
 ceive to be true in all things whatever^ which operate merely 
 by exijling. It follows therefore^ that the Cause 
 OF the Un;^ verse, operating after this manner^ is 
 
 THAT PRIMARILY, WHICH THE WoRLD IS SE- 
 CONDARILY. If therefore the World be the ple- 
 nitude of Forms of all Sorts, thefe Forms must 
 
 ALSO BE PRIMARILY IN THE CaUSE OF THE 
 
 World ; for it was the fame Caufe, which conjlitutcd the 
 Sun, and the Moon, and Man, and Horfe, and in gene- 
 ral all the Fofms exijling in the Univerfe. Thefe therefore 
 exiji primarily in the Caufe of the Univerfe ; another Sun 
 befides the apparent, aJiotber Man, and fo with refpeSi to ^ _ 
 
 every Form elfe. The Forms therefore, previous to 
 ^the fenfihk and external Forms, and which according to 
 this reafoning are their active a7id ef/icient Cau- 
 ses, are to be found pre-existing in that One 
 AND common Cause of all the Universe, 
 Prodi Com. MS. in Plat. Parmenid. L. 3. 
 
 We have quoted the above pafTages for the fame 
 reafon as the former ; for tljie fake of thofe, v/ho may , 
 have a curiofity to fee a fample of this antient Philofo- 
 phy, which (as fome have held) may be traced up from 
 Plato and Socrates to Parjnenides, Pythagoras, and Or- 
 pheus himfelf. 
 
 If the Phrafe, to operate merely by exijling, fhould aj>- 
 pear queftionable, it muft be 'explained upon 'a fuppofi- 
 tion, that in the Suprcfue Being no Attributes'areytY-^/z- 
 dary, intertnittent, or adventitious, but all original, ever 
 pcrfcd and rffential. See p. 162, 359. 
 
 Ff4 That
 
 440 
 
 Additional NOTES. 
 
 That we fliould not therefore think of a hlwd uncon- 
 faom operation, Hke that of Fire here alluded to, the 
 Author had long before prepared us, by uniting Knoiu- 
 kdge with natural Efficacy^ where he forms the Charadler 
 of thefe Divine and Creative Ideas. 
 
 But let us hear him in his own Language. — aAX* 
 %1-sSBO i^iXoitj:.iv TYiv l^iOT^lx ocvTuv (fc. ihuu) ccipo^i- 
 ira.<r^ui Jj« tuv yvto^ifJ-ooTi^uvy octto [xlv ruv (pv(nxuv 
 Koywv Xd^uy-iv to ccvtZ tZ iJvai ZTOinrmovj uv Sri xy 
 ZTOiZ(rt' d-rro SI rm n^i/ixZv ro yvui-mov, (ov Tzrojatriv, 
 
 fjLsii oiirtoLq ilvoci roi<; iSiccg h[J^ts^yiy.»? a/^a xj voi^d; 
 srdyruv twi- xcctcc (pvtnv aV or eAx^eI'WI'. But if we 
 jhonldchuje to define the pecidiar charadler of Ideas by 
 things more kn^wn to us than them/elves, let us affume 
 frcm NATURAL Principles the Power of ef- 
 fecting, MERELY BY EXISTING, all the things that 
 they efe£l ; and from artificial Principles the 
 Power of comprehending all that they ep6t^ 
 although they did not effSi them merely by exifting ; and 
 then uniting thofe two^ let us fay that Ideas are at once 
 the. efficient and intelligent Causes of all 
 things produced according to Nature. From book the 
 lecond of the fame Comment. 
 
 The Schoolman, Thomas Aquinas^ a fubtle and acute 
 writer, has the following fcntence, perfcdlycorrefpond- 
 in<' with this Philofophy. Res omnes comparantur ad 
 Divinum Jntelkfium^ficut artificiata ad Art em. 
 
 The
 
 Additional N^O T E S. 441 
 
 The Verfes of Orpheus on this fubjeft may be found 
 in the tradl De Mundo^ afcrlbed to Arijiotk^ p. 23. 
 Edit. Sylburg. 
 
 Zsvg a^a-rtv yii/eroj Ztuj h. t. A. 
 
 P. 391 — Where all things lie inveloped, 
 
 —Icoi zrip Ir* TA nOAAA jcara an rjva fxs- 
 eicy.oUy ro<ra.ura ?e, TO EN Ikhvo zroo rs fA,£pKr[J.ii 
 y.xTa TO Tzoivlri a-iAioU* a yap Vv, cJf £A«p^<rov, xot- 
 fiaTTfp XTTivc-iTTTTog i^o^s XiynVj aAX EN, flS 
 IIANTA. Js fiumeroKs as is the Multitude 
 OF Individuals by Partition, fo mmierous alfo is that 
 Principle OF Unity /^_}' z<r«;wr/??/Impartibility. For 
 it is not One, as a minimum is ojie (according to what 
 Speucippus feemed to fay) ^ hut it is One, as being all 
 THINGS. Damafcius -arf^i 'A^^uv, MS. 
 
 P. 408 — the wisest Nations — the most co- 
 pious Languages.] It is well obferved by Muretus 
 
 N^ulli unqiiam^ qui res ignorarent^ nomina, quibus 
 
 eas expriinerent-^ qiiafierimt. Var. Ledt. VI. i. 
 
 P. 411. But what was their Philoso- 
 phy r J The fame Muretus has the following paflage 
 
 upon the Roman Taste for Philosophy. 
 
 Beati autern illi^ et opuknti.y et omnium gentiwn vidores 
 Romani, in petendis honoribus^ et in prenfandis civibus, 
 et in exteris nationibus verba cotnponeyidis^ re cornpilaridis 
 cccupati^ philofopbandi curam fcrvis out libertis fuis^ it 
 Qracidls efurientibus^ rdinquebant. Jpfi^ quod ab ovarii 
 
 iia^
 
 442 
 
 Additional NOTES. 
 
 iia, quod ah amh'itione^ quod a voluptat'ibus rellquum erat 
 iemporisy ejus fi partem altquam aut ad audiendum Gres- 
 cum quefnpiam philojophum^ aut ad aliquem de philofophla 
 Ubellum vel legendu?n vel fcribendum contul'iffent, jam fe ad 
 eruditionis admen pervenijfe^ jam vi£iam a fe et projiiga' 
 tamjacereGraciamfomniabant, Var. Le6l. VI. i. 
 
 > 
 
 INDEX.
 
 N D E X. 
 
 A.. 
 
 ADjECTivE, how it differs from other Attribu- 
 tives, fuch as the Verb, and the Participle, 
 i86. verbal, 187. pronominalj 189. ftriilly fpeak- 
 ing can have no Genders, • ' 190 
 
 Adverbs, their character and ufe, 192 to 194, Ad^ 
 verbs of Intenfion and Remiflion, 195. of Com- 
 parifon, 196 to 199. of Time, and Place, and 
 Motion, 204,205. nnadeout of Prepofitions, 205. 
 Adverbs of Interrogation, 206. affinity between 
 thefe laft, and the Pronoun relative, 206 to 208. 
 Adverbs derived from every Part of Speech, 209. 
 found in every Predicament, 210. called by the 
 Stoics n«vJ'ut]»i?, - — ibid, 
 
 vS^SCHiNES, — — — — 419 
 
 Alexander Aphrgdisiensis, 294, 310, 433. his 
 account of Phanfy or Imagination, — 357 
 Alexander and Thais, 71. his influence upon the 
 Gr^^i Genius, • 419,420 
 
 Amafanius, — — 412 
 
 AMMO.MUSjhis account of Speech, and its relations, 
 4. of theProgrefsof human Knowlegefrom Com- 
 plex to Simple, 10. of the Soul's two principal 
 Pov/ers, 17. of the Species of Sentences, ibid, his 
 notion of God, 55. quoted, 59. his notion of a 
 ' Verb, 87, 193. his notion of Time, lOO. illuftrates 
 from Homer the Species of Modes or Sentences, 
 145. quoted, 154. his notion of conjundive Parti- 
 cles, and of the Unity which they produce, 241. 
 quoted, 278. his account of Sound, Voice, Arti- 
 culation, bV. 321, 328. of the diftindion be- 
 tween
 
 INDEX. 
 
 twcen a Symbol and a Refemblance, 3.31. what he 
 
 thought the human Body with refpeft to the Soul, 
 
 334. his triple order of Ideas or Forms, 382 
 
 Analyfts and SynthefiSy 2, 3, 367. analyfis of Cafes, 
 
 275, 276, 285 
 
 Anaxagoras,   269 
 
 Anthologia Gr.   47, 50 
 
 Antoninus, — f 83, 310, 405, 407, 416 
 
 Apollonius, /^^ Grammarian^ tx^\z\n^ the Species 
 of Words by the Species of Letters, 27. his elegant 
 name for the Noun and Verb, 33. quoted, 63. his 
 idea of a Pronoun, 65, 67. quoted, 70. explains 
 the Diftindlion and Relation between the Article 
 and the Pronoun, 73, 74. his two Species oi ^ii^iq 
 or Indication, 77- holds a wide difference between 
 the Prepofitive and Subjun^live Articles, 78. ex- 
 plains the nature of the Subjundive Article, 80. 
 correcl:s iiWz^r from the dodrine of Enclitics, 84, 
 85. his notion of that Tenfe called the Prateri- 
 ium perfeSfum^ 129. holds the Soul's difpofition 
 peculiarly explained by Verbs, 141. his notion of 
 the Indicative Mode, 151. of the Future, implied 
 in all Imperatives, 155. explains the power of 
 thofe paft Tenfes, found in the Greek Imperatives, 
 156. his Idea of the Infinitive, 165. his name for 
 it, 166. quoted, 168, 175. his notion of middle 
 Verbs, 176. quoted, 179, 181, 195. explains the 
 power and efFe6l of the Greek Article^ 217 to 222. 
 holds it efTential to the Pronoun not to coalefce 
 with it, 225 to 228. fhews the different force of 
 the Article when differently placed in the fame 
 Sentence, 231. quoted, 238, 239. his idea of the 
 Prepofitionj — — ^^i 
 
 Apu-
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Apuleius, fiiort account of him, — 415 
 
 Aquinas, Thomas, quoted • 440 
 
 Argument a priori & a pofteriori, g, 10. which of the 
 two more natural to Man, — ibid* 
 
 Aristophanes, — — — — 420 
 
 Aristotle, his notion of Truth, 3. quoted, 8. his 
 notion of the difference between things abfolutely 
 prior, and relatively prior, 9, 10. quoted, 15. his 
 Definition of a Sentence, 19. of a Word, 20. of 
 Stibftance, 29. divides things into Subftance and 
 Accident, 30. how many Parts of Speech he ad- 
 mitted, and why, 32, 33, 34, l^c. his notion o^ 
 Genders, 42. his account of the metaphorical ufe 
 of Sex, 48. quoted, 55, 56, 89. his Definition of a 
 Verb, 96. his notion of a Now or Inftant, 102. of 
 Senfation limited to it, 104, 105,431. of Time, 
 106, 107. of Time's dependence on the Soul, 112. 
 quoted, 119, 193. his notion of Subftance, 202« 
 calls Euripides -crsijjT?:?, 223. himfelf called the 
 Stagirite, why, ibid, a diftin^lion of his, 224. his 
 definition of a Conjunction, 239. a paflage in his 
 Rhetoric explained, 240. his account of Relatives* 
 286. his notion of the divine Nature, 301. whom 
 he thought it was probable the Gods fhould love, 
 302. his notion of Intellect and intelligible Ob- 
 jefts, ibid, held Words founded in Compadt, 314, 
 315. quoted, 310, 320. his account of the Ele- 
 ments or jLetters, 324. his high notion of Princi- 
 ples, 325. quoted, 357, 379,434. his notion of the 
 difference between moveable and immoveable Ex- 
 illence, 360. between intelledual or divine Plea- 
 fure, and that which is fubordinate, ibid, quoted, 
 361. his notion of the divine Life or Exiftence, 
 
 compared
 
 INDEX. 
 
 compare.d with that of Man, 362. of the difference 
 between the Greeks and the Barbarians^ 409. his 
 ^.lijcharader,. as a Writer^ compared with Plato and 
 XenophoK, ^21. corrcfponds whh Jlexander, ^.ig 
 yJrithmetUj founded upon whatPrinciples, 352. (See 
 Geometry.) its fubje^t', what, 367. owes its Being 
 
 to -fbe M-iiid, how,   j/^^d. 
 
 Jrti whatj and Artift, who, ; — m, 3^2 
 
 Articles, 31. their near alliance with Pronouns, 
 73. of two kinds, 214. the firft kind, 214 to 232. 
 the fecond kind, 233 to.236. Englijh Articles, their 
 \. diffefe;n<:e and ufe, 215-. Greek Article, 219. Arti- 
 desdenote pre-acquaintance, 218, 220. thence 
 eminence, and notoriety, 222 to 224. with what 
 \ >vqjjd;5 tJbey affociate, with vvhat not, 224 to 229. 
 Ci^^^i.'Ajticle marks the Subject in Propofitions, 
 23d. Articles, inftances of their effed, 231, 232. 
 Articles pronominal, 72, 73, 233. inftances of 
 their efrecl:, 235, 236, 347. Subjundive Article, 
 fee Pronoun relative or fubjuntftive. 
 Articulation., fee Voice. 
 
 AscoNiys, 132 
 
 Att^ributives, 30, 31. defined, 87. of the firft or- 
 der, 87 to 191. of the fecond order, 192 to 2iT» 
 Bee Verb, Participle, Adjective, Adverb. 
 Aulus Gellius, iliort account of him as a Writer, 
 
 414 
 
 Bacon, his ndtion of U>;/^'i?r/^/ Grammar, 2. oi an- 
 tient Languages and Geniufes, compared to mo- 
 dern, 288. of mental Separation or Divifion, 306. 
 of Symbols, to convey our thoughts, 334. of the 
 
 Analogy
 
 - I N D E X. 
 
 Analogy between the Geniufes of Nations and 
 their Languages, — —— 407 
 
 Being, or Exijience, mutable, immutable, 90, 371. 
 temporary, fuperior to Time, gi, 92. See Truths 
 God. 
 
 BelISARIUS, •■■ : ■■' ' 15O 
 
 Blemmides, Nicephorus, his notion of Time 
 prefent, 119. his Etymology of E7nfri[^yij 368. 
 his triple order of Forms or Ideas, — 386 
 
 Body, Inrtrumentof the Mind, 305. chief Obje(3: of 
 modern Philofophy, 308. confounded with Mat- 
 ter, 309. human, the Mind's veil, 333. Body, 
 that, or Mind, which has precedence in different 
 Syftems, 392, 393 
 
 BoERHAAVE, 32I 
 
 BoETHius, how many Parts of Speech he admitted 
 as necefTary to Logic, 33. his idea of God's Exift- 
 ence, 92. illuftrates from Virgil the Species of 
 Modes or Sentences, 146. quoted, 312. held 
 Language founded in Compa6l, 315. refers to the 
 Deity's unalterable Nature, 361. his notion of 
 original, intelligible Ideas, 397. of the difference 
 between Time (however immenfe) and Eternity, 
 389. fliort account of his Writings and cha- 
 
 racSter, ' 416 
 
 Both, differs from Two, how, — 227 
 
 Brutus,   413, 419 
 
 C. 
 
 C^SAR, C. Julius, his Laconic Epiflle, . 178 
 
 C^SAR, OcTAvius, influence of his Government 
 
 upon the Roman Genius, — 419, 420 
 
 Callimachus, — — .   . . 52 
 
 5 Cases,
 
 I N D E X. 
 
 Cases, fcarceany fuch thing in modern Languages, 
 273. name of, whence, 277. Nominative, 279 to 
 282. Accufative, 282, 283. Genitive and Dative, 
 284 to 287. Vocative, why omitted, 276. Abla- 
 tive, peculiar to the Romans , and how they em- 
 
 ^ ployed it, 276, 277 
 
 CaufeSf Conjunctions connect the four Species of, 
 V/ith their efFeds, 248. final Caufe, firft in Spec«- 
 lation, but laft in Event, il>id. has its peculiar 
 Mode, 142. peculiar Conjunftion, 248. peculiar 
 
 Cafe, 287 
 
 Chalcidius, 301. Ihort account of him, 415 
 
 Chance, fubfequent to Mind and Reafon, 434, 435 
 Charisius, Sosipater, — 205, 219 
 
 Cicero, 132, 170, 269, 272, 311, 313, 407. com- 
 pelled to allow the unfitnefs of the Latin Tongue 
 for Philofophy, 411. one of the firft that intro- 
 duced it into the Latin Language, 412. Cicero- 
 nian and Socratic Periods, — - 418 
 
 City, Feminine, why, — — 48 
 
 Clark, Dr. Sam. — — 128 
 
 Comparison, degrees of, 197 to 199. why Verbs 
 admit it not, 200. why incompatible with certain 
 Attributives, r'^zV. why with all Subftantives, 201 
 Conjunction, 32. its Definition, 238. its two 
 kinds, 240, 241. Conjundions Copulative, 242. 
 Continuative,z^zV.Suppofitive,Pofitive,244.Cau- 
 i"al,Colle(5tive, 245,246. Disjundtive Simple, 252. 
 Advcrfative, ibid. Adverfative abfolute, 254. of 
 Comparifon,255.Adequate,?Z>;V. Inadequate, 256. 
 Subdisjundtive, 258. Some Conjunflions have 
 an obfcure Signification, when taken alone, 259 
 Connective, 30, 31. its two kinds, 137. its firft 
 kind, ibid, to 260, its fccond, 26 1 IQ 274. 'S'**' 
 
 CoNjuf^QTjoN, Preposition. 
 
 Con-
 
 INDEX. 
 
 CoNSENTius, his notion of the Neuter Gender, 43. 
 ofmiddle Verbs, 177. of the pofitive Degree, 198 
 Confonant^ what, and why fo called, — 323 
 
 Contraries^ pafs into each other, 132. deftrudlive of 
 each other, •   "   — — 251 
 
 Converfation^ what, — ■■■•       398 
 
 Cenverfion^ of Attributives into Subftantives, 38. of 
 Subftanfeives into Attributives, 182, 189. of Attri- 
 butives into one another, 187. of Interrogatives into 
 Relatives, and vice verfdy 206, 207. of Conne*Slives 
 
 into Attributes, 205, 272 
 
 iJoRN. Nepos, — — — — 212 
 
 Country^ Feminine, why, — — - 4S 
 
 D. 
 
 DaAiascius, his notion of Deity, — 441 
 
 Deathy Mafculine, why, 51. Brother to Sleep, 52 
 Declenfion^ the name, whence,   •   278 
 
 Definitive, 30, 31, 214. 5^^ Articles. 
 
 Definitions^ what, — — 367 
 
 Asr^i?, 64,76 
 
 Demosthenes, — 49, 4x9, 421 
 
 Derivatives more rationally formed than Primitives, 
 
 why, 336 
 
 Defign^ neceflarily implies Mind, 379, 434 
 
 Diogenes, the Cynic, — — 4i<j 
 
 Diogenes Laertius, 34, 145, 154, 317, 322, 324, 
 
 407 
 
 T) lOi^YSlVS of HalicarnaJfuSy — 34)35 
 
 Diverfity, its importance to Nature, 250. heightens by 
 
 degrees, and how,   itid. to 252 
 
 Donatus, — — — . 74, 272 
 
 E- 
 
 Marthy Feminine, why, — — 47 
 
 Gg ECCLE-
 
 INDEX. 
 
 ECCLESIASTICUS,   56 
 
 Element, defined, 324. primary Articulations or Let- 
 ters fo called, why, ibid, their extenfive applica- 
 tion, 325. See Letters. 
 Empiric, who, •■ •■■ 352 
 
 Enclitics, among the Pronouns, their character, 84, 85 
 English To«^a^, its rule as to Genders, 43. a pecu- 
 liar privilege of, 58. exprefTes the power of contra- 
 diftin6live and enclitic Pronouns, 85. its poverty as 
 to the expreffion of Modes and Tenfes, 148. its 
 analogy in the formation of Participles, 185, 186. 
 ncgleded by illiterate Writers, ibid, force and pow- 
 er of its Articles, 215 to 233. fhews the Predicate 
 of the Propofition by pofition, as alfo the Accufa- 
 tive Cafe of the Sentence, 26, 274, 276. its cha- 
 rafter, as a Language,       408 
 
 Epictetus, — — 310, 407 
 
 EttjtiV''^ ^^s Etymology,   '   368 
 
 Ether, Mafculine, why, — — 46 
 
 Euclid, a difference between him and Firgil, 69. his 
 Theorems founded upon what, — — 3^.0 
 
 Euripides, ^ 52, 310, 331 
 
 Exijhnce, differs from EJfence, how, 294, 433 
 
 Experience, founded on what, — — 352 
 
 Experiment, its utility, 352. conducive to Art, how, 
 
 ibid, beholden to Science, tho' Science not to that, 
 
 353 
 F. 
 
 Form lind Matter J 2, 7. elementary Principles, 307, 
 myfterioufly blended in their co-exiftence, ibid, and 
 312. Form^ its original meaning, what, 310. trans- 
 ferred from lower things to the higheft, 311. pre- 
 exiftent, where, 312. defcribed by Ciiffro, 311, 313. 
 
 in
 
 INDEX. 
 
 in Speech, what, 315, 326, 327, &c. Form of 
 Forms, 312. triple order of Forms in Art, 374. ia 
 Nature, 377. intelligible or fpecific Forms, their 
 peculiar charader, 364, 365, 372, 380, 396, 436, 
 
 438 
 Fortune^ Feminine, why,   -   ' "   57 
 
 Fuller, > — — 183 
 
 G. 
 
 Gaza, Theodore, his Definition of a Word, 21. 
 explains the Perfons in Pronouns, 67. hardly ad- 
 mits the Subjunctive for an Article, 78. his account 
 of the Tenfes, I2g. of Modes, 140. quoted, 151. 
 calls the Infinitive the Verb's Noun, 165. quoted, 
 181. his Definition of an Adverb, 195. arranges 
 Adverbs by claffes according to the Order of the 
 Predicaments, 210. explains the power of the Arti- 
 cle, 218. quoted, 225. explains the different powers 
 of conjunctive Particles, 245. of disjunctive, 249. 
 his fingular explanation of a Verfe in Homer, 253. 
 quoted, 262, 271 
 
 Gemistue, Geo7-giiii, otherwife Pletho, his do£trine 
 of Ideas or intelligible Forms 395 
 
 Genders, their origin, 41. their natural number, 42. 
 (See Sex.) why wanting to the firft and fecond Pro- 
 noun, — = — I - 69 
 
 Genus and Species, why they (but not Individuals) ad- 
 mit of Number, • 39 
 
 Geometry, founded on what Principles, 352. that and 
 Arithmetic independent On Experiment, ibid. (See 
 Science.) its Subje<5t, what, 367. beholden for it to 
 the Mind, how, ibid. 
 
 God, exprcfled by Neuters, fuch as to ^hov, Numen, 
 ^f. why, 54, 55. as Mafculine^ why, ibid, immu- 
 
 G g 2 table.
 
 INDEX. 
 
 table, and fuperior to Time and its Diftindions, 92. 
 allvvife, and always wife, 301. immediate objeds of 
 his Wifdom, what, ibid, whom among men he may 
 be fuppofed to love, 302. P'orm of Forms, fovereign 
 Artift, 312, 313, 437. above all Intenfions and Re- 
 miflions, 162, 359, 439. his Exiftence different 
 from that of Man, how, 360, 362. his divine At- 
 tributes, 361. his Exiftence neceflarily infers that 
 of Ideas or exemplary Forms, 379, 380, 436. ex- 
 quifite Perfedion of thefe divine Ideas or Forms, 
 380, 437. his ftupendous view of all at once, 389, 
 390,442. region of Truth, 162, 391, 403, 405. 
 in Plim Knowledge and Power unite, 44O 
 
 Gocdf above all utility, and totally diftinft from it, 
 297. fought by all men, 296, 298. confidcred by all 
 as valuable for itfelf, ibid, intelledlual, its charac- 
 ter, 299. See Science^ God. 
 
 GORGIAS, — — — — 52 
 
 Gram?na!\, philofophical oruniverfal, 2. how effential 
 to other Arts, 6. how diftinguifhed from other 
 Grammars, «■   li 
 
 Grammarians, error of, in naming Verbs Neuter, 177. 
 in degrees of Comparifon, 198. in the Syntax of 
 Conjun6lions, — — — — _ 238 
 
 Greeks, their character, as a Nation, 415, ^c» 
 
 , Jftatic Greeksy different from the other Greeks, and 
 
 why, 410. Grecian Genius, its maturity and decay, 
 
 417, ^f. 
 
 Greek Tongue, how perfed in the expreflion of 
 Modes^and Tenfes, 147. force of its imperatives in 
 the paft tenfes, 156. wrong in ranging Interjec- 
 tions with Adverbs, 289. its character, as a Lan- 
 guage, — — 418, 423 
 
 Grocin'Us, his Syftem of the Tenfes, — 128 
 
 II. Herac-
 
 ' INDEX. 
 H. 
 
 FTeraclitus, Saying of, 8. his Syflem of things, 
 
 what, 369, 370 
 
 Hermes, his Figure, Attributes, and Character, 324, 
 325, 326. Authors who have writ of him, 326 
 
 Hesiod, called zyoinrri^y the Poet, by Plato^ 223 
 Hoadly's Accidence,   - 128 
 
 Homer, 50, 52, 82, 84, 145, 149, 22 r, 223, 235, 
 
 253' 273, 285, 308, 4^7, 421 
 Horace, 57, 80, 125, 142, 163, 169, 178, 199, 207, 
 
 232, 260, 413, 424, 425 
 
 I. 
 
 Ideas.y ofvi'hat. Words the Symbols, 341 to 347. if 
 only particular were to exifi:, the confequence what, 
 337 ^^ 339* general, their importance, 341, 3421 
 undervalued by whom, and why, 350. of what fa- 
 culty the Obje6is, 36c. their charadter, 362 to 366, 
 390. the only objeits of Science and real Know- 
 ledge, why, 368. acquired, how, 353 to 374. de- 
 rived, whence, 374, i^c. their triple Order in Art, 
 376. the fame in Nature, 381. efTential to Mind, 
 why, 379, 380. thefirftand higheft Ideas, charac- 
 ter of, 380, 440. Ideas, their different Sources, 
 ftated, 400. their real fource, 434j 43^ 
 
 Jeremiah, — — - • ■• 405 
 
 hnagmation^ what, 354. differs from Senfe, how, 355* 
 from Memory and Recollection, how, ibid. 
 
 Individuals^ why fo called, 39, 40. quit their charac- 
 ter, how and why, 40, 41. their infinity, how ex- 
 prefled by a finite number of Words, 214 to 217, 
 234, 346. become objects of Knowledge, how, 369 
 
 Instant. 5'^^ Now. 
 
 Jntelleil. See Mind. 
 
 G g 3 Inter-
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Interjections, their application and efFe6V, 289. 
 no diftia6^ Part of Speech with the Greeks, though 
 with the Laiinsy 289. their chara(51er and defcrip- 
 tion, 290 
 
 Interrcgot'ion, its fpecies explained and illuftrated, 151 
 to 154, Interrogativcs refufe the Article, why, 228 
 
 Joannes Gramma t. See Philoponus. 
 
 isocrates,   — «- 421 
 
 Julian, •   •   - — — . 416 
 
 K. 
 
 KUSTER, -'■ — '- 176 
 
 Knowled^e^ if any more excellent than Senfation, the 
 confequence, - " — — ^/i) 372 
 
 L. 
 
 Language, how conftituted, 327. defined, 329. 
 founded in compaiS:, 314, 327. (See Speech.) fym- 
 bolic, not imitative, why, 332 to 355. impoffible 
 for ittoexprefs the real Eflences of things, 335. its 
 double capacity, why neceffary, 348. its Matter, 
 ■what, 349. its Form, what, ibid, its Precifion and 
 Permanence derived whence, 345. particular Lan- 
 guages, their Identity, whence, 374. their Diverfity, 
 whence, ibid. See EngUJh^y Greek, Latin, Oriental. 
 
 Latin Tongue, deficient in Aorifts, and how it fup- 
 plies the defe<S, 125. its peculiar ufe of the Prateri' 
 turn Per fe Hum, 131. has recourfe to Auxiliars for 
 f'ome Modes and Tenfes, 148. to a Periphrafis for 
 fome Participles, 185. in what fenfe it has Articles, 
 '233. the Ablative, a Cafe peculiar to it, 276. right 
 :n feparating Interjections from the other Parts of 
 Speech, 289, 290. its chara6ler, as a Language, 
 411. not made for Philofophy, ibid. 412. funk 
 with BoetljiUSf — — ..—— . 416 
 
 Letttrty
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Letter s^ what Socrates thought of their Inventor, 325, 
 
 divine honours paid him by the Egyptians^ ibid. See 
 
 Element. 
 
 Liberty^ its influence upon Men's Genius, 420 
 
 Life, connedled with Being, 300, 301, 432 
 
 LiNN^us, — — <- — 44 
 
 Literature, its caufe, and that of Virtue, connedled, 
 
 how, 407. antient, recommended to the Study of 
 
 the liberal, 424. its peculiar efFecH: with regard to 
 
 a man's character,   425, 426 
 
 Logic, what, "     3, 4 
 
 LoNGiNUS, noble remark of,   • 420 
 
 LuciAN, «— — — - - -» 41 
 
 LuciLius,   -'■ ibid, 
 
 M. 
 
 Macrobius, fhort account of him, 414. quoted 
 
 127, 157, 168 
 
 JT/<?w, rational and fecial, l, 2. his peculiar ornament, 
 what, 2. firft or prior to Man, what, g, 269. his 
 Exiftence, the manner of, what, 359. how moll 
 likely to advance in happinefs, 362. has within him 
 fomething divine, 302. his Ideas, whence derived, 
 393 ^^ 4'^'* Medium, thro' which he derives them, 
 what, 359, 393, his errors, whence, 406. to be 
 correcfted, how, ibid. 
 
 Manufcripts quoted, of Olympiodorus, 371, 394, 
 395. of Philoponus, 431, 433, 437. of Pro^ 
 
 CLUS, 434,435, 438, 440. ofDAMASCIUS, 44I 
 
 Marcianus Capella, Ihort account of him, 415 
 
 Mafter Ariiji, what forms his charadler, — iii 
 
 y^/^//^r joined with Form, 2, 7. its original meaning, 
 
 confounded by the Vulgar, how, 309. its extenfive 
 
 charadler according to antient Philofophy, 308. de- 
 
 G g 4 fcribed.
 
 INDEX. 
 
 fcribed by Cicero^ 313. of Language, what, 315. 
 defcribcd at large,   316, t^c. 
 
 Maximus Tyrius, his notion of the fupreme Intel- 
 lea, 162 
 
 Memory and RecoUefJion, what, 355. diftinguiftied 
 from Imagination or Phanfy, how, — ibid. 
 
 Metaphor^ its ufe, — » 269 
 
 Metaphyficians moderriy their Syftems, what, 392 
 
 Milton, 13, 14, 44, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, 56, 59, 60, 
 112, 124, 147, 207, 267, 268, 404, 437 
 
 Mind (not Senfe) recognizes time, 107 to 112. uni- 
 verfal, 162, 311, 312, 359. differs not {z^ Senfe 
 does) from the objects of its perception, 301. a<5ts 
 in part through the body, in part without it, 305. 
 its high power of feparation, 306, 366. penetrates 
 into all things, 307. Nouj 'TAjxo;, what, 310. 
 Mind differs from Senfe, how, 364, 365. the fource 
 of Union by viewing One in Many, 362 to 365. 
 of Diflinftion by viewing Many in One, 366. with- 
 out Ideas, refembles what, 380. region of Truth 
 and Science, 371, 372. that or Body, which has 
 precedence, 392, ^c. Mind human, how fponta- 
 neousandeafy in its Energies, 361, 362. all A4inds 
 imiilar and congenial, why, »     395 
 
 Modes or Moods, whence derived, and to what end 
 deflined, 140. Declarative or Indicative, 141. Po- 
 tential, 142. Subjundive, 143. Interrogative, ibid, 
 Inquifitive, ibid. Imperative, 144. Precative or Op- 
 tative, ibid, the feveral Species iliuftrated from Ho- 
 mer, Virgil, and Milton^ 145 to 147. Infinitive 
 Mode, its peculiar character, 162, 163. how digni- 
 fied by the Stoics, 164. other Modes refolvable into 
 it, 166. its application and coalefcence, 167. Mode 
 of Science, of Conjecture, of Proficiency, of Le- 
 glflature, 168 to 170. Modes compared and diflin- 
 
 guifhed
 
 INDEX. 
 
 guifhed, 149 to 160. Greek Imperatives of the Paft 
 
 explained, and illuftrated, 156, 15/ 
 
 Moon, Feminine, why, — — ^— — 45 
 
 Motion, and even its Privation, neceflarily imply 
 
 Time, 95 
 
 MuRETUS, quoted, 441, 442. his notion of the Ro- 
 
 mafis, — "—-^ ilfid, 
 
 MusoNiusRuFus, •— —   416 
 
 N, 
 
 Names, proper, what the confequence if no other 
 words, 337 to 339. their ufe, 345. hardly parts 
 of Language, — • 346, 373 
 
 Nathan and David, - •— . 232 
 
 Nature, firft to Nature, firft to Man, how they differ, 
 9, 10. frugality of, 320. Natures fubordinate fub- 
 fervient to the higher,   359 
 
 NicEPHORUs, See Blemmides. 
 
 NiCOMACHUS, • " 437 
 
 Noun, or Subftantive, its three Sorts, 37. what 
 Nouns fufceptiblc of Number, and why, 39. only 
 Part of Speech fufceptibleof Gender, 41, 171 
 
 A Now or Instant, the bound of Time, but no 
 part of it, loi, 102. analogous to a Point in a geo- 
 metrical Line, ibid, its ufe with refpe6l to Time, 
 104. its minute and tranfient Prefence illuftrated, 
 117. by this Prefence Time made prefent, 116, 
 117, 118. See Time, Place, Space. 
 
 Number, to what words it appertains, and why, 39, 
 
 40 
 
 O. 
 
 Obje^ors, ludicrous, 293. grave, i^ 294 
 
 Ocean^
 
 INDEX. 
 
 O'cean^ Mafculine, why, ^-~— . . ^q 
 
 Olympiodorus, quoted from a Manufcript,— -his 
 
 notion of Knowledge, and its degrees, 371, 372. of 
 
 general Ideas, the Objects of Science, 3^4., ^nc 
 
 One, by natural co-incidence, 162, 173, 192, 241, 
 
 262 to 265. by the help of external connedives, 
 
 241, 265 
 
 Oriental Languages, number of their Parts of Speech, 
 
 35. their charader and Genius, — 400 
 
 Orpheus, . 441; 
 
 Ovip, — 132, 141, 206 
 
 P. 
 
 Participle, how different from the Verb, 94, 184. 
 its effence or character, 184. how different from 
 the Adjedlive, 186. See Jttrihutive, Latin and 
 English Tongues. 
 
 Particulars^ how, though infinite, exprefTed by Words 
 which are finite, 34.6. confequence of attaching 
 ourfelves wholly to them, 351 
 
 Pausanias, 285 
 
 Perception and Folitionythe Soul's leading Powers, 15, 
 17. Perception two-fold, 348. In Man what firff, 
 9,10,353, 359. fenfitive and intelle6tive differ, 
 how, 364, 365. if not correfpondent to its objefts, 
 erroneous, — — 371 
 
 Period. See Sentence. 
 
 Peripatetic Philofophy^ in the latter ages commonly 
 united with the P/atotricy 160. what fpecies of Sen- 
 tences it admitted, 144. its notion of Cafes, 277. 
 held words founded in Compacl, — 314 
 
 Perizonius,
 
 I N D E X. 
 
 Perizonius, his rational account of the Perfons m 
 Nouns and Pronouns, 171 
 
 Persius, 76, 163, 372. fliort account of his charac- 
 ter, 413 
 
 Perfons^ firft, fecond, third, their Origin and Ufe, 
 
 65 to 67 
 
 Phanfyy See Imagination. 
 
 Philoponus, his notion of Time, 431. of the bu-» 
 finefs of Wifdom or Philofophy, 433. of God, the 
 Sovereign Artift,   — — — 4^7 
 
 Philofophy^ what would banifh it out of the World, 
 293, 294. its proper bufinefs, what, 433. antient 
 differs from modern, how, 308. modern, its chief 
 objecl:, what, — — •   - ibid. 
 
 Philofophers, antient, who not qualified to write or 
 talk about them, 270. provided words for new 
 Ideas, how, — — 269 
 
 Philofophers^ modern, their notion of Ideas, 350. 
 their employment, 351. their Criterion of Truth, 
 ibid, deduce all from Body, 392. fupply the place 
 of occult Qualities, how, ' 393; 
 
 Place, mediateand immediate, 1 18. applied to illuf- 
 trate the prefent Time, and the prefent Inftant, 
 ibid, its various relations denoted, how, 266, 271* 
 its Latitude and Univerfality, - 266 
 
 Plato, 21. how many Parts of Speech he admitted, 
 32. his account of Genius and Species, 3g. quoted, 
 92. his Style abounds with Particles, why, 259. 
 new-coined Word of, 269. quoted, 325. in what 
 he placed real happinefs, 362. his two different and 
 cppofite Etymologies of 'E7r*r*i/A>ji', 369, 370. his 
 Idea of Time, 389. quoted, 407. his character, as a 
 Writer, compared with Zenophon and Arijlotle, 422 
 
 Pletho. See Gemistus. 
 
 II Pliny,
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Pliny, his account how the antient artifts infcribed 
 
 their names upon their Works, 136 
 
 Plutarch, .. . ^2 
 
 Poetry^ what,     r, 6 
 
 Porphyry, ■'■ 30 
 
 Pofit'ion, its force in Syntax, 26, 274, 276, 230 
 
 Prepositions, 32. defined, 261. their ufe, 265. 
 
 their original Signification, 266. their fubfequent 
 
 and figurative, 268. their different application, 270, 
 
 271. force inCompofition, 271, 272, change into 
 
 Adverbs,   • 272, 205 
 
 Principles, to be eflimated from their confequences, 7. 
 232, 236, 325. of Union and Diverfity, their dif- 
 ferent ends and equal importance to the Univerfe, 
 250. (See One, Union, Diver^y. ) elemenury Prin- 
 ciples myfteriouily blended, 307. their invention 
 difficult, why, 325. thofe of Arithmetic and Geo- 
 metry how fimple, •■'   - — — 3^2 
 Priscian, defines a Word, 20. explains from Philo- 
 fophy the Noun and Verb, 28, 33. quoted, 34. ex- 
 plains how Indication and Relation differ, 63. the 
 nature of the Pronoun, 65. of pronominal Perfons, 
 67. his reafon why the two firfl Pronouns have^o 
 Genders, 70. why but one Pronoun of each fort, 
 71. ranges Articles with Pronouns according to the 
 SioicSf 74, a pertinent obfervation of his, 88. ex- 
 plains the double Power of the Latin PrateriiuWy 
 125,131. his do6lrine concerning the Tenfes, 130. 
 defines Moods or Modes, 141. his notion of the 
 Imperative, 155. of the Infinitive, 165, 166. of 
 Verbs which naturally precede the Infinitive, 168. 
 of Impcrfonals, 175. of Verbs Neuter, 177. of the 
 Participle, 194. of the Adverb, 195. of Compara- 
 tives, 202. quoted, 2 10. his reafon why certain 
 
 Pronouns
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Pronouns coalefce not with the Article, 225, 226* 
 explains the different powers of Connectives which 
 conjoin, 243, 244, 245. of ConnetSlives which dif- 
 join, 250. quoted, 262. his notion of the Interjec- 
 tion, 291. of Sound or Voice, — — 316 
 Proclus, his Opinion about Reft, 95, 431. quoted, 
 3 10. explains the Source of the Do6lrine of Ideas, 
 
 434* 435> 436> 43^ 
 PRONOUNS, why fo called, 65. their Species, or Per- 
 fons, 65, 66. why the firft and fecond have no Sex, 
 69, 70. refemble Articles, but how diftinguiftied, 
 73. their coalefcence, 74, 75. their importance in 
 Language, 77. relative or fubjun6live Pronoun, its 
 nature and ufe, 78 to 83. thofe of the firft and fe- 
 cond perfon when exprelTed, when not, 83. 'Ey- 
 xXOiXxi and o^^orov^fAivcciy how diftinguiftied, 84. 
 Primitives, refufe the Article, why, — 225 
 Protagoras, his notion of Genders, 42. a Sophifm 
 of his, "I — — - 144 
 
 Proverbs of Solomon^ " 405 
 
 PUBLIUS SyRUS, ... .. I2J. 
 
 QyiNTILIAN, ~ — 154, 233, 407 
 
 polities occult, what in modern Philofophy fupplies 
 their place, .■ , . _ ,q~ 
 
 R. 
 
 Relatives^ mutually infer each other, 251, 286. their 
 ufual Cafe, the Genitive, —1 — ibid^ 
 
 Rhetoric, what, r6 
 
 Romans, their charafter as a Nation, 411. Roman 
 Genius, its maturity and decay, . 418, i^c. 
 
 S. Sallus-
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Sallustius Philosoph. — — 401 
 
 Sanctius, his elegant account of the difFerent Arts 
 refpecSling Speech, 5. quoted 36, 163, 171. re- 
 jects Imperfonals, 175. quoted, 202. his notion of 
 the Conjunction, ^her Scaliger, 2^S. of the Inter- 
 jedion, — — — — 291 
 
 ScALiGER, his Etymology of ^a/j, 82. his notion of 
 Tenfes from Grocinus, 128. his elegant obfervation 
 upon the order of the Tenfes, 138. upon the pre- 
 eminence of the Indicative Mode, 169. his account 
 how the Latins fupply the place of Articles, 233. 
 his notfon of the Conjundlion, 238. his fubtle ex- 
 plication of its various powers, ^^42 to 247, 25?, 
 hisreafon from Philofophy why Subftantlves do not 
 coalefce, 264. his origin of Prepofitions, 266. his 
 
 Etymology of 5<,7V;2/ztf, — — 370 
 
 Science, 5. its Mode the Indicative, and Tenfe the 
 Prefent, why, 159. its Conjundlion the Colledive, 
 why, 246. defended, 295. valuable for its confe- 
 quences, ibid, for itfelf, 296 to 303. {See God.) 
 pure and fpeculative depends on Principles the moft 
 fimple, 352. not beholden to Experiment, though 
 Experiment to it, 353. whole of it feen in Com- 
 pofition and Divifion, 367. its Etymology, 369. 
 refidence of itfelf and its objeds, where, 372. See 
 Mind. 
 Scriptures, their Sublimity, whence, — 410 
 
 Seneca, 47> ^39' 4H 
 
 Senfation, of the Prefent only, 105, 107, 139. none 
 of Time, 105. each confined to its own Objeds, 
 
 333i
 
 INDEX. 
 
 333' 3^9* ^^^ Objeds infinite, 338, 353. Man's 
 firll Perception, ibid, confequence of attaching our- 
 felves wholly to its Obje<fls, 351. how prior to In- 
 tellection, 379. how fubfequent, — — 391 
 Sentence, definition of, 19, 20. its various Species in- 
 veftigated, 14, 15. illuftrated from Milton, 147,^6-. 
 conneilion between Sentences and Modes, 144 
 
 Separation, corporeal inferior to mental, why, 306 
 
 Servius, * "-   - 132, 227, 432 
 
 Sex, (See Gender.) transferred in Language to Beings, 
 
 that in Nature want it, and why, 44, 45. Sub- 
 
 ftances alone fufceptible of it, — — . 171 
 
 Shakespear, — 1-2^ 13, 23, 41, 47, 51, 53 
 
 Ship, Feminine, why, 48 
 
 SiMPLicius, his triple Order of Ideas or Forms, 38 r, 
 
 382 
 Sophocles, — — — -— 432 
 
 5o«/, its leading Powers, — — , j^^ ^^^ 
 
 Sound, fpecies of, 314, 317. the 'TA11, or Matter of 
 
 Language, 315. defined, 316. See Voice. 
 Space, how like, how unlike to Time, 100. Sec 
 
 Place. 
 Speech, peculiar Ornament of Man, i, 2. how re- 
 folved or analyzed, 2. its four principal Parts, and 
 why thefc, and not others, 28 to 3;. its Matter and 
 Form taken together, 307 to 315. its Matter taken 
 feparately, 316 to 326. its Form taken feparately, 
 327 to 359. neceflity of Speech, whence, 332, 333. 
 founded in Compadt, — — 3 '4s 3^7 
 
 SPE^fCER, 134, 164 
 
 Spirits, animal, fubtle Ether, nervous Duels, Vibra- 
 tions, ^c. their ufe in modern Philofophy. See 
 polities occulta 
 
 Stoics,
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Stoics, how many Parts of Speech they held, 34, 
 ranged Articles along with Pronouns, 74. their ac- 
 count of the Tenfes, 1 30. multiplied the number of 
 Sentences, 144. allowed the name of Verb to the 
 infinitive only, into which they fuppofed all other 
 Modes refolvable, 164 to 166. their logical view of 
 Verbs, and their Diftindtions fubfequent, lyg fo 
 181. their notion of the Participle, 194. of the Ad- 
 verb, 195. called the Adverb zrocv^iytln^j and why, 
 210. called the Prepofition a-vvha-fjLO? zr^o^srmo^j 
 261. invented new Words, and gave new Significa- 
 tions to old ones, 269. their notion of Cafes, 278. 
 of the "TXrt or Matter of Virtue, 309, 310. of 
 Sound, 316. of the Species of Sound, 322. their 
 Definition of an Element, — — - — 324 
 
 SuhjeJJ and Predicate^ howdiftlnguiftied in Greek, 230. 
 bow in Englijhy ibid* analogous to what in nature, 
 
 279 
 Suhjafue znd Mtribiite^ 29. the great ObjeQs of natu- 
 ral Union, 264. Subftance fufceptible of Sex, 171, 
 41. of Number, 40. coincides not with Sub- 
 ftance, 264. incapable of Intenfion, and therefore of 
 
 Comparifon, — 201, 202 
 
 Substantive, 30, 31. defcribed, 37. primary, ibid. 
 . to 62. fecondary, 63 to 67. (See Noun, Pro- 
 noun.) Suhjiantive and Attributive^ analogous in 
 Nature to what, .— — — 279 
 
 Xvy.ta,iAoc, ITa^aff-UjU-Sa/Aa, &c.   180 
 
 Sun, Mafculine, why, ' 45 
 
 ^y-ytf, a peculiar Signification of, — 308,309 
 Symbol, what, 330, differs from Imitation, how, ibid' 
 preferred to it in conftituting Language, why, 332 
 
 T. Ten/es^
 
 INDEX. 
 
 TinfeSf their natural Number, and why, rig, I20. 
 Aorifts, 123. Tenfes either pafling or completive, 
 what authorities for thefe Diftinftions, 128 to 130. 
 Praterltum perfeSium of the Latins, peculiar ufes of, 
 131 to 134. Imperfe£iwn, peculiar ufes of, 135 to 
 137. order of Tenfes in common Grammars not 
 fortuitous, - ' «.         F3§ 
 
 Terence, -^ -^ 205,206,272 
 
 The and A. See Article. 
 
 Themistiijs, 9. his notion how the Mind gains the 
 idea of Time, 108. of the dependance of Time on 
 the Soul's exiftence, 112. of the latent tranfitionof 
 Nature from one Genus to another, 259, 432 
 
 Theodectes, — — -■   35 
 
 Theqphrastus, his notion of Speech under its va- 
 rious Relations, 4. mentioned, ^-^ 419 
 
 Theuth, inventor of Letters, 324. See Hermes. 
 
 Tibullus, — - -^ 76, 132, 133 
 
 7iW, Mafculine, why, 50. why implied in every 
 Verb, 95, 96. gave rife to Tenfes, thid. its molt 
 obvious divifion, 97. how like, how unlilce to Space, 
 100 to 103. ftri6tly fpealcing no Time prefent, 105, 
 in what fenfe it may be called prefent, 116, 117, 
 432. all Time divifible and extended, 118, 100, 
 joi. no objedl of Senfation, why, 105. how faint 
 and fliadowy in exiftence, 106, 431. how, and by 
 what power we gain its idea, 107. Idea of the pall, 
 prior to that of the future, 109. that of the future, 
 how acquired, 109, no. how conneiSled with Art 
 and Prudence, 1 1 1, of what faculty, Time the pro- 
 
 H h per
 
 INDEX. 
 
 per Obje£t, 112. hov/ intimately connc£led with 
 the Soul, ibid, order and value of its fbvcral Spe- 
 cies, 113. what things exift in it, what not, 160 to 
 l62« its natural eft"e6l on things exifting in it, 161, 
 50. defcribed by Plato, as the moving Piilure of 
 permanent Eternity, 389. this account explained 
 by Boethius, ibid. I^ee Now or Instant, 
 ^ruih, neceflary, immutable, fuperior to all diftindions 
 of prelent, paft, and future, go, gi, g2, 159, 160, 
 404, 405. (See Beings God.) its place or region, 
 162, 372. feen in Compofition and Divifion, 3, 
 367. even negative, in fome degree fynthetical, 3, 
 250, 364. every Truth One, and (o recognized, 
 lioWj 364, 365. faditious Truth, ,*^ 403 
 
 V. 
 
 Varro, 56, 61, 74, 4J3 
 
 Verb, 31. its more loofe, as well as more ftrid 
 acceptations, 87, 193. Verb, ftriftly fo called, its 
 character, 93, 94. diftinguifhed from Participles, 
 04. from Adjectives, ibid, implies Time, why, g^. 
 TenfeS, 98, 119. Modes or Moods, 140, i[70. 
 Verbs, how fufceptible of Number and Perfon, 170. 
 Species of Verbs, 173, adive, 174. paffive, ibid, 
 middle, 175, 176. tranfitive, 177. neuter, ibid, in- 
 ceptive, 126, 182. defiderative or meditative, 127. 
 formed out of Subftantives, 182,183. (See TzW, 
 J'enfes^ Modes.) Imperfonalsrejeded, 175 
 
 Verbs Subjfantives^ their pre-eminence, 88. efTential to 
 every Propof^tion, ibid, implied in every other Verb, 
 90, 93. denote exiftence, 88. vary, as varies the 
 Exiftence, or Being, which they denote, 91, 92. Seq 
 Bsingi Truth^ God. 
 
 2 ' Ferfes,
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Verfes^ logical, — — -r— 340 
 
 Vice^ Feminine, why,     - — — ^6 
 
 Virgil, 46, 47, 48, 49, 57, 68, 83, 132. his pecu- 
 liar method of coupling the pafling and completive 
 Tenfes, 133 to 136. quoted, 141, 182, 198, 199, 
 206, 235, 286, 287, 389, 401, 432. his idea of 
 
 X\\Q Roman Gtmus^ — 235,412 
 
 Virtue, Feminine, why, 55= moral and Intelledlual dif- 
 fer, how, 299, 300. its Matter, what, 309, 310. 
 its Form, what, 311. connefted with Literature, 
 
 how, 407 
 
 Underjlanding, its Etymology, 369. human Under- 
 ftanding, a compofite of what, — .— 425 
 
 Union, natural, the great objects of, 264, 279. per- 
 ceived by what power, 363. inevej-y truth, whence 
 derived,     365 
 
 Univerfe. See JVcrld, 
 
 Voice, defined, 318. fimple, produced how, 318, 319. 
 differs from articulate, how, ihld. articulate, what, 
 319 to 324. articulate, fpecies of, 321 to 323. See 
 Voivel, Confonant, Element. ^ 
 
 Volition, See Perception. 
 
 Vossius, — — 35, 75, 290 
 
 Voivel, what, and why fo called, — 321, 322 
 Utility, always and only fought by the fordid and illi- 
 beral, 294, 295, 298. yet could have no Being, 
 were there not fomething beyond it, 297. See 
 Gpodf 
 
 w. 
 
 IVhole and Parts, • — — j 
 
 JVifdom, how fome Philofophers thought it dinguifli- 
 
 ed from Wit, — — 368, 433 
 
 Words,
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Words, defined, 20, 21, 328. the feveral Species of, 
 23 to 31. fignificant by themfelves, fignificant by 
 Relation, 27. variable, invariable, 24. fignificant 
 by themfelves and alone, 37 to 211. by Relation 
 and affociated, 213 to 274. fignificant by Compaft, 
 314, 327. Symbols, and not Imitations, 332. Sym- 
 bols, of vi'hat not, 337 to 341. Symbols, of what, 
 341 to 349, 372. how, though in Number finite, 
 irhle to exprefs infinite Particulars, 346, 372, 373 
 
 'World, vifible and external, the paiTing Picture of 
 what, 383, 437. preferved one and the fame, though 
 ever changing, how, 384, 385. its Caufe not void 
 of Reafon, •   "   43^ 
 
 Writers, antient polite, differ from modern polite, in 
 what and why, — - 259, 260 
 
 X. 
 
 Xenophon, 56, 407. his character, as a Writer, com- 
 pared with Plato and Arijlotk^ — 422, 423 
 
 Y. 
 
 *'rx?), 308. ^zz Mailer^ Sylva* 
 
 F J N I S.
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY 
 Los Angeles 
 
 This book is DUE on the last date stamped below. 
 
 
 i-U- 
 
 ^it§ 
 
 ^^'^i2l$/'S 
 
 EV.L.W V 
 
 REC'D LDURC 
 
 MAY 2 5 1484 
 
 DRIW 
 U>/URL 
 
 V^- 
 
 CjW 
 
 DEC, 81'58^ 
 
 lrormL9-50>ft-9,'60(B3610s4)444 
 
 11983 
 
 o^
 
 yC SOUTHERM REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 
 
 '^ III 
 
 A A 000 285 458 
 
 3 1158 00652 
 
 1 
 J 
 6577'
 
 t